Standard Specifications For Highway Bridges AASHO 1949 - Fifth Edition

Standard specifications for highway bridges adopted by the American
Association of State Highway Officials.

American Association of State Highway Officials.
Washington, D.C., The Association, 1941.
http://hdl.handle.net/2027/mdp.49015001295238
Public Domain, Google-digitized

http://www.hathitrust.org/access_use#pd-google
We have determined this work to be in the public domain,
meaning that it is not subject to copyright. Users are
free to copy, use, and redistribute the work in part or
in whole. It is possible that current copyright holders,
heirs or the estate of the authors of individual portions
of the work, such as illustrations or photographs, assert
copyrights over these portions. Depending on the nature
of subsequent use that is made, additional rights may
need to be obtained independently of anything we can
address. The digital images and OCR of this work were
produced by Google, Inc. (indicated by a watermark
on each page in the PageTurner). Google requests that
the images and OCR not be re-hosted, redistributed
or used commercially. The images are provided for
educational, scholarly, non-commercial purposes.
The American Assfton of Slate Hishway Officia
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
for
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
University of Michigan-Flint
9015
Library
OOI2JI2SF
FLINT COLtEGE
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
for
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
Adopted by
The American Association
of State Highway
FIFTH EDITION
Second Printing
June,
Published
1950
by the Association
General Offices
917 National Press Building
Washington, D. C.
19 4
Officials
Copyright, 1949, by
THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY -OFFICIALS

J-4909
'i
.
'
42287
CONTENTS
ft (,
I General Provisions
Division
Division II Construction
Design
Division
Division IV Materials
Appendix A Tables of Moments and Shears, Standard Loadings
Appendix 15 Steel Column Formulas (special)
Appendix C Truck Train and Equivalent Loadings
(1935 Specifications for reference use.)
Appendix D Permissible Unit Concrete Stresses for Rectangular
Columns
Index
Page
6
25
III
DIVISION
1-1
-11
1138
242
248
Concrete
249
250
General Provisions
Article
1.1.1
SECTION
Definition of Terms
SECTION
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.0
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.10
1.2.11
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.0
1.3.7
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.0
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.0
1.5.7
1 .5.8
1.5.9
1.5.10
1.5.11
1 .5.12
2 Proposal Requirements
and
Conditions
Contents of Proposal Form

Interpretation of Estimates
Examination of Plans. Specification and Site of the Work
Preparation of Proposal
Rejection of Proposals
Proposal Guaranty
Delivery of Proposal
Withdrawal of Proposal
Public Opening of Proposals
Disqualification of Bidders
Competency of Bidders
SECTION 3 Award
1.3.1
Pace
1 Definition of Terms
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
and Execution of Contract
Consideration of Bids
Award of Contracts
Return of Proposal Guaranty
Requirements of Contract Bond
Execution of the Contract
Approval of Contract
Failure to Execute Contract
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
SECTION 4 Scope of the Work

Intent of the Plans and Specifications
Special
Work
Increased or Decreased Quantities
Extra Work
Temporary Crossings and Detours
Removal and Disposal of Structures and Obstructions
Rights in and Use of Materials Found on the Site
Final Cleaning Up
SECTION 6 Control of the Work
Authority of Engineer
Plans and Working Drawings
Deviations from the Plans
Coordination of Specifications and Plans
Cooperation by Contractor
Construction Stakes
Authority and Duties of Inspectors
Inspection
Removal of Unauthorized and Defective Work
Final Inspection
Disputed Claims
Arbitration
'ii
10
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
18
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
CONTENTS
SECTION
Article
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
1.7.5
1.7.6
1.7.7
1.7.8
1.7.9
1.7.10
1.7.11
1.7.12
l.S.J
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.5
1.8.6
1.8.7
1.8.8
1.8.9
1.8.10
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
1.9.4
1.9.5
1.9.6
1.9.7
of Supply and
Tests of Materials
Storage of Materials
Source
Control
of Materials
Page
15
15
16
16
16
Quality
Defective Materials
Silence of Specifications
SECTION 7 Legal Relations and Responsibility

Laws to Be Observed
Permits and Licenses
Patented Processes and Materials
Federal Participation
Sanitary Provisions
Public Safety and Convenience
Barricades and Warning Signs
Protection and Restoration of Property
Responsibility for Damages
Contractor's Responsibility for Work
Personal Liability of Public Officials
No Waiver of Legal Rights
to Public
16
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
SECTION 8 Prosecution and Progress

Subletting or Assignment of Contract
Prosecution of the Work
Limitations of Operations
Character of Workmen and Equipment
Temporary Suspension of the Work
Determination and Extension of Contract Time
Failure to Complete on Time
Annulment of Contract
Termination of Responsibility
Compensation
for Unreasonable Delays
19
19
20
20
20
SECTION 9 Measurement and Payment

Measurements
of Quantities
Scope of Payment
Payments for Increased or Decreased Quantities
Payments for Extra and Force Account Work
21
21
Payment for Omitted Items

Partial Payments
Acceptance
and Final Payment
DIVISION
19
lit
21
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
II
Construction
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8
2.1.9
2.1.10
2.1.11
2.1.12
SECTION 1 Excavation and

General
Preservation of Channel
Depth of Footings
Preparation of Foundations for Footings .
Cofferdams
and Cribs
General
Protection
Drawings Required
(d) Removal
Pumping
Inspection
Backfill
Filled Spandrel Arches
Approach Embankment
Classification of Excavation
Measurement
and Payment
2.2.1
General
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
Fill
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
*
2i
28
SECTION 2 Sheet Piles

28
CONTENTS
V
Page
Article
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
Timber Sheet Piles

Concrete Sheet Piles
Steel Sheet Piles
Measurement and Payment
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
Materials
Design and Conditions of Use
Preparation for Driving
(a) Excavation
(b) Caps
(c) Collars
(d) Pointing
(e) Splicing Piles
(f) Painting Steel Piles
Methods of Driving
(a) General
fb) Hammers for Timber and Steel Piles
(c) Hammers for Concrete Piles
(d) Additional Equipment
(e) Leads
(f) Followers
(g) Water Jets
(h) Accuracy of Driving
Defective Piles
Determination of Bearing Values
Loading Tests
Timber Pile Formulas
Concrete and Steel Piles
Test Piles
Order Lists for Piling
Storage and Handling of Timber Piles
Cutting Off Timber Piles
Cutting Off Steel or Steel Shell Piles
Capping Timber Piles
Manufacture of Precast Concrete Piles
General
Class of Concrete
Form Work
(d) Reinforcement
(e) Casting
(f) Finish
(g) Curing
Storage and Handling of Precast Concrete Piles
Manufacture of Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles
(a) General
(b) Inspection of Metal Shells
(c) Class of Concrete
(d) Reinforcement
(e) Placing Concrete
Extensions or "Build-ups"
Painting Steel Piles and Steel Pile Shells
(a) General
(b) Method A
(c) Method B
(d) Falsework and Defective Piles
(e) Additional Requirements
Payment for Test Piles
Payment for Loading Tests
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
37
37
SECTION Concrete Masonry

General
Care and Storage of Concrete Aggregates
Storage of Cement
Classes of Concrete
Classification and Proportioning of Concrete Mixtures
(a) Method A. Proportions Based on Strength
37
37
37
38
38
39
28
28
29
29
SECTION 8 Bearing Piles
2.3.4
c)b)
ia)
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.3.10
2.3.11
2.3.12
2.3.13
2.3.14
2.3.15
2.3.16
2.3.17
2.3.18
2.3.19
2.3.20
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
VI
Consistency
Measurement
of Materials
Mixing Concrete
(a J General
(b)
(c)
(d)
le)
()
Constant Cement
2.4.10
2.4.11
2.4.12
2.4.13
2.4.14
2.4.15
2.4.10
2.4.17
2.4.18
2.4.19
2.4.20
2.4.21
2.4.22
2.4.30
2.4.31
42
42
Time of Hauling and Placing Mixed Concrete
44
44
Plant Mix
(h) Delivery
(i) Reteinpering
Handling and Placing Concrete
(a^ General
ib) Culverts
(c) Girders, Slabs and Columns
(d) Arches
Pneumatic Placing
Pumping
Depositing Concrete Under Water
Construction Joints
(a) General
(b) Bonding
Rubble or Cyclopean Concrete
Concrete Exposed to Sea Water
Concrete Exposed to Alkali Soils or Alknli Water
Falsework and Centering
Forms
Removal of Falsework, Forms, and Housing
Concreting in Cold Weather
Curing Concrete
Expansion and Fixed Joints and Bearings
(a) Open Joints
(h) Filled Joints
(c) Steel Joints
(d) Water Stops
(e) Bearing Devices
Concrete
General
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
(a)
(b)
0, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1,
Ordinary Surface Finish

Rubbed Finish
Tooled Finish
Sand Blasted Finish
Wire Brushed or Scrubbed
Floated Surface Finish
Striking Off
Floating
(c) Longitudinal Floating
id) Transverse Floating
(e) Straightedging
(f) Final Finishing
Sidewalk Finish
Pneumatically Applied Mortar
(a) General
(h) Proportions
(c) Water Content
(dl Mixing
(e) Nozzle Velocity
ff) Nozzle Position
(g) Rebound Sand
(h) Forms
(i) Joints
:i) Bond
2.4.32
41
42
Mixing at Site
Truck Mixing
Partial Mixing at the Central Plant
Finishing
2.4.23
2.4.24
2.4.25
2.4.20
2.4.27
2.4.28
2.4.29
Pas*
actor 40
42
Ik) Hand Mixing
2.4.0
<<k) Curing
(1) Reinforcement
Measurement
and
Payment
43
43
44
44
44
44
44
40
40
47
47
48
48
49
4'J
49
49
49
50
50
50
51
52
52
52
52
53
53
.,.}
2.4.G
2.4.7
2.4.8
(b) Method B. Proportions Based ou
Surfaces
Finish
53
54
54
54
55
55
55
55
55
5o
5.)
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
57
j'<
Article
CONTENTS
57
57
57
57
57
57
5<
58
CONTENTS
Material
Order Lists
Protection of Material
Fabrication
Mesh Reinforcement
Bar Mat Reinforcement
Placing and Fastening
Splicing
happing
Substitutions
58
^j*
^
8
59
59
*!
J
60
2r
Measurement
Payment
Ashlar Masonry
Description
Materials
Size of Stone
Surface Finishes of Stone
Dressing Stone
Stretchers
J gj gj;>}
61
"f,
Headers
Cores and Backing
62
62
General
Face Stone
(<) Stone Backing and Cores
(d) Concrete Cores and Backing
Leveling Courses
Resetting
Dowels and Cramps
Copings
Arches
Pointing
Measurement
and Payment
7
SECTION Mortar
.>
Dry
SECTION
HH
"
O<
Rubble Masonry
67
67
*>8
OS
Brick Masonry
SECTION
g*>
gjjgj>gg
Description
Materials
Size of Stone
Headers
Shaping Stone
Laying Stone
Coping, Bridge Seats and Backwalls
gi
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.6
2.8.7
2.8.8
2.9.2
2.9.3
9.4
2.9.5
64
*;
>>
Size
2.7.10
2.9.1
Rubble Masonry
Description
Materials
Headers
Shaping Stone
Laying Stone
Copings, Bridge Seats and Backwalls
Arches
Pointing
Measurement
and Payment
2.7.!)
63
gl
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
2.7.6
2.7.7
2.7.8
"2
g2
Stone
ggjj
Mortar
g<g<
Mixing
Laying
(a)
(b)
gj
2.6.11
2.6.12
2.0.13
2.0.14
2.6.15
2.0.10
2.0.17
SECTION
2.0.1
2.0.2
2.0.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.0.0
2.0.7
2.0.8
2.6.9
2.6.10
p"8e
Description
Materials
Construction
Copings. Bridge Seats and Backwalls
and Payment
Measurement
''8
gggo
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
2.5.8
2.5.9
2.5.10
2.5.11
2.5.12
SECTION 5 Reinforcement
g*
Article
VII
69
69
VIII
CONTENTS
SECTION
Article
2.10.1
2.10.2
2.10.3
2.10.4
2.10.5
2.10.6
2.10.7
2.10.8
2.10.9
2.10.10
2.10.11
2.10.12
2.10.13
2.10.14
2.10.15
2.10.16
2.10.17
2.10.18
2.10.19
2.10.20
2.10.21
2.10.22
2.10.23
2.10.24
2.10.25
2.30.26
2.10.27
2.10.28
2.10.29
2.10.30
2.10.31
2.10.32
2.10.33
2.10.34
2.10.35
2.10.36
2.10.37
2.10.38
2.10.39
2.10.40
2.10.41
2.10.42
2.10.43
2.10.44
2.10.45
2.10.46
2.10.47
2.10.48
2.10.49
2.10.50
2.10.51
2.10.52
2.10.53
2.10.54
2.10.55
2.10.56
2.10.57
2.10.58
2.10.59
2.10.60
Type Fabrication
Quality of Workmanship
Storage of Materials
Straightening Material
10 Steel Structures
Fabrication
Page
09
69
09
70
Finish
liivet Holes
Punched Holes
Reamed or Drilled Holes
Subpunching, Keaming and Shop Assembly
Accuracy of Punched and Subdrilled Holes
Accuracy of Keamed and Drilled Holes
Shop Assembling
Camber Diagram
Drifting of Holes
Match-Marking
Rivets
Field Rivets
Bolts and Bolted Connections
(a) General
(b) Unfinished Bolts
(c) Turned Bolts
(d) Special Ribbed Bolts
Riveting
Edge Planing
Welds
Flame Cutting
Facing of Bearing Surfaces
Abutting Joints
End Connection Angles
Lacing Bars
Finished Members
Web Plates
Bent Plates
Fit of Stiffeners
Eyebars
Annealing
Pins and Rollers
Boring Pin Holes
Pin
Clearances
Screw Threads
Pilot and Driving Nuts
Notice of Beginning of Work
Facilities for Inspection
Inspector's Authority
Mill
Orders
Weighing of Members
Marking and Shipping
Erection
Erection of Structure
Plans
Plant
Delivery of Materials
Handling and Storing Materials
Falsework
Methods and Equipment
Bearings and Anchorage
Straightening Bent Material
Assembling Steel
Riveting
Pin Connections
Misfits
,
Removal of Old Structure and Falsework
Payment
Basis of Payment
Payment for Test Eyebars
Pay Weight
<0
70
JO
70
70
71
71
71
71
71
71
72
<2
72
73
<3
. .
73
73
73
74
t*
74
74
74
74
74
75
75
75
70
<"
7
70
'
7b
7b
jio
77
77
77
77
77
7<
78
78
78
J8
78
78
79
79
79
80
0
80
80
81
CONTENTS
Paf?
gj
Variance in Weight
Weight
Computed
11
81
Bronze
or Copper-Alloy Bearing and

Expansion Plates
2.11.1
2.11.2
2.11.3
2.11.4
2.11.5
2.11.6
General
Materials
Bronze Plates
Copper-Alloy Plates
Placing
Measurement
and Payment
2.12.1
2.12.2
2.12.3
2.12.4
2.12.5
2.12.6
2.12.7
2.12.8
2.12.9
2.12.10
2.12.11
SECTION 12 Steel Grid Flooring

General
Materials
Arrangement of Sections
Provision for Camber
Field Assembly
Connection to Supports
Welding
Repairing Damaged Galvanived Coatings
Concrete Filler
Painting
Method of Measurement and Basis of Payment
2.13.1
2.13.2
2.13.3
General
Materials
Line and Grade
2.13.4
2.13.5
Construction
Painting
2.13.6
2.13.7
2.13.8
2.13.9
2.13.10
2.13.11
General
Materials
Railings Cast in Place
Precast Rails
Surface Finish
Expansion Joints
gj{
82
82
82
SECTION
SECTION
83
83
83
83
84
84
84
Article
2.10.61
2.10.62
IX
So
13Railings
5
85
85
Metal Railing
85
85
Concrete
85
86
86
8b
86
Stone and
2.13.12
Railing
Brick Railing
General
86
Wood Railing
General
2.14.1
2.14.2
2.14.3
2.14.4
2.14.5
2.14.6
General
Measurement
and
SECTION
2.14.7
2.14.8
2.14.9
2.14.10
Paint
87
87
Payment
14Painting
Metal Structures
Number of Coats and Color

Mixing of Paint
Weather Conditions
Application
(a) General
(b) Brushing
(c) Spraying
(d) Inaccessible Surfaces
Removal of Paint
Thinning Paint
Painting Galvanized Surfaces
Cleaning of Surfaces
(a) General
(b) Method A. Hand Cleaning
(c) Method B. Sandblasting
(d) Method C Flame Cleaning
(e) Surfaces Inaccessible After Assembly
87
87
87
87
87
88
88
88
fg
2.13.13
2.13.14
gg
88
88
88
89
89
89
89
89
90
2.ir,.l
2.15.2
2.15.3
2.15.4
2.15.5
2.15.6
2.15.7
Pa&e
90
90
Shop Painting
Field Painting
SECTION 15 Riprap
Materials
Dry Riprap, Class 1 for Slopes
Dry Riprap Class 2 for Slopes
Mortared Riprap for Slopes
Grouted Riprap for Slopes
Stone Riprap for Foundation Protection
Concrete Riprap in Bags
General
Measurement
Payment
and Payment
j||,
*<'
18
Dampprooflng
J'
97
9*
of Surface
and
i
J'
Payment
SECTION
SECTION
2.20.8
2.20.9
2.20.10
2.20.11
2.20.12
;
._'
?i
General Requirements
95
90
?7
2.19.1
Measurement
J*
9;j
Storage of Fabric
Preparation of Surface
Application General
Application Details
Damage Patching
Protection Course
and Payment
Measurement
SECTION
2.20.6
2.20.7
17 Waterproofing
General
Materials
General
Materials
Preparation
Application
19 Name
Plates
20 Timber Structures
Materials
(a) Lumber and Timber
(b) Structural Shapes
(c) Castings
(d) Hardware
Timber Connectors
Storage of Material
Workmanship
Treated Timber
(a) Handling
(b) Framing and Boring
(c) Cuts and Abrasions
(d) Bolt Holes
(e) Temporary Attachment
Untreated Timber
Treatment of Pile Heads
(a) General
(b) Method A. Zinc Covering
(c) Method B Fabric Covering
Holes for Bolts, Dowels, Rods and Lag Screws
Bolts and Washers
Countersinking
Framing
Pile Bents
.
2.20.2
2.20.3
2.20.4
2.20.5
Cribbing
94
2.18.1
2.18.2
2.18.3
2.18.4
2.18.5
2.20.1
J<i
16 Concrete
SECTION
2.17.1
2.17.2
2.17.3
2.17.4
2.17.5
2.17.6
2.17.7
2.17.8
2.17.9
;>.$
and
General
Construction
93
Jg
Placing
SECTION
2.16.1
2.16.2
2.16.3
92
93
Concrete
Measurement
.)-
Slab Riprap
Concrete
2.15.8
2.15.9
2.15.10
2.15.11
M
J
91
97
98
Article
2.14.11
2.14.12
CONTENTS
89
99
99
99
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
10
101
101
101
101
101
102
102
XI
CONTENTS
Page
102
102
102
102
102
102
103
Article
Framed Bents
(a) Mud Sills
2.20.13
(b)
Concrete
(c) Sills
(dj Posts
pedestals
Caps
Bracing
Stringers
Plank Floors
Laminated or Strip Floors
Wheel Guards and Railings
Trusses
Truss Housings
Erection of Housing and Bailings
Painting
Measurement
and Payment
2.20.14
2.20.15
2.20.10
2.20.17
2.20.18
2.20.19
2.20.20
2.20.21
2.20.22
2.20.23
2.20.24
2.21.4
2.21.5
SECTION
2.22.1
2.22.2
2.22.3
2.22.5
2.22.0
2.23.1
2.23.2
2.23.3
2.23.4
2.23.5
2.23.6
2.23.7
2.23.8
2.23.9
2.23.10
2.23.11
104
104
104
104
104
104
SECTION 21 Preservative Treatments for Timber

104
General
100
Materials
105
Preparation for Treatment
105
(a) Sorting
105
'.
(b) Framing
105
(c) Incising
100
Amount of Preservative
(a) Creosote, Creosote Coal Tar Solution or Creosote Petroleum
106
Solution Treatment
100
(b) Salts Treatments
10(1
Pressure Treatment Processes
2.21.1
2.21.2
2.21.3
2.22 A
303
103
103
'
22 Timber Cribbing
Material
(a) Timber
(b) Logs
Preparation
Dimensions
(a) Timber
(b) Logs
Construction
(a) Foundation
(b) Mud Sills
(c) Face Logs or Timbers
(d) Ties
(e) Fastening
Filling
Measurement
>
and Payment
SECTION 23 Sectional Plate Pipe and Arches

Description
Materials
Description of Plates
Forming and Punching Plates
Field Erection Pipe Structures
Field Erection Arches
Strutting
Arch Substructures and Headwalls
Workmanship
Method
of Measurement
101;
100
107
10*
10 <
107
10 1
107
JPJ
10,
10]
108
108
10S
108
108
109
10.J
109
109
110
Ill
JIT
J"
113
118
Basis of Payment
24 Wearing Surfaces
Concrete Wearing Surface
SECTION
Separate
2.24.1
2.24.2
2.24.3
2.24.4
Description
Brick Wearing Surface
Materials
113
113
JJg
1"
XII
Article
CONTENTS
Page
Preparation of Subfloor
Bed
Sand-Cement
Placing Bedding Course
Laying the Brick
Rolling the Brick
Testing the Surface
Applying Asphalt Filler
Surface Dressing
Opening to Traffic
and Payment
Measurement
113
114
114
114
115
115
115
115
115
115
2.24.15
2.24.16
2.24.17
2.24.18
2.24.19
2.24.20
2.24.21
Asphalt Block Wearing Surface

General Requirement
Materials
Mortar Bed
Laying the Blocks
Opening to Traffic
and Payment
Measurement
116
116
116
116
116
117
117
Bituminous Carpets
General
Materials
(a) Wood Subfloor
(b) Concrete Subfloor
Construction of Tar Mat Surface
(a) Prime Coat
(b) Second Coat
(c) Seal Coat
of Asphalt Mat Surface (Mixed Method)
Construction
'
Prime Coat
Second Coat
, Seal Coat
Construction of Asphalt Mat Surface (Penetration Method)
(a) Prime Coat
(b) Second Coat
Opening to Traffic
and Payment
Measurement
117
117
117
117
118
118
118
118
118
119
119
119
119
120
120
120
120
120
2.24.22
2.24.23
2.24.24
2.24.25
2.24.26
2.24.27
2.24.28
2.24.29
DIVISION
III
2.24.5
2.24.6
2.24.7
2.24.8
2.24.9
2.24.10
2.24.11
2.24.12
2.24.13
2.24.14
Design
SECTION General
Features of Design
Determination of Waterway Area
Restricted Waterways
Channel Openings
Pier Spacing and Location
Size of Culvert Openings
Length of Culverts
Width of Roadway and Sidewalk
1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
3.1.9
3.1.10
3.1.11
3.1.12
3.1.13
3.1.14
3.1.15
3.1.16
3.1.17
121
121
Clearances
Curbs and Safety Curbs
Railings
Drainage
Superelevation
Floor Surfaces
Blast Protection
Utilities
Roadway Width, Curbs and Clearances
(a) Roadway Width
(b) Clearance Between Walls
(c) Curbs
(d) Vertical Clearance
Roadway Width. Curbs and Clearances
(a) Roadway Width
for Tunnels
for Depressed
Roadways
121
121
122
122
122
122
122
124
124
124
124
124
125
125
125
125
126
126
126
126
XIII
CONTENTS
Article
3.1.18
(b) Clearance Between Walls

(c) Curbs
Roadway Width, Curbs and Clearances,
(Undivided Highways)
(a) Widths
(b) Vertical Clearance
(c) Curbs
"
Underpasses
Page
126
126
126
127
127
127
SECTION 2 Loads
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
3.2.11
3.2.12
3.2.13
3.2.14
3.2.15
3.2.16
3.2.17
3.2.18
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
Loads
Load
Loads on Culverts
Si Rigid Culverts
Live Load
Overload
Provision
Highway Loadings
(a) General
(b) H Loadings
(c) H-S Loadings
(d) Classes of Loadings
(e) Designation of Loadings
(f) Minimum Loading
Traffic Lanes
Standard Trucks and Lane Loads
Application of Loadings
(a) Traffic Lane Units
Traffic Lane Units
(b) Number and Position,
(c) Lane Loadings Continuous Spans
(d) Loading for Maximum Stress
Reduction in Load Intensity
Electric Railway Loading
Sidewalk, Curb, Safety Curb, and Railing Loading
(a) Sidewalk Loading
(b) Curb Loading
(c) Safety Curb Loading
(d) Railing Loading
Impact
(a) Group A
(!>) Group B
(c) Impact formula
Longitudinal Forces
Wind Loads
Thermal Forces
Force of the Stream Current, Floating Ice and Drift
Buoyancy
Earth Pressure
127
127
128
128
128
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
130
130
130
132
132
132
132
133
134
134
134
134
134
134
135
135
135
135
135
136
186
137
137
137
137
SECTION 3 Distribution of Loads

Distribution of Wheel Loads to Stringers and Floorbeams
(a) Position of Loads for Shear
(b) Bending Moment in Stringers
(c) Bending Moment in Floor Beams
Distribution of Loads and Design of Concrete Slabs
(a) Bending Moment, Cases A. B and C
(b) Edge Beams (Longitudinal)
(c) Distribution Reinforcement
(d) Shear and Bond Stress in Slabs
(e) Unsupported Edges (Transverse)
(f) Cantilever Slabs
(g) Slabs Supported on Four Sides
(h) Edge Distance of Wheel Load
(i) Span Lengths
Distribution of Wheel Loads Through Earth Fills
Distribution of Wheel Loads on Timber Flooring
(a) Flooring Transverse
(b) Flooring Longtiudinal
(c) Continuous Flooring
Steel Grid Floors
138
138
138
139
139
139
141
141
141
141
141
142
142
142
143
143
143
143
143
143
Dead
XIV
CONTENTS
Article
Page
143
144
144
(a) General . .
(b) Floors Filled With Concrete
(c) Open Floors
SECTION 4 Unit
3.4.1
General
Grouping of Loads
(a) Group A
(b) Group B
Stresses, Pile Loads and Bearing

Power of Soils
144
:
144
144
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.4.0
3.4.10
Steel Structures (Permissible Unit Stresses)

Structural Carbon Steel
High Strength Rivets
Wrought Iron
Cast Steel and Cast Iron
Bronze or Copper Alloy
Structural Low-Alloy Steel
Structural Nickel and Structural Silicon Steels
Unit Stresses for Welding
Bearing on Masonry
3.4.11
Concrete
Concrete
3.4.13
3.4.14
1-50
130
130
Timber Structures
Standard Stress Grades and Working Stresses
Formulas for the Computation of Stresses in Timber
(a) Horizontal Shear in Rectangular Beams
(b) Axial Compression in Rectangular Columns
(c) Axial Compression on Connector Joined Spaced Columns
(d) Safe -Load on Round Columns
Notched
(g)
Timber Connectors
(f)
Beams
Bearing on Inclined Surfaces
3.4.18
3.5.1
Piles
SECTION 5 Substructures
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
General
Limitation of Use
Design
Loads
Spacing.
Clearances
Batter Piles
and Retaining
and Embedment
151
152
152
152
153
153
154
154
154
Miscellaneous
Bearing Power of Foundation Soils
Angles of Repose
Bearing Power of Piling
(a) General
(b) Case A Capacity of Pile as a Structural Member
(c) Case B Capacity of Pile to Transfer Load to the Ground
(d) Case C Capacity of the Ground to Support the Load De
livered by the Pile
(e) Maximum Design Loads for Piles
(f) Uplift
(g) Group Pile Loading
Moments. Shears and Floor Beam Reactions
3.4.15
3.4.16
3.4.17
146
146
146
147
148
148
148
148
140
140
140
140
150
150
Standard Notations and Assumptions

General
Flexure
Shear
<e> Bond on Piles
(fl Bearing on Bridge Seats
(g) Columns
Reinforcement
Structural Grade
Intermediate Grade
(e)
14(i
14<i
Structures
Stresses
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
3.4.12
143
154
155
155
155
155
15(1
157
157
158
158
158
Walls
158
158
158
150
150
150
CONTENTS
Page
Article
(f) Buoyancy
160
100
(a J Depth
10'
3.5.5
102
10.3
103
103
103
104
104
104
104
164
104
165
16._
16._
10^
10..
}g._
]''._
16.
J0;_
J6T
16
J''"
16<,
160
3.5.6
10-
3.5.4
101
101
'
Anchorage
Distribution of Pressure
d) Spread Footings
(e) Internal Stresses in Spread Footings
(f) Reinforcement
(g) Transfer of Stress from Vertical Reinforcement
Abutments
(a) General
(b) Reinforcement for Temperature
(c) Wing Walls
(d) Drainage
Retaining Walls
(a) General
(b) Base or Footing Slabs
(c) Vertical Walls
(d) Counterforts and Buttresses
(e) Reinforcement for Temperature
if) Expansion and Contraction Joints
(g) Drainage
Piers
(a) General
(b) Pier Nose
Tubular Steel Piers
(a) Use
(b) Depth
(c) Piling
(d) Dimensions of Shell
(e) Splices and Joints
(f) Bracing
SECTION Structural Steel Design
Number of Trusses or Girders
Spacing of Trusses and Girders
Effective Span
Effective Depth
Alternating Stresses
161
101
Footings
Sb)c)
3.5.3
15D
15!
Concrete Piles (Precast)

(h) Concrete Piles (Cast.in.Place)
(i) Steel Piles
(j) Steel Pile and Steel Pile Shell Protection
(g)
3.5.2
XV
3.6.19
3.6.20
3.6.21
3.6.22
3.6.23
3.0.24
3.6.25
3.6.26
3.6.27
3.6.28
3.6.29
Limiting Lengths of Members

Deflection
Depth Ratios
Symmetrical Sections
Effective Area of Angles in Tension
Thickness of Metal
Compression
Members
Web Plates of Solid Rib Arches

Outstanding Legs of Angles and Bearing Stiffeners
Size of Pins
Details of Design
Size of Rivets
Pitch of Rivets
Pitch in Ends of Compression Members
Maximum Pitch
Stitch Rivets
Edge Distance of Rivets
Long Rivets
Rivets in Tension
Parts Accessible
Closed Sections and Pockets
Eccentric Connections
'
0.
1<
1<
17
J<
10
Stresses
Combined
Secondary Stresses
Rolled Beams
100
100
100
Jgn
100
169
16p
JWJ
1<0
1(0
8.0.1
3.0.2
3.0.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.6.6
3.0.7
3.0.8
3.0.9
3.0.10
3.0.11
3.0.12
3.0.13
3.6.14
3.6.15
3.6.16
3.0.17
3.6.18
'
1J0
Iifl
>')}
1"'
1'1
I'1
171
l'l
I"1
172
172
XVI
CONTENTS
Article
3.6.30
3.6.31
3.6.32
3.6.33
3.6.34
3.6.35
3.6.36
3.6.37
3.6.38
3.6.39
3.6.40
3.6.41
3.6.42
3.6.43
3.6.44
3.6.45
3.6.46
3.6.47
3.6.48
3.6.49
3.6.50
3.6.51
3.6.52
3.6.53
3.6.54
Strength of Connections
Splices
Indirect Splices
Fillers
(a) Welding
(b) Riveting
Gusset Plates
Stay Plates
Perforated Cover Plates
Net Section at Pin Holes
Net Section of Riveted Tension Members
Location of Pins
Pin Plates
Forked Ends
Pins and Pin Nuts
Bolts
Upset Ends
Sleeve Nuts
Expansion and Contraction
Expansion Bearings
Bronze or Copper Alloy Sliding Expansion Bearings
Fixed Bearings
Pedestals
and Shoes
Rollers
Inclined Bearings
Anchor Bolts
Name Plates
PaBe
172
172
172
172
172
172
173
173
174
175
175
175
176
176
176
176
176
J76
17
176
177
177
177
1'Z
17<
17<
17
Welding
3.6.55
Welding General
178
Floor
System
3.6.56
3.6.57
3.6.58
3.6.59
3.6.60
3.6.61
3.6.62
3.6.63
3.6.64
Stiffness of Floor Members

Stringers
Cross Frames
Floor Beams
End Floor Beams
End Panels
End Connection of Floor Beams and Stringers
Sidewalk Brackets
Expansion Joints
3.6.65
3.6.66
3.6.67
3.6.68
3.6.69
3.6.70
3.6.71
3.6.72
General
Minimum Size of Angles
Lateral Bracing
Portal and Sway Bracing
Deck Plate Girder Spans
Half -Through Truss Spans
Through Plate Girder Spans
Bracing of Long Columns
3.6.73
3.6.74
3.6.75
3.6.76
3.6.77
3.6.78
3.6.79
3.6.80
3.6.81
3.6.82
3.6.83
3.6.84
3.6.85
General
Flange Sections
Thickness of Web Plates
Flange Rivets
Flange Splices
Web Splices
Transverse End Stiffeners
Transverse Intermediate Stiffeners
Longitudinal Stiffeners
Ends of Through Girders
Sole Plates
Masonry Bearings
Camber
178
178
178
178
179
179
179
179
179
Bracing
179
180
180
180
180
180
181
181
Plate Girders
181
181
181
182
182
182
182
182
183
183
183
183
183
CONTENTS
Article
Trusses
3.6.86
3.6.87
3.6.88
3.6.89
3.6.90
3.6.91
3.6.92
3.6.93
3.6.94
3.6.95
3.6.96
3.6.97
General
Top Chords and End Posts
Bottom Chords
Working Lines and Gravity Axes
Camber
Riveted Tension Member in Pin-Connected Trusses
Counters
Eyebars
Packing of Eyebars
Diaphragms
Sole Plates
Masonry Bearings
3.6.98
3.6.99
3.6.100
3.6.101
3.6.102
3.6.103
3.6.104
3.6.105
3.6.106
Viaducts
Type
Bents and Towers
Batter
Single Bents
Bracing
Bottom Struts
Depth of Girders
Girder Connections and Bracing
Sole and Masonry Plates
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3.
3.7.4
3.7.5
3.7.6
3.7.7
3.7.8
3.7.9
3.7.10
3.7.11
XVII
SECTION 7 Concrete Design

General Assumptions
Standard Notations
(a) Rectangular Beams
(b) T-Beams
(c) Beams Reinforced for Compression
(d) Shear, Bond and Web Reinforcement
Design Formulas
(a) Beams and Slabs
(b) T-Beams
(c) Shear, Bond and Web Reinforcement
(d) Columns with Lateral Ties
(e) Spiral Columns
Span Lengths
Expansion
T-Beams
(a) Effective Flange Width
b) Shear
(c) Isolated Beams
(d) Diaphragms
Reinforcement
(a) Spacing
'.
(b) Covering
(c) Splicing
(d) Allowable Capacity of End Anchorage Hooks
(e) Extension of Reinforcement
(f) Maximum Sizes
Compression
Reinforcement in Beams
Web Reinforcement
(a) General
(b) Bent-up Bars
(c) Vertical Stirrups
(d) Anchorage
Columns
(a) General
(b) Columns with Lateral Ties
(c) Spiral Columns
(d) Flexure and Direct Stress
Arches
Concrete
(a) Shape of Arch Ring
b) Spandrel Walls
c) Expansion Joints
d) Reinforcement
e) Waterproofing
Pa8e
183
14
184
184
184
184
184
184
184
185
15
15
185
185
185
185
J
186
180
181)
186
187
18 i
187
187
188
188
188
189
190
192
192
192
}
192
192
192
ig
JJJjj
193
1
fg
193
193
193
194
194
194
194
J9|
19o
JfS
195
195
196
196
196
197
197
198
198
198
198
XVIII
Article
CONTENTS
3.7.12
Viaduct Bents and Towers
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
Bolts
Washers
Hardware for Seacoast Structures
Columns and Posts
Pile and Framed Bents
(a) Pile Bents
(b) Framed Bents
(c) Sills and Mud bills
(d) Caps
(e) Bracing
(f) Pile Bent Abutments
Trusses
(a) Joints and Splices
(b) Floor Beams
(c) Hangers
id) Kyebars and Counters
(e) Bracing
(f) Camber
Floors and Bailings
(a) Stringers
(b) Bridging
(c) Nailing Strips
(d) Flooring
(e) Retaining Pieces
(f) Wheel Guards
(g) Drainage
(h) Bailings
Fire Stops
SECTION
3.8.0
3.8.7
3.8.8
Page
(f) Drainage of Spandrel Fill

8
Design
198
198
of Timber Structures
108
199
IBS)
199
199
199
199
199
200
200
200
200
200
201
201
201
201
201
201
201
201
201
202
202
202
202
202
202
SECTION 9 Composite
3.9.1
3.9.2
3.9.3
3.9.4
3.9.5
3.9.0
General Assumptions
Effective Flange Width
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.10.4
3.10.5
3.10.0
3.10.7
3.10.8
3.10.9
General
3.11.3
3.11.4
3.11.5
3.11.0
3.11.7
3.11.8
203
203
203
203
Stresses
Shear
Deflection
Shear Devices
SECTION
3.11.1
3.11.2
204
204
10 Sectional
Plate Pipe
201
204
Gage of Side and Top Plates

Minimum Height of Cover
Gage of Bottom Plates
Bolts
Cover Exceeding Heights Specified
Sizes of Pipe Not in Table
Multiple Pipes
Strutting
in Table 1
General
Inventory
Ratings
of Existing
20; >
205
205
20;)
205
205
20;>
SECTION II Sectional Plate Arches

General
Gages for Sectional Plate Arches
Rise
Ratio
Span
Minimum Height of Cover
Adjustment of Table
Bolts
Skewed Spans and Multiple Arches
Substructure Design
SECTION 12 Rating
3.12.1
3.12.2
Beams
206
200
20b
200
200
20!!
20 1
207
Bridges
207
207
XIX
CONTENTS
Article
3.12.15
3.12.7
3.12.8
3.12.5)
3.12.10
3.12.11
3.12.12
3.12.13
P**,!
Operating Ratings
Dead Load
Live Load
Minimum Wind Load
Unit
0J
TJSi
*}{
Stresses
Traffic Lanes
Allowable Stresses (Columns)
Batten Iilate Columns
Compression
on Flanges of Learns and Girders
Details of Design
ta) Strength of Connections
(b) Splices
(c) Pins
Field Inspection
.f"?
-"J
Ri
r,,,;
3.12.3
3.12.4
3.12.5
210
DIVISION IV
Materials
SECTION
SECTION
4.2.1
4.2.2
Quality
Tests
4.3.1
4.3.2
Fine Aggregate
Sand for Mortar
4.4.1
4.4.2
Coarse
211
211
Water for Use with
Cement
211
211
Fine
SECTION
Aggregate
212
212
Coarse
Aggregates
2J2
212
Aggregate
SECTION
Bar Reinforcement
Reinforcement
Aggregates
Hubble or Cyclopean
SECTION
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
1 Cement
General
Sampling and Testing
2
4.1.1
4.1.2
212
213
213
213
Wire and Wire Mesh

Bar Mat Reinforcement
Shapes
Structural
SECTION Structural, Eyebar and Rivet Steels

General
Structural Carbon Steel and Lye Bar Steel
Structural Silicon Steel
Structural Low.Alloy Steel
Structural Nickel Steel
Structural Rivet Steel
High.Strength Structural Rivet Steel
Copper Bearing Steels
Full Size Tests
Number and Size of Test Bars
Selection of Test Bars
Failure to Meet Requirements
Record of Annealing
Payments for Full.Size Tests
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
SECTION 7 Wrought Iron

Wrought Iron Plates
...
Shapes
and Bars
Rolled Wrought-Iron
Pipe
Welded Wrought-Iron
4.8.1
Carbon Steel
4.0.1
4.0.2
4.0.3
4.6.4
4.0.5
4.0.0
4.0.7
4.6.8
4.0.J)
4.0.10
4.0.11
4.6.12
4.6.13
4.6.14
Steel
SECTION
Forgings
213
213
213
213
214
214
21.1
214
214
214
214
214
214
215
215
21o
215
Forgings
215
XX
CONTENTS
Page
Article
SECTION
9 Steel Castings
4.9.1
4.9.2
Carbon Steel Castings

Chromium Alloy-Steel
4.10.1
4.10.2
4.10.3
Gray Iron Castings

Workmanship and Finish
Cleaning
215
216
216
4.11.1
4.11.2
4.11.3
SECTION 11Malleable Castings

Malleable Castings
Workmanship and Finish
Cleaning
216
216
216
SECTION
SECTION
215
21o
Castings
10Gray-Iron
Castings
Bronze
4.12.1
4.12.2
or Copper-Alloy Bearing and

Expansion Plates
Bronze Bearing and Expansion Plates
Rolled Copper- Alloy Bearing and Expansion Plates
4.13.1
Steel
4.14.1
4.14.2
4.14.3
4.14.4
4.14.5
SECTION 14 Steel Sheet Piling

Process
Chemical Composition
Physical Properties
Bend Tests
Miscellaneous Requirements
12
SECTION
13 Steel Piles
Piles
216
SECTION
4.15.1
4.15.2
4.15.3
216
216
Steel
Protective Treatment
Concrete
15
Steel
217
217
217
217
217
Grid Floors
(Shop Coat)
217
217
218
SECTION 16 Paint
Paint for Timber Structures
4.16.1
4.16.2
4.16.3
4.16.4
4.17.1

(a) Aluminum Paint
(b) Black Paint
Paint for Metal

Coat (Prime Coat)
First Field Coat
Second Field Coat (Finish Coat)
(a) General
(b) Green Graphite Bridge Paint
(c) Black Bridge Paint
SECTION 17Welding
Welding Materials
Shop
SECTION
4.18.1
4.18.2
4.18.3
4.19.1
4.19.2
4.19.3
4.19.4
4.19.5
4.19.6
4.19.7
4.19.8
4.19.9
Sheet
Sheet
Sheet
18
Copper
Lead
Zinc
Sheet
218
218
218
219
219
219
219
220
221
223
Metal for Water Stops and General Use
SECTION IBSectional Plate Pipe and Arches

General
Spelter Coating
Galvanizing
Sampling
Chemical Analysis and Tests for Spelter Coating
Certified Analysis and Guarantee
Identification
Bolts (for Connecting Plates)
Nuts and Bolt Heads
224
224
224
224
224
225
225
225
225
225
226
226
CONTENTS
Article
4.20.1
4.20.2
4.20.3
Corrugations
Gage Determination and Tolerance
Field Inspection and Acceptance of Plates
SECTION 20 Stone for Masonry
Ashlar Stone
Rubble Stone
Riprap
4.21.1
4.21.2
Paving Brick
Brick for Masonry
4.22.1
4.22.2
Oil Asphalt
4.22.3
4.22.4
Tar
Asphalt
4.22.5
4.22.6
4.22.7
4.22.8
4.22.9
4.22.10
4.22.11
Waterproofing
Asphalt
Pitch
Fabric
Tar for Absorptive Treatment
Tar Seal Coat
Joint Fillers
Inspection and Delivery
4.19.10
4.19.11
4.19.12
SECTION
SECTION
Premolded
22
XXI
Page
226
226
220
226
227
227
21 Brick
227
227
Bituminous
Fillers
Materials and Joint Fillers
Joint Fillers
Expansion
227
228
Bituminous Carpets
228
228
Materials
4.25.6
SECTION 23 Asphalt Paving Blocks

General
Asphaltic Cement
Mineral Aggregate
Inorganic Dust
Manufacture
Physical Characteristics
(a) Size and Shape
(b) Composition
(c) Absorption Test
SECTION 24 Premolded Asphalt Plank
General
SECTION 25 Structural Timber, Lumber and Piling
Species of Woods
Limitation of Use
Grading of Yard Lumber
Hewn and Round Timbers
Grading of Structural Timber
General
(a) Grade of Timber
(b) Commercial Grading Rules
4.25.7
4.25.8
4.25.9
General
Quality
Dimensions
4.26.1
Preservatives
4.23.1
4.23.2
4.23.3
4.23.4
4.23.5
4.23.6
4.24.1
4.25.1
4.25.2
4.25.3
4.25.4
4.25.5
229
2211
22V)
22V)
229
230
230
230
230
231
23.1
231
231
231
232
232
232
232
233
233
233
234
234
234
234
Timber Piles
234
235
SECTION
26Timber Preservatives
235
SECTION
4.27.1
4.27.2
4.27.3
4.27.4
4.27.5
4.27.6
General
Split Ring Connectors

Tooth-Ring Connectors
Shear Plate Connectors
Claw-Plate Connectors
Spike-Grid Connectors
27 Timber Connectors
230
236
236
236
237
237
INTRODUCTION
The compilation of these specifications
began with the organization,
in 1921, of the Committee on Bridges and Structures of the American
Association of State Highway Officials. During the period from 1921, until
the specifications were printed in 1931, the specifications were gradually
developed, and as the several divisions were approved, from time to time,
they were made available in mimeographed form for use of the State High
way Departments and other organizations. A complete specification was
Though they were not in
available in 1926 and it was revised in 1928.
printed form, the specifications were valuable to the bridge engineering
profession during the period of development.
The first edition of the Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

was published in 1931, and it was followed by the 1935, 1941 and 1944
The present edition constitutes a revision of the 1944 specifica
editions.
Insofar as
tions and it contains all revisions adopted up to April 1, 1948.
possible, the revisions have been made to conform to the latest developments
in the profession of bridge engineering and to current practice in bridge
design.
The more important changes have been made in the Division on Design.
Those which warrant special mention are the revision of axle loads on
floors, clarification of the application of live loads, distribution of loads,
Long
and a much improved specification on the bearing value of piles.
plate girder spans are being used more extensively and the use of lon
gitudinal stiffeners involved in the long spans has been provided for in this
edition.
The Specifications for Highway Bridges are intended to serve as a
and for
standard or guide for the preparation of State specifications
In the case of a number of States, the speci
reference by bridge engineers.
fications have been adopted as basic, subject to certain supplemental
specifications which embody provisions designed to meet the local needs
of the State in question.
Thus, the printing of a State specification is
Primarily, the specifications set forth minimum requirements
obviated.
which are consistent with current practice, and it is expected that certain
They apply to
modifications
will be necessary to suit local conditions.
ordinary highway bridges, and supplemental specifications are required
for unusual types and for long span bridges. It is recognized that for long
span bridges the uniform live load should be materially reduced, dependent
between
upon the length of the span, and that the line of demarcation
short and long spans should be in the range of 300 to 400 feet.
of the American Society for Testing Materials, the
Specifications
American Welding Society, and the American Wood Preservers' Associa
tion are referred to or are recognized, and in the formulation of the speci
fications certain portions of the American Railway Engineering Associa
tion Specifications and of the June, 1940, report of the Joint Committee
on Standard Specifications for Concrete and Reinforced Concrete have been
utilized. The Association of State Highway Officials wishes to express its
sincere appreciation to these organizations. Extensive reference has also
for Highway Materials and
been made to the Standard Specifications
Methods of Sampling and Testing, published by the American Association
of State Highway Officials.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
The Committee on Bridges and Structures has jurisdiction over the
The present membership of the Com
bridge activities of the Association.
of 48 States, the District of Columbia,
mittee includes representatives
The following have served
Hawaii and the Public Roads Administration.
as chairmen of the Committee since its inception in 1921 : Messrs. E. F.
Kelley, who pioneered the work of the Committee, Albin L. Gemeny and
R. B. McMinn. Mr. Raymond Archibald, the present chairman, has served
in that capacity since the 1941 edition was published.
Suggestions for the improvement of the specifications will be welcomed.
They should be sent to the Chairman, Committee on Bridges and Structures,
A.A.S.H.O., Public Roads Administration, Washington 25, D. C.
Committee on Bridges and Structures

1948
Raymond Archibald, Chairman

Chief, Bridge Division
Public Roads Administration, Washington
ALABAMA J. W. Chambers, Bridge Engineer,
State
ment, Montgomery.
ARIZONA R. A. Hoffman, Bridge Engineer,
25,
D. C.
Highway Depart
State Highway Department,
Phoenix.
ARKANSAS N. B. Garver, Principal Highway Engineer,
State Highway
Little Rock.
CALIFORNIA F. W. Panhorst, Bridge Engineer, Division of Highways,
Commission,
Department of Public Works, Sacramento.

S. Bailey, Bridge Engineer, State Highway
COLORADO Paul
ment, Denver.
CONNECTICUT
J.
ment, Hartford.
F. Willis, Bridge Engineer,
DELAWARE J. M. Gordon, Bridge Engineer,

ment, Dover.
Depart
State Highway Depart

State
Highway
Depart
FLORIDA W. E. Dean, Bridge Engineer,
State Road Department,

Tallahassee.
GEORGIA C. N. Crocker, Bridge Engineer, State Highway Department,
Atlanta.
IDAHO Walter Albrethsen, Bridge Engineer, Department of Public
Works, P. 0. Box 1467, Boise.
ILLINOIS G. F. Burch, Bridge Engineer, Division of Highways, Depart
ment of Public Works and Buildings, Springfield.
INDIANA J. R. Cooper, Engineer of Bridges, State Highway Commis
sion, Indianapolis.
IOWA E. W. Blumenschein, Engineer of Bridge Design, State Highway
Commission,
KANSAS E.
Topeka.
Ames.
S.
KENTUCKY E.
Elcock, Bridge Engineer,

D. Smith,
State
Highway
Commission,
Bridge Engineer, Department of Highways,
Frankfort.
LOUISIANA N. E. Lant, Chief Engineer,
J. B. Carter, Bridge Engineer,

Department of Highways, Baton Rouge.
MAINE M. L. Wilder, Bridge Engineer, State Highway Commission,
Augusta.
MARYLAND Walter C. Hopkins, Bridge Engineer, State Roads Com
mission, Baltimore.
MASSACHUSETTS R. O. Spofford, Bridge Engineer, Department of
Public Works, 100 Nashua Street, Boston.
MICHIGAN G. M. Foster, Bridge Engineer, State Highway Department,
Lansing.
MINNESOTA M. O. Giertsen, Bridge Engineer, Department of High
ways, 1246 University Avenue, St. Paul 4.
MISSISSIPPI Chas. S. Hill, Bridge Engineer, State Highway Depart
ment, Jackson.
MISSOURI V. W. Enslow, Engineer of Bridges, State Highway Com
mission, Jefferson City.
MONTANA H. W. Holmes, Bridge Design Engineer, State Highway
Commission,
NEBRASKA H.
Irrigation,
Helena.
G. Schlitt, Bridge Engineer, Department of Roads
Lincoln.
and
HIGHWAY
BRIDGES
NEVADA E. T. Boardman, Bridge Engineer,

Carson City.
NEW HAMPSHIRE H. E.
Department,
NEW
LANGLEY,
Department
of Highways,
Bridge Engineer, State
Highway
Concord.
JERSEY Morris
Good-kind, Bridge Engineer, State Highway De

Trenton.
NEW MEXICO E. B. Van de Greyn, Bridge Engineer, State Highway
Commission, Santa Fe.
NEW YORK E. W. Wendell, Assistant Chief Engineer, Department of
Public Works, Albany 1.
NORTH CAROLINA T. B. Gunter, Jr., Bridge Engineer, State Highway
and Public Works Commission, Raleigh.
NORTH DAKOTA Frank E. Cave, Bridge Engineer, State Highway
Bismarck.
Department,
OHIO G. R. Logue, Chief Engineer, Bureau of Bridges, Department of
Highways, Columbus.
OKLAHOMA Homer X. White, Bridge Engineer, State Highway Com
mission, Oklahoma City.
OREGON G. S. Paxson, Bridge Engineer, State Highway Commission,
partment,
Salem.
PENNSYLVANIA Leo A. Porter, Acting Bridge Engineer,

of Highways, Harrisburg.
RHODE ISLAND D.
Works, Providence.
O.
SOUTH CAROLINA W.
Department,
Columbia.
Department
Cargill, Bridge Engineer, Department of Public
J.
Gooding,
Bridge Engineer,
State
Highway
SOUTH DAKOTA K. R. Scurr, Bridge Engineer,
State Highway Com

Pierre.
TENNESSEE L. W. Erickson, Bridge Engineer, Department of High
ways and Public Works, Nashville.
TEXAS R. B. Alexander, Bridge Engineer, State Highway Department,
Austin.
UTAH Maurice Housecroft, Chief Bridge Engineer, State Road Commis
sion, Salt Lake City.
VERMONT A. D. Bishop, Bridge Engineer, Department of Highways,
Montpelier.
VIRGINIA Wm. R. Glidden, Engineer of Bridges, Department of High
mission,
ways, Richmond.
WASHINGTON George Stevens, Bridge Engineer, Department of High

ways, Olympia.
WEST VIRGINIA L. L. Jemison, Bridge Engineer,

sion, Charleston.
WISCONSIN C. H.
Madison.
State Road Commis
Kirch, Bridge Engineer,
State Highway Commission,
WYOMING W. H. Fisher, Bridge Engineer,
State Highway Department,
Cheyenne.
PUBLIC ROADS ADMINISTRATION H.
R. Angwin, Highway Bridge

Engineer, Phelan Building, San Francisco 2, Calif.
R. B. Wright, Highway Bridge Engineer, Box 3900, Portland 8, Oreg.
C. T. Nitteberg, Bridge Engineer, 502 U. S. Courthouse, Ft. Worth, Tex.
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA Harry R. Howser, Engineer of Bridges,
District Building, Washington, D. C.
HAWAII Wm. R. Bartels, Bridge Engineer, Territorial Highway De
partment, Territorial Office Building, Honolulu 10, T. H.
PUERTO RICO Cecilio Delgado, Chief Civil Engineer, Department of
Survey and Design of Roads and Bridges, Department of Interior,
San Juan.
OFFICERS AND MEMBERS OF EXECUTIVE
COMMITTEE
OF THE ASSOCIATION
1949
PRESIDENT
W. W. POLK
Illinois
FIRST VICE PRESIDENT

C.
W. BROWN
Missouri
REGIONAL VICE PRESIDENTS

First Region
SPENCER
Second Region
MILLER, JR.
W. V. BAISE
Third Region
M. ZIEGLER
C.
Michigan
N. Carolina
New Jersey
Fourth Region
A. P. WINKLER
Montana
EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
M.
J.
HOFFMANN
R. H. BALDOCK
Minnesota
J.
A. ANDERSON
Virginia
Oregon
T. H. CUTLER
B. D.
TALL A MY
New York
Kentucky
H. E. SARGENT
T. H. MACDONALD
Vermont
Washington, D. C.
F. R. WHITE
Iowa
EXECUTIVE SECRETARY
H. H. HALE
Washington, D. C.
TREASURER
G.
H. HENDERSON
Rhode Island
D.
C. GREER
Texas
C.
H. PURCELL
California
DIVISION
General Provisions
SECTION I Definition of
1. 1. 1. Definition
In
"State
of
Terms
Terms.
these specifications
the following
definitions shall obtain:
The State or Commonwealth

acting through its authorized representatives.
oe Commonwealth"
of
or Department" The State highway commission, depart

ment or other organization as constituted under the laws of said
State or Commonwealth for the administration of highway work
(hereinafter referred to as commission).
"Commission
"County" The County of
in which the work herein specified is
to be done.
"Township or Town" Any subdivision of
the county
used to designate
or identify the location of the proposed work.
"Board" The governing board of the county

the work.
"Engineer" The chief
or township in charge
engineer of the commission

or through his authorized representatives.
of
acting either directly
"Resident Engineer" The

the engineer
person acting as authorized representative of

in the supervision and inspection of the work.
"Inspector" The authorized representative of

make a detailed
the engineer
assigned
to
of any or all portions of the work,
inspection
or materials therefor.
"Bidder" The individual, firm, or corporation formally submitting a pro
posal for the work contemplated, or any portion thereof, acting
directly or through an authorized representative.
"Contractor" The individual, firm, or corporation undertaking
the exe
of the work under the terms of the contract and acting

directly or through his or its agents or employes.
cution
"Sub-Contractor" The individual, firm, or corporation acting for or in

behalf of the contractor in the execution of all or any part of
the contract.
"Plans" Approved drawings or reproduction of drawings, including all

notes thereon, pertaining to the construction or details
work contemplated in the contract.
of the
"Specifications" All provisions
and requirements
contained herein, to
gether with all written or printed agreements and instructions,
except notes on plans, made or to be made pertaining to the
method and manner of performing the work, or to the quantities
and qualities of the materials to be furnished under the contract.
"Supplemental Specifications" Certain
supplemental
directions, provi
not on the plans and adopted as a
and requirements
part of the contract with the express purpose that they shall
sions
GENERAL
PROVISIONS
prevail over the specifications

over special provisions.
contained
in this book but not
"Special Provisions" Specific
clauses which shall prevail over all other

and over all plans, setting forth conditions
specifications
or
requirements
peculiar to the project under consideration
and
covering work or materials involved in the proposal and estimate
but not satisfactorily covered by the specification.
to Bidders" All instructions, issued for the information

of bidders, pertaining to the requirements governing the sub
mission of proposals, the quantities and qualities of materials,
the performance of the work and payment therefor.
"Instructions
"Proposal" The written proposal of
the bidder,
for the work contemplated.
on the form furnished,
"Contract and Included Documents" The
agreement covering the per

in the specifications.
The
instruction to bidders,
contract includes the advertisement,
proposal, contract and contract bond, these specifications, supple
general and detailed plans, all supple
mental specifications,
mental agreements entered into, and all general or special
provisions pertaining to the work or materials therefor.
formance
of the work as provided
"Proposal Guaranty" The security
designated in the instructions to

bidders or proposal, to be furnished by the bidder as a guaranty
of good faith to enter into a contract for the work contemplated
if it be awarded to him.
"Contract Bond" The
bond, executed by the contractor and his surety,

of the contract.
guaranteeing complete execution
"Surety" The individuals or corporate body which is bound with and

for the contractor, for the acceptable performance of the con
tract, and for his payment of all debts pertaining to the work.
Where applying to the "Proposal Guaranty" it refers to the
individuals or corporate body which engages to be responsible

for the bidder's acts in the execution of a satisfactory contract
in the event of it being awarded to him.
"Right of Way" The
area designated by the engineer for use in con

structing the structures covered by the contract, including the
thereto.
The right of way so designated may
appurtenances
be either temporary or permanent.
"Roadway" The portion of the right of way reserved for traffic.

"Temporary Structure" Any structure required to maintain traffic while
constructing or reconstructing structures, or parts of structures
covered by the contract.
The temporary structure shall include
earth
approaches
thereto.
"Substructure" All of that part of
the structure below the bearings of

and continuous spans, skewbacks of arches and tops of
footings of rigid frames, and also backwalls, wingwalls and
wing protection railings shall be considered as part of the
simple
substructure.
HIGHWAY
BRIDGES
"Superstructure" All of that part of
the structure above the bearings

of simple and continuous spans, skewbacks of arches and tops
of footings of rigid frames, except as noted above, shall be
considered as part of the superstructure.
"Laboratory" The testing laboratory of

ing laboratory which may
"Work" Work shall
the commission or any other test

by the engineer.
be designated
to mean the furnishing of all labor,

and other incidentals necessary or con
venient to the successful completion of the project or the portion
of the project involved and the carrying out of all the duties
and obligations imposed by the contract.
be understood
materials, equipment,
"Working Day"Working
day, a calendar day, exclusive of Sundays and

legal holidays, on which weather and working conditions permit
the contractor to make effective use of not less than 50 per cent
of the usual daily men hours during regular working hours.
Saturday, subject to the above, shall be considered one-half a
working day, unless according to prevailing practice at the
location of the project no work is done on Saturdays, in which
case Saturday shall not be counted as a working day.
A. A. S. H. 0. American Association of State Highway Officials.

A. S. T. M. American Society for Testing Materials.
A. W. P. A. American Wood
A. W. S. American Welding
SECTION
1.2.
Preservers Association.
Society.
2 Proposal
Requirements
and Conditions
1. Contents
of Proposal Form.
furnished by the commission with proposal forms which
will state the location and description of the work contemplated and which
will show the approximate quantities of the work to be performed or
materials to be furnished, the amount of the proposal guaranty, and the
date, time and place of filing and of opening proposals.
The form will
also refer to any special provisions or requirements which vary from, or are
supplemental to, the standard specifications.
Bidders will
be
1. 2. 2. Interpretation
of
Estimates.
The engineer's
estimate of quantities as shown in the instructions to

bidders or proposal shall be used as a basis of calculation upon which the
award of contract will be made, but these quantities are not guaranteed to be
accurate and are furnished without any liability on the part of the State.
1. 2. 3. Examination
of Plans, Specifications, and Site of the Work

Bidders shall carefully examine the instructions to bidders, plans, speci
fications, special provisions,
specifications
supplemental
and site of the
proposed work in order to satisfy themselves by examination as to all local
conditions affecting the contract and as to the detailed requirements
of
construction.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1. 2. 4. Preparation
of Proposal.
Each proposal submitted shall be upon the form furnished. No other
The blank spaces must be filled in correctly
proposal will be considered.
and the amounts written legibly.
The bidder shall sign the proposal on the blank space provided therefor.
If the proposal is made by a partnership or corporation, the name and
address of the partnership or corporation, as well as that of the agent
acting therefor, shall be shown.
1. 2. 5. Rejection
of Proposals.
Proposals may be rejected if they show any alteration of form, addi
tions not called for, conditional or alternate bids, irregularities of any kind,
or if they contain a clause in which the bidder reserves the right to accept
Proposals in which the prices are
or reject a contract awarded to him.
obviously
unbalanced
may be rejected.
1. 2. 6. Proposal Guaranty.
No proposal will be considered unless accompanied by a certified or

cashier's check in the amount as specified in the proposal form and made
The full amount of the proposal guaranty
payable to the party specified.
shall be forfeited to the State, in liquidation of damages sustained, in the
event that the bidder (or bidders) fails to execute a satisfactory contract
and file an acceptable contract bond within
days after the accept
ance of his proposal.
2. 2. 7. Delivery of Proposal.
Each proposal submitted shall be sealed and plainly marked "Proposal

," and with the name and address
for Bridge Work. Located in
of the bidder on the outside of the envelope. When sent by mail, preferably
registered,
the sealed proposal,
marked as indicated
above, must be enclosed
in an additional envelope. All proposals shall be filed prior to the time and
at the place specified in the advertisement or instructions to bidders.
1. 2. 8. Withdrawal
of Proposal.
A bidder will
be permitted to withdraw his proposal unopened after

deposited if such request is received in writing prior to the
time specified for opening proposals.
it has
been
1. 2. 9. Public
Opening of Proposals.
Proposals will be opened publicly and read
specified in the advertisement.
at the time
and
place
1. 2. 10. Disqualification
of Bidders.
More than one proposal from an individual firm, partnership, corpora
tion, or association under the same or different names will not be consid
ered. Collusion between bidders will be sufficient cause for rejection of all
bids so affected.
1. 2. 11. Competency
of Bidders.
Bidders must be capable of performing the various items of work bid
They may be required to furnish a statement covering experience
upon.
on similar work, list of machinery, plant and other equipment available
for the proposed work, and such statements of their financial resources as
may be deemed necessary.
HIGHWAY
10
SECTION
1. 3. 1. Consideration
Award
BRIDGES
and Execution
of Contract
of Bids.
The right is reserved to waive defects and to reject any or all proposals.
1. 3. 2. Award
of Contracts.
Contracts shall be awarded at the time and place indicated
advertisement, or as soon thereafter as practicable.
in the
1. 3. 3. Return
of Proposal Guaranty.
The proposal guaranties of all except the three lowest bidders will be
returned promptly after the tabulation of bids has been made, and in no
days without
case will a proposal guaranty be held longer than
the bidder's written consent.
Should no award be made within
days, all proposals will be rejected and proposal guaranties returned.
1.3. 4. Requirements
of Contract Bond.
days from the date of accept
The successful bidder, within
ance of his proposal, shall furnish and file with the proper officer as
designated in the advertisement
or instructions to bidders, an acceptable
bond in an amount not less than
per cent of the contract amount.
Such bond shall be on the form specified, and shall meet all requirements
as specified in the laws of
.
Negotiable securities approved by the commission, in an amount equal
to that specified above, may, at the option of the contractor, be deposited
with the commission in lieu of a bond.
1. 3. 5. Execution
of the Contract.
The individual, firm, or corporation to whom the contract has been
awarded shall execute and file with the commission
copies of the
days after the date of the award.
contract within
1. 3. 6. Approval
of Contract.
Contracts requiring execution by the commission shall be so executed
Any material delivered or work
before any construction work is started.
started before such approval is noted on the contract is entirely at the
contractor's risk.
1. 3. 7. Failure
to Execute
Contract.
Failure
to execute a contract and file an acceptable bond as provided

herein within
days from date of award shall be just cause for
the annulment of the award and the forfeiture of the proposal guaranty
to the State, not as a penalty but in liquidation of damages sustained.
SECTION 4 Scope of
1. 4. 1. Intent
the Work
of the Plans and Specifications.

The true intent of the plans and these specifications is to provide for
the execution and completion in every detail of the work described herein,
and it is understood that the contractor for all or any part will furnish all
labor, material, equipment, tools, transportation and necessary supplies,
such as may reasonably be required to execute the contract in a satisfactory
and workmanlike manner and in accordance with the plans, specifications,
GENERAL PROVISIONS
Any deviation from these requirements
and terms of the contract.
be stipulated in the contract.
11
must
1. 4. 2. Special Work.
Should any construction or conditions which are not covered by the

plans or these specifications be anticipated, or encountered during con
struction, special provisions for such work will be prepared by the engineer
and shall be considered a part of these specifications the same as though
contained
fully
herein.
2. 4. 3. Increased
or Decreased Quantities.
The right is reserved, without impairing the contract, to make such

increase or decrease in the quantities of the work as may be considered
necessary to complete fully and satisfactorily the structures included in
the contract.
The compensation to the contractor for such changes shall
be adjusted as provided herein.
1. 4. 4. Extra
Work.
The right is reserved, without impairing the contract, to order the

performance of such work, of a class not contemplated in the proposal, as
may be considered necessary to complete fully and satisfactorily the struc
Such extra work shall be done by the
tures included in the contract.
contractor and he shall be compensated as provided herein.
1. 4. 5.
Temporary
Crossings and Detours.
The contractor will not be required to construct or maintain temporary

crossing structures unless such crossings are stipulated in the contract or
ordered as extra work by the engineer.
If the building of a temporary
crossing is included in the contract the responsibility of the contractor for
accidents to the public or his workmen, arising from its construction or
maintenance, shall extend to such structure and its roadway approaches.
Whenever the road upon which construction is in progress is closed to
traffic by order of the engineer, the contractor shall be relieved of all
responsibility in connection with the construction, protection, and mainte
nance of adequate detours, but he shall be responsible for the construction,
maintenance, and protection of adequate barriers, watchmen, or red lights
at both ends of the portion of the road closed.
1. 4. 6. Removal
and Disposal of Structures and Obstructions.

The contractor shall remove at his expense any existing structure or
part of structure which interferes in any way with the new construction.
All structures and materials found on the work and not especially
reserved in the plans or specifications shall be the property of the State,
to be disposed of in the confines of the right of way as the engineer shall
direct.
Unless otherwise provided, the material from any existing old
structures may be used temporarily by the contractor in the erection of the
new structure. Such material shall not be cut or otherwise damaged, except
with the approval of the engineer.
1. 4. 7. Rights in and Use of Materials Found on the Site.
The contractor may use in the construction of the work any suitable
sand, gravel, or stone found in the excavation but, if necessary, shall replace
any material so removed with material satisfactory to the engineer.
HIGHWAY
12
BRIDGES
.1. 4. 8. Final Cleaning Up.

Upon completion and before final acceptance, the contractor shall
remove all falsework, excavated or useless materials, rubbish and temporary
buildings, replace or renew any fences damaged and restore in an accept
able manner all property, both public and private, which may have been
damaged during the prosecution of the work, and shall leave the bridge
site and adjacent highway in a neat and presentable condition satisfactory
All excavated material or falsework placed in the stream
to the engineer.
channel during construction shall be removed by the contractor before
final acceptance.
SECTION 5 Control of
the Work
1. S. 1. Authority
of Engineer.
The engineer shall decide any and all questions which may arise as to
the quality and acceptability of materials furnished and work performed
and as to the manner of performance
and rate of progress of the work,
and shall decide all questions which may arise as to the interpretation of
the plans and specifications, and all questions as to the acceptable fulfillment
of the terms of the contract.
2. 5. 2. Plans and
Working Drawings.
General drawings, showing such details as are necessary to give a

comprehensive idea of the construction contemplated, will be included in
the plans, but the contractor shall submit to the engineer for approval such
additional stress sheets, shop details, or other working drawings as may
be required for the construction of any part of the work, and prior to the
approval of such plans any work done or material ordered shall be at the
contractor's risk.
Working drawings for steel structure shall consist of shop detail,
erection and other working plans showing dimensions, sizes of material,
details and other information necessary for the complete fabrication and
erection of the metal work.
Working drawings for concrete structures shall consist of such detailed
plans as may reasonably be required for the successful prosecution of the
work and which are not included in the plans furnished by the engineer.
These may include plans for falsework, bracing, centering and form work,
masonry lay-out diagrams, and diagrams for bent reinforcement.
It is expressly understood that the approval by the engineer of the
contractor's working drawings relates to the requirements for strength and
detail, and such approval will not relieve the contractor from responsibility
for errors in dimensions.
The contractor shall furnish the engineer with such blueprint copies
of the working drawings as may be required for approval and construc
tion purposes, and upon completion of the work, cloth tracings, if required
shall be supplied to the engineer.
The contract price shall Include the cost of furnishing all working
drawings, and the contractor will be allowed no extra compensation for
such drawings.
1. S. 3. Deviations
be
from the Plans.

No deviation from the plans or the approved working drawings will
permitted without the written order of the engineer.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1. 5. 4. Coordination of Specifications
13
and Plans.
In
cases of conflict in the requirements and provisions as set out by

the plans, the supplemental
the general specifications,
the
specifications,
proposal form and the special provisions, it shall be understood that the
special provisions including the proposal form take precedence over the
supplemental specifications and over both the plans and standard specifica
tions and it shall also be understood that the supplemental specifications
take precedence over the standard specifications and that the plans take
precedence over the standard specifications and the supplemental specifica
tions.
On all plans the figured dimensions shall govern in case of any
discrepancy between the figured dimensions and the scaled dimensions.
The contractor shall take no advantage of any apparent error or omis
sion in the plans or specifications, but the engineer shall be permitted to
make such corrections and interpretations as may be deemed necessary for
the fulfillment of the intent of the plans and specifications.
1. 5. 5. Cooperation
by Contractor.
The contractor shall conduct his operations so as to interfere as little

subcontractors,
or the public
as possible with those of other contractors,
on or near the work.
The contractor shall at all times during his absence from the work
have a competent superintendent
or foreman capable of reading and
thoroughly understanding the plans and specifications, as his agent on the
work, who shall receive instructions from the engineer or his authorized
The superintendent or foreman shall have full authority
representatives.
to execute the orders or directions of the engineer without delay and to
promptly supply such materials, tools, plant equipment, and labor as may
be required.
1. 5. 6. Construction Stakes.
alignment, and elevation of each structure will
by the engineer, but the contractor shall assume full respon
sibility for the alignment, elevation, and dimensions of each and all parts
For all structures the engineer
of the work and their mutual agreement.
shall furnish the contractor with roadway and waterway centerlines and
such bench marks or other points as are necessary to lay out the work
correctly. If requested by the contractor, the engineer shall furnish stakes
determining the centerlines of all piers, pedestals, or abutments, together
with stakes determining the angles of the wings or retaining walls.
The contractor shall exercise proper care in the preservation of align
ment, grade, and reference stakes, set for his use or that of the engineer.
such stakes are injured, lost or removed by the contractor's operations
they shall be reset at his expense.
The general location,
be determined
If
1. 5. 7. Authority and Duties of Inspectors.
Inspectors shall be authorized to inspect all work done and all materials
furnished. Such inspection may extend to all or any part of the work and
to the preparation, fabrication or manufacture of the materials to be used.
Resident engineers and inspectors may be stationed on the work to
report to the engineer as to the progress thereof, and manner in which it
is being performed, also to report whenever it appears that materials fur
nished or work performed by the contractor fail to fulfill the requirements
of the specifications and contract, and to direct the attention of the con
tractor to such failure.
Such inspection shall not relieve the contractor
HIGHWAY
14
BRIDGES
from any obligations to furnish acceptable materials or to provide completed

construction that is satisfactory in every particular.
In case of any dispute
arising between the resident engineer or inspector and the contractor as to
material furnished or the manner of performing the work, the resident
engineer or inspector shall have authority to reject materials or suspend
the work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the
engineer.
Neither the resident engineer nor inspector is authorized to re
voke, alter, enlarge, relax or release any requirements of these specifications,
nor to issue instructions contrary to the plans and specifications.
Neither
the resident engineer nor inspector shall act as foreman or perform other
duties for the contractor, nor interfere with the management of the work
by the latter.
1. S. 8. inspection.
The engineer or his representatives shall be allowed access to all parts

of the work at all times and shall be furnished such information and assist
ance by the contractor as may be required to make a complete and detailed
inspection.
Such inspection may include mill, plant or shop inspection and
any material furnished under these specifications
is subject to such
inspection.
1.5.9. Removal of Unauthorized

Any defective work, whether
and Defective
Work.
the result of poor workmanship, use of

defective materials, damage through carelessness, or of any other cause,
found to exist prior to acceptance of or final payment for the work, shall
and replaced by work and materials which shall
be removed immediately
conform to the specifications, or shall be remedied otherwise in an accept
This clause shall have full effect
able manner authorized by the engineer.
regardless of the fact that the defective work may have been done or the
defective materials used with the full knowledge of the inspector.
The fact
that the inspector in charge may have previously overlooked such defective
work shall not constitute an acceptance of any part of it.
No work shall be done without lines and grades having been given by
the engineer.
Work done contrary to or regardless of the instructions of
the engineer, work done beyond the lines shown on the plans or as given,
except as herein provided, or any extra work done without authority, will be
considered as unauthorized and will not be paid for under the provisions
of the contract.
Work so done may be ordered removed or replaced at the
contractor's expense.
2. S. 10. Final
Inspection.
Unless otherwise provided, the engineer shall make final inspection of

each structure included in the contract, within 10 days after notification by
If the work is not acceptable
the contractor that the work is completed.
to the engineer he shall advise the contractor as to the particular defects to
be remedied before final acceptance can be made.
2. S. 11. Disputed
In
Claims.
any case where the contractor deems extra compensation to be due

him for work or materials not clearly covered in the contract, or not ordered
by the engineer as an extra, as defined herein, the contractor shall notify
the engineer of his intention to make claim for such extra compensation
If such notification
before he begins the work on which he bases the claim.
is not given, or the engineer is not afforded proper facilities by the con
GENERAL
PROVISIONS
15
tractor for keeping strict account of actual cost, then the contractor hereby
agrees to waive the claim for such extra compensation.
Such notice by the
contractor, and the fact that the engineer has kept account of the cost as
aforesaid, shall not in any way be construed as proving the validity of the
In case the
claim.
The claim must be passed upon by the commission.
claim is found to be just, it shall be allowed and paid as an extra as
provided herein for extra work.
1. 5. 12. Arbitration.
Both parties to the contract agree that as a condition precedent to the

filing of an action in any court involving the amount or rate of payment
or settlement for work performed by the contractor under these specifica
tions and contract, and as a condition precedent to the liability of the com
mission for any amount other than contained in the estimates approved b;
the engineer, any question at issue involving the amount or rate of settle
ment or liability of the State for an amount other than as shown by the
estimates approved by the engineer, shall be referred to a board of arbitra
tion for decision and award.
Said board of arbitration shall consist of
three persons, one to be chosen by the commission, one by the contractor,
and the third by these two. The board of arbitration shall make such rules
as it shall determine equitable to govern itself in the conduct of the investi
gation and determination of the award. In determining the award, the
Certified copies of the findings and
majority of the board shall govern.
award shall be filed with the commission and contractor. The board of
arbitration shall fix the amount of the cost of the proceedings, including
a fair and reasonable compensation to the arbitrators, and shall determine
The board of arbitration shall have
how the total cost shall be borne.
authority only to pass upon questions involving compensation to the con
tractor for work actually performed but not allowed by the engineer, and
its authority shall not extend to the interpretation of the plans and specifi
cations or the determination of the qualities of materials or workmanship
furnished, nor shall it have authority to set aside or modify the terms or
requirements of the contract.
SECTION 6 Control of Materials

2. 6. 1. Source
of Supply
and Quality.
These specifications contemplate the use of first class materials through

out, used in such a manner as to produce completed construction which is
Only materials conforming
workmanlike and acceptable in every detail.
of these specifications and approved by the engineei
to the requirements
shall be used in the work. The source of supply of materials shall be
approved by the engineer before shipment is made.
1. 6. 2. Test$
All
of
Materials.
tests of materials shall be made by the engineer in accordance with

methods as described and designated in these specifications.
When tests of materials are necessary, such tests shall be made by and
at the expense of the commission unless otherwise provided.
The con
tractor shall afford such facilities as the engineer may require for collect
ing and forwarding samples, and shall hold the materials represented by
the samples until tests have been made, and the materials found equal
of the specifications or to approved samples.
to the requirements
The
contractor in all cases shall furnish the required samples without charge.
approved
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
16
In the absence of any definite specification or reference to a specifica

tion given in the body of the general specifications, in the supplemental
specifications or in the special provisions for the particular project involved,
it shall be understood that such materials shall meet the requirements of
the Standard Specifications for Highway Materials of the American Asso
ciation of State Highway Officials, or in the event that no specification has
been officially adopted by said Association, such materials shall meet the
of the American Society for Testing
and requirements
specifications
Materials.
Unless otherwise specified, all tests of materials shall be made in
accordance with the "Methods of Sampling and Testing" prescribed by the
American Association of State Highway Officials, or in case no method has
been prescribed by this Association, said tests shall be conducted in accord
ance with methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing Materials.
Whenever in these specifications a particular specification of the Ameri
can Association of State Highway Officials or the American Society for
Testing Materials is referred to by number, it shall be understood that such
reference shall include all amendments and additions thereto adopted by
such organizations prior to the call for bids.
1. 6. 3. Storage
of
Materials.
Materials shall be stored so as to insure the preservation of their

quality and fitness for the work. Stored materials shall be located so as
That portion of the right of way not
to facilitate prompt inspection.
required for public travel may be used for storage purposes and for the
placing of the contractor's plant and equipment.
Owners of abutting
property shall be permitted access thereto at all times. Additional space
required, unless otherwise stipulated, shall be provided by the contractor
at his expense.
2. 6. 4. Defective
Materials.
All materials
not conforming to the requirements of these specifications

shall be considered as defective. No defective material, the defects of which
have been subsequently corrected, shall be used until approval has been
given. Upon failure on the part of the contractor to comply forthwith with
any order of the engineer made under the provisions of this article, the
engineer shall have authority to remove and replace defective material and
to deduct the cost of removal and replacement from any moneys due or to
become due the contractor.
1.6. 5. Silence of Specifications.

The apparent silence of specifications, plans, special provisions and
supplemental specifications as to any detail or the apparent omission from
them of a detailed description concerning any point shall be regarded as
meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only
material and workmanship of first quality are to be used. All interpretatations of these specifications shall be made upon the basis above stated.
SECTION
2. 7.
2. Laws
7 Legal Relations
and Responsibility to Public
to be Observed.
The contractor is presumed to be familiar with all laws, ordinances

and regulations which may in any manner affect the equipment or materials
used in the proposed construction, those engaged on the work, or the conduct
GENERAL PROVISIONS
of the work, and shall save the State and its representatives
against any claim arising from violation thereof.
17
harmless
1. 7. 2. Permits and Licenses.
The contractor shall procure all permits and licenses, pay all charges
and fees, and give all notices necessary and incident to the due and lawful
prosecution of the work.
I.
7. 3. Patented Processes and Materials.
The contractor assumes the responsibility of defending any and all

suits brought for the infringement of any patent claimed to be infringed
by any material or process not required to be used but which he may elect
to use in the construction of any structure provided for in the plans fur
nished by the State, and to hold the State harmless on account of such
suits or claims.
The contractor must assume all responsibility for plans submitted by
him for the use of the State and shall hold the State harmless from any
suit, royalty or damage on account of the infringement of any patent by
said plans.
Plans not supplied by the State which embody the use of any patented
process or design shall be accompanied by a written statement of the exact
terms under which said plans are to be used, and shall provide a definite
and fixed price for which any responsible contractor may use said plans,
processes or designs without further liability of any character.
1. 7. 4. Federal
Participation.
The attention of the contractor is called to the fact that, when the
United States Government pays all or any portion of the cost of the work,
the Federal laws authorizing such participation and the rules and regula
tions made pursuant to such laws must be observed by the contractor.
The
work shall be subject to the inspection and approval of the representatives
of such Federal agencies as are created for the administration of these laws.
1. 7. 5. Sanitary
Provisions.
The contractor shall observe all rules and regulations of the State or
local health officials, and must take such precautions as are necessary to
avoid creating unsanitary conditions.
1. 7. 6. Public Safety and Convenience.
The contractor shall at all times so conduct his work as to insure the
The convenience of the general public
least possible obstruction to traffic.
and the residents along the highway and the protection of persons and
property are of prime importance and shall be provided for by the contractor
in an adequate and satisfactory manner.
1.7.
7. Barricades
and Warning Signs.
The contractor shall at his expense and without further or other order
provide, erect and maintain at all times during the progress or temporary
suspension of the work, suitable barricades, fences, signs, or other adequate
protection, and shall provide, keep and maintain such danger lights, signals,
and watchmen as may be necessary or as may be ordered by the engineer
to insure the safety of the public as well as those engaged in connection with
the work. All barricades and obstructions shall be protected at night by
red signal lights which shall be suitably distributed across the roadway and
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
18
which shall be kept burning from sunset to sunrise. Barricades shall be of

to
and shall be painted white or whitewashed
substantial construction
increase their visibility at night.
The contractor's responsibility for the maintenance of barricades and
lights on any individual item of work included in the contract shall cease
when final estimate (not including suspended payments) on such items has
been allowed by the commission, or when specifically released in writing by
the engineer.
The engineer shall use every precaution possible to safeguard the per
sons and property of the traveling public, and to divert traffic from the
road on which construction work is in progress, but the failure of the engi
neer to notify the contractor to maintain barriers, lights, signals of watch
men, shall not operate to relieve the contractor from his responsibility.
J.
7. 8. Protection and Restoration
of Property.
The contractor shall not enter upon private property for any purpose
without obtaining permission and shall be responsible for the preservation
of all public and private property, trees, monuments, etc., along and adja
cent to the highway, and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent
damage or injury thereto. He shall use suitable precautions to prevent, and
shall be responsible for damage to pipes, conduits and water mains, and
other underground structures, and shall carefully protect from disturbance
or damage all land monuments until these are properly referenced by the
engineer.
1. 7. 9. Responsibility
for Damages.
The contractor shall assume all responsibility for damages sustained
by persons or property due to the carrying on of his work and until final
acceptance thereof or until released by the engineer in writing.
He shall
be responsible for all accidents to persons or property, and shall save the
State harmless from all damages resulting from any accidents which may
occur on existing structures to be replaced by new construction under the
Any extension
contract after the date of completion as specified therein.
of time granted the contractor in which to complete the contract shall not
relieve him or his surety from this responsibility.
1. 7. 10. Contractor's
Responsibility for Work.
Until final
acceptance of the structure the contractor shall be held

responsible for any injury or damage to the structure or to any part thereof
by the action of the elements, or from any cause whatsoever, whether aris
ing from the execution or from the non-execution of the work, and he shall
make good at his own expense all injuries or damages to any portion of the
structure before its completion and final acceptance.
I.
7. 11. Personal
Liability of Public Officials.

In carrying out any of the provisions of this contract or in exercising
any power or authority granted to him thereby there shall be no personal
liability upon the engineer or his authorized assistants, it being understood
that in such matters he acts as the agent and representative of the State.
1. 7. 12
No Waiver of Legal Rights.
The State shall not be precluded or estopped by any measurement,

estimate, or certificate made either before or after the completion and
acceptance of the work and payment therefor from showing the true amount
GENERAL PROVISIONS
19
and character of the work performed and materials furnished by the con
tractor, or from showing that any such measurement, estimate, or certificate
is untrue or incorrectly made, or that the work or materials do not conform
The State shall not be precluded or estopped, not
in fact to the contract.
withstanding any such measurement, estimate or certificate, and payment
in accordance therewith, from recovering from the contractor and sureties
such damages as it may sustain by reason of his failure to comply with the
Neither the acceptance by the commission, or by any
terms of the contract.
of the commission, nor any payment for nor acceptance of
representative
the whole or any part of the work, nor any extension of time, nor any
possession taken by the commission, shall operate as a waiver of any portion
of the contract or of any power herein reserved, or any right to damage
herein provided.
A waiver of any breach of the contract shall not be held
to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach.
SECTION
2. 8. 1. Subletting
8 Prosecution
or Assignment
of
and Progress
Contract.
The contractor shall not sublet, sell or assign all or any portion of the
contract, or the work provided therein without the written consent of the
commission.
1. 8. 2. Prosecution
of the Work.
The execution of works under this contract shall not be commenced
until the contractor has received a written order to that effect, signed by
the engineer, and the work shall thereupon be at once begun and continu
ously carried on to completion, subject to such suspensions as are provided
for herein.
The progress of the work shall be at a rate sufficient to complete the
contract in an acceptable manner within the period of time specified. The
engineer shall at frequent intervals make progress reports to the commis
sion, and if it appears that the rate of progress is such that the contract
will not be completed within the time limit, or if the contract is not being
executed in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner, the commission may
order the contractor to take such steps as it considers necessary to complete
the contract within the period of time provided, or to prosecute the work
in a satisfactory manner.
2. 8. 3. Limitations
of
Operations.
The contractor shall begin work at such points as the engineer may
direct or approve and shall thereafter prosecute the work at such points
and in such order as may be prescribed or approved from time to time by
the engineer.
In the case of a dispute arising between two or more contractors en
gaged on the same work as to the respective rights of each under these
specifications, the engineer shall determine the matters at issue and shall
define the respective rights of the various interests involved, in order to
secure the completion of all parts of the work in general harmony and with
satisfactory results, and his decision shall be final and binding on all parties
concerned.
4. Character of Workmen and Equipment.

The contractor shall employ only competent and efficient laborers,
mechanics, or artisans, and whenever, in the opinion of the engineer, any
2. 8.
HIGHWAY
20
BRIDGES
employe is careless or incompetent, or obstructs the progress of the work,

or acts contrary to instructions, or conducts himself improperly, the con
tractor shall, upon complaint of the engineer, discharge or otherwise remove
him from the work and not employ him again upon it.
The methods, equipment and appliances used on the work shall be such
as will produce a satisfactory quality of work and shall be adequate to
complete the contract within the time limit specified.
1. 8. S. Temporary Suspension
of the Work.
The engineer shall have authority to suspend the work wholly or in
part for such period or periods as he may deem necessary, due to unsuitable
weather or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for the
prosecution of the work, or for such time as is necessarily due to the failure
on the part of the contractor to carry out orders given or to perform any
or all provisions of the contract.
When under suspension, the work shall be put in proper and satisfac
tory condition, carefully covered and properly protected, as directed by the
In all cases of suspension of construction operations, the work
engineer.
shall not again be resumed until permitted by order of the engineer.
1. 8. 6. Determination and
Extension of Contract Time.

satisfactory
execution of the contract shall require work or
If the
materials in greater amounts or quantities than those set forth on the
plans, then the contract time may be increased by such an amount as may
Extension to the contract time may be
be determined by the engineer.
No allowance
granted for other reasons, at the discretion of the engineer.
shall be made for delay or suspension of the work due to the fault of the
contractor.
In contracts specifying a certain number of working days for com
pletion, the number of working days shall be determined according to the
definition of "working days" specified in section 1.
If for any reason beyond the control of the contractor the work shall
be delayed he may be granted an extension of time in the discretion of the
engineer.
All
requests
shall be submitted
for extension of time in which to perform the contract

in writing by the contractor to the engineer.
1. 8. 7. Failure to Complete
on Time.
the contractor fail to complete the work within the required

of the preceding article, "Deter
time limit, subject to the modification
mination and Extension of Contract Time," the engineer will thereafter
deduct from any moneys due or coming due to the contractor as determined
by the engineer's estimates, an amount equal to the cost of maintaining the
necessary force of engineers and inspectors on the work plus the cost of
constructing or maintaining detours around the work during the additional
time, and this amount shall be considered as reasonable liquidated damages
due to the State from the contractor for his failure to complete the contract
within the specified time limits.
Should
If the importance of any structure erected under these specifications

is such that the commission considers it advisable, there may be inserted
in the contract, in lieu of the above, a stipulation for liquidated damages in
When such a clause is inserted in the
certain specified and fixed amounts.
contract, the State does not waive its right to collect all such additional
GENERAL PROVISIONS
21
damages as it may sustain by a failure on the part of the contractor to

carry out the terms of this contract.
1. 8. 8. Annulment
If
of Contract.
the contractor should fail to make satisfactory progress, or to com

ply with orders of the engineer, or should he neglect or refuse to remove
materials, or to perform anew such work as has been rejected as defective
and unsuitable, or if the contractor shall become insolvent or be declared
bankrupt, or shall make an assignment for the benefit of creditors, or from
any other cause shall not carry on the work in an acceptable manner, the
commission shall have the right to annul its contract without process or
action at law, and to turn over to the surety for completion or, at its option,
or in case performance is guaranteed by negotiable securities, to take over
the work and complete it, either by day labor or by the reletting of all or
any part of the work. The contractor upon receiving notice to this effect
shall vacate possession and give up the said work, or the parts thereof
specified in said notice, peaceably to the engineer.
All material, plant,
formwork, scaffolding,
caissons,
cofferdams,
piling, sheeting,
pumps,
dredges and other erection appliances, and the plans thereof, shall, at the
option of the engineer, remain on the work until completed, at such rental
(if any) as the engineer may consider reasonable. Neither by the taking
over of the work by the commission, nor by the annulment of the contract
shall the State forfeit the right to recover damages from the contractor
or his surety for failure to complete his contract.
Should the cost of com
pleting the work by day labor or by reletting the same be in excess of the
original contract price, the contractor and his surety, if any, shall be held
responsible for such excess cost.
2. 8. 9. Termination of Responsibility.
The contract shall be considered as complete after all work included

has been accepted by the commission, and the contractor shall be released
from all further obligation except as to the conditions and requirements set
forth in his bond.
1.8.10. Compensation
for
Unreasonable
Delays.
If unreasonable delays occur in reaching a settlement with the con

tractor on changes made in the plans or specifications, due to a failure of
the engineer to act, or if there are delays due to a failure to provide the
necessary stakes after a 48-hour notice in writing to the engineer that such
stakes are needed, the contractor shall be compensated for any actual loss
on his payrolls or on materials.
SECTION
2. 9. 1. Measurements
9 Measurement and
Payment
of Quantities.
All work
completed under the contract shall be measured

neer according to United States standard measures.
1. 9. 2. Scope
of
by the engi
Payment.
The contractor shall accept the compensation, as herein provided, in

payment for furnishing all materials, labor, tools and equipment, and
for performing all work under the contract; also for all loss or damage
full
HIGHWAY
22
BRIDGES
arising from the nature of the work, or from the action of the elements,
or from any unforeseen difficulties which may be encountered during the
prosecution of the work, until its final acceptance by the commission.
I.
9. 3. Payments
for
Increased
or Decreased Quantities.
It is mutually
agreed that due to latent and/or unforeseen conditions,

adjustments of plans to field conditions which cannot be foreseen at the
time of advertising, will be necessary during construction, and it is there
fore of the essence of the contract to recognize such changes in the plans
as constituting a normal and expected margin of adjustment, not unusual
and not involving nor permitting change or modification of contract prices,
provided only that resulting overruns or underruns from the quantities in
the bid schedule do not exceed a reasonable percentage.
A reasonable percentage shall be construed to apply to changes involv
ing any major item to the amount of 25 per cent or less, of the quantities
listed in the bid schedule, in which case payment will be made for the revised
quantities at the original contract bid unit price.
In case any change involves overruns or underruns of more than 25
per cent each of any major item, such change shall require a negotiated
change-order or supplemental
agreement, signed by both parties, setting
forth the necessity for the change and an adjustment of unit price or prices
of the major items involved, and agreed upon as satisfactory to both parties.
A major item shall constitute any item, unless otherwise indicated on
the plans or designated in the special provisions, the contract price for
which amounts to 5 per cent or more of the total contract price.
1. 9. 4. Payments
for Extra
and Force Account
Work.
In the event of any extra work being ordered by the engineer of a

class not covered by the prices submitted in the proposal, the basis of pay
ment for the same shall be agreed upon in writing between the parties to
the contract before such work is done, or where such method of payment
cannot be agreed upon prior to beginning the work, the engineer may order
the contractor to do such work on a "force account" basis.
All work done on a "force account" basis will be paid for in full in the
following manner:
(1) For all labor, teams, and foremen in direct charge of the specific
operation, including workmen's compensation and liability insurance on the
same, the contractor shall receive the current rate of wage for each and
every hour said labor, teams and foremen are actually engaged in such
work, to which shall be added an amount equal to 15 per cent of the sum
thereof.
(2) For all materials entering permanently into the work the con
tractor shall receive the actual cost of such materials, including freight
charges, as shown by original receipted bills, to which cost shall be added
an amount equal to 10 per cent of the sum thereof.
(3) For any machinery or special equipment, other than small tools
and including fuel and lubricants, which it may be deemed necessary or
desirable to use, the contractor shall be allowed a reasonable rental charge,
to be agreed upon in writing before the work is begun, for each and every
day such machinery is in use upon such work, and to which sum no per
centage shall be added.
The compensation herein provided shall be received by the contractor
as payment in full for extra work done on the "force account" basis and
GENERAL PROVISIONS
23
shall include superintendence, overhead and profit. For all work done on
the "force account" basis the contractor shall furnish certified copies of
the payroll on itemized forms provided for that purpose, invoices of all
material and such other detailed information as may be required by the
engineer.
J. 9. 5. Payment
for Omitted Items.

The commission shall have the right to cancel the portions of the con
tract relating to the construction of any item therein by the payment to
the contractor of a fair and equitable amount covering all items of cost
incurred prior to the date of cancellation or suspension of the work by
order of the engineer. The contractor shall be allowed to profit percentage
on the materials used and construction work actually performed at rates
as provided under "Payment for Extra and Force Account Work," but no
Acceptable materials ordered
allowance will be made for anticipated profits.
by the contractor or delivered on the work prior to the date of cancellation
or suspension of the work by order of the engineer shall be purchased from
the contractor by the State at actual cost and shall thereupon become the
property of the State.
2. 9. 6. Partial
Payments.
If
there is a sufficient amount of work in the contract to extend over

a period of more than one month, the contractor shall receive monthly
estimates based on the proportion of the contract completed and acceptable
to the engineer and any fabricated steel or other finished material delivered.
No partial payment will be allowed on cement or concrete aggregates.
Such
estimates shall not be for sums of less than one thousand dollars. The con
tractor agrees that the allowance of a monthly estimate by the commission
does not constitute final acceptance of the work. Each consecutive estimate
shall be filed by the contractor as a claim against the State and certified
to by the engineer, and 10 per cent of each estimate, plus the amount of
any unsatisfied claims filed against the contractor for labor or materials,
shall be deducted and held until final acceptance of the entire contract
except as provided herein.
The monthly payments shall be considered as
approximate only, and before the final estimate is allowed and final accept
ance made on this contract, the commission may require the contractor to
furnish a list of all persons furnishing labor or materials, with satisfactory
evidence that such persons have been paid in full.
Should a reasonable
doubt arise during construction as to the adequacy of any part of the com
pleted work, the estimate for that portion shall not be allowed until the
cause for such doubt has been removed.
Unless otherwise provided, each structure must be passed upon by the

within 10 days after written notice by the contractor that the
work is completed. Where more than one structure is included in the con
tract 90 per cent of the contract price for each structure shall become due
upon final acceptance of that structure by the commission.
The remaining
10 per cent of the contract price shall be retained by the State until final
acceptance by the commission of all of the work included in the contract.
If the total amount of the retained percentage is greatly in excess of the
uncompleted and unaccepted portion of the contract, the commission may,
of the engineer, allow the contractor a portion of
upon recommendation
this suspended payment, providing the commission shall at all times retain
engineer
an amount sufficient to enable the State

uncompleted work in the contract.
to complete
the unaccepted
or
24
I.
HIGHWAY
BRIDGES
9. 7. Acceptance and Final Payment.
Final acceptance is stipulated to mean final acceptance by the engineer

and commission, or the allowance of final estimates by the commission.
When the work is completed the engineer shall certify to the commission
in writing that the contract is completed in whole, and shall further certify
as to the amount of work performed and as to the value thereof; the com
mission shall, upon receipt of such certificate, certify the aforesaid certifi
cate or estimate for final payment, and shall notify the contractor and
The action of the engineer
his surety of the completion of the contract.
by which the contractor is bound, according to the terms of the contract,
shall be evidenced by the aforesaid certificate and final payment, prior
certificates or estimates upon which payments may have been made being
merely partial estimates and subject to correction in the final payment.
DIVISION
II
Construction
SECTION I Excavation
and Fill
2. 1. 1. General,
Foundation excavation shall include the removal of all material, of

nature, necessary for the construction of foundations and sub
structures in accordance with the plans or as directed by the engineer.
It
shall include the furnishing of all necessary equipment and the construction
of all cribs, cofferdams, caissons, unwatering, etc., which may be necessary
for the execution of the work. It shall also include the subsequent removal
of cofferdams and cribs and the placement <>f all necessary backfill as here
inafter specified. It shall also include the wasting of excavated material,
which is' not required for backfill, in a manner and in locations so as not to
affect the carrying capacity of the channel and not to be unsightly.
Compensation for all clearing and grubbing contained within the area
defined by lines connecting the extremities of the substructure units, re
gardless of whether or not excavation is involved, shall, unless otherwise
specified in the contract, be included in the unit price bid for excavation.
All substructures, where .practicable, shall be constructed in open
excavation and, where necessary, the excavation shall be shored, braced
or protected by cofferdams in accordance with approved methods.
When
footings can be placed in the dry without the use of cribs or cofferdams,
backforms may be omitted with the approval of the engineer and the entire
excavation filled with concrete to the required elevation of the top of the
The additional concrete required shall be placed at the expense
footing.
of the contractor.
whatever
2. 1. 2. Preservation
of Channel.
Unless otherwise specified, no excavation shall be made outside of

caissons, cribs, cofferdams, steel piling or sheeting, and the natural stream
without permission
bed adjacent to the structure shall not be disturbed
from the engineer.
any excavation or dredging is made at the site of
the structure before caissons, cribs or cofferdams are sunk or in place, the
contractor shall, without extra charge, after the foundation base is in place,
backfill all such excavation to the original ground surface or river bed with
material satisfactory to the engineer. Material deposited within the stream
area from foundation or other excavation or from the filling of cofferdams
shall be removed and the stream area freed from obstruction thereby.
If
2.
I.
3. Depth of Footings.
The elevation of the bottoms of footings, as shown on .the plans, shall

as approximate only and the engineer may order, in writing,
such changes in dimensions or elevation of footings as may be necessary
to secure a satisfactory foundation.
be considered
2. 1. 4. Preparation of Foundations
for
Footings.
All rock or other hard foundation material shall be freed from all loose
material, cleaned and cut to a firm surface, either level, stepped, or rough
All seams shall be cleaned out and

ened, as may be directed by the engineer.
filled with concrete, mortar or grrout.
When masonry is to rest on an excavated surface other than rock.
25
HIGHWAY
26
BRIDGES
special care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation and
the final removal of the foundation material to grade shall not be made until
just before the masonry is to be placed.
2.
J.
5. Cofferdams
and Cribs.
(a)
General.
Cofferdams and cribs for foundation construction
shall be carried to
adequate depths and heights, be safely designed and constructed, and be
made as water-tight as is necessary for the proper performance of the work
which must be done inside them.
In general, the interior dimensions of
cofferdams and cribs shall be such as to give sufficient clearance for the
construction of forms and the inspection of their exteriors, and to permit
pumping outside of the forms. Cofferdams or cribs which are tilted or moved
laterally during the process of sinking shall be righted, reset or enlarged
so as to provide the necessary clearance and this shall be at the sole expense
of the contractor.
When conditions are encountered which, in the opinion of the engineer,
render it impracticable to unwater the foundation before placing masonry,
he may require the construction of a concrete foundation seal of such
dimensions as may be necessary.
The foundation shall then be pumped
out and the balance of the masonry placed in the dry. When weighted
cribs are employed and the weight is utilized to partially overcome the
hydro-static pressure acting against the bottom of the foundation seal,
special anchorage such as dowels or keys shall be provided to transfer the
entire weight of the crib into the foundation seal. During the placing of a
foundation seal, the elevation of the water inside the cofferdam shall be
controlled to prevent any flow through the seal and if the cofferdam is to
remain in place, it shall be vented or ported at low water level.
(b) Protection of
Concrete.
Cofferdams or cribs shall be constructed so as to protect green concrete
against damage from a sudden rising of the stream and to prevent dam
age to the foundation by erosion.
No timber or bracing shall be left in
cofferdams or cribs in such a way as to extend into the substructure ma
sonry, without written permission from the engineer.
( c)
Drawings
Required.
For substructure work,
the contractor shall submit, upon request, draw

ings showing his proposed method of cofferdam construction and other
details left open to his choice or not fully shown on the engineer's drawings.
Such drawings shall be approved by the engineer before construction
is
started on work governed by them.
( d)
Removal.
Unless otherwise provided, cofferdams or cribs with all sheeting and

bracing shall be removed after the completion of the substructure, care
being taken not to disturb or otherwise injure the finished masonry.
2. 1. 6. Pumping.
Pumping from the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be done

to preclude the possibility of the movement of water
concrete.
No pumping will be permitted during the
or for a period of at least 24 hours thereafter, unless
suitable sump separated from the concrete work by a
water-tight wall or other effective means.
in such manner as
through any fresh
placing of concrete
it be done from a
CONSTRUCTION
27
Pumping to unwater a sealed cofferdam shall not commence until the

seal has set sufficiently to withstand the hydrostatic pressure.
2.
I. 7. Inspection.
After each excavation is completed, the contractor shall notify the engi
neer, and no masonry shall be placed until the engineer has approved the
depth of the excavation and the character of the foundation material.
2. 1. 8. Back-fill.
All material
engineer
traneous
All
used for back-fill shall be of a quality acceptable to the

and shall be free from large or frozen lumps, wood, or other ex
material.
spaces excavated and not occupied by abutments, piers,

permanent work shall be refilled with earth up to the surface of
All
rounding ground, with a sufficient allowance for settlement.
shall be thoroughly compacted and, in general, its top surface
neatly graded.
or other
the sur
back-fill
shall be
The fill behind abutments and wing walls of all bridge structures shall
in horizontal layers not to exceed 12 inches in thickness and
well compacted. The back-fill in front of such units shall be placed first
to prevent the possibility of forward movement.
Special precautions shall
be taken to prevent any wedging action against the masonry, and the slope
bounding the excavation for abutments and wing walls shall be destroyed
Jetting of the fill be
by stepping or roughening to prevent wedge action.
hind abutments and wing walls shall not be permitted.
Fill placed around culverts and piers shall be deposited on both sides
to approximately the same elevation at the same time.
Adequate provision shall be made for the thorough drainage of all back
filling. French drains shall be placed at weep holes.
No back-fill shall be placed against any masonry abutment, wing wall
or culvert until permission shall have been given by the engineer and prefer
ably not until the masonry has been in place 14 days, or until test cylinder?
show the strength to be twice the working stress used in the design.
Back-filling of sectional plate pipes and arches shall be done in accord
ance with articles 2. 23. 5. and 2. 23. 6.
be deposited
2. 1. 9. Filled Spandrel Arches.
For filled spandrel arches, the filling shall be carefully placed in such
manner as to load the ring uniformly and symmetrically. The filling ma
terial shall be acceptable to the engineer and shall be placed in horizontal
layers, not to exceed 12 inches in thickness, carefully tamped and brought
Wedge shaped sections of filling
up simultaneously
from both haunches.
material against spandrels, wings or abutments will not be permitted.
2. 1. 10. Approach Embankment.
When the contract for any bridge structure requires the placement of
approach embankments, they shall be constructed and paid for in accordance
with the highway specifications governing this class of construction.
2. 1. 11. Classification
set
of Excavation.
Classification, if any, of excavation
forth in the proposal.
will be indicated
on the plans and
HIGHWAY
28
2.1.
12. Measurement
BRIDGES
and Payment.
Payment for foundation excavation shall include the cost of all labor,
material, equipment, and other items that may be necessary or convenient
to the successful completion of the excavation to the elevation of the bot
tom of the footings. It shall also include the cost of removing cofferdams
and any surplus material which may have been thrown up during the proc
ess of excavation, and shall include the cost of back-filling in a compacted
Any
condition an amount of material equal to the amount of excavation.
back-fill required in excess of the amount excavated shall be paid for as
extra work unless a price for extra back-fill is included in the contract.
The yardage to be paid for shall be the actual number of cubic yards in
original position, of material acceptably excavated in conformity with the
plans or as directed by the engineer, but no yardage shall be included in
the measurement for payment which is outside of a volume bounded by
vertical planes 18 inches outside of and parallel to the neat lines of the
footing. The cross-sectional area measured shall not include water or other
liquids, but shall include mud, muck and other similar semi-solids.
The top
and bottom limits of computed volume shall be the original ground surface
and the bottom of the completed footing.
When it is necessary, in the opinion of the engineer, to carry the
foundations below the elevations shown on the plans, the excavation for
the first three feet of additional depth will be included in the quantity for
which payment will be made under the item Foundation Excavation.
Ex
cavation below this additional depth will be paid for as extra work, unless
the contractor is willing to accept payment at contract prices.
SECTION 2 Sheet
2. 2.
Piles
General.
This specification covers only sheet piling shown on the plans, or or

dered by the engineer, to be left in place so that it becomes a part of the
finished structure.
2. 2. 2
Timber Sheet Piles.

The timber, unless otherwise definitely noted upon the plans or in the
specifications, may consist of any species which will satisfactorily stand
driving. It shall be sawn or hewn with square corners and shall be free
from worm holes, loose knots, wind shakes, decayed or unsound portions, or
other defects which might impair its strength or tightness.
The piles shall be of the dimensions shown on the plans either cut from
the solid material or made by building up the piles of three planks securely
fastened together.
The piles shall be drift sharpened at their lower ends so
as to wedge the adjacent piles tightly together.
The tops of the piles shall be cut off to a straight line at the elevation
indicated and shall be braced with waling strips, properly lapped and joined
The wales shall preferably be in one length
at all splices and corners.
between corners and shall be bolted near the tops of the piles.
2. 2. 3. Concrete Sheet Piles.
Where concrete sheet

cordance with the detailed
facture and installation of
to those governing precast
piles are required, they shall be in strict ac

design.
The requirements governing the manu
concrete sheet piling shall conform, in general,
concrete bearing piles.
CONSTRUCTION
2. 2. 4
29
Sleet Sfceef Piles.
Steel sheet piles shall be of the type and weight indicated on the plans
or designated in the special provisions and of the material required in
division IV. The piles, when in place in the completed structure, shall be
practically water-tight at the joints. Painting of steel sheet piles shall
conform to article 2. 3. 17.
2. 2. 5. Measurement
and Payment.
Payment for sheet piles shall include the cost of furnishing, driving and
cutting off. Payment will be made on the basis of the piles driven as ap
proved by the engineer, except that a deduction from the payment will be
made in an amount equal to the salvage value of the material cut off after
driving.
Timber, concrete, and steel sheet piles will be paid for at the contract
price per square foot.
2. 3. 1. Materials.
SECTION 3 Bearing
Piles
Materials for piles shall conform to the requirements
of division IV.
2. 3. 2. Design and Conditions of Use.

General and Design: Refer to division III, section 5.
Bearing Values, Design : Refer to article 3. 4. 17.
Preservative Treatment : Refer to division II, section 21.
2. 3. 3. Preparation for Driving.
( a)
Excavation.
In general, piles shall not be driven until after the excavation is com
plete. Any material forced up between the piles shall be removed to correct
elevation without cost to the Commission before masonry for the foundation
is placed.
(b)
Caps.
The heads of all concrete piles, and the heads of timber piles, when
the nature of the driving is such as to unduly injure them, shall be pro
tected by caps of approved design, preferably having a rope or other suit
able cushion next to the pile head and fitting into a casting which in turn
When the area of the head of any timber
supports a timber shock block.
pile is greater than that of the face of the hammer, a suitable cap shall
be provided to distribute the blow of the hammer throughout the cross
section of the pile and thus avoid, as far as possible, the tendency to split
or shatter the pile.
For special types of piling, driving heads, mandrels, or other devices in
shall be provided so
accordance with the manufacturers' recommendation
that the pile may be driven without injury.
For steel piling the heads shall be cut squarely and a driving cap shall
be provided to hold the axis of the pile in line with the axis of the hammer.
(c) Collars.
Collars, bands, or other devices, to protect timber piles against splitting

and brooming shall be provided where necessary.
(d) Pointing.
Timber piles shall be pointed where soil conditions require it. When
necessary, the piles shall be shod with metal shoes of a design satisfactory
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
30
to the engineer, the points of the piles being carefully shaped to secure an
even and uniform bearing on the shoes.
(e) Splicing Pilet.

Full length piles shall
be used where practicable.

In exceptional cir
The method of splicing shall
cumstances splicing of piles may be permitted.
When the splic
be as shown on the plans or as approved by the engineer.
ing of steel piles or steel shells of special piles is done by welding, the arc
method shall be given preference.
(f)
Painting Steel Pilet.

Steel piles shall be painted as specified in article
2. 3. 4. Methods
(a)
2. 3. 17.
of Driving.
General.
Piles may be driven with a gravity hammer, a steam hammer, or a

combination of water jets and hammer but a steam hammer is preferred.
Precast concrete piles, preferably, shall be driven by means of a combina
tion of hammer and jet.
(b) Hammers for Timber
and Steel Piles.

Gravity hammers for driving timber and steel piles shall weigh not less
than 2,000 pounds, preferably not less than 3,000 pounds and in no case shall
the weight of the hammer be less than the combined weight of driving head
and pile. The fall shall be so regulated as to avoid injury to the piles and in
When a steam hammer is used, the total
no case shall exceed 15 feet.
energy developed by the hammer shall be not less than 6,000 foot pounds per
blow.
Hammers for Concrete Piles.
Unless otherwise provided, concrete piles, precast, or shells for cast-inplace piles, shall be driven with a steam hammer which shall develop an
energy per blow at each full stroke of the piston, of not less than one foot
pound for each pound of weight driven. In no case shall the total energy
developed by the hammer be less than 6,000 foot-pounds per blow.
If a
gravity hammer is used, it shall have a weight not less than that of the
driving head and pile, and the maximum drop shall not exceed 8 feet.
fe)
( d) Additional Equipment.
In case the required penetration is not obtained by the use of a hammer

complying with the above minimum requirements, the contractor shall pro
vide a heavier hammer, or resort to jetting at his own expense.
(e)
Leads.
Pile driver
leads shall be constructed in such a manner as to afford

freedom of movement of the hammer, and they shall be held in position by
guys or stiff braces to insure support to the pile during driving.
Except
where piles are driven through water, the leads, preferably, shall be of
sufficient length so that the use of a follower will not be necessary.
Preferably, inclined leads shall be used in driving battered piles.
(f)
Followers.
The driving of piling with followers shall be avoided if practicable and
shall be done only under written permission of the engineer.
When fol
lowers are used, one pile from every group of 10 shall be a long pile driven
without a follower, and shall be used as a test pile to determine the average
bearing power of the group.
CONSTRUCTION
81
( g)
Water Jets.
When water jets are used, the number of jets and the volume and
pressure of water at the jet nozzles shall be sufficient to freely erode the
material adjacent to the pile. The plant shall have sufficient capacity to
deliver at all times at least 100 pounds per square inch pressure at two
%-inch jet nozzles. Before the desired penetration is reached, the jets shall
be withdrawn and the piles shall be driven with the hammer to secure the
final penetration.
(h)
Accuracy of Driving.
Piles shall be driven with a variation of not more than % inch per
foot from the vertical or from the batter shown on the plans, except that
piles for trestle bents shall be so driven that the cap may be placed in its
proper location without inducing excessive stresses in the piles, and founda
tion piles shall not be out of the position shown on the plan more than 6
inches after driving.
2. 3. 5. Defective
Piles.
The procedure incident to the driving of piles shall not subject them
to excessive and undue abuse producing crushing and spalling of the con
crete, injurious splitting, splintering and brooming of the wood or deforma
tion of the steel. Manipulation of piles to force them into proper position
Any pile
considered by the engineer to be excessive will not be permitted.
damaged by reason of internal defects, or by improper driving or driven out
of its proper location or driven below the elevation fixed by the plans or
by the engineer, shall be corrected at the contractor's expense by one of
the following methods approved by the engineer for the pile in question :
(1) The pile shall be withdrawn and replaced by a new and if neces
sary, a longer pile.
(2) A second pile shall be driven adjacent to the defective or low pile.
(3) The pile shall be spliced or built up as otherwise provided herein
or a sufficient portion of the footing extended to properly embed the pile.
Timber piles shall not be spliced without specific permission of the engineer.
All piles pushed up by the driving of adjacent piles or by any other cause
shall be driven down again.
2. 3. 6. Determination of Bearing Values.
( a) Loading
(See also Article 3. 4. 17.)
Test*.
When required, the size and number of piles shall be determined by

actual loading tests. In general, these tests shall consist of the application
of a test load placed upon a suitable platform supported by the pile, with
suitable apparatus for accurately measuring the test load and the settle
ment of the pile under each increment of load.
In lieu thereof hydraulic jacks with suitable yokes and pressure gages
may be used.
The safe allowable load shall be considered as 50 per cent of that load
which, after a continuous application of 48 hours, produces a permanent
settlement not greater than % inch measured at the top of the pile. This
maximum settlement shall not be increased by a continuous application of
At least one pile for each
the test load for a period of 60 hours or longer.
group of 100 piles shall be tested.
(b) Timber Pile Formulas.

In the absence of loading
shall
be determined
tests, the safe bearing values for timber piles

by the following formulas :
HIGHWAY
32
2WH
S+1.0
2WH
S+0.1
BRIDGES
-for gravity hammers,

for
single-acting steam hammers,
2H (W+Ap)
for double-acting steam hammers,

S+0.1
where P=safe bearing power in pounds,
W = weight, in pounds, of striking parts of hammer,
H = height of fall in feet,
A = area of piston in square inches,
p = steam pressure in pounds per square inch at the hammer,
S =the average penetration in inches per blow for the last 5
to 10 blows for gravity hammers and the last 10 to 20
blows for steam hammers.
The above formulas are applicable only when
The hammer has a free fall.
(2) The head of the pile is not broomed or crushed.
(3) The penetration is reasonably quick and uniform.
(4) There is no sensible bounce after the blow.
(5) A follower is not used.
<1)
Twice the height of the bounce shall be deducted from "H" to determine
its value in the formula.
Unless otherwise ordered by the engineer timber piling shall be driven
to the bearing value given on the plans or in the supplemental specifications.
If bearing values are not given, timber piling shall be driven to a minimum
value of twenty tons.
In case water jets are used in connection with the driving, the bear
ing power shall be determined by the above formulas from the results of
driving after the jets have been withdrawn, or a load test may be applied.
Concrete and Steel Piles.
When not driven to practical refusal the bearing value for concrete
and steel piles preferably shall be determined by means of loading tests
above specified.
In the absence of loading tests, their safe bearing values
may be roughly approximated
by the formulas specified for timber piles.
However, the character of the soil penetrated, conditions of driving, dis
tributions, sizes, lengths and weights of the piles, shells or cores driven, and
the computed load per pile shall be given due consideration
in determining
the probable safe bearing value of concrete and steel piles.
( c)
2. 3. 7. Test Piles.
When required, the contractor shall drive test piles of a length and at
the location designated by the engineer.
These piles shall be of greater
length than the length assumed in the design in order to provide for any
variation in soil conditions.
2. 3. 8. Order Lists
for Piling.
The contractor shall furnish piles in accordance with an itemized list,
which shall be furnished by the engineer, showing the number and length
of all piles.
In determining lengths of piles for ordering and for footage to be in
cluded in the contract, the lengths given in the order list shall be based on
the lengths which are assumed to remain in the completed structure. The
contractor shall, at his own expense, increase the lengths given to provide
for fresh heading and for such additional length as may be necessary to
suit the contractor's method of operation.
CONSTRUCTION
2. 3. 9. Storage and Handling of Timber Piles.
The method of storing and handling shall be such as to avoid injury
to the piles.
Special care shall be taken to avoid breaking the surface of
treated piles and cant-hooks, dogs or pike-poles shall not be used. Cuts or
breaks in the surface of treated piling shall be given three brush coats of
hot creosote oil of approved quality and hot creosote oil shall be poured
into all bolt holes.
2. 3. 10. Cutting off Timber Piles.
The tops of all piling shall be sawed to a true plane, as shown on the
plans, and at the elevation fixed by the engineer.
Piles which support tim
ber caps or grillage shall be sawed to conform to the plane of the bottom
of the superimposed structure. In general, the length of pile above the
elevation of cut-off shall be sufficient to permit the complete removal of
all material injured by driving, but piles driven to very nearly the cut-off
elevation shall be carefully adzed or otherwise freed from all "broomed"
splintered or otherwise injured material.
2. 3. 11. Cutting off Steel or Steel Shell Piles.
Piles shall be cut off at the required elevation.

If capping is required
shall be made according to details shown on the plans.
the connection
2. 3. 12. Capping Timber Piles.
Timber piles not encased in concrete

under "Timber Structures."
shall
be
protected
as specified
2. 3. 13. Manufacture of Precast Concrete Piles.

(a) General.
Piles shall be constructed in accordance with details shown on the plans.
(b)
Class
Class
of
Concrete.
concrete shall be used for precast
concrete piles.
(c) Form Work.

Forms for precast concrete piles shall conform to
ments for concrete form work as provided in division
the general require

under "Concrete
Masonry." Forms shall be accessible for tamping and consolidation of the
concrete.
Under good weather curing conditions side forms may be re
moved at any time not less than 24 hours after placing the concrete, but
the entire pile shall remain supported for at least seven days and shall
not be subjected to any handling stress until the concrete has set for at
least 21 days and for a longer period in cold weather, the additional time
to be determined by the engineer.
(d) Reinforcement.
Reinforcement shall
be placed
II
in accordance with details shown on the
plans.
(e)
Casting.
The piles may be cast in either a horizontal or a vertical position.

Special care shall be taken to place the concrete so as to produce satisfactory
bond with the reinforcement and avoid the formation of "stone pockets,"
honeycomb or other such defects.
To secure uniformity and remove surplus water, the concrete in each
pile shall be placed continuously and shall be compacted by vibrating or by
The forms shall be overfilled, the
other means acceptable to the engineer.
HIGHWAY
34
BRIDGES
surplus concrete screeded off, and the top surfaces finished

even texture similar to that produced by the forms.
(f)
to a uniform,
FinUh.
As soon as the forms are removed, concrete piles shall be carefully

pointed with 1:2 mortar and finished.
Trestle piling exposed to view shall
be finished above the ground line in accordance with the provisions governing
the finishing of concrete columns.
Foundation piling, that portion of the
trestle piling which will be below the ground surface, and piles for use in
sea water or alkali soils shall not be finished except by pointing as above
set forth.
(g) Curing.
Concrete piles shall be cured as provided elsewhere in these specifi
cations for concrete.
As soon as the piles have set sufficiently to permit,
they shall be removed from the forms and piled in a curing pile separated
from each other by wood spacing blocks. No pile shall be driven until it
has set for at least 21 days and, in cold weather, for a longer period as
determined by the engineer.
Concrete piles for use in sea water or alkali
soils shall be cured for not less than 30 days before being used.
2. 3. 14. Storage and Handling of Precast Concrete Pilet.

Removal of forms, curing, storing, transporting and handling precast
concrete piles shall be done in such a manner as to avoid excessive bending
stresses, cracking, spalling or other injurious results.
The method of
handling shall not induce stresses in the reinforcement in excess of 12,000
pounds per square inch, allowing 100 per cent of the calculated load for
impact and shock.
Piles to be used in sea water or in alkali soils shall be handled so as to
avoid surface abrasions or other injuries exposing the interior concrete.
2. 3. 15. Manufacture
(a)
of
Cast-in-Place
Concrete Piles.
General.
Piles shall
be constructed
in accordance with details shown on the plans.
(b) Inspection of Metal Shells.

At all times prior to the placing of concrete in the driven shells, the
contractor shall have available a suitable light for the inspection of each
shell throughout its entire length. Any improperly driven, broken or other
wise defective shell shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the engineer,
by removal and replacement, or the driving of an additional pile, at no extra
cost to the Commission.
( c)
Class of Concrete.
Class A concrete shall be used for cast-in-place
(d) Reinforcement.
Reinforcement shall
be placed
piles.
in accordance with the plans or supple
mental specifications.
(e) Placing
Concrete.
No concrete shall
be placed until all driving within a radius of 15 feet

has been completed, nor until all the shells for any one bent have been
If this cannot be done, all driving within the above
completely driven.
limits shall be discontinued until the concrete in the last pile cast has set
at least seven days.
Concrete shall be placed as specified for piles precast in the vertical
CONSTRUCTION
position.
concrete
Accumulations of water in the shells shall
35
be removed
before the
is placed.
2. 3. 16. Extensions
or "Build-Vps."
Extensions, splices or "build-ups" on concrete piles, when necessary,
shall be made as follows:
After the driving is completed, the concrete at the end of the pile shall
be cut away, leaving the reinforcing steel exposed for a length of 40 diam
The final cut of the concrete shall be perpendicular to the axis of
eters.
the pile. Reinforcement similar to that used in the pile shall be securely
fastened to the projecting steel and the necessary form work shall be placed,
The concrete shall be
care being taken to prevent leakage along the pile.
of the same quality as that used in the pile. Just prior to placing con
crete the top of the pile shall be thoroughly wetted and covered with a
thin coating of neat cement, retempered mortar or other suitable bonding
material. The forms shall remain in place not less than seven days and
shall then be carefully removed and the entire exposed surface of the pile
finished
as above specified.
17. Painting
Steel Piles and Steel Pile Shells.

Unless otherwise provided, when steel piles or steel pile shells extend
above the ground surface or water surface they shall be protected by three
coats of paint as specified for Painting of Metal Structures. This protec
tion shall extend from an elevation 2 feet below the water or ground
surface to the top of the exposed steel.
2. 3.
(a)
and Payment.
General.
Piling, whether
to Methods
A or B
timber, concrete or steel, will

as designated in the contract.
be
paid for according
(b) Method A.
For furnishing and driving piles at the contract price per linear foot.
(1) Cutoff. The total cutoff of piling shall be paid for at the prices set
forth by the Commission, in the special provisions for those of the following
items incorporated in the work:
Cutoff,
Cutoff,
Cutoff,
Cutoff,
Cutoff,
untreated timber piles, per linear foot

treated timber piles, per linear foot
precast concrete piles, per linear foot
steel shells for piles (.12" or more in thickness), per linear foot.
steel piles, per pound
$
$
$
.
$
$
(2) Furnishing and Driving. The number of linear feet to be paid for
shall be the actual length of piles remaining in the completed structure
and the number of linear feet of cutoff to be paid for shall be the actual
number of linear feet cut off, except that no allowance will be made for
lengths in excess of those ordered by the engineer, and except that if the
contractor casts concrete piles full length of the reinforcing bars to facili
tate driving, no payment will be made for that portion where concrete must
on the plans.
be removed in order that bars may project as shown
If paid for as "cutoff," cutoff material (if the cutoff is in excess of 3 feet
Cutoff material
in length) shall become the property of the Commission.
3 feet or less in length, and other cutoff material which, in the opinion of
the engineer, is not worth salvaging shall be disposed of to the satisfaction
of the engineer.
HIGHWAY
36
BRIDGES
(3) Payment for Furnishing and Driving Piles. Payment for furnish
ing and driving piles shall include the material and work specified under
"Payment for Furnishing Piles" and "Payment for Driving Piles" Method
B.
(c)
Method B.
For furnishing piles at the contract price per linear foot.

piles at the contract price per linear foot.
For driving
(1) Furnishing. The number of linear feet of timber, precast concrete

or steel piles to be paid for shall be the total ordered length of piles which
are driven and which have been furnished in accordance with the lengths
designated by the engineer, except that if the contractor casts concrete
piles full length of the reinforcing bars to facilitate driving, no payment
will be made for that portion where concrete must be removed in order
that bars may project as shown on the plans. Cutoff material 3 feet or less
in length and other cutoff material which, in the opinion of the engineer, is
not worth salvaging, shall be disposed of to the satisfaction of the engineer.
The number of linear feet of cast-in-place piles to be paid for shall be
the actual number of linear feet of piles remaining in the completed
structure. The length measured shall include both the steel shell and the
reinforced concrete extension as measured from the point of the tip of the
pile to the bottom of the cap or bottom of the footing, as the case may be.
(2) Driving. The number of linear feet to be paid for shall be the
total number of linear feet of piling remaining in the completed structure.
For driving cast-in-place piles the length measured shall include both the
steel shell and the reinforced concrete extensions as measured from the
point of the tip of the pile to the bottom of the cap or bottom of the footing,
as the case may be.
(3) Payment for Furnishing Piles. Payment for furnishing piles

shall include full compensation for furnishing the piling or all material re
quired therefor ready for placement, including all material necessary for ex
tensions and build-ups and for completion of the pile, and for all labor, tools,
hauling, equipment, handling, treatment and all work incidental to the con
struction of the piling prior to driving or construction of build-ups and ex
Payment shall also include (a) reinforcing in concrete piles
tensions.
required to extend beyond the end of the pile for connections; (b) the fitting
and attaching of steel shoes when they are specified for timber piles; (c) the
furnishing and attachment of brackets, lugs, core stoppers and cap plates
on steel piling.
(4) Payment for Driving Piles. Payment for driving piles per linear
foot shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, tools, materials,
supplies, equipment and other necessary or incidental costs of handling,
driving, cutting off piles, treatment of pile heads, constructing build-ups
and extensions of concrete piles, painting of steel piles and all other inci
dental work connected therewith. It shall also include full compensation
for all jetting, drilling, blasting, or other work necessary to obtain the re
quired penetration or bearing values of piles.
(d) Falsework
and Defective Piles.

No payment will be made for the furnishing or driving of falsework
piles, nor will payment be made for piles driven out of place, for defective
piles, or for piles which are damaged in handling or driving.
(e) Additional
If
Requirements.
the length of wood piles, steel piles or steel pile shells
designated
CONSTRUCTION
37
by the engineer is not sufficient, the splicing, including labor, equipment

and material, shall be paid for on the basis of extra work unless a contract
item is provided to cover the payment.
Brackets, plates or other reinforcement on steel piles required by the
engineer in addition to those shown on the plans will be paid for as extra
work.
If
not covered by a contract item, metal shoes for piling, ordered by

the engineer, will be paid for at cost delivered to the site, plus 15 per cent.
No additional allowance, or adjustment, will be made in the contract
prices for furnishing or driving piling because of these additional
requirements.
2.
3. 19
Payment
for
Test Piles.
Test piles ordered by the engineer shall be paid for as follows :

If piles are used in the structure as a result of the tests, the test piles
shall be paid for as in the case of other piles.
If, however, piling is not used in the structure, the test piles will be
paid for as provided for extra work, due consideration being given to the
cost of bringing the pile driver to the site and removing it from the work.
2. 3. 20. Payment
for Loading
Tests.
Payment for loading tests shall include the cost of all material, equip
ment and labor incidental to making the loading test or tests as directed
by the engineer, or as specified in the special provisions. Payment shall be
made on the basis of the contract price for pile loading tests, or, in the
absence of such a price, shall be made on the basis of extra work
2. 4. 1.
SECTION
General.
Concrete
Masonry
Concrete masonry shall consist of portland cement, aggregates and

water which shall conform to the requirements of division IV and which
shall be proportioned as hereinafter specified.
Care and Storage of Concrete Aggregates.

The handling and storage of concrete aggregates shall be such as to
prevent segregation or the admixture of foreign materials; the engineer
may require that aggregates be stored on separate platforms at satisfactory
2. 4. 2.
locations.
When specified in the special provisions, the coarse aggregate shall be

separated into two or more sizes in order to secure greater uniformity of
the concrete mixture.
Different sizes of aggregate shall be stored in
separate stock piles sufficiently removed from each other to prevent the
material at the edges of the piles from becoming intermixed.
2. 4. 3. Storage
of
Cement.
All cement shall be stored in suitable weatherproof buildings which

These buildings shall be placed
will protect the cement from dampness.
in locations approved by the engineer. Provision for storage shall be ample,
and the shipments of cement as received shall be separately stored in such
a manner as to provide easy access for the identification and inspection of
Storage buildings shall have a capacity for the storage of
each shipment.
a sufficient quantity of cement to allow sampling at least 12 days before
HIGHWAY
88
BRIDGES
the cement is to be used. Stored cement shall meet the test requirements
at any time after storage when a retest is ordered by the engineer.
On small jobs, storage in the open may be permitted by written authori
zation from the engineer, in which case a raised platform and ample
waterproof covering shall be provided.
When required by the terms of the contract, the contractor shall keep
accurate records of the deliveries of cement and of its use in the work.
Copies of these records shall be supplied to the engineer in such form as
may be required.
4.Classes of Concrete.
The classes of concrete are A, B, C, X and Y. Each class of concrete
shall be used in that part of the structure in which it is called for on the
plans, or where directed by the engineer.
Unless otherwise specified,
The following requirements
shall govern
Class A concrete shall be used.
unless otherwise shown on the plans:
Class A concrete shall be used for all superstructures, except as noted
below, and for reinforced substructures except where the sections are
massive and lightly reinforced. The more important items of work included
are slabs, beams, girders, columns, arch ribs, box culverts, reinforced abut
ments and retaining walls and reinforced footings. Class A concrete shall
be used for precast piles and cribbing. Class A concrete shall also be used
for work exposed to salt water.
Concrete deposited in water shall be Class A with 10 per cent additional
cement.
Class B concrete shall be used for mass footings, pedestals,
massive pier shafts and gravity walls, with none or only a small amount
of reinforcing.
Class C concrete shall be used for very massive unreinforced sections.
Class X coB.tfrete shall be used for massive sections, lightly reinforced
where a higher grade than Class B is desired.
Class Y concrete shall be used in thin reinforced sections, for handrails
except as specified for precast railing under "Railings," and for filler in
steel grid floors.
2. 4.
2. 4. 5.L-Classification
and Proportioning
of Concrete Mixtures.
Concrete shall be proportioned to secure the strength and durability

required for the part of the structure in which it is to be used.
The following classes and uses of concrete are recognized in these
specifications :
Class
Designated
Minimum compres
sive strength
at 28 days
size of coarse
Use
aggregate
square openings
lbs. per so. in.

3,000
in. to No. 4
2,200
in. to No. 4
1,500
3,000
2%
2
in. to No. 4
in. to No. 4
3,000
V2 in. to No. 4
General
use and
concrete
ex
posed to sea water.
Massive sections or lightly rein
forced sections.
Massive unreinforced sections.
Massive sections or lightly rein
forced sections.
Thin reinforced sections or hand
rails.
The concrete of the various classes given in the above table shall be
designed so as to secure concrete having not less than the strengths specified
CONSTRUCTION
39
and shall be proportioned by one of the methods, A or B, given below.

or special
specifications
Unless otherwise specified in the supplemental
provisions, Method B shall be used.
Proportions Based on Strength
(a) Method A.
The proportions of cement, aggregates and water necessary to conform
to these specifications shall be determined by means of preliminary labora
tory tests on concrete made with the cement and aggregates which are to
be used in the work.
For each class of concrete, the proportions by weight of cement, fine
and coarse aggregate and the quantity of water will be designated by the
engineer so as to meet the requirements given in the following table :
Designated
Class
1!
C
size of coarse
aggregate
of concrete
square
openings
in.
in.
2'/j in.
2
in.
% in.
to No. 4
to No. 4
to No. 4
to No. 4
to No. 4
1
2
Minimum
strength at
Maximum net
water content
per bag of
lbs. per sq. in.

3,000
2,200
1,500
3,000
3,000
gallona
6.0
7.0
8.5
6.0
6.0
compressive
28 days
cement
Consistency,
range in slump
regular
vi
placing brated
inches
3-5
2-3
2-3
2-3
3-5
2-4
1-2
1-2
1-2
2-4
The engineer will furnish prospective bidders, in the special provisions,

the proportions by weight and the theoretical cement content per cubic yard
which will be required for each combination of materials from regular
commercial sources of which previously determined test data are available.
Immediately upon receipt of the award of the contract, the contractor
shall furnish the engineer with the exact location of the sources of the
the source of materials proposed
materials which he proposes to use.
by the contractor is different than set forth in the special provisions, a
design of the mix will be made and the proportions officially designated by
the engineer.
The designated proportions shall be used so long as the
materials are actually furnished from the sources originally named and
herein specified, subject
so long as they continue to meet the requirements
only to slight changes in the relative quantities of fine and coarse aggre
gate for the purpose of promoting workability.
If, during the progress of the work, the contractor wishes to use
materials for which no proportions have been designated, the engineer
reserves the right to change the proportions in order to meet the require
ments specified in the table above using the materials actually furnished.
If, during the progress of the work, it is found impossible to obtain
concrete of the required workability, with the designated proportions, the
engineer may make such changes in proportions as are deemed necessary
to secure the desired workability, provided that in no case shall the ratio
of water to cement be greater than is specified in the table above for the
class of concrete involved, and provided further that any increase or
decrease in the amount of cement which may be required as the result of
such changes shall be adjusted for or against the contractor, as the case
may be, in accordance with the following rule:
such alterations change the theoretical cement factor originally set
forth in the special provisions by 2 per cent or less, no adjustment in. the
If
If
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
40
If
amount paid the contractor will be made.

such alterations change the
theoretical cement factor by more than 2 per cent, the source and quality
of the aggregates remain the same, payment will be adjusted for or against
the contractor in whatever amount the total cost of cement, f. o. b. con
tractor's material yard, has been increased or decreased by more than 2 per
cent. The amount of such increase or decrease shall be calculated from the
theoretical cement factor determined by the laboratory for the material
used and not by count of bags of cement used or of the batches where bulk
cement is used. No adjustment will be made if the source of materials is
different than provided for in the special provisions.
Proportions Based on
Constant Cement Factor
(b) Method B.
The weights of fine and coarse aggregate per bag (94 pounds) of
cement, the maximum size of coarse aggregate and the consistency for each
class of concrete shall be as follows:
Class
of
concrete
Amount of saturated
surface dry aggregate
per bag (94 pounds)
of cement
Minimum
Designated
size of coarse
aggregate
cement
factor
Bags per
square
openings
cu. 3rd.
Fine
Coarse
Founds
Pounds
Gravel Coarse
A
B
C
in
in.
2% in.
2
in.
% in.
1
2
to
to
to
to
to
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
4
4
4
4
4
6.S
5.0
4.0
6.0
7.0
175
250
325
199
177
Stone Coarse
A
B
C
in
in.
in.
2%
2
in.
% in.
1
2
to No. 4
to No. 4
to No. 4
to No. 4
to No. 4
6.5
5.0
4.0
6.0
7.0
199
283
868
225
199
Slag Coarse
A
B
C
in
in.
in.
2%
2
in.
% in.
1
2
to No. 4
to No. 4
to No. 4
to No. 4
to No. 4
6.5
5.0
4.0
6.0
7.0
207
294
382
235
205
Maximum
net water
content
per bag
of cement
Gallons
Consistency range in
slump
Regular
Placing
Vibrated
IncheB
Inches
Aggregate
300
408
524
384
250
6.0
7.0
8.5
6.0
6.0
8-5
2-3
2-3
2-8
3-5
2-4
1-2
1-2
1-2
2-4
6.0
7.0
8.5
6.0
6.0
8-5
2-8
2-8
2-8
8-5
2-4
1-2
1-2
1-2
2-4
6.0
7.0
8.5
6.0
6.0
8-5
2-8
2-8
2-8
8-5
2-4
1-2
1-2
1-2
2-4
Aggregate
276
375
481
308
228
Aggregate
227
809
396
253
188
Note. Using the maximum allowable water content, the weights given above when mul
tiplied by the corresponding cement factors will furnish a cubic yard of concrete (absolute
volume ) .
The consistency range and the ratios of fine aggregate to total aggregate computed from
the weights shown above are based on the methods of placing which do not involve high fre
quency vibration. Where vibration is employed the ratios of fine aggregate to total aggregate
may be reduced about 5 per cent.
The minimum cement factor specified is for usual climatic conditions and quality of
concrete materials.
Where climatic conditions are favorable, and where concrete materials
available produce exceptionally high strength concrete, the engineer may lower the specified
cement factor, but not to exceed 10 per cent, with suitable adjustment in water content.
When a reduction is made, it shall be stipulated in the special provisions.
CONSTRUCTION
41
The proportions by weight given in the table above are based on the
maintenance of an approximately constant quantity of cement per cubic
The proportions are based on the use of aggregates
yard of concrete.
having bulk specific gravities in a saturated surface-dry condition of 2.65
plus or minus 0.05 for sand, gravel and crushed stone, and 2.25 plus or
minus 0.05 for crushed slag. For other specific gravities, the weights shall
be corrected by multiplying the weights shown in the table by the ratio of
the specific gravities of the aggregates used and those used in computing
the table. The bulk specific gravity tests shall be made in accordance with
Methods of Sampling and Testing A. A. S. H. O. Method T-84-45, section 6,
and Method T-85-45, section 6 (A. S. T. M. Designation C-128-42 and
C-127-42, respectively).
Since the weights given in the table are computed for aggregates in
a saturated surface-dry condition, the batch weights shall be corrected to
accord with the moisture condition of the aggregates
delivered to the
measuring bin. Absorption tests shall be made in accordance with Methods
of Sampling and Testing A. A. S. H. O. Method T-84-45, section 8, and
Method T-85-45, section 8 (A. S. T. M. Designation C-128-42 and C-127-42,
respectively).
The weights of sand and coarse aggregate given in the table have been
calculated on the basis of using a well-eraded natural sand in combination
These weights are subject to change,
with a well-graded coarse aggregate.
depending upon the gradation of the materials furnished by the contractor.
The weights of fine and coarse aggregate will be adjusted by the
engineer to insure concrete of satisfactory plasticity and workability, using
During
not more than the maximum permissible net water content shown.
the progress of the work, the total weight of aggregate per bag of cement
shall not be changed except under the following conditions:
(1) If concrete of satisfactory plasticity and workability cannot be
made without exceeding the maximum net water content, the engineer shall
reduce the total weight of aggregate by an amount sufficient to insure that
the maximum net water content will not be exceeded, and the contractor
shall not receive additional compensation for any extra cement which may
be necessary by reason of such adjustment.
(2) If during the progress of the work the specific gravity of one or
changes, the batch weights shall be changed
both of the aggregates
accordingly.
(3) The compression tests used in determining the strength of concrete
shall conform to Method T-23-45, "Method of Making and Storing Com
pression Specimens of Concrete in the Field," and Method T-22-45, "Method
of Making Compression Tests of Concrete," "Methods of Sampling and
Testing," of the A. A. S. H. 0. (A. S. T. M. Designations C-31-44 and
C-39-44, respectively) .
2. 4. 6. Consistency.
Concrete shall have a consistency such that it will be workable in the
It shall be of such a consistency that it will flow around
required position.
reinforcing steel but individual particles of the coarse aggregate when
isolated shall show a coating of mortar containing its proportionate amount
of sand. The consistency of concrete shall be gauged by the ability of the
equipment to properly place it and not by the difficulty in mixing or trans
porting. The quantity of mixing water shall be determined by the engineer
in accordance with article 2. 4. 5. and shall not be varied without his consent.
In general the slump, for concrete placed by the usual methods, when
HIGHWAY
42
BRIDGES
made in accordance with the Standard Method of Slump Test for Consistency
of Portland Cement Concrete, A. A. S. H. O., Method T-119-42 (A. S. T. M.
Designation C-143-39), shall be as follows:
For mass concrete, not over 2

For lightly reinforced concrete
inches.
sections,
easily accessible for spading

and working, not over 3 inches.
For reinforced concrete sections, not easily accessible for spading and
working due to amount or spacing of steel, or other reasons, not over
4 inches.
For sections which are inaccessible to a workman, such as long slender
columns, etc., not over 5 inches.
In the case of structural steel encasement, where the deposited concrete
must pass through very small openings, the above provisions shall not
govern.
Batches in the same section shall be uniform.
When the vibration method of placing concrete is used the slump shall
generally be from one-half to two-thirds of that given above. Concrete as
dry as it is practical to place with the equipment specified shall be used.
of Materials.
by weighing, except as otherwise specified

other methods are specifically authorized by the engineer.
The
apparatus provided for weighing the aggregates and cement shall be
suitably designed and constructed for this purpose. Each size of aggregate
The accuracy of all weighing
and the cement shall be weighed separately.
devices shall be such that successive quantities can be measured to within
Cement in standard packages (sack)
1 per cent of the desired amount.
need not be weighed, but bulk cement shall be weighed.
The mixing water
The water measuring device
shall be measured by volume or by weight.
shall be susceptible of control accurate to plus or minus % per cent of
the capacity of the tank. All measuring devices shall be subject to approval.
Where volumetric measurements are authorized by the engineer for
projects where the amount of concrete is small, the weight proportions
shall be converted to equivalent volumetric proportions. In such cases,
suitable allowance shall be made for variations in the moisture condition
of the aggregates, including the bulking effect in the fine aggregate.
When the aggregates contain more water than the quantity necessary
surface-dry condition as contemplated in article
to produce a saturated
samples shall be taken and the moisture content
2. 4. 5, representative
determined for each kind of aggregate.
When sack cement is used the quantities of aggregates for each batch
shall be exactly sufficient for one or more full sacks of cement and no batch
requiring fractional sacks of cement will be permitted.
Materials shall
be measured
or where
2. 4. 8. Mixing Concrete.
(a) General.
Unless otherwise authorized
mixed at the site.
(b) Mixing
by the engineer, concrete shall be machine
at Site.
Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a batch mixer of an approved
size and type which will insure a uniform distribution of the materials
throughout the mass.
The mixer shall be equipped with adequate water storage and a device
for accurately measuring and automatically controlling the amount of
CONSTRUCTION
water used in each batch. Preferably, mechanical means shall be provided

for recording the number of revolutions for each batch and automatically
preventing the discharge of the mixer until the materials have been mixed
the specified minimum time.
The entire contents of the mixer shall be removed from the drum before
The materials com
materials for a succeeding batch are placed therein.
posing a batch shall be deposited simultaneously in the mixer.
No mixer
having a rated capacity of less than a 1-bag batch shall be used nor shall
a mixer be charged in excess of its rated capacity.
All concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than 1% minutes
after all materials, including water, are in the mixer. During the period
of mixing, the mixer shall operate at the speed for which it has been
designed, but this speed shall be not less than 14 nor more than 20 revolu
tions per minute.
The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer shall contain
a sufficient excess of cement, sand and water to coat the inside of the drum
without reducing the required mortar content of the mix. Upon the cessa
tion of mixing for a considerable period, the mixer shall be thoroughly
cleaned.
(c) Truck Mixing.

Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the engineer, shall be of
the revolving drum type, watertight, and so constructed that the concrete
can be mixed to insure a uniform distribution of materials throughout the
mass. All solid materials for the concrete shall be accurately measured in
accordance with article 2. 4. 7. and charged into the drum at the propor
tioning plant. Except as subsequently provided, the truck mixer shall be
Only the prescribed
equipped with a tank for carrying mixing water.
amount of water shall be placed in the tank unless the tank is equipped
with a device by which the quantity of water added can be readily verified.
The mixing water may be added directly to the batch, in which case a tank
shall not be required.
Truck mixers may be required to be provided with
means by which the mixing time can be readily verified by the engineer.
The maximum size of batch in truck mixers shall not exceed the
maximum rated capacity of the mixer as stated by the manufacturer and
Truck mixing shall be continued for not
stamped in metal on the mixer.
less than 50 revolutions after all ingredients, including the water, are in
the drum. The speed shall not be less than 4 r. p. m., nor more than a
speed resulting in a peripheral velocity of the drum of 225 feet per minute.
Not more than 100 revolutions of mixing shall be at a speed in excess of
Mixing shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has been
6 r. p. m.
added either to the water or aggregate.
When cement is charged into a mixer drum containing water or surfacewet aggregate and when the temperature is above 90 F., or when highearly strength portland cement is used, this limit shall be reduced to 15
minutes; the limitation on time between the introduction of the cement to
and the beginning of the mixing may be waived when, in
the aggregates
are sufficiently free from
the judgment of the engineer, the aggregates
moisture, so that there will be no harmful effects on the cement.
at the Central Plant.
When a truck mixer, or an agitator provided with adequate mixing
blades, is used for transportation, the mixing time at the stationary machine
mixer may be reduced to 30 seconds and the mixing completed in a truck
(d) Partial Mixing
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
44
mixer or agitator. The mixing time in the truck mixer or agitator equipped
with adequate mixing blades shall be as specified for truck mixing.
(e) Plant Mix.
Mixing at a central plant shall conform to the requirements
for mixing
at the site.
( f) Time of Hauling
and Placing Mixed Concrete.

Concrete transported in a truck mixer, agitator, or other transporta
tion device shall be discharged at the job and placed in its final position in
the forms within 1% hours after the introduction of the mixing water to
the cement and aggregate, or the cement to the aggregate, except that in
hot weather or under other conditions contributing to quick stiffening of
the concrete, the maximum allowable time may be reduced by the engineer.
The maximum volume of mixed concrete transported in an agitator shall
be in accordance with the specified rating.
(g) Hand Mixing.

When hand mixing is authorized it shall be done on a watertight
platform and in such a manner as to insure a uniform distribution of the
materials throughout the mass. Mixing shall be continued until a homo
geneous mixture of the required consistency is obtained.
(h)
Delivery.
The organization supplying concrete shall have sufficient plant capacity

delivery at the rate
and transporting apparatus to insure continuous
The rate of delivery of concrete during concreting operations
required.
shall be such as to provide for the proper handling, placing and finishing
of the concrete. The rate shall be such that the interval between batches
shall not exceed 20 minutes.
The methods of delivering and handling the
of
concrete shall be such as will facilitate placing with the minimum
rehandling and without damage to the structure or the concrete.
(i)
Retempering.
The concrete shall be mixed only in such quantities as are required for
immediate use and any which has developed initial set shall not be used.
Concrete which has partially hardened shall not be retempered or remixed.
2. 4. 9. Handling and Placing Concrete,
(a)
General.
In preparation for the placing of concrete all sawdust, chips, and other
construction debris and extraneous matter shall be removed from the in
terior of forms. Struts, stays and braces, serving temporarily to hold the
forms in correct shape and alignment, pending the placing of concrete at
their locations, shall be removed when the concrete placing has reached an
elevation rendering their service unnecessary.
These temporary members
shall be entirely removed from the forms and not buried in the concrete.
No concrete shall be used which does not reach its final position in
the forms within the time stipulated under "Time of Hauling and Placing
Mixed Concrete," article 2. 4. 8.
Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the materials and
the displacement of the reinforcement.
The use of long troughs, chutes and
pipes for conveying concrete from the mixer to the forms shall be permitted
only on written authorization of the engineer.
In case an inferior quality
of concrete is produced by the use of such conveyors, the engineer may
CONSTRUCTION
45
order discontinuance of their use and the substitution of a satisfactory

method of placing.
Open troughs and chutes shall be of metal or metal lined; where steep
slopes are required, the chutes shall be equipped with baffles or be in short
lengths that reverse the direction of movement.
All chutes, troughs and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings
of hardened concrete by thoroughly flushing with water after each run;
water used for flushing shall be discharged clear of the structure.
When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete more
than 5 feet, it shall be deposited through sheet metal or other approved
pipes. As far as practicable, the pipes shall be kept full of concrete during
placing and their lower ends shall be kept buried in the newly placed con
crete. After initial set of the concrete the forms shall not be jarred and
no strain shall be placed on the ends of reinforcing bars which project.
Concrete, during and immediately after depositing, shall be thoroughly
compacted.
The compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration subject
to the following provisions:
(1) The vibration shall be internal unless special authorization of other
methods is given by the engineer or as provided herein.
(2) Vibrators shall be of a type and design approved by the engineer.
They shall be capable of transmitting vibration to the concrete at fre
quencies of not less than 4500 impulses per minute.
(3) The intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect a mass
of concrete of 1-inch slump over a radius of at least 18 inches.
(4) The contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to
properly compact each batch immediately after it is placed in the forms.
(5) Vibrators shall be manipulated so as to thoroughly work the con
crete around the reinforcement and imbedded fixtures and into the corners
and angles of the forms.
Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in the area of
freshly deposited concrete. The vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn
out of the concrete slowly. The vibration shall be of sufficient duration and
intensity to thoroughly compact the concrete, but shall not be continued so
as to cause segregation.
Vibration shall not be continued at any one point
to the extent that localized areas of grout are formed.
Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced and not
farther apart than twice the radius over which the vibration is visibly
effective.
(6) Vibration shall not be applied directly or through the reinforce
ment to sections or layers of concrete which have hardened to the degree
that the concrete ceases to be plastic under vibration. It shall not be used
to make concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to cause
segregation, and vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete in the
forms.
(7) Vibration shall be supplemented by such spading as is necessary
to insure smooth surfaces and dense concrete, along form surfaces and in
corners and locations impossible to reach with the vibrators.
(8) The provisions of this article shall apply to the filler concrete for
steel grid floor except that the vibrator shall be applied to the steel.
(9) The provisions of this article shall apply to precast piling, concrete
cribbing and other precast members except that, if approved by the engineer,
the manufacturers' methods of vibrations may be used.
Concrete
shall
be placed
in horizontal layers not more than
12 inches
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
46
thick except as hereinafter provided.

When less than a complete layer is
placed in one operation, it shall be terminated in a vertical bulkhead.
Each
layer shall be placed and compacted before the preceding batch has taken
initial set to prevent injury to the green concrete and avoid surfaces of
separation between the batches. Each layer shall be compacted so as to
avoid the formation of a construction joint with a preceding layer which
has not taken initial set.

When the placing of concrete is temporarily discontinued, the concrete,
after becoming firm enough to retain its form, shall be cleaned of laitance
and other objectionable material to a sufficient depth to expose sound con
crete.
To avoid visible joints as far as possible upon exposed faces, the
top surface of the concrete adjacent to the forms shall be smoothed with a
trowel. Where a "feather edge" might be produced at a construction joint,
as in the sloped top surface of a wing wall, an inset form work shall be
used to produce a blocked out portion in the preceding layer which shall
produce an edge thickness of not less than 6 inches in the succeeding
layer. Work shall not be discontinued within 18 inches of the top of any
face, unless provision has been made for a coping less than 18 inches thick,
in which case, if permitted by the engineer, the construction joint may be
made at the under side of the coping.
Immediately following the discontinuance of placing concrete all accum
ulations of mortar splashed upon the reinforcing steel and the surfaces of
forms shall be removed. Dried mortar chips and dust shall not be puddled
into the unset concrete.
the accumulations are not removed prior to the
concrete becoming set care shall be exercised not to injure or break the
concrete-steel-bond at and near the surface of the concrete, while cleaning
the reinforcing steel
If
(b)
Culverts.
general, the base slab or footings of box culverts shall be placed and
In this
allowed to set before the remainder of the culvert is constructed.
case suitable provision shall be made for bonding the sidewalls to the culvert
base, preferably by means of raised longitudinal keys so constructed as to
prevent, as far as possible, the percolation of water through the construc
In
tion joint.
Before concrete is placed in the sidewalls, the culvert footings shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all shavings, sticks, sawdust, or other extraneous
material and the surface carefully chipped and roughened in accordance
with the method of bonding construction joints as specified herein.
In the construction of box culverts 4 feet or less in height, the sidewalls
When this method of con
and top slab may be constructed as a monolith.
struction is used, any necessary construction joints shall be vertical and
at right angles to the axis of the culvert.
In the construction of box culverts more than 4 feet in height, the
concrete in the walls shall be placed and allowed to set before the top slab
is placed.
In this case, appropriate keys shall be left in the sidewalls for
anchoring the cover slab.
Each wing wall shall be constructed, if possible, as a monolith.
Con
struction joints, where unavoidable, shall be horizontal and so located that
no joint will be visible in the exposed face of the wing wall above the
ground line.
Girders, Slabs and Columns.
Concrete, preferably, shall be deposited by beginning at the center of
the span and working from the center toward the ends. Concrete in girders
(c)
CONSTRUCTION
47
shall be deposited uniformly for the full length of the girder and brought
up evenly in horizontal layers.
Concrete in girder haunches less than 3 feet in height shall be placed
at the same time as that in the girder stem, and the column or abutment
Whenever any
tops shall be cut back to form seats for the haunches.
haunch or fillet has a vertical height of 3 feet or more, the abutment or
columns, the haunch and the girder shall be placed in three successive
stages; first, up to the lower side of the haunch; second, to the lower side
of the girder; and third, to completion.
Concrete in slab spans shall be placed in one continuous operation for
each span unless otherwise provided.
The floors and girders of through girder superstructures shall be placed
in one continuous operation unless otherwise specified, in which case special
shear anchorage shall be provided to insure monolithic action between
girder and floor.
Concrete in T-beam or deck girder spans may be placed in one con
tinuous operation or may be placed in two separate operations, each of
which shall be continuous; first, to the top of the girder stems, and second,
to completion.
In the latter case, the bond between stem and slab shall be
positive and mechanical, and shall be secured by means of suitable shear
The size and location of these keys
keys in the top of the girder stem.
shall be computed. In general, suitable keys may be formed by the use of
timber blocks approximately 2 by 4 inches in cross-section and having a
length 4 inches less than the width of the girder stem. These key blocks
shall be spaced along the girder stems as required, but the spacing shall
be not greater than 1 foot center to center.
The blocks shall be beveled and
oiled in such manner as to insure their ready removal, and they shall be
removed as soon as the concrete has set sufficiently to retain its shape.
Concrete in columns shall be placed in one continuous operation, unless
The concrete shall be allowed to set at least 12 hours
otherwise directed.
before the caps are placed.
Unless otherwise permitted by the engineer, no concrete shall be placed
in the superstructure until the column forms have been stripped sufficiently
The load of the
to determine the character of the concrete in the columns.
superstructure shall not be allowed to come upon the bents until they have
been in place at least 14 days, unless otherwise permitted by the engineer.
(d)
Arches.
The concrete in arch rings shall be placed in such a manner as to load

the centering uniformly.
Arch rings, preferably, shall be cast in transverse sections of such size
The arrangement
that each section can be cast in a continuous operation.
of the sections and the sequence of placing shall be as approved by the
engineer and shall be such as to avoid the creation of initial stress in the
reinforcement. The sections shall be bonded together by suitable keys or
dowels. When permitted by the engineer, arch rings may be cast in a single
continuous
operation.
2. 4. 10. Pneumatic Placing.
Pneumatic placing of concrete will be permitted only if specified in the

The equipment shall
special provisions or if authorized by the engineer.
be so arranged that no vibrations result which might damage freshly placed
concrete.
Where concrete is conveyed and placed by pneumatic means the equip
48
HIGHWAY
BRIDGES
shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the work.

The machine shall be located as close as practicable to the place of deposit.
The position of the discharge end of the line shall not be more than 10 feet
from the point of deposit. The discharge lines shall be horizontal or inclined
upwards from the machine.
At the conclusion of placement the entire equipment shall be thoroughly
ment
cleaned.
2. 4. 11. Pumping.
Placement of concrete by pumping will be permitted only if specified

in the special provisions or if authorized by the engineer.
The equipment
shall be so arranged that no vibrations result which might damage freshly
placed concrete.
Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied pressure
the equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the
work. The operation of the pump shall be such that a continuous stream
of concrete without air pockets is produced.
When pumping is completed,
the concrete remaining in the pipeline, if it is to be used, shall be ejected
in such a manner that there will be no contamination of the concrete or
After this operation, the entire equipment
separation of the ingredients.
shall be thoroughly cleaned.
2. 4. 12. Depositing Concrete Under Water.
Concrete shall not be deposited in water except with the approval of
the engineer and under his immediate supervision; and in this case the
method of placing shall be as hereinafter designated.
Concrete deposited in water shall be Class A with 10 per cent excess
cement. To prevent segregation, it shall be carefully placed in a compact
mass, in its final position, by means of a tremie, a bottom dump bucket or
other approved method, and shall not be disturbed after being deposited.
Still water shall be maintained at the point of deposit and the forms under
water shall be water-tight.
For parts of structures under water, when possible, concrete seals shall
be placed continuously from start to finish; the surface of the concrete
shall be kept as nearly horizontal as practicable at all times. To insure
thorough bonding, each succeeding layer of a seal shall be placed before
the preceding layer has taken initial set.
A tremie shall consist of a tube having a diameter of not less than 10

inches, constructed in sections having flanged couplings fitted with gaskets.
The tremies shall be supported so as to permit free movement of the dis
charge end over the entire top surface of the work and so as to permit
rapid lowering when necessary to retard or stop the flow of concrete. The
discharge end shall be closed at the start of work so as to prevent water
entering the tube and shall be entirely sealed at all times; the tremie tube
shall be kept full to the bottom of the hopper.
When a batch is dumped
into the hopper, the flow of concrete shall be induced by slightly raising
the discharge end, always keeping it in the deposited concrete.
The flow
shall be continuous until the work is completed.
Depositing of concrete by the drop bottom bucket method shall conform
The top of the bucket shall be open. The
to the following specification.
bottom doors shall open freely downward and outward when tripped. The
bucket shall be completely filled and slowly lowered to avoid backwash.
It shall not be dumped until it rests on the surface upon which the concrete
is to be deposited and when discharged shall be withdrawn slowly until well
CONSTRUCTION
above the concrete.
The slump of concrete shall
49
be
maintained between
4 and 8 inches.
Unwatering may proceed when the concrete seal is sufficiently hard and
strong. All laitance or other unsatisfactory material shall be removed from
the exposed surface by scraping, chipping or other means which will not
injure the surface of the concrete.
2. 4. 13. Construction
(a)
Joints.
General.
Construction joints shall be made only where located on the plans or

shown in the pouring schedule, unless otherwise approved by the engineer.
not detailed on the plans, or in the case of emergency, construction
joints shall be placed as directed by the engineer.
Shear keys or inclined
reinforcement shall be used where necessary to transmit shear or bond the
two sections together.
If
(b) Bonding.
Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete which has

The surface of the hardened
hardened, the forms shall be retightened.
concrete shall be roughened as required by the engineer, in a manner that
will not leave loosened particles of aggregate or damaged concrete at the
It shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter and laitance, and
surface.
saturated with water. To insure an excess of mortar at the juncture of the
hardened and the newly deposited concrete, the cleaned and saturated
surfaces, including vertical and inclined surfaces, shall first be thoroughly
covered with a coating of mortar or neat cement grout against which the
new concrete shall be placed before the grout has attained its initial set.
The placing of concrete shall be carried continuously from joint to
joint. The face edges of all joints which are exposed to view shall be
carefully finished true to line and elevation.
2. 4. 14. Rubble or Cyclopean
Concrete.
Rubble or cyclopean concrete shall consist of either Class B or C con

It shall be used
crete, as specified, containing large embedded stones.
only with the approval of the engineer in massive piers, gravity abutments,
and heavy footings. The stone for this class of work may be one-man stone
or derrick stone conforming to the requirements of division IV.
The stone shall be carefully placed not dropped or cast so as to avoid
injury to the forms or to the partially set adjacent masonry.
Stratified
All stone shall be washed and
stone shall be placed upon its natural bed.
saturated with water before placing.
The total volume of the stone shall not be greater than one-third of the
total volume of the portion of the work in which it is placed. For walls or
piers greater than 2 feet in thickness, one-man stone may be used; each
stone shall be surrounded by at least 6 inches of concrete; and no stone
shall be closer than 1 foot to any top surface nor any closer than 6 inches
For walls or piers greater than 4 feet in thickness, derrick
to any coping.
stone may be used; each stone shall be surrounded by at least 1 foot of
concrete; and no stone shall be closer than 2 feet to any top surface nor
closer than 8 inches to any coping.
2. 4. 1S. Concrete Exposed
to Sea Water.
Unless otherwise specifically provided, concrete for structures exposed

to sea water shall be Class A concrete as specified in article 2. 4. 5. The
clear distance from the face of the concrete to the nearest face of reinforce
50
HIGHWAY
BRIDGES
ment steel shall be not less than 4 inches. The concrete shall be mixed for
a period of not less than 2 minutes and the water content of the mixture
shall be carefully controlled and regulated so as to produce concrete of
maximum impermeability. The concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and
stone pockets shall be avoided.
No construction joints shall be formed
between levels of extreme low water and extreme high water as determined
Between these levels sea water shall not come in direct
by the engineer.
contact with the concrete for a period of not less than 30 days. The original
surface, as the concrete comes from the forms, shall be left undisturbed.
2. 4. 16. Concrete Exposed
to
Alkali Soils or Alkali Water.
Where concrete may be exposed to the action of alkaline waters or soils,

special care shall be taken to place it in accordance with placing specifica
tions herein.
Wherever possible placing shall be continuous until com
pletion of the section or until the concrete is at least 18 inches above ground
or water level. Alkaline waters or soils shall be kept from contact with the
concrete during placement and for a period of at least 72 hours thereafter.
2. 4. 17. Falsework and Centering.
Unless otherwise provided, detailed plans for falsework or centering

shall be supplied to the engineer on request, but, in no case shall the con
tractor be relieved of responsibility for results obtained by the use of these
plans.
For designing falsework and centering, a weight of 150 pounds per

All falsework shall be
cubic foot shall be assumed for green concrete.
designed and constructed to provide the necessary rigidity and to support
The engineer may
the loads without appreciable settlement or deformation.
require the contractor to employ screw jacks or hardwood wedges to take
up any settlement in the formwork either before or during the placing
of concrete.
Falsework which cannot be founded on a satisfactory footing shall be
supported on piling which shall be spaced, driven and removed in a manner
approved by the engineer.
Falsework shall be set to give the finished structure the camber speci
fied or indicated on the plans.
Arch centering shall be constructed according to centering plans
Provision shall be made by means of suitable
wedges, sand boxes or other device for the gradual lowering of centers, and
When directed, centering shall be
rendering the arch self-supporting.
placed upon approved jacks in order to take up and correct any slight
settlement which may occur after the placing of masonry has begun.
2. 4. 18. Forms.
All forms shall be of wood or metal and shall be built mortartight and
of sufficient rigidity to prevent distortion due to the pressure of the concrete
operations.
and other loads incident to the construction
Forms shall be
constructed and maintained so as to prevent warping and the opening of
joints due to shrinkage of the lumber.
The forms shall be substantial and unyielding and shall be so designed
that the finished concrete will conform to the proper dimensions and con
tours.
The design of the forms shall take into account the effect of
vibration of concrete as it is placed.
Forms for exposed surfaces shall be made of dressed lumber of uniform
thickness with or without a form liner of an approved type, and mortar
CONSTRUCTION
51
tight. Forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and shall be given a
bevel or draft in the case of all projections, such as girders and copings,
to insure easy removal.
Metal ties or anchorages within the forms shall be so constructed as
to permit their removal to a depth of at least 2 inches from the face without
injury to the concrete. In case ordinary wire ties are permitted, all wires,
upon removal of the forms, shall be cut back at least V* inch from the
face of the concrete with chisels or nippers; for green concrete, nippers
All fittings for metal ties shall be of such design that, upon
are necessary.
their removal, the cavities which are left will be of the smallest possible
size. The cavities shall be filled with cement mortar and the surface left
sound, smooth, even and uniform in color.
All forms shall be set and maintained true to the line designated until
Forms shall remain in place for
the concrete is sufficiently hardened.
When forms
periods which shall be determined as hereinafter specified.
appear to be unsatisfactory in any way, either before or during' the placing
of concrete, the engineer shall order the work stopped until the defects
have been corrected.
The shape, strength, rigidity, watertightness and surface smoothness
of re-used forms shall be maintained at all times. Any warped or bulged
Forms which are unsatis
lumber must be re-sized before being re-used.
factory in any respect shall not be re-used.
For narrow walls and columns, where the bottom of the form is inac
cessible, the lower form boards shall be left loose so that they may be
removed for cleaning out extraneous material immediately
before placing
the concrete.
All forms shall be treated with oil or saturated with water immediately
For rail members or other members with
before placing the concrete.
exposed faces, the forms shall be treated with an approved oil to prevent
the adherence of concrete.
Any material which will adhere to or discolor
the concrete shall not be used.
2. 4. 19. Removal
of Falsework, Forms and Housing.
In the determination of the time for the removal of falsework, forms

and housing, and the discontinuance of heating, consideration shall be given
to the location and character of the structure, the weather and other condi
tions influencing the setting of the concrete, and the materials used in
the mix.
field operations are not. controlled by beam or cylinder tests, the
following periods, exclusive of days when the temperature is below 40",
for removal of forms and supports may be used as a guide :
If
Arch
centers
Centering under beams

Floor slabs
Walls
Columns
Sides of beams and all other parts
14 days
14 days
7-14 days
12-24 hrs.
1-7 days
12-24 hrs.
If high-early strength cement is used these periods may be reduced a&

directed by the engineer.
field operations are controlled by beam or cylinder tests, the removal
of forms, supports and housing, and the discontinuance of heating and
curing may be begun when the strengths reach values which shall be fixed
by the engineer for the particular method of testing which is to be used.
The beams or cylinders shall be cured under conditions which are not more
If
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
52
favorable than the most unfavorable conditions for the portions of the
concrete which the beams represent.
Methods of form removal likely to cause overstressing of the concrete
shall not be used. In general, the forms shall be removed from the bottom
upwards.
Forms and their supports shall not be removed without the
approval of the engineer.
Supports shall be removed in such a manner as
to permit the concrete to uniformly and gradually take the stresses due
to its own weight.
In general, arch centering shall be struck and the arch made selfsupporting before the railing or coping is placed.
This precaution is
essential in order to avoid jamming of the expansion joints and variations
in alignment.
For filled spandrel arches, such portions of the spandrel
walls shall be left for construction subsequent to the striking of centers,
as may be necessary to avoid jamming of the expansion joints.
Centers shall be gradually and uniformly lowered in such a manner
as to avoid injurious stresses in any part of the structure.
In arch struc
tures of two or more spans, the sequence of striking centers shall be
specified or approved by the engineer.
2. 4. 20. Concreting
in Cold Weather.
No concrete shall be placed when the atmospheric temperature is below

permission of the engineer.
When directed by the
engineer, the contractor shall enclose the structure in such a way that the
concrete and air within the enclosure can be kept above 60 F. for a period
of seven days after placing the concrete.
If high early strength cement is used these periods may be reduced,
35
F. without written
as directed
by the engineer.
The contractor shall supply such heating apparatus as stoves, sala

manders or steam equipment and the necessary fuel. When dry heat is
used, means of maintaining atmospheric moisture shall be provided.
All
aggregates and mixing water shall be heated to a temperature of at least
70 but not more than 150 F.; the aggregates may be heated by either
steam or dry heat.
If permitted by the engineer the torch method of
heating mixed concrete may be used, provided the heating apparatus shall
be such as to heat the mass uniformly and avoid hot spots which will burn
the materials. The temperature of the concrete shall be not less than 60
at the time of placing in the forms. In case of extremely low tempera
tures, the engineer may, at his discretion,
raise the minimum limiting
temperatures for water, aggregates and mixed concrete.
2. 4. 21. Curing Concrete.
Concrete surfaces exposed to conditions
causing premature drying
shall be protected by covering as soon as possible with canvas, straw,
burlap, sand or other satisfactory material and kept moist; or if the sur
faces are not covered, they shall be kept moist by flushing or sprinkling.
Curing shall continue for a period of not less than seven days after placing
high-early strength cement is used this period may be
the concrete.
reduced, as directed by the engineer.
Other precautions to insure the
development of strength shall be taken as the engineer may direct.
If
2. 4. 22. Expansion and Fixed Joints and Bearings.

All joints shall be constructed according to details shown on the plans.
(a)
Open Joints.
Open joints shall be placed in the locations shown on the plans and
shall be constructed by the insertion and subsequent removal of a wood
CONSTRUCTION
53
strip, metal plate or other approved material. The insertion and removal
of the template shall be accomplished without chipping or breaking the
Reinforcement shall not extend across an open
corners of the concrete.
joint unless so specified on the plans.
(b) Filled Joints.
Poured expansion joints shall be constructed similar to open joints.

When premolded types are specified, the filler shall be placed in correct
position as the concrete on one side of the joint is placed. When the form
Metal water
is removed, the concrete on the other side shall be placed.
stops shall be carefully placed as shown on the plans.
Steel Joints.
The plates, angles or other structural shapes shall be accurately shaped,
at the shop, to conform to the section of the concrete floor. The fabrica
tion and painting shall conform to the requirements of these specifications
covering those items. When called for on the plans or in the special provi
sions the material shall be galvanized in lieu of painting.
Care shall be
taken to insure that the surface in the finished plane is true and free of
warping. Positive methods shall be employed in placing the joints to keep
them in correct position during the placing of the concrete.
The opening
at expansion joints shall be that designated on the plans at normal tempera
ture, and care shall be taken to avoid impairment of the clearance in any
C c)
manner.
(d)
Water Stops.
Metal water stops shall be furnished and placed as provided on the

They shall be spliced, welded, or soldered, to form continuous water
plans.
tight joints.
(e) Bearing
Devices.
Bearing plates, rockers and other expansion devices shall be constructed

according to details shown on the plans.
Unless set in plastic concrete or
as otherwise specified, they shall be set in grout to insure uniform bearing.
Bronze or copper-alloy plates shall conform to the requirements of article
4. 12. 1. or 4. 12. 2.
Structural steel and painting shall conform to the
specifications for those items.
When called for on the plans or in the
special provisions, the material shall be galvanized
in lieu of painting.
The rockers or other expansion devices shall be set to conform to the
temperature at the time of erection.
Finishing Concrete Surfaces
2. 4. 23. General.
Surface finishes shall be classified as follows:
Class 1. Ordinary surface finish.
Class 2. Rubbed finish.
Class 3. Tooled finish.
Class 4. Sand-blast finish.
Class 5. Wire brush, or scrubbed finish.
Class 6. Floated surface finish.
All concrete shall be given Class 1, Ordinary Surface Finish, and in

addition, if further finishing is required, such other type of finish as is
not otherwise specified, the following surfaces shall be given
specified.
a Class 2, Rubbed Finish: The exposed faces of piers, abutments, wing
walls and retaining walls; the outside faces of girders, T-beams, slabs,
columns, brackets, curbs, headwalls, railings, arch rings, spandrel walls
If
54
HIGHWAY
BRIDGES
and parapets; but not on the tops and bottoms of floor slabs and sidewalks,
bottoms of beams and girders, sides of interior beams and girders, backwalls above bridge seat or the underside of copings. The surface finish on
piers and abutments shall include all exposed surfaces below bridge seat
to 1 foot below low water elevation or 2 feet below finished ground line
when such ground line is above the water surface.
Wing walls shall be
finished from the top to 2 feet below the finish slope lines on the outside
face and shall be finished on top and for a depth of 1 foot below the top
on the back sides.
Unless otherwise specified, roadway floors shall be given Class 6,
Floated Surface Finish.
2. 4. 24. Class 1, Ordinary Surface Finish.

Immediately following the removal of forms, all fins and irregular
projections shall be removed from all surfaces except from those which are
not to be exposed or are not to be waterproofed. On all surfaces, the cavi
ties produced by form ties and all other holes, honeycomb spots, broken
corners or edges and other defects shall be thoroughly cleaned, and after
having been kept saturated with water for a period of not less than three
hours shall be carefully pointed and trued with a mortar of cement and
fine aggregate mixed in the proportions used in the grade of the concrete
Mortar used in pointing shall be not more than one hour
being finished.
The mortar patches shall be cured as specified under Curing. All
old.
construction and expansion joints in the completed work shall be left
carefully tooled and free of all mortar and concrete. The joint filler shall
be left exposed for its full length with clean and true edges.
The resulting surfaces shall be true and uniform. All surfaces which
cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the engineer shall be "rubbed" as
specified for Class 2, Rubbed Finish.
2. 4. 25. Class 2, Rubbed Finish.
After removal of forms the rubbing of concrete shall be started as soon
Immediately before starting this work the
as its condition will permit.
concrete shall be kept thoroughly saturated with water for a minimum
Sufficient time shall have elapsed before the wetting
period of three hours.
down to allow the mortar used in the pointing of rod holes and defects to
thoroughly set. Surfaces to be finished shall be rubbed with a medium
stone, using a small amount of mortar on its face.
coarse carborundum
The mortar shall be composed of cement and fine sand mixed in proportions
Rubbing shall be continued until all
used in the concrete being finished.
form marks, projections and irregularities have been removed, all voids
The paste produced by
filled and a uniform surface has been obtained.
this rubbing shall be left in place at this time.
After all concrete above the surface being treated has been cast, the
final finish shall be obtained by rubbing with a fine carborundum stone and
water. This rubbing shall be continued until the entire surface is of a
smooth texture and uniform color.
After the final rubbing is completed and the surface has dried, it shall
be rubbed with burlap to remove loose powder and shall be left free from
all unsound patches, paste, powder and objectionable marks.
2. 4. 26. Class 3, Tooled Finish.
Finish of this character for panels and other like work may be secured
Air
by the use of a bushhammer, pick, crandall, or other approved tool.
No tooling shall be done until the
tools, preferably, shall be employed.
CONSTRUCTION
55
concrete has set for at least 14 days and as much longer as may be
necessary to prevent the aggregate particles from being "picked" out of the
surface.
The finished surface shall show a grouping of broken aggregate
particles in a matrix of mortar, each aggregate particle being in slight
relief.
Class 4, Sand Blasted Finish.

The thoroughly cured concrete surface shall be sand blasted with hard,
sharp sand to produce an even fine-grained surface in which the mortar
has been cut away, leaving the aggregate exposed.
2. 4. 27
2. 4. 28. Class 5, Wire Brushed or Scrubbed Finish.

This type of finish shall be produced by scrubbing the surface of a
green concrete with stiff wire or fiber brushes, using a solution of muriatic
acid in the proportion of 1 part acid to 4 parts water. As soon as the
forms are removed and while the concrete is yet comparatively green, the
surface shall be thoroughly and evenly scrubbed as above described until
the cement film or surface is completely removed and the aggregate particles
are exposed, leaving an even pebbled texture presenting
an appearance
grading from that of fine granite to coarse conglomerate, depending upon
As soon as the scrubbing has
the size and grading of aggregate used.
progressed sufficiently to produce the texture desired, the entire surface
shall be thoroughly washed with water to which a small amount of ammonia
has been added to remove all traces of the acid.
2. 4. 29. Class 6, Floated Surface Finish.
(a) Striking Off.

After the concrete
is compacted as specified under article 2.4.9(a),

the surface shall be carefully rodded and struck off with a strike board
Proper
to conform to the cross section and grade shown on the plans.
allowance shall be made for camber, if required.
The strike board may be
operated longitudinally or transversely and shall be moved forward with
a combined longitudinal and transverse motion, the manipulation being
such that neither end is raised from the side forms during the process.
A slight excess of concrete shall be kept in front of the cutting edge at
all times.
(b) Floating.
After striking
off and consolidating as specified above, the surface

shall be made uniform by longitudinal or transverse floating, or both.
Longitudinal floating will be required except in places where this method
is not feasible.
(c) Longitudinal Floating.
The longitudinal float, operated from foot bridges, shall be worked

with a sawing motion while held in a floating position parallel to the road
centerline and passing gradually from one side of the pavement to the
The float shall then be moved forward one-half of its length and
other.
Machine floating which produces equivalent
the above operation repeated.
results
may be substituted
for
the above hand method.
Transverse Floating.
The transverse float shall be operated across the pavement by starting
at the edge and slowly moving to the center and back again to the edge.
The float shall then be moved forward one-half of its length and the above
Care shall be taken to preserve the crown and cross
operations repeated.
section of the pavement.
(d)
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
56
(e)
Straightedging.
the longitudinal floating has been completed and the excess water
removed, but while the concrete is still plastic, the slab surface shall be
tested for trueness with a straightedge.
For this purpose the contractor
shall furnish and use an accurate 10-foot straightedge swung from handles
3 feet longer than one-half the width of the slab.
The straightedge shall be held in successive positions parallel to the
road centerline and contact with the surface and the whole area gone over
from one side of the slab to the other as necessary.
Advance along the
deck shall be in successive stages of not more than one-half the length of
the straightedge.
Any depressions found shall be immediately filled with
freshly mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated and refinished.
High areas
shall be cut down and refinished.
The straightedge testing and refloating
shall continue until the entire surface is found to be free from observable
departures from the straightedge and the slab has the required grade and
contour, until there are no deviations of more than % inch under the 10-foot
straightedge.
After
( f) Final Finishing.
When the concrete has hardened sufficiently,
the surface shall be given
a broom finish.
The broom shall be of an approved type. The strokes shall
be square across the slab, from edge to edge, with adjacent strokes slightly
overlapped, and shall be made by drawing the broom without tearing the
concrete, but so as to produce regular corrugations not over % of an inch in
depth. The surface as thus finished shall be free from porous spots, irregu
larities, depressions and small pockets or rough spots such as may be
caused by accidental disturbing, during the final brooming, of particles of
coarse aggregate embedded near the surface.
2. 4. 30. Sidewalk
Finish.
After the concrete has been deposited in place, it shall be compacted

and the surface shall be struck off by means of a strike board and floated
with a wooden or cork float. An edging tool shall be used on all edges and
at all expansion joints. The surface shall not vary more than % inch
The surface shall have a granular
(0.125") under a 10-foot straightedge.
or matte texture which will not be slick when wet.
Sidewalk surfaces shall be laid out in blocks with an approved grooving
tool as shown on the plans or as directed by the engineer.
2. 4. 31. Pneumatically
(a)
Applied Mortar.
General.
This section refers to premixed sand and cement pneumatically applied

by suitable mechanism and competent operators, and to which mixture the
water is added immediately previous to its expulsion from the nozzle.
(b) Proportions.
The proportion of cement to sand shall be based on dry and loose
volumes and shall not be less than one to four for encasement of steel
members, one to three for concrete repair, nor one to four and a half for
special linings.
( c)
Water Content.
The water content shall
not in excess of
gallons
be maintained
at a practicable
per sack of cement as placed.
minimum and
CONSTRUCTION
57
(d) Mixing.
The cement and sand shall be thoroughly mixed before being charged
into the machine.
The sand shall contain not less than 3 nor more than 6
per cent moisture by weight.
(e)
Nozzle Velocity.
The velocity of the material as it leaves the nozzle must be maintained

uniform at a rate determined for the given job conditions to produce
minimum
C
f)
rebound.
Nozzle Position.
The nozzle shall be held in such a position and at such distance that
the stream of flowing material will impinge at approximately right angles
to the surface being covered without excessive impact.
(g) Rebound
Sand.
Rebound or accumulated loose sand shall be removed from the surface

prior to placing of the original or succeeding layers of mortar.
to be covered
(h) Forms.
The forms shall be structurally sufficient and of such design that
rebound or accumulated loose sand can freely escape or be readily removed.
Shooting strips should be used at corners, edges, and on surfaces where
necessary to obtain true lines and proper thickness.
(i) Joints.
The pneumatically applied mortar at the end of any day's work or
similar stopping periods shall be sloped off to a thin edge. Before placing
an adjacent section this sloped portion shall be thoroughly cleaned and
wetted.
(j)
Bond.
Surfaces to which pneumatically applied mortar is to be bonded shall

thoroughly cleaned of dirt, paint, grease, organic matter and loose
Absorptive surfaces shall be wetted before the application of
particles.
the mortar.
be
(k) Curing.
Pneumatically applied mortar shall be so applied, protected, and cured
as to prevent its temperature falling below 50 F., or a loss of moisture
from the surface for the periods indicated below:
(1)
(2)
normal portland cement is used, 7 days.

Where high-early strength portland cement is used,
Where
days.
Pneumatically applied mortar shall be applied only with the permission

of the engineer if the air temperature is 50 P. or less.
(I)
Reinforcement.
The reinforcement when required shall be adequate from the stand

point of structural requirements and shall consist of mesh or round bars,
spaced not less than 2 inches nor more than 4 inches apart either way,
and having a diameter not less than that of No. 12 wire. The area of the
reinforcement shall be at least 0.2 per cent of the cross-sectional area of
the mortar. The reinforcement shall be at least % inch from the unex
posed surface of the mortar and at least % inch from the exposed surface.
HIGHWAY
58
BRIDGES
and Payment.
The payment for concrete of the various classes shall include compen
sation for all equipment, tools, material, falsework, forms, bracing, labor,
surface finish and all other items of expense required to complete the con
crete work shown on the plans, with the exception of reinforcing steel. The
payment for concrete shall include the cost of joint fillers, metal drains,
expansion joints and miscellaneous metal devices unless they are covered
The quantity of concrete involved in fillets,
by other items in the contract.
scorings and chamfers 1 square inch or less in cross-sectional area shall
Payment will be made on the basis of the actual yardage
be neglected.
within the neat lines of the structure as shown on the plans or revised by
authority of the engineer, except that deduction shall be rnade as follows:
(1) The volume of structural steel, including steel piling, encased in
concrete.
(2) The volume of timber piles encased in concrete,

volume to be .8 cubic foot per linear foot of pile.
(3) The volume of concrete piles encased in concrete.
assuming
the
No deduction shall be made for the volume of concrete displaced by

floor drains, or expansion joint material. If a bid is
steel reinforcement,
asked on handrailing, that portion of the railing above the top of the road
way curb or above the surface of the sidewalk, as the case may be, shall
not be included in the yardage of concrete, but shall be paid for as handrailing. Massive pylons or posts which are to be excepted from handrail
payment shall be so noted on the plans.
Payment for pneumatically applied mortar will be made on the basis
of the actual number of square feet placed and accepted. The payment for
pneumatically applied mortar shall include compensation for all equipment,
tools, materials, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work and
shall include metal reinforcement unless otherwise provided.
SECTION
Reinforcement
2. 5. 1. Material.
All material shall conform to the requirements of division IV. The

use of only one grade of steel will be allowed on any one contract, unless
otherwise noted on the plans or in the special provisions.
2. 5. 2. Order Lists.
Before ordering material, all order lists and bending diagrams shall be
furnished by the contractor for the approval of the engineer, and no ma
terials shall be ordered until such lists and bending diagrams have been
The approval of order lists and bending diagrams by the engi
approved.
neer shall in no way relieve the contractor of responsibility for the correct
Any expense incident to the revision of
ness of such lists and diagrams.
material furnished in accordance with such lists and diagrams to make it
comply with the design drawings shall be borne by the contractor.
2. 5. 3. Protection
of Material.
When
Steel reinforcement shall be protected at all times from injury.
placed in the work, it shall be free from dirt, detrimental scale, paint, oil
However, when steel has, on its surface, detri
or other foreign substance.
CONSTRUCTION
69
mental rust, loose scale and dust which is easily removable,

cleaned by a satisfactory method, if approved by the engineer.
it
may
be
2. 5. 4. Fabrication.
Bent bar reinforcement shall be cold bent to the shapes shown on the
plans, and unless otherwise provided on the plans or by authorization,
bends shall be made in accordance with the following requirements :
Stirrups and tie bars shall be bent around a pin having a diameter not
less than two times the minimum thickness of the bar.
Bends for other
bars shall be made around a pin having a diameter not less than six times
the minimum thickness except for bars larger than 1 inch, in which case
the bends shall be made around a pin of eight bar diameters.
Bar reinforcement shall be shipped in standard bundles, tagged and
marked in accordance with the Code of Standard Practice of the Concrete
Reinforcement Steel Institute.
2. 5. 5. Mesh Reinforcement.
Mesh reinforcement shall conform to the requirements

and shall be fabricated as shown on the plans.
of division IV,
2. 5. 6. Bar
Mat Reinforcement.
Bar mat reinforcement shall conform to the requirements
of division IV.
2. 5. 7. Placing and Fattening.
All steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the positions shown

on the plans and firmly held during the placing and setting of concrete.
When placed in the work it shall be free from dirt, detrimental rust, loose
scale, paint, oil or other foreign material. Bars shall be tied at all inter
sections except where spacing is less than 1 foot in each direction when
alternate intersections shall be tied.
Distances from the forms shall be maintained by means of stays, blocks,
Blocks for holding reinforce
ties, hangers, or other approved supports.
ment from contact with the forms shall be precast mortar blocks of approved
Metal chairs which are in
shape and dimensions or approved metal chairs.
Layers
contact with the exterior surface of the concrete shall be galvanized.
of bars shall be separated by precast mortar blocks or by other equally
suitable devices. The use of pebbles, pieces of broken stone or brick, metal
The minimum spacing of
pipe and wooden blocks shall not be permitted.
bars shall be as specified in article 3. 7. 7. Reinforcement in any member
shall be placed and then inspected and approved by the enginer before the
placing of concrete begins. Concrete placed in violation of this provision
may be rejected and removal required.
If fabric reinforcement is shipped in rolls, it shall

flat sheets before being placed.
be straightened
into
2. 5. 8. Splicing.
All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full lengths indicated on

Splicing of bars, except where shown on the plans, will not be
the plans.
Splices shall be
permitted without the written approval of the engineer.
staggered as far as possible.
Unless otherwise shown on the plans, bars shall be lapped 40 diameters
In lapped splices, the bars shall be placed in contact
to make the splice.
and wired together in such a manner as to maintain a clearance of not
HIGHWAY
60
BRIDGES
less than the minimum clear distance to other bars and the minimum
distance to the surface of the concrete specified in article 3. 7. 7. Welding
of reinforcing steel shall be done only if detailed on the plans or if authorized
Welding shall conform to the current speci
by the engineer in writing.
fications for Welded Highway and Railway Bridges of the American Weld
ing Society.
2. S. 9. Lapping.
Sheets of mesh or bar mat reinforcement shall overlap each other
sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be securely fastened
at the ends and edges. The edge lap shall not be less than one mesh in
width.
2. 5. 10. Substitutions.
Substitution of different size bars will be permitted only with specific

authorization by the engineer. If steel is substituted, it shall have an area
equivalent to the design area, or larger.
2. 5. 11. Measurement.
Steel reinforcement incorporated in the concrete masonry
will be
measured in pounds based on the total computed weight for the sizes and
lengths of bars, mesh or mats as shown on the plans or authorized.
The weight of mesh will be computed from the theoretical weight of

plain wire. If the weight per square foot is given on the plan, that weight
shall be used.
The weight of plain or deformed bars or bar mat will be computed from
the theoretical weight of plain round or square bars of the same nominal
size as shown in the following table :
Size
Weight
in
pounds
per
foot
Round
. .
Square
. .
M"
Vs"
Vs"
3A"
Vs"
1"
0.167
0.376
0.668
1.043
1.502
2/44
2.670
0.850
3.400
V4'
4.303
5.313
7.650
The weight of reinforcement used in railings, when they are paid for on
a linear foot basis, shall not be included.
The weight of reinforcement in
precast piles and other items where the reinforcement is included in the
contract price for the item shall not be included.
No allowance will be made for clips, wire, separators, wire chairs, and
other material used in fastening the reinforcing in place.
bars are sub
stituted upon the contractor's request and as a result more steel is used
than specified, only the amount specified shall be included.
If
When laps are made for splices, other than those shown on the plans,
for the convenience of the contractor, the extra steel shall not be included.
2. S. 12. Payment.
Payment for reinforcement as determined under measurement shall be

Payment shall include the cost of
made at the contract price per pound.
furnishing, fabricating and placing of the reinforcement.
CONSTRUCTION
61
SECTION 6 Ashlar Masonry

2. 6. 1. Description.
Ashlar masonry shall consist of first-class cut stone masonry laid in

regular courses and shall include all work in which, as distinguished from
rubble masonry,
the individual stones are dressed or tooled to exact
dimensions.
2. 6. 2. Materials.
Materials shall conform
to the requirements
of division IV, supple
mented as follows:
Stone.
The stone shall be kept free from dirt, oil or any other injurious ma
terial which may prevent the proper adhesion of the mortar or detract
from the appearance of the exposed surfaces.
Mortar.
Mortar for laying the stone and pointing shall be composed of one part
of portland cement and three parts of sand unless otherwise provided.
The
of division IV for "Sand for
sand shall conform to the requirements
Mortar."
2. 6. 3. Size of Stone.
They shall
The individual stones shall be large and well proportioned.
not be less than 12 nor more than 30 inches in thickness.
The thicknesses
of courses, if varied, shall diminish regularly from bottom to top of wall.
The size of ring stones in arches shall be as shown on the plans.
2. 6. 4. Surface Finishes of Stone.
For the purpose

defined as follows:
of this specification
the surface finishes
of stone are
Having a surface in which the variations from the

Smooth-finished:
pitch line do not exceed Me inch.
Pine-finished: Having a surface in which the variations from the pitch
line do not exceed % inch.
Rough-finished: Having a surface in which the variations from the
pitch line do not exceed % inch.
Scabbled: Having a surface in which the variations from the pitch
line do not exceed 94 inch.
Rock-faced: Having an irregular projecting face without indications
of tool marks. The projections beyond the pitch line shall not exceed 3
inches and no part of the face shall recede back of the pitch line.
2. 6. 5. Dressing Stone.
Stones shall be dressed to exact sizes and shapes before being laid and
shall be cut to lie on their natural beds with top and bottom truly parallel.
The bottom bed shall be the full size
Hollow beds will not be permitted.
of the stone and no stone shall have an overhanging top. In rock-face
construction the face side of any stone shall not present an undercut contour
adjacent to its bottom arris giving a top-heavy, unstable appearance when
laid.
12
Beds of face stone shall be fine-finished

inches.
for
a depth
of not less than
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
62
Vertical joints of face stone shall be fine-finished and full to the square
for a depth of not less than 9 inches.
Exposed surfaces of the face stone shall be given the surface finish
indicated on the plans, with edges pitched to true lines and exact batter.
Face
Chisel drafts 1% inches wide shall be cut at all exterior corners.
stone forming the starling or nosing of piers shall be rough-finished
unless
otherwise
specified.
Holes for stone hooks shall not
be permitted
to show in exposed surfaces.
2. 6. 6. Stretchers.
Stretchers shall have a width of bed of not less than 1% times their
thickness.
They shall have a length of not less than twice their thickness,
nor less than 3 feet, and not more than 3% times their thickness.
2. 6. 7. Headers.
Headers shall be placed in each course and shall have a width of not
less than 1% times their thickness.
In walls having a thickness of 4 feet
or less, the headers shall extend entirely through the wall. In walls of
greater thickness, the length of headers shall be not less than 2% times
their thickness when the course is 18 inches or less in height, and not less
Headers shall bond with the
than 4 feet in courses of greater height.
core or backing not less than 12 inches. Headers shall hold in the heart of
the wall the same size shown in the face and shall be spaced not further
apart than 8 feet center to center. There shall be at least one header to
every two stretchers.
2. 6. 8. Cores and Backing.
Cores and backing shall consist either of roughly bedded and jointed
headers and stretchers, as specified above, or of Class "B" or "C" concrete,
as may be specified.
When stone is used for cores or backing, at least % of the stone shall
be of the same size and character as the face stone and with parallel ends.
No course shall be less than 8 inches thick.
Concrete used for cores and backing shall conform to the requirements
specified for Concrete Masonry, division II.
The headers and stretchers in walls having a thickness of 3 feet or
less shall have a width or length equal to the full thickness of the wall.
No backing will be allowed.
2. 6. 9. Mixing
Mortar.
The mortar shall be hand or machine mixed, as may be required by

In the preparation of hand-mixed mortar, the sand and
the engineer.
cement shall be thoroughly mixed together in a clean, tight mortar box
until the mixture is of uniform color, after which clean water shall be
Machine-mixed
added in such quantity as to form a stiff plastic mass.
mortar shall be prepared in an approved mixer and shall be mixed 'not less
than 1% minutes.
Mortar shall be used within 45 minutes after mixing.
Retempering of mortar will not be permitted.
2. 6. 10. Laying Stone,
(a)
General.
Stone masonry shall not be constructed in freezing weather or when
the stone contains frost, except by written permission of the engineer and
subject to such conditions as he may require.
CONSTRUCTION
63
(b)
Face Stone.
Stone shall not be dropped upon or slid over the wall, nor will hammer
ing, rolling or turning of stones on the wall be allowed, but shall be care
fully set without jarring the stone already laid and they shall be handled
with a lewis or other appliance which will not cause disfigurement.
Each stone shall be cleaned and thoroughly saturated with water before
being set and the bed which is to receive it shall be cleaned and well
All stones shall be well bedded in freshly made mortar and
moistened.
settled in place with a suitable wooden maul before the setting of the mortar.
Whenever possible, the face joints shall be properly pointed before the
mortar sets. Joints which cannot be so pointed shall be prepared for point
ing by raking them out to a depth of 2 inches before the mortar has set.
The face surfaces of stones shall not be smeared with the mortar forced out
of the joints or that used in pointing. No pinning up of stones with spalls
will be permitted and no spalls will be permitted in beds.
Joints and beds shall be not less than % inch nor more than % inch
in thickness and the thickness of the joint or bed shall be uniform
throughout.
The stones in any one course shall be placed so as to form bonds of not
Headers shall be
less than 12 inches with the stones of adjoining courses.
placed over stretchers and, in general, the headers of each course shall
equally divide the spaces between the headers of adjoining courses, but no
header shall be placed over a joint and no joint shall be made over a header.
(c)
Stone Backing and Cores.
Stone backing shall be laid in the same manner as specified above for
face stone, with headers interlocking with face headers when the thickness
of the wall will permit. Backing shall be laid to break joints with the face
stone. Stone cores shall be laid in full mortar beds so as to bond not less
Bed
than 12 inches with face and backing stone and with each other.
joints in cores and backing shall not exceed 1 inch and vertical joints shall
not exceed 4 inches in thickness.
(d)
Concrete
Cores and Backing.
The operations involved in the handling and placing of concrete used

in cores and backing shall conform to the requirements specified for "Con
However, the puddling and compacting of concrete ad
crete Masonry."
jacent to the ashlar masonry facing shall be done in a manner that will
insure the filling of all spaces around the stones and secure full contact
and efficient bond with all stone surfaces.
2. 6. 11. Leveling Courses.
Stone cores and backing shall be carried up to the approximate level
of the face course before the succeeding course is started.
The construction joints produced in concrete cores or backing by the
intermittent placing of concrete shall be located, in general, not less than
6 inches below the top bed of any course of masonry.
2. 6. 12. Resetting.
In case any stone is moved or the joint broken, the stone shall be
taken up, the mortar thoroughly cleaned from bed and joints, and the stone
reset in fresh mortar.
HIGHWAY
64
BRIDGES
2. 6. 13. Dowels and Cramps.
Where required, coping stone, stone in the wings of abutments and

stone in piers shall be secured with wrought-iron cramps or dowels as
indicated on the plana.
Dowel holes shall be drilled through each stone before the stone is
placed and, after it is in place, such dowel holes shall be extended by
drilling into the underlying course not less than 6 inches.
Cramps shall be of the shapes and dimensions shown on the plans or
They shall be inset in the stone so as to be flush
with the surfaces.
Cramps and dowels shall be set in lead, care being taken to completely
fill the surrounding spaces with the moulten metal.
2. 6. 14. Copings.
Stones for copings of walls, piers and abutment bridge seats shall
carefully selected and fully dimensioned stones. On piers, not more
than two stones shall be used to make up the entire width of coping and
the copings of abutment bridge seats shall be of sufficient width to extend
at least 4 inches under the backwall. Each step forming the coping of a
wing wall shall be formed by a single stone which shall overlap the stone
forming the step immediately below it at least 12 inches.
Tops of copings shall be given a bevel cut at least 2 inches wide, and
beds, bevel cuts and tops shall be fine-finished.
The vertical joints shall
and the copings shall be laid with joints not more than
be smooth-finished
The under sides of projecting copings, preferably,
% inch in thickness.
shall have a drip bead.
Joints in copings shall be located so as to provide not less than a
12-inch bond with the stones of the under course and so that no joint will
come directly under the superstructure masonry plates.
be
2. 6.
I5. Arches.
The number of courses and the depth of voussoirs shall be as shown on

the plans.
Voussoirs shall be placed in the order indicated, shall be full
size throughout, dressed true to template, and shall have bond not less than
the thickness of the stone. Beds and joints shall be fine-finished and mortar
joints shall not exceed % inch in thickness.
Exposed surfaces of the intrados and arch ring shall be given the surface finish indicated on the plans.
Backing may consist of Class B concrete or of large stones shaped to
fit the arch, bonded to the spandrels, and laid in full beds of mortar. The
extrados and interior faces of the spandrel walls shall be given a finishing
coat of 1:2% cement mortar which shall be trowelled smooth to receive the
waterproofing.
Arch centering, waterproofing, drainage and filling shall
for concrete arches.
be as specified
2. 6. 16. Pointing.
Pointing shall not be done in freezing weather nor when the stone
contains frost.
Joints not pointed at the time the stone is laid shall be thoroughly wet
with clean water and filled with mortar. The mortar shall be well driven
into the joints and finished with an approved pointing tool. The wall shall
be kept wet while pointing is being done and in hot or dry weather the
pointed masonry shall be protected from the sun and kept wet for a period
of at least three days after completion.
CONSTRUCTION
65
After the pointing is completed and the mortar set, the wall shall
thoroughly cleaned and left in a neat and workmanlike condition.
be
and Payment.
The quantity of stone masonry to be paid for under this item shall
be the number of cubic yards measured in the completed work and the
limiting dimensions shall not exceed those shown upon the plans or fixed
by the engineer.
The contract price shall include all labor, tools, materials
and other expense incidental to the satisfactory completion of the work.
SECTION 7 Mortar Rubble Masonry
Mortar rubble masonry, as here specified, shall include the classes com
monly known as coursed, random and random range work and shall consist
of roughly squared and dressed stone laid in cement mortar.
2. 7. 2. Materials.
Materials shall conform to the requirements

as follows:
mented
of division
IV
supple
Stone.
The stone shall be kept free from dirt, oil, or any other injurious
material which may prevent the proper adhesion of the mortar.
Mortar.
The mortar used shall conform as regards materials, proportions and
mixing to the mortar specified for "Ashlar Masonry."
2. 7. 3. Size.
Individual stones shall have a thickness of not less than 8 inches and
width of not less than 1 % times the thickness.
No stones, except headers,
shall have a length less than 1% times their width. Stone shall decrease
in thickness from bottom to top of wall.
The size of ring stones for arches shall be as shown on the plans.
a
2. 7. 4. Headers.
Headers shall hold in the heart of the wall the same size shown in the
They
face and shall extend not less than 12 inches into the core or backing.
shall occupy not less than % of the face area of the wall and shall be evenly
distributed.
Headers in walls 2 feet or less in thickness shall extend
entirely through the wall.
2. 7. 5. Shaping Stone.
The stones shall be roughly squared on joints, beds and faces. Selected
stone, roughly squared and pitched to line, shall be used at all angles and
ends of walls. If specified, all corners or angles in exterior surfaces shall
be finished with a chisel draft.
All shaping or dressing of stone shall be done before the stone is laid
in the wall, and no dressing or hammering which will loosen the stone will
be permitted after it is placed.
2. 7. 6. Laying Stone.
Stone masonry shall not be constructed in freezing weather or when the
of the engineer and
stone contains frost, except by written permission
subject to such conditions as he may require.
HIGHWAY
66
BRIDGES
The masonry shall be laid to line and in courses roughly leveled up.
The bottom or foundation courses shall be composed of large, selected stones
and all courses shall be laid with bearing beds parallel to the natural bed
of the material.
Each stone shall be cleaned and thoroughly saturated with water before
being set and the bed which is to receive it shall be cleaned and well
moistened.
All stones shall be well bedded in freshly made mortar. The
mortar joints shall be full and the stones carefully settled in place before
the mortar has set. No spalls will be permitted in the beds. Joints and
beds shall have an average thickness of not more than 1 inch.
Whenever possible the face joints shall be properly pointed before the
mortar becomes set. Joints which cannot be so pointed shall be prepared
for pointing by raking them out to a depth of 2 inches before the mortar
has set. The face surfaces of stones shall not be smeared with the mortar
forced out of the joints or that used in pointing.
The vertical joints in each course shall break joints with those in
adjoining courses at least 6 inches. In no case shall a vertical joint be so
located as to occur directly above or below a header.
In case any stone is moved or the joint broken, the stone shall be taken
up, the mortar thoroughly cleaned from bed and joints, and the stone reset
in fresh mortar.
2. 7. 7. Copings, Bridge Seats and Backwalls.
Copings, bridge seats and backwalls shall be of the materials shown on
the plans and when not otherwise specified shall be of Class "A" concrete
which shall conform to the requirements for "Concrete Masonry."
Concrete copings shall be made in sections extending the full width of
the wall, not less than 12 inches in thickness, and from 5 to 10 feet long.
The sections may be cast in place or precast and set in place in full
mortar beds.
2. 7. 8
Arches.
The number of courses and the depth of voussoirs shall be as shown

Voussoirs shall be placed in the order indicated, shall be full
size throughout and shall have bond not less than their thickness.
Beds
shall be roughly pointed to bring them to radial planes. Radial joints shall
be in planes parallel to the transverse axis of the arch and, when measured
at the intrados, shall not exceed % inch in thickness.
Joints perpendicular
to the arch axis shall not exceed 1 inch in thickness when measured at the
intrados.
The intrados face shall be dressed sufficiently to permit the stone
Exposed faces of the arch ring shall
to rest properly upon the centering.
be rock-faced with edges pitched to true lines.
The work shall be carried up symmetrically about the crown, the stone
being laid in full mortar beds and the joints grouted where necessary.
Pinning by the use of stone spalls will not be permitted.
Backing may consist of Class "B" concrete or of large stones shaped to
fit the arch, bonded to the spandrels, and laid in full beds of mortar. The
extrados and interior faces of the spandrel walls shall be given a finishing
coat of 1:2% cement mortar which shall be trowelled smooth to receive
the waterproofing.
Arch centering, waterproofing, drainage and filling shall be as specified
for concrete arches.
on the plans.
CONSTRUCTION
67
2. 7. 9. Pointing.
Pointing shall not

contains frost.
be
done in freezing
weather
or when
the
stone
Joints not pointed at the time the stone is laid shall be thoroughly
wet with clean water and filled with mortar.
The mortar shall be well
driven into the joints and finished with an approved pointed tool. The
wall shall be kept wet while pointing is being done and in hot or dry
weather the pointed masonry shall be protected from the sun and kept wet
for a period of at least three days after completion.
After the pointing is completed and the mortar set, the wall shall be
thoroughly cleaned and left in a neat and workmanlike condition.
and Payment.
The quantity of stone masonry to be paid for under this item shall be
the number of cubic yards measured in the completed work and the limiting
dimensions shall not exceed those shown upon the plans or fixed by the
engineer.
The contract price shall include all labor, tools, materials and
other items incidental to the satisfactory completion of the work.
Concrete used in connection with rubble masonry
in the case of other concrete construction.
shall
be paid
for
as
SECTION 8 Dry Rubble Masonry

2. 8. 1 Description.
Dry rubble masonry as here specified shall include the classes com
monly known as coursed, random and random range work and shall consist
of roughly squared and dressed stone laid without mortar.
2. 8. 2. Materials.
Stone
for this
division IV.
class of masonry
shall conform
to the requirements
of
2. 8. 3. Size of Stone.
in size to the requirements
The stones shall conform

Rubble Masonry."
"Mortar
specified
for
2. 8. 4. Headers.
Headers shall conform

Rubble Masonry."
to
the
requirements
specified
for "Mortar
2. 8. 5. Shaping Stone.
The stones shall be roughly squared on joints, beds and faces. Selected
stone, roughly squared and pitched to line, shall be used at all angles and
ends of walls.
2. 8. 6. Laying Stone.
The masonry shall be laid to line and in courses roughly leveled up.
The bottom or foundation courses shall be composed of large, selected stones
and all courses shall be laid with bearing beds parallel to the natural bed
of the material. Face joints shall not exceed 1 inch in width.
In laying dry rubble masonry, care shall be taken that each stone takes
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
68
a firm bearing at not less than three separate points upon the underlying
course.
Open joints, both front and rear, shall be "chinked" with spalls
fitted to take firm bearing upon their top and bottom surfaces, for the
purpose of securing firm bearing throughout the length of the stone.
When required by the terms of the contract, the open joints on the
rear surfaces of abutments or retaining walls shall be "slushed" thoroughly
with mortar to prevent seepage of water through the joints.
2. 8. 7. Copings,
Bridge Seats and Backicalls.
Copings, bridge seats and backwalls, when used in connection with dry
rubble masonry, shall conform to the requirements
specified for "Mortar
Rubble Masonry."
and Payment.
The quantity of stone masonry to be paid for under this item shall
number of cubic yards measured in the completed work and the
limiting dimensions shall not exceed those shown upon the plans or fixed by
the engineer.
The contract price shall include all labor, tools, materials
and other expense incidental to the satisfactory completion of the work.
Concrete used in connection with rubble masonry shall be paid for as
in the case of other concrete construction.
oe the
SECTION 9 Brick Masonry

Brick masonry shall consist of brick laid in cement mortar and shall
include such construction with building brick or ornamental brick as may
be specified.
Brick pavements are not included under this designation.
2. 9. 2. Materials.
(a) Brick.
Brick used for this class of work shall conform
specified in Brick for Masonry, division IV.
to the requirements
(b) Mortar.
The mortar used shall conform, as regards materials, proportions and
mixing, to the mortar specified for Ashlar Masonry.
,
2. 9. 3. Construction.
The brick shall be laid in such manner as will thoroughly bond them
into the mortar by means of the "shove-joint" method; "buttered" or
All brick must be thoroughly
plastered joints will not be permitted.
saturated with water before being laid. The arrangement of headers and
stretchers shall be such as will thoroughly bond the mass and, unless other
wise specified, brick work shall be of alternate headers and stretchers with
consecutive courses breaking joints. Other types of bonding, as for orna
mental work, shall be as specified on the plans.
All joints shall be completely filled with mortar. They shall not be
less than % inch and not more than % inch in thickness and the thickness
shall be uniform throughout. All joints shall be finished properly as the
work progresses and on exposed faces they shall be neatly struck, using the
"weather" joint.
No spalls or bats shall
be
used except for shaping around
irregular
CONSTRUCTION
69
or when unavoidable to finish out a course, in which case full

bricks shall be placed at the corners, the bats being placed in the interior
of the course.
Piers and walls may be built of solid brick work, or may consist of a
brick shell backed with concrete or other suitable material as specified on
the plans.
None but expert brick layers shall be employed on the work
and all details of the construction
shall be in accordance with the most
approved practice and to the satisfaction of the engineer.
openings
2. 9. 4. Copings,
Bridge Seats and Backwalls.
The tops of retaining walls, abutment wing walls and similarly exposed
brick work shall be provided, in general, with either a stone or concrete
coping which shall project at least 1 inch beyond the face of the brick work
and shall have a batter or drip bead, permitting water to drip clear of the
wall. The coping upon an abutment backwall will commonly have no pro
jection beyond its bridge seat face. When concrete is used it shall be of
Class "A" quality. For thin copings, mortar of the same proportions as
used for laying the brick may be used to produce precast sections not less
than 3 feet nor more than 5 feet in length.
No coping shall be less than
4 inches thick.
Copings of piers and abutment bridge seats shall be of ashlar stone
work or of Class "A" concrete and shall conform to the requirements for
Ashlar Masonry or Concrete Masonry as the plan may indicate.
When not
shown upon the plans, concrete shall be used.
and Payment.
The quantity of brick work to be paid for under this item shall be the
number of cubic yards of brick masonry actually placed in the structure
in accordance with the plans or as modified by written instructions from
the engineer.
This price shall include all labor, materials and other expense
incidental to the satisfactory completion of the work. Filling material for
the interior of the wall, when not of brick, and concrete or mortar copings,
shall be paid for on the basis of the number of cubic yards actually placed.
SECTION 10 Steel
Structures
Fabrication
2. 10.
1. Type of Fabrication.
Riveted
2. 10.
construction
is intended,
unless
otherwise
indicated.
2. Quality of Workmanship.
Workmanship and finish shall be equal to the best general

modern bridge shops.
practice
in
2. 10. 3. Storage of Materials.
Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored at the

shop above the ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports.
shall be kept free from dirt, grease and other foreign matter, and shall
protected as far as practicable from corrosion.
bridge
It
be
*Note: The fabrication

article 2.10.44 to 2.10.58.
of steel is covered
by articles 2.10.1 to 2.10.43 and
erection by
HIGHWAY
70
2. 10. 4. Straighening
BRIDGES
Material.
If
Rolled material, before being laid off or worked, must be straight.
straightening is necessary, it shall be done by methods that will not injure
Sharp kinks and bends shall be cause for rejection of the
the metal.
material.
2. 10. 5
Finish.
Portions of the work exposed to view shall be finished neatly. Shearing,

flame cutting and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately.
2. 10. 6. Rivet Holes.
All holes for rivets shall be either punched or drilled. Material form
ing parts of a member composed of not more than five thicknesses of metal
may be punched Me inch larger than the nominal diameter of the rivets
whenever the thickness of the metal is not greater than % inch for struc
tural steel or % inch for alloy steel.
When there are more than five thicknesses or when any of the main
material is thicker than % inch in carbon steel, or % inch in alloy steel,
or when required under article 2. 10. 9, all the holes shall be subpunched
or subdrilled $ie inch smaller and, after assembling, reamed Me inch larger,
or drilled from the solid to Me inch larger, than the nominal diameter of
the rivets.
2. 10. 7. Punched Holes.
The diameter of the die shall not exceed the diameter of the punch by
more than Mo inch. If any holes must be enlarged to admit the rivets, they
shall be reamed. Holes must be clean cut, without torn or ragged edges.
Poor matching of holes will be cause for rejection.
2. 10. 8
Reamed or Drilled Holes.
Reamed holes shall be cylindrical, perpendicular to the member and not

more than Me inch larger than the nominal diameter of the rivets. Where
practicable, reamers shall be directed by mechanical means.
Drilled holes
shall be Mo inch larger than the nominal diameter of the rivet. Burrs on
the outside surfaces shall be removed. Poor matching of holes will be cause
Reaming and drilling shall be done with twist drills.
for rejection.
required by the engineer, assembled parts shall be taken apart for removal
of burrs caused by drilling. Connecting parts requiring reamed or drilled
holes shall be assembled and securely held while being reamed or drilled
and shall be match marked before disassembling.
If
2. 10. 9. Subpunching, Reaming and Shop Assembly.
Unless otherwise specified, holes in all field connections and field splices
of main truss or arch members, continuous beams, plate girders and rigid
frames shall be subpunched (or subdrilled if subdrilling is required accord
ing to article 2. 10. 6) , and reamed while assembled in the shop. The
assembly, including camber, alignment, accuracy of holes and milled joints,
shall be approved by the engineer before reaming is commenced.
Unless otherwise authorized by the engineer, each individual (full
length) truss, arch, continuous beam or girder shall be assembled in the
shop before reaming is commenced.
All holes for floor beam and stringer field end connections shall be
subpunched and reamed to a steel template or reamed while assembled.
CONSTRUCTION
If additional subpunching and reaming is required, it shall

in the special provisions or on the plans.
2. 10. 10. Accuracy
All
71
be specified
of Punched and Subdrilled Holes.
holes punched full size, subpunched, or subdrilled shall be so

accurately punched that after assembling (before any reaming is done)
a cylindrical pin Vs inch smaller in diameter than the nominal size of the
punched hole may be entered perpendicular to the face of the member,
without drifting, in at least 75 per cent of the contiguous holes in the same
plane.
If the requirement is not fulfilled, the badly punched pieces will be
rejected.
any hole will not pass a pin %e inch smaller in diameter than
the nominal size of the punched hole, this will be cause for rejection.
If
2. 10. 11. Accuracy of Reamed and Drilled Holes.
When holes are reamed or drilled, 85 per cent of the holes in any
contiguous group shall, after reaming or drilling, show no offset greater
than %2 inch between adjacent thicknesses of metal.
2. 10. 12. Shop Assembling.
assembly of trusses, arches, continuous beam spans and plate
be according to article 2. 10. 9.
Complete shop assembly of an entire structure, including floor system,
which may be necessary in the case of complicated designs shall be done
when shown on the plans or when stipulated in the special provisions.
Surfaces of metal in contact shall be cleaned before assembling.
The
parts of a member shall be assembled, well pinned, and firmly drawn to
gether with bolts before reaming or riveting is commenced.
Assembled
pieces shall be taken apart, if necessary, for the removal of burrs and
shavings produced by the reaming operation.
The member shall be free
from twists, bends, and other deformation.
Preparatory to the shop riveting of full-sized punched material, the
rivet holes, if necessary, shall be spear-reamed for the admission of the
rivets. The reamed holes shall not be more than Me inch larger than the
nominal diameter of the rivets.
End connection angles, stiffener angles, and similar parts shall be care
fully adjusted to correct positions and bolted, clamped, or otherwise firmly
held in place until riveted.
Parts not completely riveted in the shop shall be secured by bolts, in
sofar as practicable, to prevent damage in shipment and handling.
Shop
girders shall
2. 10. 13. Camber Diagram.
A camber diagram shall be furnished the engineer, showing the camber

at each panel point for each truss, taken from actual measurements while
the truss is assembled.
2. 10. 14. Drifting
of
Holes.
The drifting done during assembling shall be only such as to bring

the parts into position, and not sufficient to enlarge the holes or distort the
If any holes must be enlarged to admit the rivets, they shall be
metal.
reamed.
2. 10. 15. Match-Marking.
Connecting parts assembled in the shop for the purpose of reaming

holes in field connections shall be match-marked,
and a diagram showing
such marks shall be furnished to the engineer.
HIGHWAY
72
BRIDGES
2. 20. 16. Rivets.
The size of rivets called for on the plans shall be the size before heating.
Rivet heads shall be of standard shape, unless otherwise specified, and
of uniform size for the same diameter of rivet. They shall be full, neatly
made, concentric with the rivet holes, and in full contact with the surface
of the member.
2. 10. 17
Field Rivets.
Sufficient field rivets shall be furnished to rivet the entire structure

with an ample surplus to replace all rivets burned, lost or cut out.
2. 10. 18. Bolts and Bolted Connections.
(a)
General.
Bolted connections shall not be used unless shown on the plans.

Where
bolted connections are permitted, the bolts furnished shall be unfinished
Turned bolts shall be provided
bolts (ordinary rough or machine bolts).
if shown on the plans or if required by the special provisions.
Special
ribbed drive fit bolts may be substituted for turned bolts upon written
approval of the engineer.
The holes shall be truly cylindrical. The size of holes shall be He inch
greater than the nominal diameter of the bolts and shall make a driving
fit with the bolts. Holes shall be at right angles to the surface of the metal
against the metal.
so that both head and nut will bear squarely
Bolts
shall be driven accurately into the holes without damaging the thread.
A
snap shall be used to prevent damaging the heads.
The heads and nuts shall be drawn tight against the work with a
Bolt heads shall be tapped
suitable wrench not less than 15 inches long.
Where bolts are to be used
with a hammer while nut is being tightened.
in beveled surfaces, beveled washers shall be provided to give full bearing
Ribbed bolts shall be furnished in the same number
to the head or nut.
and in nominal sizes not smaller than the rivets for which they are sub
They shall be furnished in sufficient variety of lengths that when
stituted.
drawn tight the fluted shank will fill the hole in the work and the thread
will completely fill the nut with not more than one thread protruding. All
bolts shall have cut threads neatly and accurately finished.
If for any reason the bolts twist before drawing tight, the hole shall
be carefully reamed and the bolt replaced with a new bolt of diameter to
fit properly in the hole.
The contractor shall provide and supply himself with oversize bolts
for this replacement in an amount not less than 10 per cent of the number
of ribbed bolts specified.
The nuts of unfinished, turned bolts and ribbed bolts shall be effectually
locked after they have been finally tightened.
(b) Unfinished
Bolts.
Unfinished bolts shall be standard bolts with hexagonal heads and

The diameter of the bolt holes shall be
inch greater than the
nuts.
diameter of the bolts used. Bolts transmitting shear shall be threaded to
such a length that not more than one thread will be within the grip of
The bolts shall be of such length that they will extend entirely
the metal.
through their nuts, but not more than % inch beyond them.
The number
of bolts furnished shall be 5 per cent more than the actual number shown
on the plans for each size and length.
CONSTRUCTION
78
(c) Turned Bolts.

Holes for turned
bolts shall be carefully reamed and the bolts turned

driving fit with the threads entirely outside of the holes and a washer
shall be used. The heads and nuts shall be hexagonal.
One-fourth inch nut locks shall be used on all turned bolts unless
Turned bolts shall be finished by a
otherwise specified on the plans.
finishing cut.
to a
( d)
Special Ribbed Bolts.
Ribbed bolts, with drive fit, shall be used only where called for on the
Ribbed bolts may be substituted for field rivets in locations where,
plans.
in the opinion of the engineer, it is impractical to drive rivets.
2. 10. 19
Riveting.
Rivets shall be heated uniformly to a "light cherry red color" and shall
driven while hot. Any rivet whose point is heated more than the re
mainder shall not be driven.
When a rivet is ready for driving, it shall
Any rivet which, in
be free from slag, scale and other adhering matter.
the opinion of the engineer, is scaled excessively, will be rejected.
All rivets that are loose, burned, badly formed, or otherwise defective
shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets. Any rivet whose
head is defective in size or whose head is driven off center will be con
sidered defective and shall be removed.
Stitch rivets that are loosened
by driving of adjacent rivets shall be removed and replaced with satis
factory rivets. Caulking, recupping or double gunning of rivet heads will
be
not be permitted.
Shop rivets shall be driven by direct-acting rivet machines when
practicable. Approved beveled rivet sets shall be used for forming rivet
When the use of a direct-acting rivet machine
heads on sloping surfaces.
pneumatic hammers of approved size shall be used.
is not practicable,
Pneumatic bucking tools will be required when, in the opinion of the engineer,
the size and length of the rivets warrant their use.
Rivets may
2. 10. 20
be
driven cold provided their diameter is not over % inch.
Edge Planing.
Sheared edges of plates more than % inch in thickness and carrying

calculated stress shall be planed to a depth of V* inch.
Re-entrants cuts
shall be filleted before cutting.
2. 10. 21
Weld.
Welding of steel structures, when authorized in accordance with the

provisions of division III, shall conform to Specifications for Welded High
way and Railway Bridges of the American Welding Society.
If a fabricating shop prequalifies its metal-arc welding operators ac
cording to the standard qualification procedure of the American Welding
Society and certifies to the engineer that an operator working on the struc
ture has been prequalified within twelve months previous to the beginning
of work on the subject structure, the engineer may consider such operator
The certificate shall state that such operator shall have been
qualified.
doing satisfactory welding of the required type within the three month
A certification shall be submitted
period previous to the subject work.
for each operator and for each project, stating, the name of the operator,
HIGHWAY
74
BRIDGES
the name and title of the person who conducted the examination, the kind
of specimens, the positions of welds, the results of the tests and the date
of the examination.
Such a certification of prequalification may also be
accepted as proof that an operator on field welding is qualified, if the
contractor who submits it is properly staffed and equipped to conduct such
an examination or if the examining and testing is done by a recognized
agency which is staffed and equipped for such purpose.
2. 10. 22. Flame Cutting.
Steel or wrought-iron may be flame cut, provided a smooth surface
is secured by the use of a mechanical guide.
Flame cutting by hand shall
be done only where approved by the engineer and the surface shall be made
smooth by planing, chipping or grinding.
The cutting flame shall be so
adjusted and manipulated as to avoid cutting beyond the prescribed lines.
Re-entrant cuts shall be filleted to a radius of not less than % inch.
In the case of silicon steel, flame cut edges shall be removed to a depth
of at least % inch, by milling, chipping, or grinding.
2. 10. 23. Facing of Bearing Surfaces.
The top and bottom surfaces of steel slabs and base plates and cap
plates of columns and pedestals shall be planed, or else the plates or slabs
hot straightened.
Parts of members in contact with them shall be faced.
Sole plates of beams and girders shall have full contact with the
flanges. Sole plates and masonry plates shall be planed or hot straightened.
Cast pedestals shall be planed on surfaces to be in contact with steel
and shall have the surface to be in contact with masonry, rough-finished.
Surfaces of bronze bearing plates intended for sliding contact shall
be finished.
In planing the surfaces of expansion bearings the cut of the tool shall
be in the direction of expansion.
2. 10. 24. Abutting Joints.
Abutting joints in compression
members and girder flanges, and in

members where so specified on the drawings, shall be faced and
brought to an even bearing.
Where joints are not faced, the opening shall
not exceed Vs inch.
tension
2. 10. 25. End Connection
Angles.
Floor beams, stringers and girders having end connection angles shall
built to exact length back to back of connection angles.
If end con
nections are faced, the finished thickness of the angles shall not be less
than that shown on the detail drawings.
be
2. 10. 26. Lacing Bars.
The ends of lacing bars shall be neatly rounded

is required.
unless
another
form
2. 10. 27. Finished Members.
Finished members shall
open joints.
2. 10. 28
be
true to line and free from twists, bends and
Web Plates.
In girders having
no cover plates and not to be encased in concrete,

the top edge of the web plate shall not extend above the backs of the flange
CONSTRUCTION
75
angles and shall not be more than % inch below at any point.
Any portion
of the plate projecting beyond the angles shall be chipped flush with the
backs of the angles.
Web plates of girders having cover plates may be
Vz inch less in width than the distance back to back of flange angles.
Splices in webs of girders without cover plates

top by welding.
shall
be sealed on the
At web splices, the clearance between the ends of the web plates shall
not exceed % inch.
The clearance at the top and bottom ends of the web
splice plates shall not exceed V* inch.
2. 10. 29. Bent Plates.
Cold-bent load-carrying rolled-steel

shall conform
plates
to the
following :
(1) They shall be so taken from the stock plates that the bend-line will
be at right angles to the direction of rolling.
(2) The radius of bends, measured to the concave face of the metal,
shall not be less and preferably shall be greater than shown in the following
table, in which "T" is the thickness of the plate:
Minimum
Angle through which plate is bent
91 degrees to 120 degrees

121 degrees to 150 degrees
radius
1.0
1.5
2.0
T
T
T
If
a shorter radius is essential, the plates shall be bent hot. Hot-bent

plates shall conform to requirement
(1) above.
(3) Before bending, the corners of the plate shall be rounded to a
radius of Me inch throughout that portion of the plate at which the bending
is to occur.
Fit of Stiffeners.
End stiffener angles of girders and stiffener angles intended as sup
ports for concentrated loads shall be milled or ground to secure an even
bearing against the flange angles.
Intermediate stiffener angles shall fit
sufficiently tight to exclude water after being painted.
Fillers under
stiffeners shall fit within Vt inch at each end.
Welding will be permitted in lieu of milling or grinding if noted on the
plans or specified in the special provisions as provided in division III.
Welding transversely across the tension flanges of beams or girders, which
have a flange stress of more than 75 per cent of their designed capacity,
2. 10. 30
will
not be permitted.
2. 10. 31. Eyebars.
Eyebars shall be straight, true to size, and free from twists, folds
in the neck and head, and other defects.
The heads shall be made by
upsetting and rolling or forging, and not by welding. The form of the
heads will be determined by the dies in use at the works where the eyebars
are made, if they are satisfactory to the engineer.
The thickness of the
head and neck shall not overrun more than Mg inch.
Eyebars that are to be placed side by side in the structure shall be
bored so accurately that upon being placed together, pins tys inch less
in diameter than the pin holes will pass through the holes at both ends
at the same time without driving.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
76
2. 10. 32. Annealing.
Before boring, eyebars shall be annealed to produce the required

Proper instruments shall be
physical qualities and shall be straightened.
provided for determining at any time the temperature of the bars.
Other steel that has been heated partially shall be annealed, unless
it is to be used in minor parts. Crimped stiffeners need not be annealed.
2. 10. 33
Pins and Rollers.
Pins and rollers shall be accurately turned to the dimensions shown

on the drawings and shall be straight, smooth, and free from flaws.
Pins and rollers more than 7 inches in diameter shall be forged and
annealed.
In pins larger than 9 inches in diameter, a hole not less than 2 inches
in diameter shall be bored full length along the axis after the forging has
below the critical range under suit
been allowed to cool to a temperature
able conditions to prevent injury by too rapid cooling, and before being
annealed.
2. 10. 34. Boring
Pin
Holes.
Pin holes shall be bored true to the specified diameter, smooth and
straight, at right angles with the axis of the member and parallel with
The final surface shall be produced
each other unless otherwise required.
by a finishing cut.
The distance outside to outside of holes in tension members and inside
to inside of holes in compression members shall not vary from that specified
Boring of holes in built-up members shall be done
more than %2 inch.
after the riveting is completed.
2. 10. 35. Pin Clearances.
The diameter of the pin hole shall not exceed that of the pin by more
inch for larger pins.
than %o inch for pins 5 inches or less in diameter, or
2. 10. 36. Screw Threads.
Threads for all bolts and pins for structural steel construction shall
conform to the American National Coarse Thread Series, Class 2, free fit,
except that the pin ends having a diameter of 1% inches or more shall be
threaded six threads to the inch.
2. 10. 37
Pilot and Driving Nuts.
Two pilot nuts and two driving nuts for each size of pin shall
furnished, unless otherwise specified.
be
2. 10. 38. Notice of Beginning of Work.
The contractor shall give the engineer ample notice of the beginning
of work at the mill or in the shop, so that inspection may be provided.
The term "mill" means any rolling mill or foundry where material for
the work is to be manufactured. No material shall be manufactured or
work done in the shop before the engineer has been so notified.
2. 10. 39. Facilities for Inspection.
The contractor shall furnish facilities for the inspection of material

and workmanship in the mill and shop, and the inspectors shall be allowed
free access to the necessary parts of the works.
CONSTRUCTION
2. 10. 40. Inspector's
77
Authority.
Inspector shall have the authority to reject any material or work

which does not meet the requirements of these specifications.
In case of
dispute the contractor may appeal to the engineer, whose decision shall
be final.
2. 10. 41
Mill
Orders.
The contractor shall furnish the engineer with

orders as the engineer
as many
copies of mill
may direct.
Weighing of Members.
In case it is specified that any part of the material is to be paid for by
actual weight, finished work shall be weighed in the presence of the inspector,
if practicable. In such case, the contractor shall supply satisfactory
scales and shall perform all work involved in handling and weighing the
various parts.
2. 10. 42
2. 10. 43. Marking and Shipping.
Each member shall be painted or marked with an erection mark for

identification and an erection diagram shall be furnished with erection
marks shown thereon.
The contractor shall furnish to the engineer as many copies of
material orders, shipping statements and erection diagrams as the engineer
The weights of the individual members shall be shown on the
may direct.
statements.
Members weighing more than 3 tons shall have the weights
marked thereon.
Structural members shall be loaded on trucks or cars in
such a manner that they may be transported and unloaded at their desti
nation without being excessively stressed, deformed or otherwise damaged.
Bolts and rivets of one length and diameter and loose nuts or washers
Pins, small parts and packages
of each size shall be packed separately.
of bolts, rivets, washers and nuts shall be shipped in boxes, crates, kegs
or barrels, but the gross weight of any package shall not exceed 300 pounds.
A list and description of the contained material shall be plainly marked on
the outside of each shipping container.
ERECTION
2. 10. 44. Erection of Structure.
If the substructure and superstructure are built under separate con

tracts, the commission will provide the masonry, constructed to correct lines
and elevations and properly finished, and will establish the lines and
elevations required for setting the steel.
The contractor shall erect the metal work, remove the temporary con
struction, and do all work required to complete the bridge or bridges as
covered by the agreement, including the removal of the old structure or
structures if stipulated, all in accordance with the plans and these
specifications.
2. 10. 45. Plans.
If
the fabrication and erection of the superstructure are done under

separate contracts, the commission will furnish detail plans for the bridge
or bridges to be erected, including shop details, camber diagrams, erection
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
78
diagrams, list of field rivets and bolts, and copy of shipping statements
showing a list of parts and their weights.
2. 10. 46. Plant
The contractor shall provide the falsework and all tools, machinery
and appliances, including drift pins and fitting-up bolts, necessary for the
expeditious handling of the work.
2. 10. 47. Delivery
of
Materials.
If the contract is for erection only, the contractor shall receive the
materials entering into the finished structure, free of charges at the place
designated and loaded or unloaded as specified. The contractor shall unload
promptly upon delivery any material delivered on railroad cars or barges
which he is required to unload, otherwise he shall be responsible for
demurrage
eharges.
2. 10. 48. Handling and Storing Materials.
It
Material to be stored shall be placed on skids above the ground.
shall be kept clean and properly drained. Girders and beams shall be placed
upright and shored. Long members, such as columns and chords, shall be
supported on skids placed near enough together to prevent injury from
deflection.
If the contract is for erection only the contractor shall check
the material turned over to him against the shipping lists and report
He shall be re
promptly in writing any shortage or injury discovered.
sponsible for the loss of any material while in his care, or for any damage
caused to it after being received by him.
2. 10. 49. Falsework.
The falsework shall be properly designed and substantially constructed

and maintained for the loads which will come upon it. The contractor, if
required, shall prepare and submit to the engineer for approval, plans for
falsework or for changes in an existing structure necessary for maintaining
Approval of the contractor's plans shall not be considered as
traffic
relieving the contractor of any responsibility.
2. 10. SO. Methods and Equipment.
Before starting the work of erection, the contractor shall inform the
engineer fully as to the method of erection he proposes to follow, and the
amount and character of equipment he proposes to use, which shall be
The approval of the engineer shall
subject to the approval of the engineer.
not be considered as relieving the contractor of the responsibility for the
safety of his method or equipment or from carrying out the work in full
accordance with the plans and specifications.
No work shall be done until
such approval by the engineer has been obtained.
2. 10. 51. Bearings and Anchorage.
Masonry bearing plates shall not be placed upon bridge seat bearing
areas which are improperly finished, deformed or irregular.
Bearing plates
shall be set level in exact position and shall have a full and even bearing
upon the masonry.
Unless otherwise directed by the engineer, they shall
be placed on a layer of canvas and red lead applied as follows:
Thoroughly swab the bridge seat bearing area with red lead paint
it three layers of 12 to 14 ounce duck, each layer being
and place upon
CONSTRUCTION
79
thoroughly swabbed on its top surface with red lead paint.

Place the
superstructure shoes or pedestals in position while the paint is plastic.
As
an alternate to canvas and red lead, sheet lead may be used if called for
on the plans.
The contractor shall drill the holes and set the anchor bolts, except
where the bolts are built into the masonry.
The bolts shall be set accurately
and fixed with Portland cement grout completely filling the holes.
The
location of the anchor bolts in relation to the slotted holes in the expansion
shoes shall correspond with the temperature at the time of erection.
The
nuts on anchor bolts at the expansion ends of spans shall be adjusted to
permit the free movement of the span.
2. 10. 52. Straightening
Bent Material.
The straightening of plates and angles or other shapes shall be done

by methods not likely to produce fracture or other injury.
The metal
shall not be heated unless permitted by the engineer, in which case the
heating shall not be to a higher temperature than that producing a dark
"cherry red" color. After heating, the metal shall be cooled as slowly as
possible.
Following the straightening of a bend or buckle, the surface of the
metal shall be carefully inspected for evidence of fracture.
2. 10. 53. Assembling
Steel.
The parts shall be accurately assembled as shown on the plans and

The material shall be carefully handled
any match-marks shall be followed.
Hammering
so that no parts will be bent, broken, or otherwise damaged.
Bearing
which will injure or distort the members shall not be done.
surfaces and surfaces to be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before
Unless erected by the cantilever method,
the members are assembled.
truss spans shall be erected on blocking so placed as to give the trusses
proper camber. The blocking shall be left in place until the tension chord
splices are fully riveted and all other truss connections pinned and bolted.
Rivets in splices of butt joints of compression members and rivets in railings
Splices and field
shall not be driven until the span has been swung.
connections shall have one half of the holes filled with bolts and cylindrical
Splices and
erection pins (half bolts and half pins) before riveting.
connections carrying traffic during erection shall have three-fourths of the
holes so filled.
Fitting-up bolts shall be of the same nominal diameter

and cylindrical erection pins shall be Vm inch larger.
as the rivets,
2. 10. 54. Riveting.
Pneumatic hammers shall be used for field riveting, except when the
of hand tools is permitted by the engineer. Rivets larger than % Inch
Cup-faced dollies, fitting the
in diameter shall not be driven by hand.
head closely to insure good bearing, shall be used. Connections shall be
Drifting
accurately and securely fitted up before the rivets are driven.
shall be only such as to draw the parts into position and not sufficient to
Unfair holes shall be reamed or
enlarge the holes or distort the metal.
drilled. Rivets shall be heated uniformly to a light "cherry red" color and
shall be driven while hot. They shall not be overheated or burned. Rivet
heads shall be full and symmetrical, concentric with the shank, and shall
They shall not be smaller than the heads of
have full bearing all around.
use
HIGHWAY
80
BRIDGES
the shop rivets. Rivets shall be tight and shall grip the connected parts
securely together.
Caulking or recupping will not be permitted.
In remov
ing rivets, the surrounding metal shall not be injured; if necessary, they
shall be drilled out.
2. 10. 55. Pin Connections.
Pilot and driving nuts shall be used in driving pins. They shall be
furnished by the contractor without charge.
Pins shall be so driven that
the members will take full bearing on them.
Pin nuts shall be screwed
up tight and the threads burred at the face of the nut with a pointed tool.
2. 10. 56. Misfits.
correction
of minor misfits involving non-harmful amounts of
cutting and chipping will be considered a legitimate part of the
However, any error in the shop fabrication or deformation result
ing from handling and transportation which prevents the proper assembling
and fitting up of parts by the moderate use of drift pins or by a moderate
amount of reaming and slight chipping or cutting, shall be reported immedi
ately to the inspector and his approval of the method of correction obtained.
The correction shall be made in his presence.
the contract provides for
complete fabrication and erection the contractor shall be responsible for
all misfits, errors and injuries and shall make the necessary corrections
If the contract is for erection only the inspector, with
and replacements.
the cooperation of the contractor, shall keep a correct record of labor and
materials used and the contractor shall render within 30 days an itemized
bill for the approval of the engineer.
The
reaming,
erection.
If
2. 10. 57. Removal of Old Structure and Falsework.
If
in the agreement, the contractor shall dismantle the old

unless otherwise provided, shall be the property of the
commission, and shall store the material in the immediate vicinity of the
the old structure is to be
bridge site as the engineer may direct.
re-erected, it shall be dismantled without unnecessary damage and the parts
match-marked and carefully piled.
stipulated
structure which,
If
Upon completion of the erection and before final acceptance, the con
tractor shall remove all falsework, excavated or useless materials, rubbish
and temporary buildings, replace or renew any fences damaged and restore
in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which may
have been damaged during the prosecution of this work, and shall leave
the bridge site and adjacent highway in a neat and presentable condition
All excavated material or falsework placed
satisfactory to the engineer.
in the stream channel during construction shall be removed by the contractor
before final acceptance.
2. 10. 58. Basis of Payment.
The contract price for fabrication and erection of structural steel shall
include all labor, materials, transportation, and shop and field painting
necessary for the proper completion of the work in accordance with the
contract.
The contract price for fabrication without erection shall include all
labor and materials necessary for fabrication, shop painting, shipping and
delivery at the place designated.
Payment will be made on a pound-price or a lump-sum basis, as required
CONSTRUCTION
81
by the terms of the contract, but unless stipulated otherwise, it shall be

basis. For the purpose of payment, such items as bearing
plates, pedestals, etc., shall unless otherwise provided, be considered as
structural steel even though made of other materials.
on a pound-price
Under contracts containing an item for structural steel, all minor metal
parts other than metal reinforcement,
such as expansion joints, drains,
bolts, etc., which are embedded in concrete shall be paid for as structural
steel.
2. 10. 59. Payment
for Test Eyebars.

Full-size eyebars which are tested and meet the requirements of these
specifications shall be paid for by the purchaser at the same rate as for
the structure. Bars which fail to meet these requirements,
and all bars
rejected as a result of tests, shall not be paid for by the purchaser.
2. 10. 60. Pay Weight.
The payment in pound-price contracts shall be based on the weight of

However,
metal in the fabricated structure, including field rivets shipped.
any weight in excess of 1% per cent above the computed weight for the
The weight of
whole structure shall not be included in the pay weight.
used for
erection bolts, field paint, boxes, crates and other containers
packing, and materials used for supporting members during transportation,
shall not be included.
The weight paid for shall be the shop scale weight unless otherwise
specified in the contract or permitted by the engineer, com
provided.
puted weights, obtained as hereinafter described, may be made the basis
of payment.
If
2. 10. 61. Variance
in Weight.
If
the scale weight of any member is less than 97% per cent of the
This applies to both poundcomputed weight, the member may be rejected.
price and lump-sum contracts.
2. 10. 62. Computed
Weight.
The weight shall be computed on the following basis:

(1) Unit weights, per cubic foot
Aluminum, cast or wrought

Bronze, cast
Copper-alloy
Copper sheet
Iron, cast
Iron, malleable
Iron, wrought
Lead, sheet
Steel, cast, copper bearing,
Zinc
silicon, nickel
173.0
536.0
536.0
558.0
445.0
470.0
487.0
707.0
and stainless . . 490.0
450.0
(2) The weights of rolled shapes, and of plates up to and including

in width, shall be computed on the basis of their nominal weights
and dimensions, as shown on the approved shop drawings, deducting for
copes, cuts and all open holes, except rivet holes.
To the nominal weights of plates more than 36 inches in width, there
shall be added one-half the allowed percentage of overrun in weight given
in the Specifications for Steel for Bridges and Buildings of the A. S. T. M.,
36 inches
Designation
7-46.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
82
(3) The weight of all rivet heads, both field and shop, shall be included
on the basis of the following weights:
Diameter of rivet,
inches
Weight
per
100
heads, pounds
4
7
12
18
26
36
48
(4) The weight of castings shall be computed from the dimensions

shown on the approved shop drawings, deducting for open holes.
To this
weight shall be added 10 per cent allowance for fillets and overrun.
(5) To the total computed weight of metal shall be added 0.4 of 1 per
cent as an allowance for shop paint.
(6) Railing. The weight of railing shall be included unless it is paid
for on a linear foot basis.
(7) Steel Grid Flooring. Steel grid flooring shall be measured and
paid for as structural steel only if so specified in the special provisions.
The
(8) The weight of steel or brass shims required shall be included.
weight of brass shims shall be calculated on the basis of the unit weight
of brass.
1 1 Bronze
1.
General.
SECTION
2. 11.
or Copper-Alloy
Bearing
and Expansion
Plates
Plates shall be of the kind of metal specified in the special provisions

or as shown on the plans.
2. 11. 2. Materials.
The material shall conform to the requirements
of division IV.
2. 11. 3. Bronze Plates.
Sliding
Plates shall be cast according to details shown on the plans.
surfaces shall be planed parallel to the movment of the spans and polished
unless detailed otherwise.
2. 11. 4. Copper-Alloy Plates.
Plates shall be furnished according to details shown on the plans.

Finishing of the rolled plates will not be required provided they have a
plane, true and smooth surface.
2. 11.
Placing.
Bearing plates shall be accurately set in correct position as shown on

the plans and shall have a uniform bearing over the whole area. Provision
shall be made to keep the plates in correct position as the concrete is being
placed.
and Payment.
The weight to be paid for shall be the inspector's certified shop scale
weight of the plates as placed in the structure, unless otherwise provided.
specified in the contract or permitted by the engineer, computed weights,
obtained as herein described, may be made the basis of payment.
If
CONSTRUCTION
Payment shall
at the contract price per pound. Payment shall

of material and all labor and incidental work that
be made
include the furnishing

is required.
SECTION
2. 12.
83
12 Steel
Grid Flooring
1. General.
Steel grid flooring shall be of the open type, or the concrete filled type
as specified in the special provisions or as shown on the plans.
The floor shall meet the requirements for the design of steel grid floors,
division III. Before fabrication or construction is undertaken the con
tractor shall submit complete shop and assembly details to the engineer for
approval and his approval secured.
Materials
division IV.
shall conform
to
the
requirements
for
steel
grid
floors,
2. 12. 3. Arrangement
of Sections.
Where the main elements are normal to center line of roadway, the
units generally shall be of such length as to extend over the full width of
the roadway for roadways up to 40 feet, but in every case the units shall
extend over at least three panels.
Where joints are required, the ends of
the main floor members shall be welded at the joints over their full crosssectional area or otherwise connected to provide full continuity.
Where the main elements are parallel to center line of roadway, the
sections shall extend over not less than three panels, and the ends of
abutting units shall be welded over their full cross-sectional area or other
wise connected to provide full continuity in accordance with the design.
2. 12. 4. Provision
for
Camber.
Unless otherwise provided on the plans, provision for camber shall be

made as follows:
Steel units so rigid that they will not readily follow the camber required
shall be cambered in the shop. To provide a bearing surface parallel to
the crown of the roadway the stringers shall be canted or provided with
If beveled bars are used they shall be
shop-welded beveled bearing bars.
placed along the center line of the stringer flange, in which case the design
span length shall be governed by the width of the bearing bar instead of
by the width of the stringer flange.
Longitudinal stringers shall be mill cambered or provided with bearing
strips so that the completed floor after dead-load deflection shall conform
to the longitudinal camber shown on the plans.
2. 12. S. Field Assembly.
Areas of considerable size shall be assembled before the floor is welded

The main elements shall be made continuous and sections
to its supports.
shall be connected together along their edges by welding of bars or by
riveting them. The connections shall meet with the approval of the engi
neer. The rivets may be cold driven.
2. 12. 6. Connection
to Supports.
Before
The floor shall be connected to its steel supports by welding.
any welding is done the floor shall either be loaded to make a tight joint
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
84
with full bearing or it shall be clamped down. The location, length and
size of the welds shall be subject to the approval of the engineer, but in no
case shall they be less than the manufacturer's standards.
The ends of all the main steel members of the slab shall be securely
fastened together at the sides of the roadway for the full length of the
span by means of steel plates or angles welded to the ends of the main
members, or by thoroughly encasing the ends with concrete.
2. 12. 7. Welding.
All shop and field welding shall be done in accordance with the current
of "The American Welding Society for Welded Highway
specifications
and Railway Bridges."
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from paint, grease, loose scale, rust
and other material that will prevent a proper weld.
A thin coating of
Any clinkers or slag
linseed oil, without pigment, need not be removed.
caused by flame cutting or other causes shall be removed before welding.
2. 12. 8. Repairing Damaged
Galvanized
Coatings.
All galvanizing that has been chipped off or damaged in handling or

transporting or in welding or riveting shall be repaired by field galvanizing
by the application of a paste composed of approved zinc powder and flux
with a minimum amount of water. The places to be coated shall be
thoroughly cleaned, including removal of slag on welds, before the paste is
The surface to be coated shall first be heated with a torch to
applied.
a sufficient temperature so that all metallics in the paste are melted when
Extreme care shall be taken to see that the
applied to the heated surface.
galvanized surfaces are not damaged by the torch. The flux in the paste
will cause a black substance to appear on the surface of the coated parts,
and this black substance shall be removed by wiping off with waste or by
the quick application of cold water.
2. 12. 9. Concrete Filler.
Floor types with bottom flanges not in contact shall be provided with
bottom forms of metal or wood to retain the concrete filler without excessive
leakage.
If metal form strips are used they shall fit tightly on the bottom flanges
of the floor members and be placed in short lengths so as to extend only
about 1 inch onto the edge of each support, but in all cases the forms shall
be such as will result in adequate bearing of slab on the support.
The concrete shall be mixed, placed and cured in accordance with the
The concrete shall be
specification for Concrete Masonry, division II.
The vibrating
thoroughly compacted by vibrating the steel grid floor.
device and the manner of operating it shall be subject to the approval of
the engineer.
Painting.
2. 12. 10
flooring furnished without galvanizing
but with a shop coat of paint

shall be given two field coats of paint in accordance with the specification
for Painting Metal Structures.

If a structural steel plate is used on the bottom of a filled type floor,
the bottom surface of the plate shall be painted one shop coat and two field
coats of paint in accordance with specification for Painting Metal Structures,
division
II.
CONSTRUCTION
85
2. 12. 11. Method of Measurement
and Basis of Payment.

Payment for steel grid floor, open or concrete filled type, shall include
the furnishing of all materials, equipment, tools, and labor necessary for
the satisfactory completion of the work. Payment will be made on the basis
of the number of square feet of steel grid floor complete in place, unless
otherwise
specified.
SECTION
13 Railings
2. 13. 1. General.
Railings for bridges, wing walls, retaining walls, etc., shall include all
work constructed above the top of the roadway curb or of the sidewalk
surface.
Entrance posts, pylons, and other items integral with the railing
shall, for the purpose of measurement and payment, be included as railing
unless otherwise specified.
This item shall include the furnishing of all
material, equipment, tools, supplies, and labor necessary for the proper
construction
of the handrails and parapets, as shown on the plans or
provided for in the special provisions.
2. 13. 2
Materials.
All materials shall
conform to the requirements of division IV. Unless

If
specified, all pipe used for railing shall be wrought iron.
galvanizing is required, it shall be specified in the special provisions or
called for on the plans.
Paint shall be as specified for Metals, division IV.
otherwise
2. 13. 3. Line and Grade.
The line and grade of the railing shall be true to that shown on the
plans, and not follow any unevenness in the superstructure. Unless other
wise specified or shown on the plans, the handrail and curbs on bridges,
whether superelevated or not, shall be vertical.
Metal Railing
Fabrication and erection shall be done in accordance with the require

ments for Steel Structures, division II. In the case of welded railing, after
welding, all exposed joints shall be finished by grinding or filling to give
a neat appearing job.
Metal railings shall be carefully adjusted prior to fixing in place to
insure proper matching at abutting joints and correct alignment and
Holes for field connections shall be drilled
camber throughout their length.
with the railing in place in the structure at proper grade and alignment.
Welding may be substituted for rivets in field connections with the approval
of the engineer.
2. 13. 5. Painting.
Unless otherwise specified, metal railing shall be given one shop coat
Painting shall conform
of paint, and three coats of paint after erection.
for Painting Metal Structures, division II.
to the requirements
2. 13. 6. General.
Concrete Railing
In no case shall concrete railings be placed until the centering or

falsework for the span has been released, rendering the span self-supporting.
86
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
Except as modified herein, materials shall conform to the requirements

of division IV.
2. 13. 8 Railings Cast in Place.
The portion of the railing or parapet which is to be cast in place shall

in accordance with the requirements for Concrete Masonry,
division II. Special care shall be exercised to secure smooth and tightfitting forms which can be rigidly held in line and grade and removed
without injury to the concrete.
Forms shall either be of single width boards or shall be lined with
suitable material which shall meet with the approval of the engineer.
Form
joints in plane surfaces will not be permitted.
All moldings, panel work, and bevel strips shall be constructed accord
ing to the detail plans with neatly miter ed joints and all corners in the
finished work shall be true, sharp and clean-cut and shall be free from
cracks, spalls or other defects.
be constructed
2. 13. 9. Precast Rails.
Moist tamped mortar precast members shall be made of a mixture of

cement and sand approximately in the proportions of one part of cement to
two and one-half parts of sand.
The sand shall be specially selected for
color and grading. The sand shall be screened through a screen having
Only
% inch square meshes, and all oversize particles shall be discarded.
sufficient water shall be used in mixing to permit the immediate removal
of the member from the mold.
Moist tamped mortar precast members shall be cast in mortar-tight
The precast members shall be removed from
metal or metal-lined molds.
the molds as soon as practicable and shall be kept damp for a period of at
least 10 days. During this period they shall be protected from the sun and
from wind. Any members that show checking or soft corners or surfaces
The method of storage and handling shall be such as
shall be rejected.
to preserve true and even edges and corners, and any precast members
which become chipped, marred, or cracked before or during the process of
placing shall be rejected.
In the construction of cast-in-place railing caps and copings built in
connection with precast balusters, the balusters shall be protected from
staining and disfigurement during the process of placing and finishing the
concrete.
Surface Finish.
The surfaces of railings shall conform to the requirements
specification for Concrete Masonry, division II.
2. 13. 10
of the
2. 13. 11. Expansion Joints.
Expansion joints shall be so constructed as to permit freedom of

After all other work is completed, all loose or thin shells of
mortar likely to spall under movement shall be carefully removed from all
expansion joints by means of a sharp chisel.
movement.
2. 13. 12. General.
Stone
and
Brick
Railing
Unless otherwise specified, the materials used in masonry or brick

railings and parapets shall conform to, and the work shall be done in
CONSTRUCTION
87
accordance with, the requirements of these specifications for the particular

class of work involved.
The work shall be done in accordance with the
detailed plans, the workmanship shall be first class in every particular, and
the finished construction shall be neat in appearance and true to line and
grade.
Wood Railing
2. 13. 13. General.
Wood railings shall be constructed

Timber Structures, division II.
according
to the requirements
for
and Payment.
Payment for railing shall include all materials, tools, equipment, sup
plies, labor, and other costs necessary for the satisfactory completion of
the work.
The reinforcing steel included in payment for rail shall be determined
as follows: The portion of slab or beam bars which project into the handrail
shall be paid for as metal reinforcement, but the portion of the handrail
steel which extends into the slab or beams shall be considered as part of
the handrail.
Payment will be made on the basis of the number of linear feet of
railing measured along the center line of the railing. When steel railings
are shown on steel structures and no separate bid is taken for railing, the
railing will be paid for at the price bid per pound for structural steel.
SECTION 14 Painting Metal
Structures
2. 14. 1. General.
The painting of metal structures shall include, unless otherwise pro

vided in the contract, the preparation of the metal surfaces, the application,
protection and drying of the paint coatings, and the supplying of all tools,
tackle, scaffolding, labor and materials necessary for the entire work.
2. 14. 2. Paint.
The paint used shall conform to the requirements
as specified in the special provisions or on the plans.
of division
IV
and
2. 14. 3. Number of Coats and Color.
All steel shall be painted one shop or prime coat, and with not less than
two field coats, as specified in division IV. The color shall be as specified
or determined by the engineer.
The coats shall be sufficiently different in
color to permit detection of incomplete application.
2. 14. 4. Mixing of Paint.
Paint shall be factory mixed except as provided in division IV. All

paint shall also be field mixed before applying in order to keep the pigments
in uniform suspension.
2. 14. 5. Weather
Conditions.
Paint shall not be applied when the air temperature is below 40" P.
or when the air is misty, or when, in the opinion of the engineer, conditions
are otherwise unsatisfactory for the work.
It shall not be applied upon
damp or frosted surfaces.
Material painted under cover in damp or cold weather shall remain
under cover until dry or until weather conditions permit its exposure in the
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
88
Painting shall not be done when the metal is hot enough to cause the
paint to blister and produce a porous paint film.
open.
2. 14. 6. Application.
(a) General.
Painting shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. Paint may

with hand brushes or by spraying except that aluminum paint
preferably shall be applied by spraying. By either method the coating of
paint applied shall be smoothly and uniformly spread so that no excess
paint will collect at any point. If work done by spraying is not satisfactory
to the engineer, hand brushing will be required.
be applied
(b) Brushing.
When brushes are used, the paint shall be so manipulated under the
brush as to produce a smooth, uniform, even coating in close contact with
the metal or with previously applied paint, and shall be worked into all
corners or crevices
(c)
Spraying.
Power spraying equipment shall apply the paint in a fine, even spray
without the addition of any thinner. In cool weather, the paint may be
warmed to reduce the viscosity for use.
Such warming shall be accom
plished by heating the paint containers in water or by placing them on
steam radiators.
Paint when applied with spray equipment shall be immediately fol
lowed by brushing when necessary to secure uniform coverage and to
eliminate wrinkling, blistering and airholes.
(d)
Inaccessible Surfaces.
On all surfaces which are inaccessible for paint brushes, the paint shall
be applied
by spraying or with sheepskin daubers to insure thorough
covering.
2. 14. 7. Removal
of Paint.
painting
is unsatisfactory to the engineer, the paint shall
If the
removed and the metal thoroughly cleaned and repainted.
be
2. 14. 8. Thinning Paint.
Paint as delivered in containers when thoroughly mixed is ready for

If it is necessary in cool weather to thin the paint in order that it
shall spread more freely, this shall be done only by heating in hot water
or on steam radiators, and liquid shall not be added nor removed unless
use.
permitted
by the engineer.
2. 14. 9. Painting Galvanized
Surfaces.
to be painted shall be treated

as follows:
For the purpose of conditioning the surface of galvanized surfaces for
painting, the painting shall be deferred as long as possible in order that
the surface may weather.
Before painting galvanized surfaces they shall be treated as follows:
In 1 gallon of soft water dissolve 2 ounces each of copper chloride,
copper nitrate, and sal ammoniac, then add 2 ounces of commercial muriatic
acid. This should be done in an earthen or glass vessel, never in tin or
Apply the solution with a wide flat brush to the
other metal receptacle.
Galvanized
surfaces which are required
CONSTRUCTION
89
galvanized surface, when it will assume a dark, almost black, color, which
on drying becomes a grayish film.
2. 14. 10. Cleaning
(a)
of Surfaces.
General.
Surfaces of metal to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned, removing

rust, loose mill scale, dirt, oil or grease and other foreign substances.
Unless
cleaning is to be done by sand blasting, all weld areas, before cleaning is
begun, shall be neutralized with a proper chemical, after which it shall be
thoroughly rinsed with water.
Three methods of cleaning are provided herein. Any of these methods
may be used unless otherwise specified.
A. Hand Cleaning.
The removal of rust, scale and dirt shall be done by the use of metal
brushes, scrapers, chisels, hammers or other effective means.
Oil and
grease shall be removed by the use of gasoline or benzine.
Bristle or wood
fiber brushes shall be used for removing loose dust.
(b) Method
( c)
Method B. Sandblasting.
All steel shall be cleaned by sandblasting.

The sandblasting shall
remove all loose mill scale and other substances down to the bare metal.
Special attention shall be given to cleaning of corners and re-entrant angles.
Before painting, sand adhering to the steel in corners and elsewhere shall
be removed.
The cleaning shall be approved by the engineer prior to any
painting. The material shall be painted before rust forms.
( d) Method
C. Flame Cleaning.
Unless otherwise provided in the supplemental specifications, all metal,

except the exposure of the inside of boxed members and other surfaces
which will be inaccessible to the flame cleaning operation after the member
is assembled, shall be flame cleaned in accordance with the following
operations :
(1) Oil, grease and similar adherent matter shall be removed by wash
ing with a suitable solvent. Excess solvent shall be wiped from the work
before proceeding with subsequent operations.
(2) The surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned and dehydrated (freed
of occluded moisture) by the passage of oxyacetylene flames which have an
The inner cones of these flames
oxygen to acetylene ratio of at least one.
shall have a ratio of length to port diameter of at least 8 and shall be not
more than 0.15 inch center to center. The oxyacetylene flames shall be
traversed over the surfaces of the steel in such manner and at such speed
that the surfaces are dehydrated; and dirt, rust, loose scale, scale in the
form of blisters or scabs, and similar foreign matter are freed by the
rapid, intense heating by the flames. The flames shall not be traversed so
slowly that loose scale or other foreign matter is fused to the surface of
the steel. The number, arrangement and manipulation of the flames shall
be such that all parts of the surfaces to be painted are adequately cleaned
and dehydrated.
(3) Promptly after the application of the flames, the surfaces of the
steel shall be wire brushed, hand scraped wherever necessary, and then
swept and dusted to remove all free material and foreign particles Com
pressed air shall not be used for this operation.
(4) Paint shall be applied promptly after the steel has been cleaned and
while the temperature of the steel is still above that of the surrounding
90
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
atmosphere, so that there

cleaned surfaces.
will
be
no
recondensation
of moisture
on the
( e) Surfaces Inaccessible After Assembly.

Unless otherwise provided, the exposure of the inside of boxed members
and other surfaces which will be inaccessible to the flame cleaning operation
after the member is assembled shall be cleaned by Method A, Hand Cleaning.
If flame cleaning of such surfaces is required, it shall be so stated in the
special provisions and the following will apply :
The inside surfaces of boxed members and other surfaces which will
be inaccessible to the flame cleaning operation
after the member is as
sembled, shall be cleaned as specified in paragraphs 1 and 2, and wire
brushed but not painted before the member is boxed or assembled. After
all fabrication of the member is completed, its inside surfaces shall be
hand wire brushed or hand scraped wherever necessary in order to remove
dirt and other foreign substances which may have accumulated after the
surfaces were originally cleaned.
The outside surfaces of the members
shall then be cleaned and dehydrated, wire brushed, and hand scraped
wherever necessary. All surfaces shall then be swept and dusted to remove
free material and foreign particles and the member completely painted.
2. 14. 11. Shop Painting.
Unless otherwise specified, steelwork shall be given one coat of approved

paint after it has been accepted by the inspector and before it is shipped
from the plant.
Surfaces not in contact but inaccessible after assembly or erection shall
be painted three coats.
The shop contact surfaces shall not be painted.
Field contact surfaces shall receive a shop coat of paint, except main splices
for chords of trusses and large girder splices involving multiple thicknesses
of material where a shop coat of paint would make erection difficult.
Field contact surfaces not painted with the shop coat shall be given a coat
of approved lacquer or other protective coating if it is expected that there
will be a prolonged period of exposure before erection.
Surfaces which will be in contact with concrete shall not be painted.
Structural steel which is to be welded shall not be painted before
welding is complete. If it is to be welded only in the fabricating shop and
subsequently erected by bolting, it shall receive one coat of paint after
shop welding is finished. Steel which is to be field welded shall be given
coating after
one coat of boiled linseed oil or other approved protective
shop welding and shop fabrication is completed.
Surfaces of iron and steel castings, either milled or finished, shall be
given one coat of paint.
With the exception of abutting joints and base plates, machine-finished
surfaces shall be coated as soon as practicable after being accepted, with
a hot mixture of white lead and tallow or other approved coating, before
removal from the shop.
Erection marks for the field identification of members and weight
marks shall be painted upon surface areas previously painted with the
shop coat. Material shall not be loaded for shipment until it is thoroughly
dry, and in any case not less than 24 hours after the paint has been applied.
2. 14. 12. Field Painting.
When the erection work is complete, including all riveting and straight
ening of bent metal, all adhering rust, scale, dirt, grease or other foreign
material shall be removed as specified under Cleaning of Surfaces.
CONSTRUCTION
91
As soon as the inspector has examined and approved all field rivets
driven, the heads of such rivets and field bolts, all welds and any surfaces
from which the shop or first coat of paint has become worn off or has
otherwise become defective, shall be cleaned and thoroughly covered with
one coat of shop-coat paint.
Surfaces to be riveted in contact and surfaces which will be in contact
with concrete shall not be painted.
Surfaces which will be inaccessible
after erection shall be painted with such field coats as are called for on
plans or authorized.
When the paint applied for retouching the shop coat
has thoroughly dried and the field cleaning has been satisfactorily com
pleted, such field coats as are called for on the plans or are authorized shall
In no case shall a succeeding coat be applied until the previous
be applied.
coat has dried throughout the full thickness of the paint film.
All small
cracks and cavities which were not sealed in a watertight manner by the
first field coat shall be filled with a pasty mixture of red lead and linseed oil
before the second coat is applied.
The following provision shall apply to the application of both field
coats. To secure a maximum coating on edges of plates or shapes, rivet
heads and other parts subjected to special wear and attack, the edges shall
first be striped with a longitudinal motion and the rivet heads with a rotary
motion of the brush, followed immediately by the general painting of the
whole surface, including the edges and rivet heads.
If, in the opinion of the engineer, traffic produces an objectionable
amount of dust, the contractor shall, at his own expense, allay the dust for
the necessary distance on each side of the bridge and take any other pre
cautions necessary to prevent dust and dirt from coming in contact with
freshly painted surfaces or with surfaces before the paint is applied.
The application of the second field coat shall be deferred until adjoining
concreting operations have
concrete work has been placed and finished.
damaged the paint, the surface shall be recleaned and repainted.
The contractor shall protect pedestrian, vehicular and other traffic
upon or underneath the bridge, and also all portions of the bridge super
structure and substructure, against damage or disfigurement by spatters,
splashes and smirches of paint or paint materials.
If
SECTION
15 Riprap
Unless otherwise modified herein,

of division IV.
all materials shall conform
to the
requirements
2. 15. 2. Dry Riprap, Class
for
Slopes.
specified, all stones used in this class of riprap shall

weigh between 50 and 150 pounds each and at least 60 per cent of them
shall weigh more than 100 pounds each.
The stones shall be placed upon a slope not steeper than the natural
angle of repose of the filling material. The stones shall be laid with close
joints. The courses shall be laid from the bottom of the bank upward, the
larger stones being placed in the lower courses. Open joints shall be filled
with spalls.
Unless otherwise
2. 15. 3. Dry Riprap, Class 2
for
Slopes.
The stones shall be placed upon

angle of repose of the filling material.
than the natural

Stones having one broad flat surface
a slope not steeper
HIGHWAY
92
BRIDGES
shall
be used when possible, this surface being

bed prepared for it and so placed as to overlap
laid on a horizontal earth

the underlying course, the
intent being to secure a lapped or "shingled" surface which will shed a
maximum amount of water. Fifty per cent of the mass shall be of stones
having a volume of 2 cubic feet or more. These stones shall be placed first
and roughly arranged in close contact.
The spaces between the larger
stones shall then be filled with stone of suitable size so placed as to leave
the surface evenly stepped, conforming to the contour required, and capable
of shedding water to the maximum degree practically attainable.
2. 15. 4. Mortared Riprap for Slopes.
Stone for this purpose shall, as far as practicable, be selected as to size
and shape in order to secure fairly large, flat-surfaced stone which will
lay up with a true and even surface and a minimum of voids. The stonu
shall be placed upon a slope not steeper than the natural angle of repose
of the slope material. Fifty per cent of the mass shall be broad flat stones,
2 cubic feet or more in volume, laid with the flat surface uppermost
and
parallel to the slope. These stones shall be placed first and roughly
arranged in close contact, the largest stones being placed near the base of
the slope. The spaces between the larger stones shall be filled with stones
of suitable size, leaving the surface smooth, reasonably tight and conform
ing to the contour required. In general, the stone shall be laid with a degree
of care that will insure for plane surfaces a maximum variation from a true
plane of not more than 1% inches in 4 feet. Warped and curved surfaces
shall have the same general degree of accuracy as specified above for plane
surfaces.
As each of the larger stones is placed, it shall be surrounded by fresh

mortar and adjacent stones shall be shoved into contact. After the larger
stones are in place, all of the spaces or openings between them shall be
filled with mortar and the smaller stones, then placed by shoving them
into position, forcing excess mortar to the surface and insuring that each
stone is carefully and firmly bedded laterally.
After the work has been completed as above described, all excess
mortar forced up shall be spread uniformly to completely fill all surface
voids.
All surface joints shall then be roughly pointed up either with
flush joints or with shallow, smooth raked joints.
2. 15. 5. Grouted Riprap
for
Slopes.
Grout for grouted riprap shall consist of one part of portland cement
and three parts of sand, thoroughly mixed with water to produce grout
having a thick, creamy consistency.
The stones shall be of the same sizes and placed in the same manner
as specified above for Dry Riprap, Class 1, care being taken during placing
to keep earth or sand from filling the spaces between the stones.
After
the stones are in place, the spaces. between them shall be completely filled
with grout from bottom to top, and the surface swept with a stiff broom.
No riprap shall be grouted in freezing weather, and in hot, dry weather
the work shall be protected from the sun and kept moist for at least three
days after grouting.
2. 15. 6. Stone Riprap
for Foundation Protection.
Stone riprap for pier and abutment protection shall range, in size,
up to derrick stone and shall be graded from coarse to fine in such manner
as to produce a minimum of voids. It shall be deposited where directed;
CONSTRUCTION
stone deposited contrary to directions
not be paid for.
2. 15. 7. Concrete
will
93
be considered
wasted
and
will
Riprap in Bags.
Concrete riprap in bags shall consist of Class "C" concrete in cement

sacks or suitable burlap bags. The bags shall be about two-thirds filled
with concrete, securely tied, and immediately placed in the work. When
used for foundation protection the bags of concrete shall be placed in
accordance with the provisions governing the placement of stone riprap for
foundation protection as specified above. When used for slope protection,
riprap of this material shall be placed in conformance with the above
specified provisions governing the placement of Dry Riprap, Class 1.
Concrete Slab Riprap

2. 15. 8. -General.
The concrete slabs for riprap shall consist of concrete, cast in place,
inches thick, unless otherwise specified or noted on the plans. The slabs
shall be of two types, plain concrete or reinforced.
reinforcement is
required, it shall be furnished as shown on the plans. Except as modified
herein, construction shall conform to specifications for Concrete Masonry,
4
division
2. 15. 9
If
II.
Concrete.
The concrete shall be Class B unless the riprap is exposed to salt water,
in which case it shall be Class A. It shall be of such consistency that it
can be placed without the use of top forms.
2. 15. 10. Placing.
A trench of the dimensions shown on the plans or as given by the

engineer shall be dug at the toe of the slope and the slope shall be dressed
to the lines and grades given by the engineer.
The riprap shall be placed in blocks of dimensions as shown on the
plans, alternate blocks being poured and the remaining panels filled in later.
Unless otherwise specified, the blocks shall be laid in horizontal courses
and successive courses shall break joints with preceding ones. The joint
details shall be as shown on the plans, but if not shown the horizontal joints
shall be normal to the slope and shall be cold joints without filler. The
joints extending up the slope shall be formed with %-inch lumber, which
shall be removed and the joint left open. The slabs shall be finished with
a wood float.
and Payment.
Payment for riprap shall include the cost of furnishing all materials
and tools, the preparation of the subgrade, the laying and grouting of the
stone and all other work incidental to finished construction in accordance
The basis of payment shall be as follows:
with these specifications.
Stone riprap for slope walls shall be paid for on the basis of the
actual number of square yards of material placed.
Stone riprap for foundation protection shall be paid for on the basis
of volume or weight as may be specified.
Concrete riprap in bags shall be paid for on the basis of the actual
number of cubic yards of riprap placed.
Concrete slab riprap shall be paid for on the basis of the actual number
HIGHWAY
94
BRIDGES
If reinforcing is specified, it shall

of square yards of riprap placed.
included in the contract price for concrete slab riprap.
SECTION
16Concrete
be
Cribbing
2. 16. 1. General.
The construction of concrete cribbing shall consist of the furnishing

and installation of reinforced concrete crib members and the placing of
The crib members shall be cast in the
the interior filling materials.
proportions and in conformance with the general requirements set forth
for precast concrete bearing piles. Dowels, where used shall be of wroughtiron or galvanized steel not less than 1 inch in diameter and of the required
length.
Casings for dowels shall be of galvanized steel or iron pipe not less
than 1% inches in diameter.
The details of the crib members and their arrangement shall be as
shown on the plans.
If specific details for reinforcement are not shown on
the plans, or if the contractor is permitted to purchase the crib members
from manufacturers, he shall submit detailed specifications and plans for
the approval of the engineer, and such plans must be approved before
delivery of the material is begun.
All members shall be free from depressions and spalled, patched, or
plastered surfaces or edges, or any other defect which may impair their
strength or durability. Cracked or otherwise defective members will be
rejected.
The foundation or bed for the cribbing shall be firm and shall be
approved by the engineer before any of the crib work is placed. In general,
transverse concrete sill members shall be used to support the lower cribbing
course.
Crib members shall be carefully handled and erected in such
Each member shall
manner as to avoid any injury due to shock or impact.
be secured by approved interlocking details or by means of dowels passing
through galvanized casings. Any members which become cracked or other
wise injured during erection shall be completely renewed and replaced.
The filling for the interior of the crib shall progress simultaneously
with the erection of the cribbing, and shall be of approved material placed
in layers not to exceed 12 inches in thickness and tamped or consolidated
to the satisfaction of the engineer.
and Payment.
Concrete cribbing will be paid for at the contract price per cubic foot
for concrete cribbing complete in place. This price shall include all mate
rials, equipment, tools, and labor incidental to the satisfactory erection of
The volume to be paid for
the cribbing, including necessary excavation.
will be the actual net volume of the concrete in the crib members as shown
on the plans.
The filling for the interior of the crib will be paid for at the
contract price per cubic yard for crib filling in place.
SECTION 17 Waterproofing
2. 17.
be
1. General.
When specified on the plans or in the special provisions, surfaces shall

waterproofed as specified herein.
CONSTRUCTION
95
The bituminous material, fabric, and joint filler used for waterproofing
shall conform to the requirements
specified in division IV.
Sand for the
mortar protection course shall conform to the requirements of division IV.
2. 17. 3. Storage of Fabric
The fabric shall be stored in a dry, protected
not be stored on end.
place.
The rolls shall
2. 17. 4. Preparation of Surface.

All concrete surfaces which are to be waterproofed shall be reasonably
smooth, and free from projections or holes which might cause puncture of
the membrane.
The surface shall be dry, so as to prevent the formation
of steam when the hot asphalt or tar is applied, and, immediately before
the application of the waterproofing, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned
of dust and loose materials.
No waterproofing shall be done in wet weather, nor when the tempera
ture is below 35 F., without special authorization from the engineer.
Should the surface of the concrete become temporarily damp, it shall be
covered with a 2-inch layer of hot sand, which shall be allowed to remain
in place from one to two hours, or long enough to produce a warm and
surface-dried condition, after which the sand shall be swept back, uncover
ing sufficient surface for beginning work, and the operation repeated as
the work progresses.
2. 17. 5. Application General.
Asphalt shall be heated to a temperature between 300 and 350 P.,

and tar for hot application shall be heated to a temperature between 200
The heating
and 250 P., with frequent stirring to avoid local overheating.
kettles shall be equipped with thermometers.
In all cases, the waterproofing shall begin at the low point of the
surface to be waterproofed, so that water will run over and not against
or along the laps.
The first strip of fabric shall be of half width; the second shall be
full width, lapped the full width of the first sheet; and the third and each
succeeding strip shall be full width and lapped so that there will be two
layers of fabric at all points with laps not less than 2 inches wide. All
end laps shall be at least 12 inches.
Beginning at the low point of the surface to be waterproofed, a coating
of primer shall be applied and allowed to dry before the first coat of
asphalt is applied.
The waterproofing shall then be applied as follows :
Beginning at the low point of the surface to be waterproofed, a section
about 20 inches wide and the full length of the surface shall be mopped
with the hot asphalt or tar, and there shall be rolled into it, immediately
following the mopping, the first strip of fabric, of half width, which shall
be carefully pressed into place so as to eliminate all air bubbles and obtain
close conformity with the surface.
This strip and an adjacent section of
the surface of a width equal to slightly more than half the width of the
fabric being used shall then be mopped with hot asphalt or tar, and a full
width of the fabric shall be rolled into this, completely covering the first
strip, and pressed into place as before. This second strip and an adjacent
section of the concrete surface shall then be mopped with hot asphalt or
tar and the third strip of fabric "shingled" on so as to lap the first strip
not less than 2 inches.
This process shall be continued until the entire
surface is covered, each strip of fabric lapping at least 2 inches over the
HIGHWAY
96
BRIDGES
last strip but one. The entire surface shall then be given a final mopping
of hot asphalt or tar.
The completed waterproofing shall be a firmly bonded membrane com
posed of two layers of fabric and three moppings of asphalt or tar,
together with a coating of primer. Under no circumstances shall one layer
of fabric touch another layer at any point or touch the surface, as there
must be at least three complete moppings of asphalt or tar.
In all cases the mopping on concrete shall cover the surface so that
no gray spots appear, and on cloth it shall be sufficiently
heavy to com
pletely conceal the weave. On horizontal surfaces not less than 12 gallons
of asphalt or tar shall be used for each 100 square feet of finished work,
and on vertical surfaces not less than 15 gallons shall be used. The work
shall be so regulated that, at the close of a day's work, all cloth that is
laid shall have received the final mopping of asphalt or tar. Special care
shall be taken at all laps to see that they are thoroughly sealed down.
2. 17. 6. Application Details.
At the edges of the membrane and at any points where it is punctured

by such appurtenances as drains or pipes, suitable provisions shall be made
to prevent water from getting between the waterproofing and the water
proofed surface.
All flashing at curbs and against girders, spandrel walls, etc., shall be
done with separate sheets lapping the main membrane not less than 12
inches.
Flashing shall be closely sealed either with a metal counterflashing or by embedding the upper edges of the flashing in a groove
poured full of joint filler.
Joints which are essentially open joints but which are not designed
to provide for expansion shall first be caulked with oakum and lead wool
and then filled with hot joint filler.
Expansion joints, both horizontal and vertical, shall be provided with
sheet copper or lead in "U" or "V" form in accordance with the details, and
after the membrane has been placed shall be filled with hot joint filler. The
membrane shall be carried continuously across all expansion joints.
At the ends of the structure the membrane shall be carried well down
on the abutments and suitable provision made for all movement.
2. 17. 7. Damage Patching.
Care shall be taken to prevent injury to the finished membrane by
the passage over it of men or wheelbarrows,
or by throwing any material
Any damage which may occur shall be repaired by patching.
on it.
Patches shall extend at least 12 inches beyond the outermost damaged
portion and the second ply shall extend at least 3 inches beyond the first.
2. 17. 8. Protection Course.
Over the waterproofing membrane, constructed as specified above, there
shall be constructed a protection course which, unless otherwise specified
or shown on the plans, shall be a 2-inch course of mortar mixed in the
proportion of one part portland cement and two parts sand. This mortar
course shall be reinforced midway between its top and bottom surfaces
with wire netting of 6-inch mesh and No. 12 gauge, or its equivalent.
The top surface shall be troweled to a smooth, hard finish and, where
required, true to grade.
The construction of the protection course shall follow the waterproofing

that the latter will not be exposed without protection for more
so closely
than
24
hours.
CONSTRUCTION
97
and Payment.
Payment for waterproofing shall include the cost of furnishing all

equipment, materials and labor necessary for the satisfactory completion
of the waterproofing membrane and the protection course.
Payment will be made on the basis of the number of square yards of
waterproofing complete in place.
2. 18.
1. General.
SECTION 18 Dampproofing
When specified on the plans or in the

shall be dampproofed as specified herein.
2. 18. 2
special
provisions,
surfaces
Materials.
The material used for dampproofing
shall be tar or asphalt as required

by the special provisions.
Tar for absorptive treatment (or primer) and tar seal coat shall
comply with the requirements specified in division IV. Asphalt for primer
and seal coat shall conform to the requirements for Asphalt, division IV.
of
Surface.
The surface to which the dampproofing coating is to be applied shall

be cleaned of all loose and foreign material and dirt and shall be dry.
When necessary the engineer may require the surface to be scrubbed with
water and a stiff brush, after which the surface shall be allowed to dry
before application of the primer.
2. 18. 4. Application.
Concrete, brick or other surfaces which are to be protected by damp
They
proofing shall be thoroughly clean before the primer is applied.
shall then be brush or spray painted with two or more coats (as indicated
on the plans or in the special provisions) of tar or asphalt for absorptive
treatment.
Below ground not less than two coats shall be applied, using
On the well-primed surface
% gallon for each square yard of surface.
one application of tar or asphalt seal coat shall be applied by brush, using
Vio gallon per square yard.
Care shall be taken to confine all paints to the areas to be water

proofed and to prevent disfigurement of any other parts of the structure
by dripping or spreading of the tar or asphalt.
and Payment.
Payment for dampproofing shall include the cost of furnishing all

equipment, materials and labor necessary for the satisfactory completion
of the work.
Payment will
dampproofing
be made on the basis of the number

complete in place.
SECTION 19Name
of square yards of
Plates
2. 19. 1. General Requirements.
When specified, the contractor for the superstructure shall furnish and
install name plates of such form, dimensions, material and design as may
Unless otherwise provided, the contract price for
be shown on the plans.
the superstructure shall include the cost of such name plates.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
98
No permanent plates or markers other than those shown on the plans

or approved by the engineer will be permitted on any structure.
SECTION 20 Timber
(a) Lumber
Structures
and Timber.
Lumber and timber shall conform to the requirements of division IV.

For the various structural purposes the following grades shall be used :
Structural purpose
(1) Truss members,
Floor beams
tension
5" x 8"
and
larger
Stringers
Other floor members
(2)
(3)
Standard grade
Size of member
Il800#f, or
|
Caps
Posts, bridge and guard rail
Sills
Mud sills
Nailing strips
Truss members, compression
Timbers (culverts)
6" x 6" and

larger
1600#f, or 1400#f
structural beams and

stringers
1200#c or 1100#c structural

posts and timbers
Joist
Decking, wearing
Other floor members
Rails
Rail posts
Nailing strips
1600ff, or 1400#f
structural joist and plank.
4"_ and
thinner
1800#f,
Truss members, compression

and tension
Guard rail
'
(4) Wheel and felloe guards
x 6" and
larger
/
\
1100#c structural
posts and
1200#f or 1100#f
joist
timbers
(5) Sub-decking, flat
Sub-decking, laminated
Bracing, sway, sasl , and
longitudinal
4" and
thinner
Girts
Bulkhead plank
Scupper blocks
Cleats
Grillage
(6)
Cross-bridging
Sidewalk
Firestops
1
V
(7) Truss housing
Inside sheathing
(8-
For temporary structures which
2" and 3"

thick
and 1U"
thick
plank
<
No.
dimension
I D select
boards
and
finish,
or No.
are for use only during erection or for emer

gency use, the grades of 1200#f or llOOifc may be substituted for 1800#f,
1600#f, 1400#f, or 1200)fc where specified above; No. 1 Dimension for 1200#f
and llOOff, and No. 1 timbers for llOOff.
CONSTRUCTION
99
(b) Structural
Shapes.
Rods, plates and shapes shall be of structural steel or wrought-iron,
of division IV. Eyebars shall
as specified, conforming to the requirements
conform to the requirements of division IV for structural steel eyebars.
( c)
the
(d)
Castings.
Castings shall be cast steel or gray-iron,

requirements of division IV.
as
specified,
conforming to
Hardware.
Machine bolts, drift-bolts and dowels may be either wrought-iron or

medium steel. Washers may be cast O-gee or malleable castings, or they
may be cut from medium steel or wrought-iron plate, as specified.
Machine bolts shall have square heads and nuts, unless otherwise speci
Nails shall be cut or round wire of standard form. Spikes shall be
fied.
cut or wire spikes, or boat spikes, as specified.
Nails, spikes, bolts, dowels, washers and lag screws shall be black or
galvanized,
as specified.
Unless otherwise specified, all hardware, except malleable iron con

nectors, for treated timber bridges, shall be galvanized or cadmium plated.
2. 20. 2
Timber Connectors.
Timber connectors shall be one of the following types, as specified on

the plans; the split ring, the toothed ring, the shear plate, the claw plate
or the spike grid. The split ring and the shear plate shall be installed in
precut grooves of dimensions as given herein or as recommended by the
manufacturer. The toothed ring and the spike grid shall be forced into the
contact surfaces of the timbers joined by means of pressure equipment.
All connectors of this type at a joint shall be embedded simultaneously and
uniformly.
The claw plate shall be installed by a combination of both
methods, partially by precut grooving and partially by pressure.
Fabrication of all connectored structures shall be done prior to treat
ment. When prefabricated from templates or shop details, bolt holes shall
not be more than %e inch from required placement.
Bolt holes shall be Vie
inch larger than bolt diameter.
Bolt holes shall be bored perpendicular to
the face of the timber.
Timber after fabrication shall be stored in a manner which will pre
of the members before assembly.
Connectors for treated timber structures, except those of malleable iron,
shall be galvanized in accordance with A. S. T. M. specification A-123 47.
Connectors shall conform to the requirements of division IV, section 27.
Dimensions of material and details not otherwise specified shall meet
with the approval of the engineer.
vent changes in the dimensions
Storage of Material.
Lumber and timber on the site of the work shall be stored in piles.
Untreated material shall be open-stacked at least 12 inches above the
ground surface and piled to shed water and prevent warping.
When re
quired by the engineer, it shall be protected from the weather by suitable
2. 20. 3
covering.
Creosoted timber and piling shall be close-stacked and piled to prevent
warping.
The ground underneath and in the vicinity of all material piles shall
be cleared of weeds and rubbish.
HIGHWAY
100
BRIDGES
2. 20. 4. Workmanship.
None but competent
Workmanship shall be first class throughout.
bridge carpenters shall be employed and all framing shall be true and
exact.
Unless otherwise specified, nails and spikes shall be driven with
just sufficient force to set the heads flush with the surface of the wood.
Deep hammer marks in wood surfaces shall be considered evidence of poor
workmanship and sufficient cause for removal of the workman causing them.
The workmanship on all metal parts shall conform to the requirements
specified for steel structures, division II.
2. 20. 5. Treated
Timber.
(a) Handling.
Treated timber shall be carefully handled without sudden dropping,
breaking of outer fibers, bruising or penetrating the surface with tools.
It shall be handled with rope slings. Cant hooks, peaveys, pikes or hooks
shall not be used.
(b) Framing and Boring.
All cutting, framing, and boring of treated timbers shall be
treatment in so far as is practicable.
When treated timbers are
done before
to be placed
in waters infested by marine borers, untreated cuts, borings or other joint
framings below high water elevation shall be avoided.
(c)
Cuts and Abrasions.

cuts in treated piles or timbers, and all abrasions, after having
been carefully trimmed, shall be covered with 2 applications of a mixture
of 60 per cent creosote oil and 40 per cent roofing pitch or brush coated
with at least two applications of hot creosote oil and covered with hot
roofing pitch.
All
(d) Bolt
Holes.
holes bored, after treatment, shall be treated with creosote oil
by means of an approved pressure bolt hole treater. Any unfilled holes,
after being treated with creosote oil, shall be plugged with creosoted plugs.
All bolt
(e) Temporary
Attachment.
Whenever with the approval of the engineer, forms or temporary braces
are attached to treated timber with nails or spikes, the holes shall be filled
by driving galvanized nails or spikes flush with the surface or plugging
holes as required for bolt holes.
2. 20. 6. Untreated
Timber.
In structures of
untreated
timber the following surfaces shall be
thoroughly coated with two coats of hot creosote oil before assembling:
Ends, tops and all contact surfaces of sills, caps, floor beams and stringers ;
and all ends, joints, and contact surfaces of bracing and truss members.
The back faces of bulkheads and all other timber which is to be in contact
with earth, metal or other timber shall be similarly treated.
Bolts passing through non-resinous wood shall preferably be galvanized.
2. 20. 7. Treatment of Pile Heads,
(a) General.
Pile heads, after cutting to receive the caps, and prior to placing the
caps, shall be treated to prevent decay.
The heads of treated timber piles shall be protected by one of the fol
lowing methods, as specified on the plans. If not otherwise specified, method
B shall be used.
CONSTRUCTION
( b) Method A Zinc
101
Covering.
The sawed surface shall be covered with three applications of a mixture

per cent creosote oil and 40 per cent roofing pitch or thoroughly brush
coated with three applications of hot creosote oil and covered with hot roofing
pitch. Before placing the cap, a sheet of 12 gage. (.028-inch) zinc shall be
placed on each pile head. The sheet zinc shall be of sufficient size to project
at least 4 inches outside of the pile, and it shall be bent down, neatly
trimmed and securely fastened to the faces of the pile, with large headed
galvanized roofing nails.
of
60
(c) Method B Fabric
Covering.
The heads of all piles shall be covered with alternate layers of hot pitch
and loosely woven fabric similar to membrane waterproofing, using four
applications of pitch and three layers of fabric. The cover shall measure at
least 6 inches more in dimension than the diameter of the pile and shall be
neatly folded down over the pile and secured by large headed galvanized
nails or by binding or serving with not less than seven complete turns of gal
vanized wire securely held in place by large-headed galvanized nails and
staples.
The edges of the fabric projecting below the wire wrapping shall
be trimmed to present a workmanlike appearance.
The heads of untreated piles shall be given one of the following treat
ments, as may be specified or directed by the engineer :
(1) The sawed surface shall be thoroughly brush coated with two ap
plications of hot creosote oil.
(2) The sawed surface shall be heavily coated with red lead paint, after
which it shall be covered with cotton duck, of at least 8-ounce weight, which
shall be folded down over the sides of the pile and firmly secured thereto
with large-headed roofing nails. The edges of the duck shall be trimmed
to give a workmanlike appearance.
The duck shall then be waterproofed
by being thoroughly saturated and coated with one or more applications of
red lead paint.
2. 20. 8. Holes
for Bolts,
Dowels, Rods and Lag Screws.
Holes for round drift-bolts and dowels shall be bored with a bit Me
inch less in diameter than the bolt or dowel to be used. The diameter of
holes for square drift-bolts or dowels shall be equal to the least dimension
of the bolt or dowel.
Holes for machine bolts shall be bored with a bit the same diameter
as the bolt.
Holes for rods shall be bored with a bit Me inch greater in diameter
than the rod.
Holes for lag screws shall be bored with a bit not larger than the body
of the screw at the base of the thread.
2. 20. 9. Bolts and Washers.
A washer, of the size and type specified, shall be used under all bolt
heads and nuts which would otherwise come in contact with wood.
The nuts of all bolts shall be effectually locked after they have been
finally tightened.
2. 20. 10. Countersinking.
Countersinking shall be done wherever smooth faces are required.

Horizontal recesses formed for countersinking shall be painted with hot
creosote oil, and, after the bolt or screw is in place, shall be filled with hot
pitch.
HIGHWAY
102
BRIDGES
Framing.
2. 20. 11
All
lumber and timber shall be accurately cut and framed to a close fit
in such manner that the joints will have even bearing over the entire con
tact surfaces.
Mortises shall be true to size for their full depth and tenons
shall fit snugly.
No shimming will be permitted in making joints, nor will
open joints be accepted.
Pile Bents.
The piles shall be driven as indicated on the plans, with a variation
of the portion above the ground of not more than % inch per foot from the
vertical or batter indicated, or so that the cap may be placed in its proper
location without inducing excessive stresses in the piles. Excessive manipu
lation of the piles will not be permitted and the contractor will be required
to redrive or use other satisfactory methods to avoid such manipulations.
No shimming on tops of piles will be permitted.
The piles for any one bent shall be carefully selected as to size, to
avoid undue bending or distortion of the sway bracing.
However, care shall
be exercised in the distribution of piles of varying sizes to secure uniform
strength and rigidity in the bents of any given structure.
Cut-offs shall be accurately made to insure perfect bearing between the
2. 20. 12
cap and piles.

2. 20. 13. Framed
(a) Mud
Bent:
SUU.
Untreated timber used for mud sills shall be of heart cedar, heart
cypress, redwood, or other durable timber.
Mud sills shall be firmly and
evenly bedded to solid bearing and tamped in place.
(b)
Concrete Pedestals.
Concrete pedestals for the support of framed bents shall be carefully

finished so that the sills or posts will take even bearing on them.
Dowels
of not less than %-inch diameter and projecting at least 6 inches above
the tops of the pedestals, shall be set in them when they are cast, for
anchoring the sills or posts.
(c) SUh.
Sills shall have true and even bearing on mud sills, piles or pedestals.
They shall be drift-bolted to mud sills or piles with bolts of not less than
%-inch diameter and extending into the mud sills or piles at least 6 inches.
When possible, all earth shall be removed from contact with sills so that
there will be free air circulation around them.
(d)
Posts.
be fastened to pedestals with dowels of not less than %-inch

diameter, extending at least 6 inches into the posts.
Posts shall be fastened to sills by one of the following methods, as indi
cated on the plans:
(1) By dowels of not less than %-inch diameter, extending at least
6 inches into posts and sills.
(2) By drift-bolts of not less than %-inch diameter driven diagonally
through the base of the post and extending at least 9 inches into the sill.
Posts shall
2. 20. 14. Caps.

Timber caps shall be placed, with ends aligned, in a manner to secure
an even and uniform bearing over the tops of the supporting posts or piles.
All caps shall be secured by drift-bolts of not less than %-inch diameter,
CONSTRUCTION
at least 9 inches into the posts or piles.
approximately in the center of the post or pile.
extending
103
The drift-bolts shall
be
2. 20. 1S. Bracing.

The ends of bracing shall be bolted through the pile, post or cap with
a bolt of not less than %-inch diameter.
Intermediate intersections shall
be bolted, or spiked with wire or boat spikes, as indicated on the plans.
In
all cases spikes shall be used in addition to bolts.
2. 20. 16. Stringers.
Stringers shall be sized at bearings and shall be placed in position so

that knots near edges will be in the top portions of the stringers.
Outside stringers may have butt joints with the ends cut on a taper,
but interior stringers shall be lapped to take bearing over the full width
of the floor beam or cap at each end. The lapped ends of untreated stringers
shall be separated at least Vz inch for the circulation of air and shall be
securely fastened by drift-bolting where specified. When stringers are two
panels in length the joints shall be staggered.
Cross-bridging between stringers shall be neatly and accurately framed
and securely toe-nailed with at least two nails in each end.
All crossbridging members shall have full bearing at each end against the sides of
stringers. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, cross-bridging shall be
placed at the center of each span.
2. 20. 17. Plank Floors.
Plank shall be of the grade specified in division II. Unless otherwise

specified they shall be surfaced one side and one edge.
Single plank floors shall consist of a single thickness of plank supported
by stringers or joists. The planks shall be laid heart side down, with
inch openings between them for seasoned material and with tight joints
for unseasoned material. Each plank shall be securely spiked to each joist.
The planks shall be carefully graded as to thickness and so laid that no
two adjacent planks shall vary in thickness by more than He inch.
Two-ply timber floors shall consist of two layers of flooring supported
on stringers or joists.
The lower course shall be pressure-treated
with
creosote oil. The top course may be laid either diagonal or parallel to the
centerline of roadway, as specified and each floor piece shall be securely
Joints shall be staggered at least 3 feet.
fastened to the lower course.
If the top flooring is placed parallel to the centerline of the roadway,
special care shall be taken to securely fasten the ends of the flooring. At
each end of the bridge these members shall be beveled.
2. 20. 18. Laminated
or Strip Floors.
The strips shall be of the grade specified in division II. The strips
shall be placed on edge, at right angles to the center line of roadway.
Each
strip shall be spiked to the preceding strip at each end and at approximately
18-inch intervals with the spikes driven alternately near the top and bottom
edges.
The spikes shall be of sufficient length to pass through two strips
and at least half-way through the third strip.
If timber supports are used every other strip shall be toe-nailed to
The size of the spikes shall be as shown on the plans.
every other support.
When specified on the plans, the strips shall be securely attached to steel
supports by the use of approved galvanized metal clips. Care shall be taken
to have each strip vertical and tight against the preceding one, and bearing
evenly on all the supports.
104
HIGHWAY
<
BRIDGES
2. 20. 19. Wheel Guards and Railings.

Wheel guards and railing shall be accurately framed in accordance
with the plans and erected true to line and grade.
Unless otherwise specified, wheel guards shall be surfaced one side
and one edge (S1S1E) and rails and rail posts shall be surfaced on four
sides (S4S).
Wheel guards shall be laid in sections not less than 12 feet long.
2. 20. 20
Trusses.
Trusses, when completed, shall show no irregularities of line. Chords

shall be straight and true from end to end in horizontal projection and, in
vertical projection, shall show a smooth curve through panel points con
forming to the correct camber. All bearing surfaces shall fit accurately.
Uneven or rough cuts at the points of bearing shall be cause for rejection
of the piece containing the defect.
2. 20. 21. Truss Housings.
The carpentry on truss housings shall be equal in all respects to the
best house carpentry. The finished appearance of the housing is considered
of primary importance and special care shall be taken to secure a high
quality of workmanship and finish on this portion of the structure. Work
men wearing shoes with caulks will not be permitted on the roof.
2. 20. 22. Erection of Housing and Railings.
Unless otherwise directed by the engineer, housing and railings shall

built after the removal of the falsework and the adjustment of the
trusses to correct alignment and camber.
be
2. 20. 23. Painting.
Rails and rail posts, untreated timber, or timber treated with preserva
tive salts shall be painted with three coats of paint.
Parts of the structure, other than rails and rail posts, which are to be
painted, shall be designated on the plans or in the special provisions.
Metal parts, except hardware, shall be given one coat of shop paint and,
after erection, two coats of field paint.
and Payment.
Payment for timber structures shall include the furnishing of ma

terials, preservative treatment, equipment, tools and labor necessary for
the erection and painting of the work in a satisfactory manner.
Lumber and timber, unless otherwise specified, shall be paid for at the
contract price per 1,000 feet board measure (M.B.M.) for material remain
ing in the finished structure, including the cost of all hardware. Computa
tions of the amount of lumber and timber in the structure shall be based on
nominal sizes and the shortest commercial length which could be used. No
other allowance for waste will be made.
Metal parts, other than hardware, shall be paid for at the contract
price per pound, the weight being computed in the same manner as specified
for steel structures, division II.
SECTION
21
Preservative
Treatments
for Timber
2. 21. 1. General.
The kind of preservative treatment required

the special provisions or as noted on the plans.
shall be one of the following:
shall be as specified in
The type of treatment
CONSTRUCTION
Creosote oil.
Creosote-coal-tar
solution.
Creosote-petroleum
solution.
Zinc chloride.
dinitrophenol solution
Sodium fluoride-arsenate
Chromated zinc chloride.
Zinc meta-arsenite (Z.M.A.).
105
(Wolman Salts).
The preservatives specified herein are not intended to be used inter

changeably, but the kind of preservative to be used shall be adopted for its
suitability to the conditions of exposure to which it will be subjected. Some
of the conditions to be considered are: effect of marine borers, effect of
termites, action of exposure to water and leeching of the preservative, effect
of contact with the ground, painting requirements and cleanliness require
Experience records for the particular exposure intended shall be
ments.
given consideration in selecting the treatment to be used.
Treatments are subject to the following limitations:
(1) Creosote-petroleum solution shall not be used for treating southern
pine piles.
solution treatment shall not be used for ma
(2) Creosote-petroleum
terial that will or may be exposed to attack by marine borers.
(3) Generally, salts treatment shall be used for material which has to
be painted.
(4) Wood treated with salts shall not be used where the wood is in
direct contact with the ground, except where painting is required and wood
treated with salts shall not be used where it will be in contact with water.
Timber, lumber and piling shall conform to the requirements

The preservatives
and shall be inspected prior to treatment.
conform to the requirements of division IV.
IV
of division
used shall
2. 21. 3. Preparation for Treatment.
(a)
Sorting.
Whenever it is practicable the material shall be sorted into one kind or

designated group of kinds of wood and into pieces of approximately equal
size and moisture and sapwood content, and so separated as to insure contact
of the treating medium with all surfaces.
(b) Framing.
So far as
practicable, all adzing, boring, chamfering, framing, gaining,

mortizing, surfacing, etc., shall be done prior to treatment.
(c) Incising.
All Douglas fir
treated with creosote or creosote-petroleum

is 2 inches or over, shall be incised in a
Lumber having a thickness of 3 inches
machine.
suitable power-driven
and over shall be incised on all four sides. Lumber less than 3 inches thick
shall be incised on the wide faces only, except where indicated on the
drawings. The spacing and shape of the cutting teeth and the method
The depth of
of incising shall be such as to produce a uniform penetration.
the incisions shall be not less than the following :
lumber
mixture, whose least dimension
HIGHWAY
106
BRIDGES
Minimum depth
Size
of incision
2x12
3 x 12
4x12
8x10
y2"
10x12
12x12
%"
%"
Intermediate sizes in proportion.
2. 21. 4. Amount
of Preservative.
The net retention in any charge shall be not less than 90 per cent of the
quantity of preservative that may be specified; but the average retention
by the material treated under any contract or order and the average reten
tion of any five consecutive charges shall be at least 100 per cent of the
quantity specified. Unless otherwise specified in the proposal or plans, the
minimum amount of preservative retained shall be as follows:
(a)
Creosote, Creosote
Treatment
Coal-Tar Solution or Creosote Petroleum Solution
Material
Structural timber (Southern pine)

Structural timber (Douglas Fir) 5 inches or less in thickness .
Structural timber (Douglas Fir) more than 5 inches in thick
Min. net retention

of preservative per
cu. ft. of wood
10 lbs. empty cell
. 10 lbs. empty cell
ness
Southern yellow pine piles for land or fresh water use

Douglas Fir piles for land or fresh water use
Southern yellow pine piles and timber in salt water subject to
attack by marine borers
Douglas Fir piles in salt water subject to attack by marine
borers
Douglas Fir timber in salt water subject to attack by marine
borers
(b)
8 lbs. empty cell

12 lbs. empty cell
10 lbs. empty cell
20 lbs. full cell

14 lbs.
full
eel!
14 lbs.
full
cell
Salts Treatments
Zinc chloride
Sodium
fluoride-arsenate-dinitrophenol
Salts)
Chromated zinc chloride
Zinc meta-arsenite (Z.M.A.)
2. 21. 5. Pressure
Treatment
Pounds dry salt per

cu. ft.
solution
1.00
(Wolman
.35
.75
.35
Processes.
All lumber
and piles shall be treated according to current A. W. P. A.

Standard Specifications for Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes.
When a clean treatment is desired it shall be obtained by using the
optional method provided in the treatment specifications.
required it shall
be so stated in the special provisions.
If
SECTION 22 Timber Cribbing

2. 22. 1. Material,
(a) Timber.
sion
Timber used for cribbing shall conform to the requirements of divi

IV, and unless otherwise specified shall be the same as for caps, posts,
CONSTRUCTION
If
sills, etc.
treated timber is used all hardware shall be galvanized
mium plated.
(b)
107
or cad
Logs.
Logs used for cribbing shall conform

specified for timber piles in division IV.
in quality to the requirements
2. 22. 2. Preparation.
When timber or logs are to be treated, all framing shall be completed

before treatment and all surfaces cleaned of dirt and grease.
All timber and log framing shall be done in a workmanlike manner
and true to line and angle.
2. 22. 3. Dimensions.
(a)
Timber.
(b)
Logs.
When cribs are constructed of sawed timber, no timber shall be less

The face timber in the base tier shall be
than 8 inches in least dimension.
not less than 10 inches in least dimension.
When cribs are constructed of logs, no face log shall have a diameter
at the small end of less than 10 inches and tie logs shall be not less than
The face log in the base tier shall
8 inches in diameter at the small end.
be not less than 12 inches in diameter at the small end.
All logs for cribbing shall be selected from the logs available with as
small an amount of taper as possible.
The length of logs used shall be
.somewhat dependent upon the taper.
(a) Foundation.
The foundation or bed for the cribbing shall be excavated to exact

grade and shall be approved as to bearing quality by the engineer before any
of the crib work is placed.
(b) Mud Sills.
When mud sills are used, they shall be set at right angles to the face of
the cribbing and firmly and evenly beaded in the foundation material.
Mud sills shall be not less than 12 by 12 inches in squared cross-sectional
dimensions and not less than 3 feet in length.
They shall be spaced not
more than 4 feet apart.
Log or timber mud sills shall be leveled to fit the first tier resting upon
them. In no case shall there be less than 100 square inches of flat contact
surface between the face log and each mud sill.
Foundation material shall be thoroughly tamped around all mud sills.
Face Logs or Timbers.
The logs or timbers in the base tier and in alternate tiers above the
and, preferably, shall extend the full
base shall be as long as practicable
In intermediate tiers they may have a length of not
length of the face.
Crib faces shall be laid solid
less than 8 feet, arranged to break joints.
or with spacers as indicated on the plans.
All framed surfaces shall receive a heavy coat of approved preservative
at the time of assembling.
Care shall be exercised in the erection of all cribs to produce a true
face as shown on the plans and all timbers or logs in faces shall be hori
(c)
zontal.
HIGHWAY
108
(d)
Ties.
(e)
Fastening.
BRIDGES
The length of ties shall be sufficient to develop the required anchorage

against overturing, and in no case shall the length of tie extending into
the fill be less than two-thirds of the height of fill above the tie in question.
Ties shall be anchored to the face walls by framing, either dove-tailed
or by sufficient projection beyond the face of the crib to form the proper
anchorage.
Ties shall be anchored at the fill end to cross pieces fastened
to them at right angles by drift-bolts or other suitable means.
Ties shall be spaced not more than 8 feet center to center in any
horizontal tier and shall be staggered with the next adjacent tier of ties.
Tiers of ties shall be not more than 3 feet apart vertically.
Each successive tier of logs or timbers shall be drift-bolted to the one
upon which it rests by drifts not less than % inch in diameter and of suffi
cient length to extend through 2 tiers and not less than 4 inches into the
third tier.
Drift-bolts shall be staggered and not more than 8 feet center to center
in each tier.
All end joints and splices shall be half-lapped for 10 inches and drifted
at the center.
Before assembling, all framed joints in contact shall be heavily coated
with an approved preservative.
2. 22. 5. Filling.
Filling inside and around cribs shall be of the material specified and
shall be placed in a careful manner so as to avoid distortion of the crib.
Filling shall be placed in even horizontal layers and compacted to reduce
the voids to a minimum.
2. 22. 6. Measurement and Payment.
Payment for the construction of cribbing shall include the furnishing
of all materials, equipment, tools and labor necessary for the excavation,
crib erection, and filling, complete in place, in accordance with the plans and
Payment for timber and logs shall include the cost
these specifications.
of drift-bolts and other miscellaneous hardware.
Excavation for cribbing shall be paid for at the contract price per
cubic yard for material actually removed except that in no case shall this
be computed to include material more than 1 foot outside of vertical planes
The
through the extreme neat lines of the finished crib or its supports.
contract price for excavation shall include a yardage of back-fill equivalent
to that excavated.
Timber shall be paid for at the contract price per 1,000 feet board
measure (M.B.M.) for material remaining in the finished structure.
Logs shall be paid for at the contract price per linear foot, for each size
specified, for material remaining in the finished structure.
Filling material shall be paid for at the contract price per cubic yard
for the actual volume placed.
SECTION
23 Sectional Plate
Pipe and Arches
This item shall consist of furnishing sectional plate pipe or arches

conforming to these specifications and of the sizes and dimensions required
on the plans and installing such pipe or arches at such places as are
CONSTRUCTION
designated on the plans or by the engineer,
lines and grades established by the engineer.
109
and in conformity with the
The materials shall be as specified in division
IV.
2. 23. 3. Description
of Plates.
Plates shall consist of structural units of galvanized corrugated metal.
Standard plates shall have a covering width of not less than 47 inches,
measured along the neutral axis of the plate, and shall be available in
nominal lengths of 10 feet, 7% feet, 5 feet, and 2% feet.
(Plates have ap
proximately a 2-inch lip beyond each end crest, which results in the actual
length of a given structure being approximately 4 inches longer than the
In constructing footings
nominal length, except when skewed or beveled.
for arches, this additional length must be provided for.)
The gage of plates and the radius of curvature shall be as specified in
or as shown on the plans.
division
The plates at longitudinal and circumferential seams shall be connected
by bolts.
Circumferential seams shall be staggered, so that no circum
ferential seam shall be continuous for a greater distance than the width of
the plates.
III
2. 23. 4. Forming and Punching Plates.
Each plate shall be curved to the proper radius, and the bolt holes
be so punched that all except end plates shall be interchangeable
in
the erection process.
As an alternate to this punching, the plates used in
the two bottom segments of the arch shall be punched with one row of bolt
holes adjacent to the longitudinal edge of the plate which is to rest upon
the pier or abutment.
Unless otherwise specified, bolt holes along those edges of the plates that
will form longitudinal seams in the finished structure shall be staggered in
rows 2 inches apart, with one row in the valley and one in the crest of the
corrugations.
Bolt holes along those edges of the plates that will form circumferen
tial seams in the finished structure shall provide for a bolt spacing of ap
proximately 12 inches.
The center of no hole shall be closer to the edge of the plate than 1%
times the diameter of the bolt.
Bolt holes in plates 7 to 1 gage, inclusive, shall be punched before plates
shall
are galvanized.
When the completed structure is to be a full circle pipe, the plates shall
be so curved that when bolted together, true circles shall be formed of the
The diameter of the pipe, in inches, divided by 15, shall
required diameter.
determine the number of plates required to make a full circle, unless other
wise shown on the plans.
Plates for forming skewed or sloped ends shall be cut so as to give the
Burnt edges shall be free from oxide and
angle of skew or slope specified.
burrs, shall present a workmanlike finish, and legible identification numerals
shall be placed on each part plate to designate its proper position in the
finished structure.
2. 23. 5. Field Erection Pipe Structures.
be made as provided in section 1 under Excavation
and as modified hereafter.
When a pipe structure is to be erected in a trench, the width of the
Excavation shall
and
Fill
HIGHWAY
110
BRIDGES
trench must be sufficient to permit thorough tamping of the earth backfill

against every plate except the bottom one.
Bedding.
The pipe shall be bedded in an earth foundation of uniform
density carefully shaped, by means of a template supported at the desired
grade, to fit the lower plate of the pipe.
Where rock in either ledge or
boulder formation is encountered it shall be removed below grade and re
placed with suitable materials in such manner as to provide a compacted
earth cushion having a thickness under the pipe of not less than V2 inch
per foot height of fill over the top of the pipe, with a minimum allowable
Where a firm foundation is not encountered, at the
thickness of 8 inches.
grade established, due to soft, spongy or other unstable soil, unless other
special construction methods are called for on the plans or in special pro
visions, all of such unstable soil, under the pipe and for a width of at least
one diameter on each side of the pipe, shall be removed and replaced with
gravel or other suitable material properly compacted to provide adequate
support for the pipe line.
Selected material of a gravelly nature, free from all material which
pass a 3-inch circular ring shall be used in the back-filling opera
The 3-inch size limitation shall not apply to fill over one diameter
tion.
Backfilling material shall also be free from vegetable
above the pipe.
matter, frozen lumps and all other objectionable substances.
Allowance of
a minimum camber of 1 per cent of the length of pipe shall be made to take
care of settlement after placing the fill. The amount of camber shall be
varied to suit the height of fill and supporting soil.
will not
After the pipe has been assembled, fill material shall be deposited evenly
on both sides of the pipe, in not to exceed 6-inch layers, until at least the
Special care shall be taken to thoroughly tamp
34 point has been reached.
the backfilling material between the pipe and the sides of the trench or, for
a distance each side of the pipe equal to the diameter of the pipe. Above
the 94 point, the fill shall be placed uniformly on each side of the pipe in
layers not to exceed 12 inches until a height is reached equal to the diameter
of the pipe, after which the remainder of the fill may be made from one
direction, but only under the supervision of the engineer.
When strutting is specified, the pipe shall be strutted as provided in
article 2. 23. 7. The bottom row of plates shall be lapped so that the
exposed edges
will
face downstream.
2. 23. 6. Field Erection Arches.
When backfilling arches before headwalls are placed, the first material
shall be placed midway between the ends of the arch forming as narrow a
The ramp shall be
ramp as possible until the top of the arch is reached.
built evenly from both sides, and the backfilling material shall be thoroughly
After the two ramps have been built to the top
compacted as it is placed.
of the arch, the remainder of the backfill shall be deposited from the top of
the arch both ways from the center to the ends, and as evenly as possible
on both sides of the arch.
If the headwalls are built before the arch is backfilled, the filling
material shall first be placed adjacent to one headwall, until the top of the
arch is reached, after which the fill shall be dumped from the top of the arch
toward the other headwall, with care being taken to deposit the material
evenly on both sides of the arch.
In multiple installations the procedure above specified shall be followed,
CONSTRUCTION
111
but extreme care shall be used to bring the backfill up evenly on each side
of each arch so that unequal pressure will be avoided.
In all cases the filling material shall be thoroughly but not excessively
tamped. Puddling the backfill will not be permitted.
Strutting.
Unless otherwise specified, sectional plate pipes shall be timber strutted
vertically 3 per cent out of round before placement of the fill. The timber
struts shall be in accordance with table 1 which follows unless an elongation
other than 3 per cent is specified.
The pipe shall be deformed the required amount by means of suitable
jacks. The method of jacking shall meet with the approval of the engi
neer. A. tolerance of % per cent above and below the specified amount will
2. 23. 7
be permitted.
Strutting shall be carried uniformly from end to end of pipe for pipes
without headwalls.
When headwalls are used there shall be no elongation of
the ends of the pipe.
The struts shall be left in place until the fill is
complete and compacted, unless otherwise instructed by the engineer.
2. 23. 8. Arch Substructures and Headwalls.
Substructures and headwalls shall be designed in accordance with the
requirements of division III.
Each side of the arch shall be anchored to the foundation by means
of a galvanized formed channel or galvanized structural steel angle. The
arch plates shall bear directly on the channel or angle.
Channels shall be made of 7-gage material not less than
inches
in depth with the shorter flange not less than 2 inches and the longer flange
not less than 4% inches. The 4% -inch flange shall be bolted to the bottom
row of plates on not to exceed 18-inch centers.
Anchors shall be attached
to the web of channel on approximately 18-inch centers.
If angles are used, they shall be not lighter than 3 inches by 3 inches
by
inch, and the vertical leg shall be bolted to the bottom row of plates
Angles shall be anchored to the founda
on not to exceed 18-inch centers.
tion by %-inch bolts, not less than 8 inches in length, on not to exceed
24-inch centers.
2. 23. 9. Workmanship.
It is the essence of these specifications that in addition to compliance

with the details of construction the completed pipe shall show careful,
finished workmanship in all particulars. Culvert pipe on which the spelter
coating has been bruised or broken either in the shop or in shipping, or
The requirement
which shows defective workmanship, shall be rejected.
applies not only to the individual plates but to the shipment on any con
Among others, the following defects are specified as
tract as a whole.
constituting poor workmanship and the presence of any or all of them
in any individual culvert plate or in general in any shipment shall consti
tute sufficient cause for rejection:
1.
2.
Uneven
laps.
Elliptical shaping
3. Variation from a
4. Ragged edges.
5. Loose, unevenly
6. Illegible brand.
7.
(unless
specified).
straight center line.
lined or spaced bolts.
Bruised, scaled, or broken spelter coating.

or bends in the metal itself.
8. Dents
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
112
, o "3iO IOO O
co i0C0 c0^ coco id
00
v*
CO CO
t-4 H
.S.S b
io o iao o o to
S *! o
CS"" CO t>
co n id coco
IO
co
CQ
V
.Had
to ."
'3'
CM
o io oo
io co co.* coid
IO CO
Vi
E
a.S'
CO
oi
0 B
.9
to
i
M
CU
- coco '
IO o o o
Tfid oo coid Tf
.2.6 B .
to
i
BiS
Cft
==mo
w coio
CO
oo o o
id co coio
to io o
io co***
aj
.2 b a
to
co
ij
0J
ft
-flJ
w
B
cd
co,J
.2 B
' t
.5 *
# ;
id
CO '
OS i
2 B a
m-.S
,a o
S IO oi0, iO "5 iO IOIO "s

id kJ^1 tj3io co-^*coco
id
^1
ra e w
o..E'
CO CO
en
h
+
fir
.SB d
CO
f
w
.2 .2
8 1
8
X3
ai
-5 C
S
3
B
a
rt
-g.o
co
co""*^*
_j
Tftd co"s co
id
I0O iOO O iqIO io O O
til
it
3gi
fl IH A CO
T3.2
<U
*i
O SOCU
bo
ft
tj
o
I
.2 B a
CO- "|
SJ olo
a* st
OS CO
io co
O O 0 IO Lfi oW iO IO
goto
io coo
io co
td
s s
iflO .0
^!
t ^.
5 c
o|o
COCO
to
id
51
v *.
O KjO Oo OO <cO !00 Oio UiO o

* * (5.* cod rf co"3 id co <*
<
o,.2<
(I'M h
CONSTRUCTION
113
2. 23. 10. Method
of Measurement.
The footage to be paid for shall be the actual number of linear feet
of the pipe or arch, installed in place, completed and accepted.
The
measurement shall be as follows:
Pipes and arches with square and vertical ends, end to end of metal,
on center line of structure.
Pipes with skewed and vertical ends, end to end, on center line.
Pipes with square ends, beveled, average end to end at top and bottom
of pipe.
Pipes with skewed ends, beveled, average end to end at top and bottom
of pipe, parallel to center line.
Arches, with ends other than square and vertical, as noted on the plans.
2. 23. 11. Basis of Payment.

The footages, determined as above, shall be paid for at the contract unit
prices per linear foot bid for Sectional Plate Pipe or Arches of the several
sizes, as the case may be, which prices and payments shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing, handling, erecting and installing the pipe or
arches, and for all materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals, neces
sary to complete this item, but shall not constitute payment for concrete or
masonry headwalls and foundations or for excavation.
SECTION 24 Wearing
Surfaces
Separate Concrete Wearing Surface
Separate concrete wearing surface shall consist of a concrete pavement
placed over other deck construction.
It shall conform to details shown on
the plans.
The concrete may be with or without reinforcement.
The construction
shall conform to that specified for Concrete Masonry,
II.
2. Measurement
division
2. 24.
and Payment.
Payment for separate concrete wearing surface shall include the cost
of furnishing all materials, equipment, tools and labor necessary for the
completion of the work. Unless otherwise specified, separately placed con
crete wearing surfaces will be paid for on the basis of the number of square
yards of wearing surface complete in place.
Brick Wearing Surface
2. 24. 3. General
Requirements.
Brick wearing surfaces for concrete floors shall be placed only after
the concrete floor has been thoroughly cured.
2. 24. 4. Materials
All materials used in the construction of brick wearing surfaces shall

Sand for the sand-cement
conform to the requirements of division IV.
for Sand for Mortar.
bedding course shall conform to the requirements
2. 24. 5. Preparation of Subfloor.
After the concrete slab has been properly cured, and immediately
before the bedding course is placed, the surface of the slab shall be
thoroughly hand-broomed with stiff wire or fiber brooms to remove all dust
and loose or foreign materials adhering to the surface.
HIGHWAY
114
2. 24. 6
Sand-Cement
BRIDGES
Bed.
The sand-cement bedding course shall consist of sand and portland

cement, in the proportion of one part cement and four parts sand, mixed
dry until the mass is of a uniform color. The mixing may be done in an
approved batch mixer or by hand on a clean, tight surface.
Immediately prior to placing the sand-cement bed, the surface of the
floor slab shall be dampened thoroughly.
No more of the sand-cement
bed shall be mixed or prepared than can be used within any continuous
working period, and any bed upon which the bricks are not laid and rolled
during any continuous working period shall be removed and replaced with
new materials when the work is resumed.
2. 24. 7. Placing Bedding Course.
Upon the prepared floor slab, the bedding course shall be placed and
shaped so that its finished depth shall be not less than % inch and not
more than 1 inch.
The bedding shall be shaped to a true surface parallel with the surface
of the finished roadway by means of a template extending the entire width
of the roadway, drawn forward upon the curbs or other guide rails. When
the width of the roadway precludes the use of a template spanning the
entire distance, the bedding shall be shaped in sections, using scantlings
adjusted to correct elevations as guides.
The bedding course shall be
struck off at least twice with the template.
Any irregularities discovered
shall be corrected and the bed struck off with the template to its correct
This operation shall be continued until perfect
elevation and contour.
alignment is secured.
directed by the engineer, in addition to shaping with a template
the bedding course shall also be compacted with a hand roller. The bedding
course shall be alternately struck off and rolled until perfect alignment
is secured. The roller shall be not less than 36 inches in diameter and 24
inches in width, and shall weigh not less than 10 pounds per inch of width.
When the use of the template and guiderails is impracticable in finish
ing the bedding course, it shall be shaped to the surface required by
means of hand lutes.
After final shaping, the bedding shall not be disturbed prior to laying
the brick.
If
2. 24. 8. Laying the Brick.
Upon the bedding course as prepared, the brick shall be laid in suc
cessive courses with the better face or wire-cut side upward. They shall
be laid with the ends and sides in contact and lugs, if any, shall be turned
in one direction.
Alternate courses of brick shall begin with one-half a
brick. Each course shall be completed by batting in at the end, if neces
sary, with fragments of brick at least 3 inches long, a portion of the next
adjoining brick being broken off if necessary to give the minimum 3-inch
bat at the end of the course.
The fractured end of cut or trimmed brick
Every course of brick
shall be turned toward the center of the roadway.
shall be laid true and even and, except in special cases, perpendicular to
No course shall deviate from a straight line more than
the curb line.
2 inches in 30 feet.
All brick laying shall take place over brick already
laid and shall follow the completion of the bedding within 50 feet.
Immediately after laying the brick, the surface of the roadway shall
Any inferior brick shall be lifted out and turned
be swept and inspected.
over, or removed and replaced by acceptable brick.
CONSTRUCTION
116
2. 24. 9. Rolling the Brick.

Following the inspection and after the replacement of defective brick,
the surface shall be swept free of spalls and shall then be rolled by a
self-propelled
tandem roller weighing approximately 3 tons.
The rolling
shall be done as soon as possible after laying the brick so that it may be
completed before the bed has begun to set.
Rolling shall begin at the edge of the pavement, proceeding back and
forth parallel to the sides until the center of the pavement is reached.
The roller shall then pass to the other edge and repeat the operation to
the center.
The rolling may then be done obliquely entirely across the
pavement, after which the operation shall be repeated in the opposite
direction.
Broken or otherwise injured brick shall be removed and replaced
before final rolling takes place.
Final rolling shall be parallel with the
centerline of the roadway.
Portions of the surface not accessible to
mechanical rolling shall be hand tamped.
2. 24. 10. Testing the Surface.
After final rolling, the pavement shall be tested with a template laid
transversely and a 10-foot straight edge, laid parallel with the side of the
pavement, and any unevenness exceeding % inch shall be corrected and,
if necessary, the entire surrounding surface again rolled.
2. 24. 11. Applying Asphalt Filler.
All joints shall be filled with hot asphalt filler and a surface dressing
applied on the day of laying the brick.
Immediately before filling the joints, the surface of the brick shall be
swept clean and the brick shall be clean and dry when filler is applied.
Filler shall not be applied if the bricks are wet, nor if air temperatures
are such that the filler will not flow freely into the joints.
The filler shall be heated to a temperature between 177* C. (350 F.)
and 200 C. (392 F.).
All filler heated beyond 232" C. (450 F.) shall
be rejected.
The heater shall be so designed as to admit of an even heating
of the entire mass, with an efficient and positive control of the heat at
all times, and shall be equipped with accurate thermometers capable of
registering at all times the temperature of the filler.
The filler shall be removed from the heater and promptly applied to
the pavement before cooling.
It shall be worked into the joints by means
of hot iron squeegees operated slowly backward and forward at an angle
with the joints. Squeegee irons shall be kept hot and squeegeeing shall
continue until the joints appear full and a thin coating of asphalt remains
upon the surface of the brick.
2. 24. 12. Surface
Dressing.
Immediately after the joints have been filled, and while the filler is
still soft and pliable, the pavement shall be covered with a thin layer of
dry sand, stone or slag screenings, or granulated slag. This top dressing
shall be of such sizes that all will pass a 14 -inch sieve. As soon as the
dressing is spread, the surface of the pavement shall be rolled thoroughly
to bed the dressing in the asphalt coating.
2. 24. 13. Opening to Traffic.
Traffic shall not be permitted
cooled to air temperature.
on
the pavement
until the filler has
and Payment.
Payment for brick wearing surfaces shall include the cost of furnishing
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
116
all materials, equipment, tools and labor necessary for the satisfactory
completion of the work. Payment will be made on the basis of the number
of square yards of wearing surface complete in place.
Asphalt Block Wearing Surface
2. 24. 15. General Requirement.
Asphalt block wearing surfaces for concrete floors shall

after the concrete floor has been thoroughly cured.
be placed only
All materials used in the construction of asphalt block wearing surfaces

shall conform to the requirements of division IV. Sand for the mortar
bed shall conform to the requirements for Sand for Mortar.
2. 24. 17. Preparation of Sub floor.
After the concrete floor slab has been properly cured, and immediately
before the mortar bed is placed, the surface of the slab shall be thoroughly
hand-broomed with stiff wire or fibre brooms to remove all dust or foreign
material adhering to the surface.
2. 24. 18. Mortar Bed.
The mortar bed shall consist of sand and portland cement, in the
proportion of one part cement to four parts sand, mixed with sufficient
water to thoroughly moisten the ingredients and to make a mortar of such
consistency that it can easily be spread upon the foundation and struck
with a template to a smooth and even surface.
It must not, however, be so
soft as to allow the blocks to sink into the mortar when they are placed
thereon.
The
mortar bed shall be spread on the foundation slab and evenly

The bed shall be struck
distributed in a uniform layer % inch in thickness.
to a true surface exactly parallel to the top of the finished pavement in
following manner :
Wooden strips 4 inches wide by % inch thick, or strips of steel 4 inches
inch thick, of a convenient length for handling, shall
wide by % to
be carefully set from curb to curb to the exact crown of the pavement and
embedded throughout their length in the mortar, so that the top surface
of the strips shall be below the grade of the finished pavement by an
amount equal to the thickness of the blocks and not less, on the average,
An iron-shod straight edge or striker
than % inch above the concrete.
shall be drawn on two sets of these strips, set as above described, to strike
Fresh mortar shall be added
the mortar bed to a true and even surface.
and struck off as many times as may be found necessary to produce a
uniformly dense bed, free from depressions or porous spots. Special care
shall be exercised to produce a bed of uniform density.
As soon as the
mortar bed has been struck off, one set of strips shall be taken up and the
trench carefully filled with mortar so that it will have the same height
and density as the adjacent mortar.
In the case of car tracks, a template to run on the rails shall be used
to strike the mortar bed to the required grade between the rails.
2. 24. 19. Laying the Blocks.
Upon the mortar cushion prepared as described above, the blocks shall
laid with close joints and uniform top surface.
The blocks shall be laid by the pavers standing upon the blocks already
laid and not upon the bed of mortar, and shall be laid at right angles to
be immediately
CONSTRUCTION
117
the axis of the pavement with such crown as is shown on the plans, and
in such a manner that all longitudinal joints shall be broken by a lap of
approximately 4 inches. The blocks shall be laid so as to make the lateral
joints as tight as possible, consistent with keeping a good alignment across
the pavement, and where possible the longitudinal joints shall be immedi
ately closed by pressing each course in the direction of its length with a
lever.
After the blocks are laid, any irregularities in the surface of the pave
ment shall be corrected and the pavement immediately covered with clean,
dry sand, all of which shall pass a 10-mesh sieve. The sand shall be spread
over the surface and swept into the joints and shall be allowed to remain
on the pavement not less than 30 days, or until such time as the action
of the traffic on the pavement shall have thoroughly ground the sand into
all the joints.
The requirements for irregularities shall be the same as for brick as
given in article 2. 24. 10.
After the pavement is laid and sanded it shall be protected from all
vehicle traffic for a period of at least 7 days and for a longer period if
directed by the engineer.
and Payment.
Payment for asphalt block wearing surfaces shall include the cost
of furnishing all materials, equipment, tools and labor necessary for the
satisfactory completion of the work. Payment will be made on the basis
of the number of square yards of wearing surface complete in place.
Bituminous
2. 24.
22. General.
Carpets
No mix shall be laid when, in the opinion

are not satisfactory.
of the engineer,
climatic
conditions
The bituminous materials used in the construction of bituminous car

to the requirements of division IV.
The aggregate shall consist of gravel, crushed stone or crushed slag,
which shall be clean, sound and hard, and thoroughly dry when applied.
Material containing soft or partially disintegrated particles of stone or shale
will not be accepted. The aggregate shall be washed and screened to such
size that all of it will pass a sieve having %-inch square openings, and
not more than 15 per cent shall pass a %-inch sieve.
pets shall conform
of Subfloor.
(a) Wood Subfloor.

Before placing the carpet coat, all parts of the subfloor shall be securely
fastened to prevent vibration and, unless otherwise specified, all sharp
corners, projections or irregularities in the surface shall be removed. Wood
which is worn or which contains defects which may be injurious to the
bituminous carpet shall be removed and replaced with new material. Any
openings in the floor shall be completely sealed by caulking with oakum,
All dust, dirt, debris or foreign material on
or by other suitable means.
the surface to be treated shall be removed by sweeping with stiff brooms
water is used,
and if necessary the surface may be flushed with water.
If
HIGHWAY
118
BRIDGES
the subfloor shall be allowed to become thoroughly dry and then swept with
stiff brooms before applying the first coat.
(b)
Concrete Subfloor.
The requirements as to cleanliness, as specified above for wood subfloors, shall also apply to concrete subfloors.
Irregularities in the surface
such as might project into or injure the bituminous carpet shall be removed.
Immediately before applying the first coat the surface shall be swept clean
and no traffic permitted thereon until the carpet coat is placed.
of Tar Mat Surface.
(a) Prime
After
Coat.
the subfloor has been prepared as hereinbefore specified and is
thoroughly dry, the entire surface shall be covered with a first coat of the
tar specified in division IV for Tar for First or Prime Coat. The tar shall
be applied cold at the rate of M gallon per square yard.
No traffic shall
be permitted to use the surface thus treated.
The prime coat shall remain
in place 12 hours before applying the second coat.
(b)
Second Coat.
The tar used for the second coat shall be that specified in division IV
for this purpose.
The tar shall be heated in an open tank or kettle to a temperature
between 200" and 225 F. and applied evenly to the surface at the rate of
% gallon per square yard. The methods and appliances used shall be such
as to insure a uniform distribution of the tar over the surface of the road
A suitable pressure spraying device, preferably, shall be employed.
way.
Immediately after the tar is sprayed or otherwise deposited upon the road
way surface, it shall be smoothed out to a uniform thickness by means of
squeegees, mops or other suitable spreading device.
Care shall be taken
not to overheat the material, the proper temperature being obtained when
it will flow with reasonable freedom and remain fluid for a sufficient period
to permit the aggregate to become thoroughly incorporated
in the mass.
Immediately after the application of this coat of tar the surface shall
be covered with the aggregate at the rate of approximately 0.4 cubic foot
per square yard. Accurate measuring or weighing devices shall be provided
by the contractor to insure the proper quantity of aggregate being used.
The aggregate shall be spread evenly over the surface by means of squareAs soon thereafter as practicable the surface shall be
pointed shovels.
hand tamped or rolled with a heavy hand roller.
After rolling or tamping is completed, if successive applications of
tar
and aggregate are necessary to obtain the required thickness they

in the same proportions and in the same manner as specified
for the first application. The entire surface shall then be rolled or hand
tamped as specified above.
Care shall be exercised to secure a smooth, even surface, free from
depressions or irregularities, which when tested with a 10-foot straight-edge
shall not vary by more than % inch from the specified surface contour.
The total thickness of the tar mat coat shall be as specified but in no
case shall exceed % inch.
the
shall
(c)
be applied
Seal Coat.
If a seal coat is required by the special provisions, or by the notes on
the plans, it shall be constructed as follows:
Immediately after the second coat has been completed, it shall be given
a seal coat using tar of the same grade as that specified for the second coat.
CONSTRUCTION
119
The tar shall be heated to a temperature not in excess of 225 F., depending
upon the grade used, and shall be applied at the rate of M gallon per square
yard.
The seal coat shall be immediately covered with a light dressing
of clean dry sand, stone screenings or granulated slag.
(a) Prime Coat.

After the subfloor
of
Asphalt Mat Surface (Mixed Method).
has been prepared
as hereinbefore
specified and is
thoroughly dry, the entire surface to be covered with the mat shall be given
a first or prime coat of asphalt of the type and grade set forth in article
4. 22. 4.
For application, these asphalts may be heated to a temperature
of not more than 120 F. and shall be applied to the floor surface at the
rate of from 0.15 to 0.25 gallon per square yard, depending upon the
condition of the surface.
Caution shall be used in heating the asphalts to
the temperature of application. The treated surface shall be allowed to
cure until it becomes tacky before applying the second coat. No traffic shall
be allowed
on the primed surface.
(b)
Second Coat.
(c)
Seal Coat.
The asphalt used shall be as set forth in article 4. 22. 4. If asphalts

type RC are used, they shall be cautiously heated to a temperature between
150" F. and 275 F.
If it is deemed necessary to dry the aggregate used
with asphalts type RC, it shall be heated to a temperature of 250 F. to
300 F. and its temperature
when mixed with the asphalt shall not be
greater than 275 F. Asphaltic emulsions shall not be heated and, nor
mally, the aggregates used with them need not be heated.
The asphalt and aggregate, prepared as hereinbefore specified, shall
be thoroughly mixed either by hand or with a machine
(preferably the
If
latter) until all particles of aggregate are covered with the bitumen.
hand mixing is done, the contractor shall provide a suitable platform for
mixing. Concrete mixers are acceptable for machine mixing. The pro
portion of the asphalt and the aggregate shall be such that the finished mix
Accurate
contains from 5 per cent to 10 per cent by weight of bitumen.
weighing and measuring devices shall be provided to insure that the proper
quantities of, materials are being used.
The mixture shall then be spread on the surface to produce the re
quired cross section when compacted.
Preferably the upper surface of the
The entire surface
mat shall be crowned to provide transverse drainage.
of the mat shall then be rolled with either a heavy hand roller or a light
The rolling shall be done longitudinally and from the
mechanical roller.
For side support of the mat, it is preferable
edge to the center of the mat.
to use continuous retainer strips. The thickness shall be as noted on the
plans or as specified in the supplemental specifications, but the total thick
ness shall not be less than 94 inch nor more than 2 inches.
The finished surface shall be smooth, free of depressions or irregulari
ties, and when tested with a 10-foot straightedge
placed parallel to the
center line of the roadway it shall not be more than % inch distant from
the working face of such straightedge.
Unless otherwise provided, a seal coat shall be applied over the entire
surface of the second coat. The seal coat shall not be applied until the
This is indicated by the absence in the
second coat has cured sufficiently.
mat of a noticeable odor of gasoline in the case of RC materials and by
the sufficient evaporation of water to complete the breaking down of the
emulsion in the case of emulsified asphalts.
HIGHWAY
120
BRIDGES
The seal coat shall consist of EC asphalts preferably of the heavier

grades. The asphalts may be heated to a temperature not exceeding 275 F.,
depending upon the grade of asphalt used, and shall be applied at the rate
of M gallon per square yard. Caution shall be used in heating the asphalts
to the temperature of application.
after application of the
Immediately
asphalt to the surface, a light coating of coarse dry sand, stone screenings
or granulated slag shall be uniformly applied in sufficient quantity to blot
the excess asphalt.
2. 24. 27. -Construction of Asphalt Mat Surface (Penetration Method).
(a) Prime Coat.
The first or prime coat of asphalt shall be prepared and applied in the
same manner as specified in article 2. 24. 26 for the prime coat for a Mixed
Asphalt Mat.
(b)
Second Coat.
The asphalt used shall be of the type specified in article 4. 22. 4.

After the first or prime coat has set sufficiently to become sticky, the
surface to be treated shall be covered with a thin layer of the aggregate
applied over the surface by means of square-pointed
For side
shovels.
support of the mat, it is preferable to use continuous retainer strips.
When asphaltic emulsion is used it shall not be heated.
The asphalt
shall be applied over the surface covered with the aggregate at the rate of
approximately % gallon per square yard. The methods and appliances
used for the application of the asphalt shall be such as to insure a uniform
Preferably, a
distribution of the asphalt over the surface of the roadway.
Care shall be taken to apply
pressure spraying device shall be employed.
the asphalt in such a way that thorough penetration of the aggregate is
obtained.
If successive application of aggregate and asphalt are necessary to
obtain the required thickness, they shall be applied immediately following
the first application. Each application shall consist of a layer of aggre
gate applied in the manner specified above and an application of asphalt
The thickness shall be as
at the rate of *4 to % gallon per square yard.
noted on the plans or as specified in the special provisions, but the total
thickness shall not be less than 94 inch nor more than 2 inches.
Over the final coat of asphalt there shall be spread a layer of dry stone
screenings, coarse sand or granulated slag sufficiently thick to prevent
bleeding, and the entire surface shall then be rolled with a heavy hand
roller or a light mechanical roller. The finished surface shall conform to
the required cross section and, preferably, shall have sufficient crown to
provide transverse drainage.
The finished surface shall be smooth, free of depressions or irregulari
ties and when tested with a 10-foot straightedge
placed parallel to the
center line of the roadway it shall not be more than Vi inch distant from
the working face of such straightedge.

No traffic shall be allowed on the bituminous mat surface for a period
of 24 hours after it has been completed. Tar and mixed asphalt mats shall
not be considered as completed until after the application of the seal coat.
2. 24. 29. Measurement and Payment.
Payment for bituminous carpets shall include the cost of furnishing
all materials, equipment, tools and labor necessary for the satisfactory
completion of the work. Payment will be made on the basis of the number
of square yards of bituminous carpet complete in place.
III
DIVISION
Design
Design
Analysis.
any case where the specifications provide for an empirical formula

a rational analysis based on a theory accepted by
the Bridge Committee of the American Association of State Highway
Officials, with stresses in accordance with the specifications will be con
sidered as compliance with the specifications.
In
as a design convenience,
SECTION General
Features
of Design
3. 1. 1. Determination of Waterway Area.

For the determination of the waterway area to be provided by any
drainage structure, a careful study shall be made of local conditions, in
cluding flood height, flow and frequency, size and performance of other
openings in the vicinity carrying the same stream, characteristics of the
channel and of the watershed area, climatic conditions, available rainfall
records and any other information pertinent to the problem and likely to
affect the safety or economy of the structure.
For culverts and small bridges, waterway formulas or drainage tables
The use of such
may be used to assist in fixing the proper size of opening.
formulas or tables is justified only to the extent that they are known to
However, their use shall serve merely as a guide and
fit local conditions.
shall not obviate the need for careful field observation and the exercise of
intelligent judgment.
In general, the waterway provided shall be sufficient to insure the dis
charge of flood waters without undue backwater head and at a velocity which
will not increase the erosive action of the stream to such an extent as to
endanger the structure.
3. 1. 2. Restricted
Waterways.
When it is necessary to restrict the waterway to such an extent that

the stream will be discharged at erosive velocities, protection against dam
age due to scour shall be afforded by deep foundations, curtain or cut-off
walls, riprap, stream bed paving, bearing piles, sheet piles, or other suitable
Likewise, embankment slopes adjacent to all structures subject
means.
to erosion shall be adequately protected by riprap, brush mattresses, tree
retards, wing dams, or other suitable construction.
3.Channel Openings.
The channel openings shall, in general, conform in width, height and
location to all Federal, State and local requirements.
Particular atten
tion is directed to the Federal laws governing the bridging of navigable
waters and to the fact that the U. S. War Department exercises control
over all the navigable waters of the United States.
In general the clear width of all openings and the clear vertical dis
tance between the superstructure and the highest flood water of which there
are records or other authentic evidences shall be sufficient for the passage,
without damage to the structure, of ice floes and the largest drift or debris
which may be expected.
3. 1.
3. 1. 4. Pier Spacing and Location.
Piers shall be located in such manner as to meet the above specified

for channel openings. They shall be located so as to afford
requirements
121
122
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
the minimum restriction of the waterway, especially in the main stream

In general, piers shall be placed as nearly parallel with the
channel.
being
direction of the stream current as is practicable, due consideration
given to the velocity and direction of current at both ordinary and highwater stages, so as to avoid such deflections of the current as might prove
destructive to the foundations of the structure or to the adjacent stream
banks.
3. 1. 5 Size of Culvert Openings.
In general, culverts shall be proportioned to carry the maximum flood
discharge without head.
If the maximum flood discharge occurs only at
rare intervals, culverts may be designed to carry it under slight head, pro
vided they are protected against undermining by means of adequate pave
ment and apron or cut-off walls and that adjacent embankments are pro
tected from erosion by riprap or other suitable means.
3. 1. 6. Length of Culverts.
The length of culverts shall be sufficient to provide the full required
width of roadway or the required width of embankment at the top. The
assumed slope of the embankment shall be suitable for the particular filling
material and shall be such as to eliminate any tendency for the embankment
slopes to slip or slide.
3. 1. 7. Width
of Roadway and Sidewalk.

The width of roadway shall be the clear width measured at right angles
to the longitudinal center line of the bridge between the bottoms of curbs
or guard-timbers, or, in the case of multiple height curbs, between the bot
toms of the lower risers.
The width of the sidewalk shall be the clear width, measured at right
angles to the longitudinal center line of the bridge, from the extreme inside
portion of the handrail to top of the face of the curb or guard timber, except
that if there is a truss, girder, or parapet wall adjacent to the roadway
curb, the width shall be measured to its extreme walk .side portion.
3. 1. 8. Clearances.
The horizontal clearance shall be the clear width, and the vertical
clearance the clear height, available for the passage of vehicular traffic,
as shown on the clearance diagrams.
Unless otherwise provided, the several parts of the structure shall be
constructed to secure the following limiting dimensions or clearances for
traffic :
The clearances and width of roadway for 2-lane traffic shall be not
The roadway width shall be increased
less than those shown in figure 1.
at least 10 feet and preferably 12 feet for each additional lane of traffic.
3. 1. 9. Curbs and Safety Curbs.
The face of the roadway curb is defined as the sloping or vertical surface
Horizontal measurements of roadway
on the roadway side of the curb.
and curb widths are given from the bottom of the face, or, in the case of
stepped back curbs, from the bottom of the lower face for roadway widths.
The face of the roadway curb shall be not less than 12 inches from that
portion of the structure above the elevation of the top of the curb and
nearest the roadway except in those cases where the clear roadway width
is equal to or greater than the shoulder width but not less than the approach
DESIGN
123
pavement width plus 12 feet, in which case the 12-inch clearance may be
The curb height
omitted, thus making the provision of a curb optional.
shall be not less than 9 inches above the adjacent finished surface of the
roadway, when not otherwise determined or provided by law. That portion
of a curb more than 10 inches above the roadway surface shall be stepped
back or sloped back so that no part of a vehicle except the tires may come
in contact with it.
Curbs widened to provide for occasional pedestrian traffic shall be

"Safety Curbs." Safety curbs shall be not less than l'-6" wide.
designated
u
o
z
<
<
UJ
_1
CURB
CURB -12"MINIMUM
_l
<
ROADWAY
NOT LESS THAN

26-0M BUT
NOT LESS THAN 6'- d" GREATER
THAN APPROACH PAVEMENT WIDTH
SEE FOOTNOTE
2Hr
o
u
HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE
CLEARANCE DIAGRAM
TWO-WAY HIGHWAY TRAFFIC
FIGURE
Footnote For important roads, carrying or likely to carry fast and heavy traffic or large
of trucks, roadway widths greater than the above minimums should be given con
sideration.
A reduction of two feet in the above minimum requirements shall be permitted if safety
curbs or contiguous sidewalks are used, or if traffic lane widths are in excess of 12 feet.
If both conditions exist, a reduction of four feet shall be permitted.
In special cases where traffic is light and meeting of vehicles on the bridge likely to
be infrequent, or where the bridge exceeds 1,000 feet in length, a width of 24'-0" may be
permitted.
For all bridges under 50 feet in length it is preferable that the overall width shall con
form as nearly as practicable to the full cross section of the highway (shoulder to shoulder).
percentages
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
124
3. 1. 10. Railings.
Substantial railings along each side of the bridge shall be provided for
Consideration shall be given to the architectural
to protection of traffic.
features of the railing to obtain proper proportioning of its various mem
Consideration shall also
bers and harmony with the structure as a whole.
as far as consistent with safety and appearance,
be given to avoiding,
obstruction of the view from passing vehicles.
In
general, railings shall be of two classes, as follows
(1)
(2)
Roadway railings.
Sidewalk railings.
Roadway railings shall have a minimum height of
the roadway adjacent
feet
inches above
to the curb.
Sidewalk railings shall have a minimum height above the surface of

sidewalk of 3 feet less one-half the horizontal width of the top rail. Clear
openings shall be proportioned with due regard for safety of persons using
the structure. When the top of a curb is more than 2 feet in width the
provisions for sidewalk railings shall apply.
Provision shall be made for the expansion
consistent with the design.
3. 1. 11. Roadway
and contraction
of railings
Drainage.
The transverse drainage of roadways shall be secured by means of a

suitable crown in the roadway surface and longitudinal drainage by cam
ber or gradient. If necessary, longitudinal drainage shall be secured by
means of scuppers, inlets or other suitable means, which shall be of suffi
cient size and number to drain the gutters adequately.
drainage fixtures
and downspouts are required, the downspouts shall be of rigid, corrosive
resistant material not less than 4 inches in least dimension, provided with
The details of flood drains shall be such as to
suitable clean-out fixtures.
prevent the discharge of drainage water against any portion of the struc
Overhanging portions of concrete floors, preferably shall be provided
ture.
with drip beads.
If
3. 1. 12. Superelevation.
The superelevation
of the floor surface of a bridge on a horizontal
curve shall be provided in accordance with the standard practice of the
except that the superelevation
commission for the highway construction,
shall not exceed 0.10 foot per foot width of roadway.
3. 1. 13. Floor Surfaces.
All
bridge floors shall have non-skid
characteristics.
3. 1. 14. Blast Protection.

On bridges over steam railroad tracks, metal likely to be injured by
locomotive gases, and concrete surfaces less than 20 feet above the tracks,
shall be protected by blast plates. The blast plate shall be placed laterally,
so that the center is on a line normal to the plane of the two rails at the
center line of the track, thus taking into account the direction of blast due
to superelevation.
The plates shall be not less than 4 feet wide and shall
and blast resisting alloy
consist of wrought-iron, cast-iron, a corrosion
or asbestos-board shields, so supported that they may be readily replaced.
DESIGN
125
The thickness of plates and other parts in direct contact with locomotive
blast shall be not less than % inch for cast-iron, % inch for wrought-iron
or alloy, % inch for plain asbestos-board and %e inch for corrugated as
Pockets
bestos-board.
Bolts shall be not less than % inch in diameter.
which may hold locomotive gases shall be avoided as far as practicable.
All
fastenings shall be galvanized or of corrosive resistant material.
3. 1. 15. Utilities.
Where required, provision shall be made for trolley wire supports and
poles, pillars for lights, electric conduits, telephone conduits, water pipes
and gas pipes.
3. 1. 16. Roadway Width, Curbs and Clearances for Tunnels.
(a)
Roadway Width.
The clear width between curbs shall
for bridges.
(b)
be
(See Fig. 2.)
not less than that specified
Clearance Between Walls.

The minimum
width between walls of two-lane tunnels shall
be 30 feet.
MINIMUM
CURB
CLEARANCE
DIAGRAM
FOR TUNNELS
FIGURE
TWO-WAY HIGHWAY TRAFFIC
CLEARANCE
T^T
S
FOR BRIDGES
* 1
31
r"
NOT LESS THAN SPECIFIED
VERTICAL
IB"
NOT
-CURB
LESS
NOT LESS THAN 30 FT.
THAN
14 FT.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
126
(c)
Curbs.
The width of curbs shall be not less than

shall be as specified for bridges.
(d) Vertical
18 inches.
Clearance.
The vertical clearance, between curbs, shall

3.1.17.
(a)
The height of curbs
Roadway Width,
Curbs and Clearances
be not less lihan 14 feet.
for
Depressed Roadways.
Width.
Roadway
The clear width between curbs should
be not less than
that specified for
bridges.
Clearance Between Walls.
The minimum width between walls for depressed roadways
two lanes of traffic shall be 30 feet.
(b)
(c)
carrying
Curbs.
The width of curbs shall be not less than

curbs shall be as specified for bridges.
18 inches.
3. 1. 18. Roadway
Width, Curbs and Clearances,

Highways). (See Figure 3.)
Underpasses
NOT LESS THAN 6 FT. WIDER THAN
APPROACH
PAVEMENT
MINIMUM
CURB
18
30
FT.
MINIMUM
NOT LESS THAN SPECIFIED

FOR BRIDGES
CLEARANCE DIAGRAM FOR

UNDERPASSES
TWO-WAY HIGHWAY
TRAFFIC
FIGURE
The height of
(Undivided
DESIGN
(a)
127
Widths.
The clear width between walls or columns shall be not less than 6 feet
wider than the approach pavement, but in no case shall the width be less
than 30 feet.
The clear width between

specified for bridges.
curbs,
if
used, shall be not less than that
(b) Vertical Clearance.

A vertical clearance of
curbs, or
traffic.
(c)
if
not less than 14 feet shall be provided between

curbs are not used, over the entire width that is available for
Curbs.
Curbs shall be not less than

shall be as specified for bridges.
18 inches
in width.
The height of curbs
SECTION 2 Loads
3. 2. 1. Loads.
Structures shall
be
proportioned for the following loads and forces when
they exist:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Dead load.
Live load.
Impact or dynamic effect of the live load.
Wind loads.
Other forces, when they exist, as follows:
Longitudinal force, centrifugal force, thermal forces, earth
erection
pressure, buoyancy, shrinkage stresses, rib shortening,
stresses, ice and current pressure, and earthquake stresses.
shall be proportioned as specified under Stresses, section 4.

Upon the stress sheets a diagram or notation of the assumed live loads
shall be shown and the stresses due to the various loads shall be shown
Members
separately.
3. 2. 2. Dead Load.
The dead load shall consist of the weight of the structure complete,
including the roadway, sidewalks, and car tracks, pipes, conduits, cables and
other public utility services.
The snow and ice load is considered to be offset by an accompanying
decrease in live load and impact and shall not be included except under
special conditions.
If a separate wearing surface is to be placed when the bridge is con

structed, or if placement of a separate wearing surface is anticipated in
the future by the commission, adequate allowance shall be made for its
weight in the design dead load. Otherwise provision for a future wearing
surface is not required.
shall be given to the necessity for a separate
Special consideration
wearing surface for those regions where the use of chains on tires is
anticipated.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
128
Where abrasion of concrete is not anticipated the traffic may bear

directly on the concrete slab. If considered desirable, Yi inch or more may
be added to the slab for a wearing surface.
The following weights are to be used in computing the dead load :
Weight per cubic foot
pounds
Steel or cast steel

Cast iron
Aluminum alloys
Timber (treated or untreated)
Concrete, plain or reinforced
Compacted sand, earth, gravel or ballast
Loose sand, earth and gravel
Macadam or gravel, rolled
490
450
175
50
150
120
100
140
60
150
Cinder filling
Pavement, other than wood block

Railway rails, guard rails, and fastenings
linear foot of track
Stone masonry
Asphalt plank, 1 inch thick
(a)
(per
200
170
lbs. per square foot
Loads on Culverts.
Earth pressures or load on culverts may be computed ordinarily as the

weight of earth directly above the slab. In order to have the effect of in
creasing the allowable design dead load stresses 40 per cent more than
allowed for live load, the effective weight of earth backfill may be taken
as 70 per cent of its actual weight.
(b) Rigid Culverts.

For definite conditions
mechanics may be applied.
these conditions:
(1) Culvert in trench
on yielding foundation.
of bedding and backfill, the principles of soil

The following are recommended formulas for
on unyielding subgrade,
or culvert untrenched
P=WH
H 0.87 B)
as rock or
for H>1.7 B
.385H
(such
= 2.59
BWê
<
(1.92
1
.7
P=W
on unyielding foundation
l^for
(2) *Culvert untrenched

piles).
is
where P=the unit pressure in pounds per square foot due to earth backfill
B= width in feet of trench, or in case there no trench, the overall width
of the culvert
H = depth in feet of fill over culvert
W= effective weight per cubic foot of fill material, which may be taken as
70 percent of actual weight in accordance with above stated provisions.
(
2
)
Note Formula
has been derived from Iowa Engineering Experiment Station Bul
letin 96, "The Theory of External Loads on Closed Conduits in the Light of The Latest Ex
periments," by Anson Marston, Director, February 19, 1930.
3. 2. 3. Live Load.
The live load shall consist of the weight of the applied

of vehicles, cars and pedestrians.
moving
load
DESIGN
129
3. 2. 4. Overload Provision.
The following provision for overload shall apply to all loadings except
the H 20 and H 20-S 16 loadings.
Provision for infrequent heavy loads shall be made by applying in any
single lane an H or H-S truck as specified, increased 100 per cent, and
without concurrent loading of any other lanes. Combined dead, live and
impact stresses resulting from such loading shall not be greater than
The overload shall
150 per cent of the allowable stresses allowed herein.
apply to all parts of the structure affected, including stringers, but except
ing flooring.
3. 2. 5. Highway Loadings.
(a)
General.
highway live loadings on the roadway of bridges or incidental

structures shall consist of standard trucks or of lane loads which are
Two systems of loading are provided, the
equivalent to truck trains.
H loadings and the H-S loadings, the corresponding H-S loadings being
heavier than the H loadings.
The
(b) H
Loadings.
The H loadings are illustrated in Figures 4 and 5. They consist of

The H loadings are
truck or the corresponding lane loading.
designated H followed by a number indicating the gross weight in tons of
the standard truck.
a two-axle
(c) HS Loadings.
The H-S loadings are illustrated in figures 5 and 6. They consist
of a tractor truck with semi-trailer or of the corresponding lane loading.
The H-S loadings are designated by the letter H followed by a number
indicating the gross weight in tons of the tractor truck and the letter S
followed by the gross weight in tons of the single axle of the semi-trailer.
The variable axle spacing has been introduced in order that the spacing
of axles may approximate more closely the tractor trailers now in use.
The variable spacing also provides a more satisfactory loading for con
tinuous spans, in that heavy axle loads may be placed on adjoining spans
to produce maximum
negative moment.
(d)
Classes of Loadings.
Highway loadings shall be of five classes: H 20, H 15, H 10, H 20-S 16
and H 15-S 12. Loadings H 15 and H 10 are 75 per cent and 50 per cent,
respectively, of loading H 20. Loading H 15-S 12 is 75 per cent of loading
H 20-S 16. If loadings of weights other than those designated are desired,
they shall be obtained by proportionately changing the weights shown for
both the standard truck and the corresponding lane loads.
( e)
Designation of Loadings.
The policy of affixing the year to loadings, to identify them, was
instituted with the publication of the 1944 edition in the following manner:
H10-44
H10 Loading, 1944 Edition shall be designated
H15-44
H20-44
H15-S12 loading, 1944 Edition shall be designated
H15-S12-44
H20-S16 Loading, 1944 Edition shall be designated
H20-S16-44
'
The affix remains unchanged until such time as the loading specifica
tion is revised.
The same policy for identification shall be applied, for
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
130
future reference, to loadings previously adopted by the American Associa

tion of State Highway Officials.
Cf
) Minimum Loading.
For trunk highways, or for
other highways which carry, or which may

the minimum live load shall be the H15-S12
carry, heavy truck traffic,

designated herein.
the derivation of the lane loadings, the H lane loading: approxi

truck train loading included in the 1935 A. A. S. H. O. Specifications given in
Appendix C. The H15-S12-44 lane loading approximates the H 15 standard truck followed
The H 20-S 16-44
axles).
and preceded by 11^4-ton trucks spaced 30 feet apart (between
lane loading approximates the H 20 standard truck followed and preceded by 15-ton trucks
spaced 30 feet apart (between axles).
Noth: In explanation of
mates
the
3. 2. 6. Traffic Lanes.
Where the spacing of main supporting members exceeds 6.5 feet for tim
ber floors or 10.5 feet for concrete or steel grid floors, the lane loading or
standard trucks shall be assumed to occupy a width of 10 feet. These loads
shall
be placed
Wc
in design traffic lanes having a width of W=
N.
Where Wc=Roadway width between curbs exclusive of median strip.

N = Number of design traffic lanes as shown in the following
table,
and
W= Width of
design traffic lane
Wc (in feet)
20 to 30 inc
over
over
over
over
over
over
over
over
30 to 42 inc
42 to 54 inc
54 to 66 inc
66 to 78 inc
78 to 90 inc
90 to 102 inc
102 to 114 inc
114 to 126 inc
N
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The lane loadings or standard trucks shall be assumed to occupy any

position within their individual design traffic lanes (W) which will produce
the maximum stress.
3. 2.7. Standard
Trucks and Lane Loads.
The wheel spacing, weight distribution, and clearance of the standard

H and H-S trucks shall be as shown in figures 4 and 6 and corresponding
lane loads shall be as shown in figure 5.
Each lane loading shall consist of a uniform load per linear foot of
traffic lane combined with a single concentrated load (or two concentrated
loads in the case of continuous spans see 3.2.8 (c) ) , so placed on the
span as to produce maximum stress.
The concentrated load and uniform
load shall be considered as uniformly distributed over a 10-foot width on
a line normal to the center line of the lane.
For the computation of moments and shears, different concentrated
loads shall be used as indicated in figure 5. The lighter concentrated loads
shall be used when the stresses are primarily bending stresses and the
heavier concentrated loads shall be used when the stresses are primarily
shearing stresses.
DESIGN
131
W = TOTAL WEIGHT OF TRUC K AND LOAO
IH
H
H
8.000- LBS
6,000 -LBS4,000- LBS.
20-44
15-44
10-44
IW
32,000-LBS.
24,000-LBS-
16,000-LBS.
-14-00.1
W-
WIDTH OF EACH REAR TIRE EQUALS MNCH

PER TON OF TOTAL WEJGHT OF LOADED TRUCK-
-E
0.1 W
lO-o'cLEARANCE&LOAD
LAME WIDTH
CURB->
2-0"
6'-0M
STANDARD
TRUCKS
FIGURE
* In the design of floors (concrete slabs, steel grid floors, and timber floors) for H-20 or
H-20-S-16 loading, one axle load of 24,000 pounds or two axle loads of 16,000 pounds each,
spaced 4 feet apart shall be used, whichever produces the greater stress, instead of the 32,000pound
axle
shown.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
132
3. 2. 8. Application of Loadings.
(a) Traffic Lane Units.

In computing stresses,
each 10-foot lane loading or single standard

truck shall be considered as a unit, and fractional load lane widths or frac
tional trucks shall not be used.
and Position, Traffic Lane Units.
The number and position of the lane loadings or truck loading shall be
as specified in article 3. 2. 6 and whether lane loading or truck loading shall
be such as to produce maximum stress, subject to the reduction specified
(b) Number
in article
3. 2. 9.
(c) Lane Loadings Continuous
Spans.
The lane loadings, shown in figure 5, shall be modified as follows for

the design of continuous spans: The lane loadings shall consist of the loads
18,000
FOR
MOMENT
H20-44
20
-S
--UNIFORM LOAD 400.LBS. PER LINEAR
15-44
I5-SI2-44
JiyUNIFORM
LOAD
LANE
AND
9,000 FOR
13,000
{9,000
320.LBS.
HIO-44
PER
MOMENT
OR SHEAR
LINEAR
FOOT
OF LOAD
LANE
HS LANE LOADINGS
Note
For the loading of continuous spans involving lane
load.
(c) which provides for an additional concentrated
:
LANE
LOADING
FIGURE
3.2.8
OF LOAD
LOADING
-CONCENTRATED LOAD
FOOT
LOADING
MOMENT
SHEAR
3,500 FOR
500 FOR
LOAD
L-CONCENTRATED
LOADING
16-44 LOADING
-G5
loading refer to article
DESIGN
133
shown in figure 5 and in addition thereto another concentrated load of

equal weight shall be placed in one other span in the series in such position
as to produce maximum negative moment.
C
d) Loading for Maximum
Stress.
The type of loading, whether lane loading or truck loading, to be used,

and whether the spans be simple or continuous, shall be the loading which
The moment and shear tables given in
produces the maximum stress.
H20-SI6 -44 8,000 -LBS.

H 15-512 -44 6,000- LBS.
-t
32,000 LBS:
24,000 LBS.
32,000 LBS.
24,000 LBS.
0'|wh
- WIDTH OF TIRES SHALL BE THE
SAME AS THE STANDARD H TRUCKS-
|-
0.4* -
oVw^j-
. 0.4VV-
TWO AXLES WHICH IS THE SAME AS FOR THE

CORRESPONDING
H TRUCK
SPACING
14 FEET TO 30 FEET, I N C LUSI V E. SPACI NG TO B E
USED IS THAT WHICH PRODUCES MAXIMUM STRESSES.
W=COMBIND WEIGHT ON THE FIRST
V-VARIABLE
lO-o'cLEARANCE
8c LOAD
LANE WIDTH
CURB-,
2-0
t'-o"
2-0_
STANDARD H-S TRUCKS

FIGURE
*
In
of floors (concrete slabs, steel grid floors, and timber floors) for H-20 or
H20-S16 loading, one axle load of 24,000 pounds or two axle loads of 16,000 pounds each,
spaced 4 feet apart shall be used, whichever produces the greater stress, instead of the 32,000pound axle shown.
the design
HIGHWAY
134
BRIDGES
A show which loading controls for simple spans. The axle spacing
for H-S trucks shall be varied between the specified limits to produce
appendix
maximum
stresses.
continuous spans, the lane loading shall be continuous or discon
tinuous, as may be necessary to produce maximum
stresses, and the
concentrated load or loads as specified in paragraph (c) shall be placed in
such position as to produce maximum stresses.
For
3. 2. 9. Reduction in Load Intensity.

Where maximum stresses are produced in any member by loading any
number of traffic lanes simultaneously,
the following percentages of the
resultant live load stresses shall be used in view of improbable coincident
maximum loading:
Percent
One or two lanes. .

Three lanes
Four lanes or more
100
90
75
The reduction in intensity of floor beam loads shall be determined as

in the case of main trusses or girders, using the width of roadway which
must be loaded to produce maximum stresses in the floor beam.
3. 2. 10. Electric Railway Loading.
If highway bridges carry electric railway traffic, the railway loading
shall be determined on the basis of the class of traffic which the bridge may
The possibility that the bridge may be required to
be expected to carry.
carry the freight cars of steam railroads shall be given consideration.
3. 2. 11. Sidewalk,
Curb, Safety Curb and Railing, Loading.

Loading.
(a) Sidewalk
Sidewalk floors, stringers, and their immediate supports, shall be de
signed for a live load of 85 pounds per square foot of sidewalk area.
Girders, trusses, arches and other members shall be designed for the
following sidewalk live loads per square foot of sidewalk area:
85 lbs.
Spans 0 to 25 ft. in length
Spans 26 to 100 ft. in length
60 lbs.
Spans over 100 ft. in length according to the formula
P = live
load per square foot (maximum,

feet.
W= width of sidewalks in feet.
L = loaded length of sidewalk in
60 lbs. per sq.
ft.).
In calculating stresses in structures which support cantilevered side

walks, the sidewalk shall be considered as fully loaded on only one side of
the structure if this condition produces maximum stress.
(b) Curb Loading.
Curbs shall be designed to resist a lateral force of not less than 500
pounds per linear foot of curb, applied at the top of the curb, but at a
point not over 10 inches above the floor.
(c)
Safety Curb Loading.
Safety curbs, or wide curbs provided for occasional use of pedestrians,

shall be designed for loads specified in paragraph (a) if the curb is more
than 2 feet in width. If 2 feet or less in width, no live load shall be applied.
',
DESIGN
135
(d) Railing Loading.

(1) Roadway Railings.
Top members of roadway railings shall be designed to resist a
lateral horizontal force of 150 pounds per linear foot together with a
simultaneous vertical force of 100 pounds per linear foot applied at
the top of the railing. When curbs are 10 inches or less in height,
lower rails shall be designed to resist a lateral horizontal force of 300
pounds per linear foot; or if there is no lower rail, the web members
shall be designed to resist a horizontal force of 300 pounds per linear
foot applied not less than 21 inches above the roadway. For each inch
of height of curb above 10 inches, this lateral horizontal force may be
reduced 15 pounds per linear' foot, but this force shall not be less than
per linear foot.
150* pounds
The horizontal forces shall be applied
simultaneously.
Railings without webs and with single rails shall be
designed for the forces specified above for lower rails.
(2)
Railings.
Sidewalk railings shall be designed to resist the same forces as
those specified for roadway railings, subject to the same restrictions
concerning curb heights.
Where through trusses, girders, or arches
separate the sidewalk and roadway or where sidewalks are protected
by curb railings, the sidewalk railings shall be designed only for the
forces specified for the top rail.
Sidewalk
3. 2. 12. Impact.
Live load stresses produced by H or H-S loadings shall be increased

for items in Group A by allowance at stated herein, for dynamic, vibratory
and impact effects. Impact shall not be applied to items in Group B.
(a) Group
A.
(1) Superstructure, including steel or concrete supporting columns,

steel towers, legs of rigid frames and generally those portions of the
structure which extend down to the main foundation.
(2) The portion above the ground line of concrete or steel piles which
are rigidly connected to the superstructure as in rigid frame or continuous
designs.
(b) Group B.
retaining walls, piers and piling except Group
(1)
Abutments,
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Foundation pressures and footings.

Timber structures.
Sidewalk loads.
Culverts and structures having cover of
(2).
(A)
feet or more.
( c) Impact Formula.
The amount of this allowance or increment is expressed
of live load stress, and shall be determined by the formula:
I=ETl25
the
as a
fraction
in which
I=impact fraction (maximum 30 per cent).

L=length in feet of the portion of the span which is loaded
maximum stress in the member.
to produce
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
136
For uniformity of application the loaded length "L" shall be especially

considered as follows:
For roadway floors, use the design span length.
For transverse members, such as floor beams, use span length of
member.
For computing truck load moments use span length, except for canti
lever arms use the length from moment center to far end of truck.
For shear due to truck loads use length of the loaded portion of span
from the point under consideration to the reaction, except for cantilever
arms use 30 per cent.
For continuous spans use length of span under consideration for posi
tive moment, and use average of two adjacent loaded spans for negative
moment.
For
"
3. 2. 13.
culverts with cover 0'
"
"
"
"
Longitudinal
Provision shall
to 1'
0" inc. 1=30%

0" inc. 1=20%
2' 1" to 2' 11" inc. 1=10%
l'l"to2'
Forces.
for the effect of a longitudinal force of 5 per

in all lanes, using lane loads, with concentrated load
impact.
The reductions in load intensity of article
This force shall be considered as acting 4 feet above
assumed is based on all traffic headed in the same
be made
cent of the live load

for moment, and no
3. 2. 9. shall apply.
the floor. The force
direction.
The longitudinal force due to friction at expansion

for in the design.
bearings
shall also
be provided
3. 2. 14. Wind Loads.
The following lateral forces shall be applied to all structures, except

as otherwise provided, in respect to bracing requirements,
in section 6,
Structural Steel Design. They shall be considered to act in any horizontal
direction.
(1) The wind force on the structure shall be assumed as a moving
horizontal load equal to 30 pounds per square foot on 1% times the area
of the structure as seen in elevation, including the floor system and railings
and on one-half the area of all trusses or girders in excess of two in the span.
(2) The lateral force due to the moving live load and the wind force
against this load shall be considered as acting 6 feet above the roadway
and shall be as follows:
Highway bridges, 200 pounds per linear foot.

is made to item (6).
(3) The total assumed wind force shall be not less than 300 pounds
per linear foot in the plane of the loaded chord and 150 pounds per linear
foot in the plane of the unloaded chord on truss spans, and not less than
300 pounds per linear foot on girder spans.
(4) In calculating the uplift, due to the foregoing lateral forces, in
the posts and anchorage of viaduct towers, highway viaducts shall be con
sidered as loaded on the leeward traffic lane with a uniform load of 400
pounds per linear foot of lane. These loads shall be applied only in case
they increase the net uplift.
(5) A wind pressure of 50 pounds per square foot on the unloaded
structure, applied as specified above in paragraph (1), shall be used if it
Reference
DESIGN
137
produces greater stress than the combined wind and lateral forces of
paragraphs (1) and (2). This requirement shall not apply if the provision
of paragraph (6) is effective.
(6) A reinforced concrete floor slab effectively keyed to its support, or
a steel grid floor adequately attached to its supports, may be assumed to
resist within the superstructure the wind loads specified under item (2).
3. 2. 15. Thermal Forces.
Provision shall be made for stresses or movements resulting from

The rise and fall in temperature shall be fixed
variations in temperature.
for the locality in which the structure is to be constructed and shall be
figured from an assumed temperature
at the time of erection.
Due con
sideration shall be given to the lag between air temperature and the interior
temperature of massive concrete members or structures.
The range of temperature shall generally be as follows :
Metal Structures
Moderate climate, from 0 to 120 F.
Cold climate, from 30 to 120 F.
Temperature
rise
Concrete Structures
Moderate climate
Cold climate
30
35
F.
F.
Temperature
fall
40 F.
45
F.
3. 2. 16. Force of Stream Current, Floating Ice and Drift.
All piers and other portions of structures which are subject to the
force of flowing water, floating ice, or drift shall be designed to resist the
maximum stresses induced thereby.
Pressure of ice on piers shall be calculated at 400 pounds per square
inch. The thickness of ice and height at which it applies shall be determined
by investigation at the site of the structure.
Effect of flowing water on pier
P=KV2, where
P= pressure in pounds per square foot,
V= velocity of water in feet per second,
K=a
constant, being 1% for square ends, % for angle ends where

the angle is 30 degrees or less, and % for circular piers.
3.2.
7. Buoyancy.
Buoyancy shall be considered as it affects the design of either sub

structure, including piling, or of the superstructure.
3. 2. 18. Earth Pressure.
Structures designed to retain fills shall be proportioned to withstand

as given by Rankine's formula; provided, however, that no struc
ture shall be designed for less than an equivalent fluid pressure of 30 pounds
per cubic foot.
When highway traffic can come within a distance from the top of the
structure equal to one-half of its height, the pressure shall have added to it
a live load surcharge pressure equal to not less than 2 feet of earth.
Where an adequately designed reinforced concrete approach slab sup
ported at one end by the bridge is provided, no live load surcharge need be
pressure
considered.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
138
All designs shall provide for the thorough drainage of the back-filling
material by means of weep holes and crushed rock, pipe drains or gravel
drains, or by perforated drains.
SECTION 3 Distribution of
Loads
3. 3. 1. Distribution of Wheel Loads to Stringers and Floor Beams.
(a) Position of Loads for Shear.

In calculating endshears and
end reactions in transverse floor beams

and longitudinal beams and stringers, no lateral or longitudinal distribution
of the wheel load shall be assumed for the wheel or axle load adjacent to
For loads in other posi
the end at which the stress is being determined.
tions on the span, the distribution for shear shall be determined by the
method prescribed for moment, except that the calculation of horizontal
shear in rectangular beams shall be in accordance with article 3. 4. 14.
(b) Bending Movement in Stringers.

In calculating bending moment in longitudinal
beams or stringers, no
longitudinal distribution of the wheel loads shall be assumed. The lateral
distribution shall be determined as follows : v
(1) Interior Stringers.
Interior stringers shall be designed for loads determined in accordance
with the following table :
Kind of floor
One traffic lane,

fraction of a wheel load to
each stringer
Two or more traffic lanes,

fraction of a wheel load to
each stringer
plank
in thickness,
4 inches
wood block on 4-inch plank
subfloor
or multi-thickness
plank more than 5 inches
Strip
Strip
inches
or
more
in
4.0
8.75
4.5
4.0
If
5.0
S exceeds 5.0 ft.
see footnote*
If
6.0
S exceeds 6.0 ft.
see footnote*
If
4.25
S exceeds 6.5 ft.
see footnote*
If
5.0
S exceeds 10.5 ft.
see footnote*
grid
thick)
Steel
Steel
grid
(less
than
(4 inches
4 inches
or more)
If
4.5
4.0
6.0
S exceeds 6.0 ft.
see footnote*
If
5.0
S exceeds 10.5 ft.
see footnote*
S=average spacing of stringers in feet.

Spline and dowled flooring shall have the same distribution as strip floors of equivalent
thickness.
* In this case the load on each stringer shall be the reaction of the wheel loads, assuming
the flooring between stringers to act as a simple beam.
DESIGN
139
(2) Outside Stringers.

The live load supported by outside stringers shall be the reaction of the
truck wheels, assuming the flooring to act as a simple beam between
stringers.
(3) Total Capacity of Stringers.
The combined load capacity of the beams in a panel shall not be less
than the total live and dead load in the panel.
(c) Bending
Moment
in Floor Beams
(Transverse).
In calculating bending moments in floor beams no transverse distribu
tion of the wheel loads shall be assumed.
If longitudinal stringers are omitted and the floor is supported directly
on floor beams, the beams shall be designed for loads determined in accord
ance with the following table :
Fraction of wheel load to each
Kind of floor
floor beam
S
4
Strip
wood block
on 4-inch
in thickness,
4 inches
subfloor or multi-thickness plank more than 5 inches
plank
thick.
S
4.5
S*
5
S*
6
Steel grid
( less than 4 inches
thick )
S *
4.5
S *
6
S=spacing of beams in feet.

Spline and doweled flooring shall have the same distribution as strip floors of equivalent
thickness.
*
S exceeds denominator, the load on the beam shall be the reaction of the wheel
assuming the flooring between beams to act as a simple beam.
If
3, 3, 2. Distribution
(a)
loads
of Loads and Design of Concrete Slabs,*
Bending Moment,
Bending moment per foot width of slab shall be calculated

to methods given under Cases A, B and C.
In Cases A, B and C:
according
S=effective span length as defined under "Span Lengths"

slab over which a wheel load is distributed
N = maximum number of lanes of traffic permissible on bridge
E= width of
* The slab distribution set forth herein is based, substantially, upon the "Westergaard"
theory.
The following references are furnished concerning the subject of slab design :
Public Roads, March, 1930, "Computation of Stresses in Bridge Slabs Due to Wheel
Looads," by H. M. Westergaard.
University of Illinois Bulletin No. 303, "Solutions for Certain Rectangular Slabs Con
tinuous Over Flexible Supports," by Vernon P. Jensen ; Bulletin 304, "A Distribution
Procedure for the Analysis of Slabs Continuous Over Flexible Beams," by Nathan M.
Newmark ; and Bulletin 315, "Moments in Simple Span Bridge Slabs with Stiffened Edges,"
by Vernon P. Jensen.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
140
W= width of roadway between

W width of graded roadway
curbs on bridges
across culverts
Q= uniform lane load per linear foot of lane
P1 and P2=load on one wheel
P1 = load on one wheel of single axle
P2=load on one wheel of tandem axle
P'= concentrated lane load per lane.
Case
A Main Reinforcement Perpendicular to Traffic
(See note under Case B)
Formula for Moments

Distribution of Wheel Loads
Single Axle
Freely supported
Spans 2' to 7', E = .SS+2.5
+.25^S
Spans over 7', E = .4S + 3.75
+ .25 S
'1 andem
p.,
+.25^?S
+.2^rS
+ .23^S
.2 S.
Continuous
Spans
Spans
+.2^8
'.2
E,
Axles
Spans 2' to 7', E = .36S+2.58
Spans over 7', E = .063S +4.65
po
Note: In the design for H-20 or H20-S16 loads, the single 24,000 pound axle governs
for spans under 10.5 feet and the two 16,000 pound axles govern for spans of 10.5 feet or over.
Case
Main Reinforcement
Parallel to
Traffic*
Spans 2 to
Feet
12
Formula for moment

Freely supported
spans
Distribution, E=.
175 S+3.2
+.25
Note:
Continuous
spans
+.2
The formulas for distribution and moment, Cases A and B, include

the effect of all wheel loads placed in positions to produce maximum
moments. Continuous spans shall be designed in accordance with the above
formula unless moments are calculated by more exact methods which may
permit a greater reduction.
Case C Main Reinforcement Parallel to Traffic*

Distribution,
(a) Wheel loads:
(b)
E=
10N+W
4N
Spans over
12 Feet
Load per foot of slab =
Lane loads:
* In the design for H20 and H20 S16 loads, the single 24,000-pound axle shall be used for
spans under 18 feet in accordance
with the formulas of cases B & C. For spans 18 feet and
over the two 16,000-pound axles govern and the moments obtained from the formulas of Cases
B & C using a single axle load of 24,000 pounds shall be increased by the percentage expressed
by the formula 1.6 (S-18).
DESIGN
Uniform load=
Concentrated
per square foot of slab
0.5W+5N
NP'
load=
0.5
141
W+5 N
per foot width of slab
The moment for slabs over 12 feet shall be calculated as follows : The
loads per foot of slab shall be determined according to the method given
for distribution of loads. The loads thus determined shall be placed on the
span or spans in position to cause maximum positive or negative moments.
The moment shall be calculated in accordance with standard practice for
design of simple and continuous spans.
(b)
Edge Beams (Longitudinal)
Edge beams shall be provided for all slabs having main reinforcement
parallel to traffic. The beam may consist of the curb section reinforced, of
a beam support or of additional slab width. It shall be designed to resist
a live load moment of 0.10 P S where P=the wheel load and
S=span length.
20
The moment as stated is for a freely supported span. It may be reduced

per cent for continuous spans unless a greater reduction results from an
exact analysis.
(c) Distribution Reinforcement.

Reinforcement shall be placed in the bottom of all slabs normal to
the main steel to provide for lateral distribution of the loads. The amount
shall be the percentage of the main reinforcing steel required for positive
moment as given by the following formula :
Percentage =
100
g
Maximum 50%
where S equals the effective span of the slab in feet.
(d)
Shear and Bond Stress in Slabs.
Slabs designed for bending moment in accordance

shall be considered satisfactory in bond and shear.
(e)
Unsupported
with the foregoing
Edges, Transverse.
The design assumptions of this article do not provide for the effect of
loads near unsupported edges. Therefore, at the ends of the bridge and at
intermediate points where the continuity of the slab is broken, the edges shall
be supported
by diaphrams or other suitable means.
The diaphrams
shall be designed to resist the full moment and shear produced by the wheel
loads which can come on them.
(f)
Cantilever
Slabs.
Under the following formulas for distribution of loads on cantilever

slabs, the slab is designed to support the load independent of edge support
The distribution given includes the effect
along the end of the cantilever.
of wheels on parallel elements.
I.
Reinforcement Perpendicular to Traffic
Each wheel on the element perpendicular to traffic shall

to the following formula:
according
be
distributed
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
142
Moment
per foot of slab
E=.8X+3.75
P
= X foot-pounds
E
in which X= distance in
feet from load to point of support.

2.
Reinforcement Parallel to Traffic
The distribution for each wheel load on the element parallel to traffic
shall be as follows :
W
E=.35 X+3.2 but shall not exceed
2N
Moment per foot of slab=
( g)
Slabs Supported
foot-pounds.
on Four Sides.
the case of slabs supported along four edges and reinforced in both
directions, the proportion of the load carried by the short span of the slab
shall be assumed as given by the following equations:
In
For
For
load uniformly
b*
distributed, p =
&*
load concentrated
b*
b3
at center, p =
a3
+ W
where p = proportion of load carried by short span,

a = length of short span of slab,
b = length of long span of slab.
Where the length of the slab exceeds IV2 times its width, the entire load
shall be assumed to be carried by the transverse reinforcement.
The distribution width E for the load taken by either span shall be
Moments obtained shall be used
determined as provided for other slabs.
in designing the center half of the short and long slabs. The reinforcing
steel in the outer quarters of both short and long spans may be reduced 50
per cent.
In the design of the supporting beams, consideration shall be
given to the fact that the loads delivered to the supporting beams are not
uniformly distributed along the beams.
(h)
Edge Distance of Wheel Load.
In
designing
slabs the center line of wheel load shall be assumed to be
foot from the face of the curb.
(i)
Span Lengths.
(See also Article 3. 7. 4.)
The following effective span lengths shall be used in calculating distri

bution and moment of slabs continuous over more than two supports.
Slabs monolithic with beam (without haunches) S = clear span.
Slabs supported on steel stringers S = distance between edges of flanges
plus V2 of the stringer flange width.
Slabs supported
of stringer.
on timber stringers S = clear span plus
Vz
thickness
For simple spans the span length shall be the distance center to center
of supports but not to exceed clear span plus thickness of slab.
DESIGN
143
3. 3. 3. Distribution of Wheel Loads Through Earth Fills.

When the depth of fill is 2 feet or more, concentrated loads shall be con
sidered as uniformly distributed over a square, the sides of which are equal
to 1% times the depth of fill. When such areas from several concentrations
overlap, the total load shall be considered as uniformly distributed over the
area defined by the outside limits of the individual areas, but the total width
of distribution shall not exceed the total width of the supporting slab. For
single spans, the effect of live load may be neglected when the depth of fill
is more than 8 feet and exceeds the span length ; for multiple spans, it may be
neglected when the depth of fill exceeds the distance between faces of end
When the depth of fill is less than 2 feet the wheel
supports or abutments.
load shall be distributed as in slabs with concentrated loads. When the cal
culated live load and impact moment in concrete slabs based on distribution
of the wheel load through fills as herein outlined exceeds the live load and
impact moment calculated according to article 3. 3. 2 then the latter moment
shall be used.
3. 3. 4. Distribution of Wheel Loads on Timber Flooring.
For the calculation of bending moments in timber flooring each wheel
load shall be distributed as follows :
(a) Flooring Transverse.

In direction of span over width of tire.
H
(H 10 loading 10 inches;
H 20 loading 20 inches.)
Normal to direction of span plank floor, distribution = width of plank.
Normal to direction of span laminated floor, distribution = 15 inches.
Spline, or doweled floor not less than 5% inches thick, distribution = 4
15 loading
15 inches;
times thickness.
Span length
of
one
= clear distance between stringers plus one-half the width

stringer but shall not exceed the clear span plus thickness of floor.
(b) Flooring Longitudinal.

In direction of span point
loading.
Normal to direction of span laminated floor, distribution = width of

wheel plus thickness of floor.
Normal to direction of span plank floor, distribution = width of plank.
Spline, or doweled floor not less than 5% inches thick, distribu
tion = width of wheel plus twice thickness.
Span length = clear distance between floor beams plus one-half the
width of one beam but shall not exceed the clear span plus thickness of floor.
(c) Continuous Flooring.
If
the flooring is continuous over more than two spans the maximum
bending moment shall be assumed as being 80 per cent of that obtained for
a simple span.
3. 3. 5. Steel Grid Floors,
(a) General.
The grid floor shall be designed as continuous and moments reduced as

in article 3. 3. 2.
The formulas for distribution of loads provided herein are based upon
there being adequate transfer of the load normal to the main elements.
Reinforcement for this purpose shall consist of transverse bars or shapes
welded to the main steel. The strength and details of the transverse rein
forcement shall meet with the approval of the engineer.
provided
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
144
(b) Floors Filled
with Concrete.
The distribution and bending moment shall be as specified for concrete

slabs, article 3. 3. 2. The following items specified in that article shall also
apply to concrete filled steel grid floors:
Edge beams (longitudinal).
Unsupported edges (transverse).
Span lengths.
The strength of the composite steel and concrete slab shall be determined
The allowable stresses shall
by means of the "transformed area" method.
be as set forth in section 4.
'c ) Open
Floors.
wheel load shall be distributed, normal to the main bars, over a width
of W plus twice the distance center to center of main bars, where W equals
Bending moment shall be
1 inch per ton of total weight of loaded truck.
calculated as specified in section 3 for concrete slabs.
The strength of the
section shall be determined by the moment of inertia method.
The allow
able stresses shall be as set forth in section 4.
SECTION
Unit
Stresses, Pile Loads
and Bearing
Power
of Soils
3. 4. 1. General.
For the purpose of application of stresses and pile loads, the loads and
forces shall be divided into two groups:
(a) Group A.
Buoyancy
Dead load
Earth
Live load
Impact
pressure
(b) Group B.
Longitudinal forces
Wind loads
Shrinkage stresses
Rib shortening
Centrifugal force
Back-fill (to original ground line)
Erection stresses
Ice
Current
Earthquake
Thermal stresses
Structures designed for Group A loads shall be proportioned so the

stresses and loads shall not exceed those set forth in this section.
Structures designed for Group A loads in combination with Group B
loads shall be proportioned for stresses and pile loads set forth herein in
creased 25 per cent; provided, however, that the resulting sections shall not
be less than required for Group A loading only.
Unit Stresses.
Unless otherwise noted the allowable
are given in pounds per square inch.
unit stresses stipulated herein
Steel Structures
Unless otherwise specified or noted on the plans, it shall be assumed

that the steel is to be Structural Carbon Steel, A. S. T. M. A7-46 (Eyebars,
A7-39). The modulus of elasticity for all grades of steel shall be assumed
as 29,000,000 and the coefficient of expansion .0000065.
DESIGN
14S
3. 4. 2. Structural Carbon Steel A. S. T. M. A 7-46 (Eyebars, A 7-39).
Rivet steel, A. A. S. H. 0. M 97-39 (A. S. T. M. A 141-39).

Pins and rollers, A. S. T. M.A 235-46 (Class CI).
Axial tension, structural steel, net section
Tension in extreme fibers of rolled shapes, girders and built
sections subject to bending
18,000
Tension in bolts at root of thread
18,000
13,500
Stiffeners of plate girders
18,000
Axial
compression,
gross section:
The permissible unit stress in concentrically loaded columns having

values of L/r not greater than 140 may be computed from the following
formulas, or from the more exact formulas given in
approximate
Appendix B:
Riveted
Pin
L2
15,000 hi-^r
ends
15,000^-;
ends
L = length of member, in inches.

r = least radius of gyration of member,
in inches.
For compression members with values of L/r greater than 140, and for
compression members of known eccentricity, see appendix "B."
Compression in extreme fibers of rolled shapes, girders
and built sections subject to bending (for values of
L/b
not greater than 30)
18,000 5
^_
L =
length, in inches, of unsupported flange be

tween lateral connections or knee braces,
b = flange width in inches.
Allowable compression in splice material, gross section

Stress in extreme fiber of pins
Shear in girder webs, gross section
Diagonal tension in webs of girders and rolled beams, at sections
where maximum shear and bending occur simultaneously
Shear in power-driven rivets and pins
18,000
27,000
11,000
18,000
13,500
11,000
24,000
Shear in turned bolts

Bearing on pins not subject to rotation
Bearing on power-driven rivets, milled stiffeners, and other steel
27,000
parts in contact
(Rivets driven by pneumatically or electrically
operated hammers are considered power driven.)
12,000
Bearing on pins subject to rotation (not due to deflection)
20,000
Bearing on turned bolts
Bearing on expansion rollers and rockers, pounds per linear inch:

p 13,000
Diameters
up to 25 inches
600d
20,000
Diameters
from
p 13,000
25 to 125 inches
3,000
20,000
d
p
Vd
= diameter of roller or rocker, in inches.

= yield point in tension of steel in the roller or the
base which ever is the lesser.
HIGHWAY
146
BRIDGES
In proportioning rivets
the nominal diameter shall be used.

The effective bearing area of a pin, a bolt, or a rivet shall be its
diameter multiplied by the thickness of the metal on which it bears.
In metal less than % inch thick countersunk rivets shall not be assumed
to carry stress.
In metal % inch thick and over, one-half the depth of
countersink shall be omitted in calculating bearing area.
3. 4. 3. High Strength
Rivets.
High Strength Structural Rivet Steel, A. A. S. H. 0. M

M. A 195-41).
Shear
Bearing
98-41
S. T.
(A.
20,000
40,000
3. 4. 4. Wrought Iron.
hapes and bars, A. A. S. H. O. M 100-39
(A. S. T. M. A 42-47).
Pipe (A. S T. M. A 72-45).
Tension
Bending on extreme
(A. S. T. M. A 207-39).
14,000
14,000
fiber
3. 4. 5. Cast Steel and Cast Iron.
For
cast steel the allowable
shall
unit stresses in compression and bearing

Other allowable unit stresses
be the same as those for structural steel.

shall be three-fourths of those for structural
steel.
cast iron of the grades specified in division
able unit stresses shall be used:
Bending on extreme fiber
For
Shear
Direct compression
3. 4.
IV
the following allow

3,000
3,000
12,000
(short columns)
6. Bronze or Copper Alloy.
Bearing on bronze or copper alloy bearing and expansion plates

3. 4. 7. Structural low-Alloy
. .
2,000
Steel.
This steel is designated:
Structural low-alloy steel, A. S. T. M. A
242-46.
The foregoing specifications shall apply to low-alloy steel parts of

bridges except as provided otherwise below and the nomenclature below is
the same unless otherwise defined.
Yield Point, Min

Axial tension, structural
steel,
net section
Tension in extreme fibers of rolled
shapes, girders and built sec
tions subject to bending
Axial compression, gross section:
% in. and
under
50,000
over J in. to
1 XA in. inch
45,000
27,000
24,000
22.000
27,000
24,000
22,000
27,000
24,000
22,000
over
2
1 14 in . to
in. incl.
40,000

values of L/r not greater than 125 for low-alloy steel may be computed from
the following approximate formulas or by the more exact method, using the
formulas given in Appendix B.
DESIGN
147
Riveted ends
22,000-0.56^
20,000-0.46^
18,000-0.39^
Pin
22,000-0.73^
20,000-0.61
18,000-0.48^
ends
For compression members with values of L/r greater than 125 low-alloy
steel, and for compression members of known eccentricity see Appendix B.
Compression in extreme fibers of
rolled shapes, girders and built
sections, subject to bending,
gross section.
(Values of L/b not to exceed 25
for low-* loy steel)
Compression, splice material gross
section
Stress in extreme fibers of pin
Shear in plate girder webs, gross
sections
Diagonal tension in webs of girders
and rolled beams at sections
where maximum
shear and
bending occurs simultaneously.
Shear in pins
Bearing on pins (not subject to
rotation)
Bearing on milled stifleners and
other parts in contact
Bearing on pins subject to rota
tion (not due to deflection)
Bearing on rollers and rockers:
Same formulas as in article 3.4.2.
NOTE
elled flanges
the greatest
tj
j.2
24,000-6.67^
22,000-6.11^
27,000
40,000
24,000
36,000
22,000
32,000
15,000
14,000
12,000
27,000
20,000
24,000
18,000
22,000
16,000
36,000
32,000
28,000
40,000
36,000
32,000
18,000
16,000
14,000
27,000-7.50g.2
For determining
the permissible stresses for low.alloy steel the thickness of bev

For built-up members the plate having
or plates shall be the average thickness.
thickness shall govern.
3. 4. 8. Structural Nickel and Structural Silicon Steels.

These steels are designated: structural silicon steel (A. S. T. M. A
94-46) and structural nickel steel (A. S. T. M. A 8-46).
The foregoing specifications shall apply to silicon or nickel steel parts
of bridges except as provided otherwise below and the nomenclature below is
the same unless otherwise defined:
Axial
tension, structural steel, net section

Tension in extreme fibers of rolled shapes, girders
and built sections, subject to bending
Axial compression, gross section:
Silicon steel
Nickel steel
24,000
30,000
24,000
30,000
24,000
30,000

values of L/r not greater than 130 for silicon steel or 120 for nickel steel
may be computed from the following approximate formulas or by the more
exact method, using formulas given in Appendix B.
Riveted ends
20,0000.46^
24,000 0.66^
Pin
20,000 0.61
24,0000.86^
ends
j2
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
148
For compression on members with values of L/r greater than 130 for
silicon steel and 120 for nickel steel, and for compression members of known
eccentricity see appendix "B."
Silicon steel
extreme fibers of rolled
shapes, girders and built sections, subject
to bending, gross section (for values of
L/b not greater than 25 for silicon steel,
L2
24,000 6.67por 20 for nickel steel
Compression in
Compression, splice material, gross section .

Stress in extreme fibers of pins
Shear in plate girder webs, gross section . .
Diagonal tension in webs of girders and
rolled beams at sections where maximum
shear and bending occurs simultaneously
Shear in pins
Bearing on pins (not subject to rotation) . .
Bearing on milled stiffeners and other parts
in contact
Bearing on pins subject to rotation (not
due to deflection)
Bearing on rollers and rockers:
Same formulas as in article 3. 4. 2.
3. 4. 9. Unit Stresses
Nickel steel
30,000 8.33
24,000
36,000
14,000
30,000
44,000
17,500
24,000
18,000
32,000
27,000
22,000
40,000
36,000
44,000
16,000
18,000
L2
for Welding.
The allowable unit stresses in pounds per square inch of effective area of
weld shall be as given in the current specifications of the American Welding
Society for Welded Highway and Railway Bridges.
3. 4. 10. Bearing on Masonry.
Bearing on granite masonry

Bearing on sandstone and limestone masonry
Bearing on concrete:
Bridge seats, under hinged rockers and bolsters (not subjected
to high edge loading by a deflecting beam, girder, or truss) . .
Bridge seats, under bearing plates or non-hinged shoes (sub
jected to high edge loading by the direct bearing, upon the
plate or shoe, of a deflecting beam or birder), average
800
400
1,000
700
(The above bridge seat unit stresses will apply only where the edge of
bridge seat projects at least 3 inches (average) beyond edge of shoe or plate.
Otherwise, the unit stresses permitted will be 75 per cent of the above
amounts.)
Concrete Structures
3. 4. 11. Concrete Stresses.
(a)
Standard Notations
and Assumptions.
L = unsupported length of column, in feet.

D = least dimension of column, in feet.
(1)
(2)
(3)
The full dimensions of the concrete section shall be used in the

design of tied columns.
The diameter of the outer circumference of the spiral hooping
shall be used for the computation of stresses in spiral columns.
For battered columns "D" shall be measured at midheight.
DESIGN
149
fc =
permissible extreme fiber stress in compression.

=unit ultimate compressive strength of concrete as determined by cylinder
tests at the age of 28 days,
fe = permissible unit compressive stress in concrete in eccentrically loaded
columns.
e = eccentricity of resultant load as measured from the gravity axis.
c~ distance from gravity axis to the extreme fiber in compression, measured
parallel to the plane of bending.
r = radius of gyration of gross transformed column section in the plane of
bending.
K= ratio of the permissible unit concrete compressive stress for axial loading
to the permissible unit stress in the extreme fibers of the concrete beams.
(See formula in appendix D.)
n = ratio of modulus of elasticity of steel to that of concrete.
The value of
n, as a function of the ultimate cylinder strength of concrete, shall be
assumed as follows:
f'c- 2000-2400 n = 15
= 2500-2900
=12
=3000-3900
=10
= 4000-4900
= 8
= 5000 or more = 6
f'c
p = ratio of cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcing bar to the gross

area of the concrete section,
p' = ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to volume of the concrete core.
Coefficients:
Thermal, .000006.
Shrinkage, .0002.
when L/D is greater
f''c = permissible unit compressive stress in concrete
than 12.
(b)
General.
It shall
be understood that concrete structures designed in accordance

with these specifications are designed on the basis of concrete having an
ultimate strength of 3,000 lbs. per square inch at 28 days; unless another
ultimate strength is stipulated on the plans, in which case the allowable
stresses shall be noted on the plans.
The extreme upper limit of ultimate strength upon which allowable
stresses are based shall be 4,500 pounds per square inch.
Allowable
Stresses
(c) Flexure.
Values if
f'c =30 00
Extreme fiber in compression

Extreme fiber in tension, plain concrete, primarily in foot
ings
Extreme fiber in tension, reinforced concrete
fc =
}i f 'c
fc = .03 f'c
1000
90
None
(d)
Shear.
Beams without web reinforcement:
bars not anchored
Longitudinal
footings
Longitudinal bars anchored
Beams with web reinforcement:
Longitudinal bars not anchored
Longitudinal bars anchored
Punching shear
(e) Bond
or plain
concrete
02
03
f'c
f'c
60
90
046 f'c
06 f'c
053 f'c
140
180
160
on Piles
(in Seals).
Timber, steel or concrete piles, 10 lbs. per square inch.
pile has the resistance to pull thereby induced.)
(Providing the
HIGHWAY
150
(f)
Bearing on Bridge Seats.

Refer to article
(g)
BRIDGES
Columns
3. 4. 10.
Flexure and Direct Stress
Axially loaded columns with
L/D from 3 to
clusive, reinforced with longitudinal bars:
With lateral ties
Value if f'c=3000
equal
12
Axially loaded columns with
(4)
Eccentrically
L/D
-i
fc = .25f'cl
l + (n-l)p|
+12p')f
=
greater than 12.
\f
(3)
750
in
fc = (.25
Spirally reinforced
fc = .25f \>
l)p]
( 2)
to or less than 3.
L/D
+
(n
Axially loaded piers and pedestals with
'c[l
CI)
(l.33 -3^5)^
With
L/D
greater than
12
r2
equal to or less than 12
fc
L/D
fe
With
fe
loaded columns
1+SS
+r
= f",
1+K
ec
is
is
fe,
fe,
equal to or less than 12, are given in the diagram

when L/D
Values of
greater than 12, apply the factor
when L/D
appendix D. For values of
fc/fo to the values given in the diagram.
Structural
Grade
Steel reinforcement:
Tension in flexural members

Tension in web reinforcement
Compression:
"n" times the compression in the surround
ing concrete.
Bond:
Bars not anchored
Bars adequately anchored by hooks
or otherwise
18,000
16,000
.05
fo
(maximum 150)
Intermediate
Grade
3. 4. 12. Reinforcement.
20,000
16,000
.05 f'c
(maximum 150)
.075 f'c
.075 f'c
(maximum 225)
(maximum 225)
above allowable bond stresses fhall be reduced for footings as provided under
"Reinforcement," Article 3.5.2 (f).
According to article 4. 5.
it is required that the grade of reinforcing ateel shall
be either "Structural"
or "Intermediate," unless otherwise stipulated. In the event allowable
by
stresses for "Intermediate Grade" steel are used, it is necessary to modify article 4. 5.
special provision, to require that "Intermediate Grade" steel be furnished.
The grade re
quired should also be noted on the plans.
1
1,
NOTE: The
the item
DESIGN
151
Timber Structures
3. 4. 13. Standard
Stress Grades and Working Stresses.
The following are the allowable unit stresses for treated timber
Fiber
Grades and species
Shortleaf
1600#f Dense Longleaf or

Dense Shortleaf South
ern Pine
1600 #f Close-grained
Red-
#f Tidewater
#f
1400#f Close-grained
1200#f
Douglas
(Inland)
Larch
Fir
#f Dense Shortleaf
Southern Pine
Red1200#f Close-grained
1000
....
#f Western
Red
Cedar
1200#f Port Orford Cedar.
1200#f Douglas Fir
...
(Coast)
1100#f Port Orford Cedar.
1100#f Tidewater Red
1100#f
120
120
380
380
1,600,000
1,300,000
1800
120
380
1,600,000
1600
100
345
1,600,000
1600
80
335
1,500,000
1600
100
345
1,300,000
1600
120
380
1,600,000
1600
80
267
1,200,000
1400
1400
120
120
300
500
1,200,000
1,500,000
1400
100
380
1,600,000
1400
80
267
1,200,000
1200
1200
80
100
315
325
1,500,000
1,300,000
1200
100
380
1,600,000
1200
70
267
1,200,000
1000
1200
100
100
200
250
1,000,000
1,500,000
1200
1100
100
80
325
250
1,600,000
1,500,000
1100
1100
100
100
300
500
1,200,000
1,500,000
Red-
1200#f
1200
1800
1800
Red
Oak
1400#f Dense Longleaf
1400
Modulus
of
elasticity
South-
Douglas Fir (Coast)
Douglas Fir (Inland)...
1400
Compression
perpendicular
to grain
Fir
(Coast and Inland)

1800#f Dense Larch
1800 #f Dense Longleaf or
Dense
Maximum
horizontal
shear
stress
in bending
or tension
Dense Douglas
1800#f
Oak
Compression
Parallel to Grain, Short Columns

Grades and Species
1 200 #c
-
1200#
1200#c
1200#c
1200#c
1200#c
1100#c
1100#c
1100#c
Tidewater red cypress

Close-grained Douglas fir (coast) .
Close-grained Douglas fir (inland)
Close-grained larch
Dense longleaf or dense shortleaf southern pine
Close-grained redwood
Douglas fir (coast)
Douglas fir (inland)
Larch
1100#cOak
1200
1^00
1^00
"J
n00
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
152
Compression
Parallel to Grain, Short
Columns
Grades and Species

1100#c
1100#c
1000#c
1000#c
1000#c
1000#c
800#c
Close-grained
redwood
1100
1100
1000
1000
1000
1000
800
Port Orford cedar

Tidewater red cypress
Oak
Dense longleaf southern
Close-grained redwood
Western red cedar
pine
.'
For untreated timber, except for temporary use, the stresses given
the above table shall be reduced to the following percentages:
Kind of stress
Extreme fiber in bending
Compression perpendicular to grain
Compression parallel to grain
Horizontal shear
Modulus of elasticity
3. 4. 14. Formulas
(a) Horizontal
for
in
Per cent
87%
70
92
100
100
of Stresses in Timber,
the Computation
Shear in Rectangular Beams.
Horizontal shear in beams shall be computed from the maximum shear

occurring at a distance from the support equal to three times the depth
of the beam, or at the quarter point whichever be the lesser distance from
the support.
The live load to be used in computing horizontal shear in each
beam shall be one-half the sum of the wheel load and the live load used in
computing the maximum moment.
The shear shall be calculated according
3
s~2
bd
to the following formula:
Where
s= maximum unit shear per square inch
b = width of beam in inches

d = depth of beam in inches
V=end shear in pounds
(h) Axial
in Rectangular Columns.
P = total load in pounds
A = area of cross section in square inches
Compression
(Hinged ends assumed.)
C =safe stress in compression parallel to grain for short columns

L = unsupported length in inches
D least dimension in inches
E = modulus of elasticity
for any grade, for factor of safety of 3.
Short columns.
not over
Intermediate columns,
11
between
11
and
K.
DESIGN
Long columns.
163
equal to or greater than
K,
but not to exceed
50
.274
(Hinged ends
Compression on Connector-Joined Spaced Columns.
assumed).
Timber connectors shall include devices used in the contact surfaces of
timber joints to increase the strength or shear resistance over that of
bolted joints.
(c) Axial
^Xl.25
^
for unstayed portion of individual members shall not exceed
50
members of spaced columns shall not exceed 80
of individual
for entire column shall not exceed 50
Spacer blocks.
A single spacer block shall be within 5 per cent of L
from center of column. If more than one spacer block is used, the distance
between any two blocks shall not exceed one-half the distance between
Connectors of the same size as
centers of connectors in the end blocks.
used in the end block shall be used for spacer blocks under these conditions.
Spacer blocks shall be in contact with the full width of sides of the main
timbers.
Laminated columns and spaced columns with less than full width
spacer pieces shall not be permitted.
Intermediate columns.
Condition A.
K2 = 1.5811
When connectors are within
from the ends of the column
Condition B.
When connectors are placed from
blocks are used.

K3 = 1.732
^ to ^
from the end and long
P
A
Long columns.
.274
EX2.5
for condition A
X'(fe)'
P
(d)
.274
EX3
for condition B
Safe Load on Round Columns.
The safe load on a round column shall not exceed that permitted for a
square column of the same cross-section area.
The diameter of a tapered
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
154
column shall be measured at a point one-third the length from the small
end and in no case shall it be assumed as more than 1% times the least
diameter at its small end. The compressive stress at the small end of a
tapered column shall not exceed the allowable stress for a short column.
(e)
Notched Beams.
Beams notched upward in the bearing face on supports
to maximum end load R as determined by the formula.
D
R
2bd2
shall
be limited
3h~
R
H
= maximum end load

= maximum permissible stress in shear
b = breadth of beam
d = depth of beam above the notch
h = total depth of beam
(f)
Bearing on Inclined Surfaces.

N- Psin2 PQ cos2 e
e+Q
N =unit bearing on an inclined surface
P=unit stress in compression parallel to the grain
Q =unit stress in compression perpendicular to the grain
0= angle in degrees between the direction of load and the direction
of grain
(g) Timber
Connectors.
Timber connectors shall consist of devices to be used at surfaces of

contact in bolted timber joints, to increase the strength or shear resistance
of wood-to-wood or wood-to-steel connections.
Allowable loads, spacing of connectors, edge and end distance, bolt
and washer sizes and other details of design shall be those recommended or
approved by the United States Forest Products Laboratory, or the allow
able loads may be determined by actual tests of full sized joints for each
condition of connector use in accordance with their procedure.
Miscellaneous
Determination
3. 4. 15. Bearing Power of Foundation Soils.
of Bearing
Power.*
When required by the engineer, the bearing power of the soil in ex
cavated foundation pits shall be determined by loading tests.
The following tabulation of the bearing power of broad basic groups
of materials may be used as an aid to the judgment in the absence of more
definite information:
Safe bearing power
Tons per square foot
Material
Alluvial soils
Clays
V2
Max.
1
Sand, confined
Gravel
10
Cemented sand and gravel

Rock
*
Min.
For laboratory methods of determining the consolidation characteristics of foundation

see PUBIC Roads, March, 1937, "The Theory of Soil Consolidation and Testing of
Foundation Soils," by L. A. Palmer and E. S. Barber.
soils,
DESIGN
155
3. 4. 16. Angles of Repose.

Earth, Loam
30
25
30
15
25
35
Dry Sand. .
Miost Sand
Wet Sand.
Clay
Compact earth
to
to
to
to
to
to
45
35
45
30
45
40
Gravel .
Cinders
Coke
Coal.
30
25
30
25
to 40
to 40
to 45
to 35
In the absence of exact data which has been determined by field inves
tigation and soil analysis, the angle of repose of the material shall be
assumed to be the minimum given in the table.
3. 4. 17. Bearing Value of Piling.
(a)
General.
The design loads for pile3 shall not be greater than the minimum value
which shall be determined for Case A, Case B and Case C; where Case A is
the capacity of the pile as a structural member, Case B is the capacity of the
pile to transfer its load to the ground and Case C is the capacity of the
The values
ground to support the load delivered to it by the pile or piles.
assignable to each of the three cases shall be determined by making subsur
face investigations or tests of sufficient extent to justify the assumed design
values used for the particular condition of support under consideration.
In determining the bearing value of piles for use in designing, considera
tion shall be given to all information available relative to the subsurface
conditions.
Consideration shall also be given to :
The difference between the supporting capacity of a single pile and
a group of piles.
(2) The capacity of the underlying strata to support the load of the
pile group.
(3) The effect of driving additional piles and the effect of their loads on
(1)
(4)
(b)
adjacent structures.
Possibility of scour and its effect.
Case A.
Capacity of Pile as a Structural Member.
(1) Piles shall
be designed as structural columns.

Timber piles shall
in accordance with article 3.4.14, concrete piles in accordance
with article 3.4.11, steel piles in accordance with article 3.4.2, and concretefilled pipe piles in accordance with article 3.4.11, except that the allowable
unit stresses may be increased 20% provided the shell thickness is not less
than % inch. The area of the shell shall be included in determining the value
of P=percentage of reinforcement.
Where corrosion may be expected Me
inch shall be deducted from the shell thickness to allow for reduction in sec
tion by corrosion. The allowable stresses of articles 3.4.2, 3.4.11 and 3.4.14
may be used in all cases where all of the stresses to which the piles may be
subjected have been included. These stresses may be increased in accordance
with article 3.4.1. For trestle piles or other piles without lateral support de
signed for dead load and live load only and where temperature, traction,
water pressure and other forces are not considered, the allowable unit
stresses specified in articles 3.4.2, 3.4.11 and 3.4.14 shall be decreased 20%.
be designed
(2)
Required
Subsurface
Investigations:
Subsurface investigations shall be made which will determine the prob

able depth of scour or flotation of material and the condition of lateral sup
port of the pik. A pile shall be considered fully supported laterally except
HIGHWAY
156
BRIDGES
that portion which is or may be, as a result of scour, in air, water, muck, peat,
thin mud or other very plastic or fluid material.
of Pile to Transfer Load to the Ground.
(1) Point-bearing Piles. A pile shall be considered to be a point-bearing
pile when placed or driven on or into a material which is capable of develop
ing the pile load by direct bearing at the point with reasonable factor of
(c)
Case B.
Capacity
safety.
The allowable load at the tip of the pile shall not exceed the following:
(a) For timber piles, 80% of allowable compression parallel to grain,

short columns, in accordance with article 3.4.13.
(b) For concrete piles, 0.33f'c in accordance with article 3.4.11.
*(c) For concrete-filled pipe piles, 0.40f'c in accordance with article
3.4.11, applied to the total actual area of the concrete and steel.
*
(d) For steel piles, 6,000 pounds per sq. in. over the cross sectional
area of the pile tip.
Friction piles. A pile shall be considered to be a friction pile if its
not rest on or in a material which is capable of developing the
pile load by direct bearing at the point.
The load-carrying capacity of friction piles shall be determined by one
or more of the following methods :
(2)
point
does
(a) Driving and loading test piles. The safe allowable load shall be as
defined by article 2.3.6 (a).
(b) Pile-driving experience in the vicinity. When piles are designed on
the basis of experience in the vicinity, due consideration will be
given to the variation in pile types and lengths, and in the varia
tion of the soil strata. Where possible, the complete driving records
of all piles in the vicinity shall be examined and compared to the
driving records of the project piles.
(c) Adequate tests of the soil strata through which the pile is to be
driven.
These tests should be projected and compared, if possible,
to tests of similar material through which piles of known capacity
have been driven.
Investigations:
Sufficient borings shall be made to determine
the presence, position, and thickness of the material which is capa
ble of developing point bearing, and the log of borings shall show
the nature of the overlying strata in order that the extent of lateral
support may be determined.
If the point-bearing stratum is of
doubtful thickness and quality, the borings shall be made to suffi
cient depth below this stratum such that the capacity of a friction
(3) Required
Subsurface
(a) Point-bearing piles.
pile may be determined.
(b)
Friction piles. Borings shall be made to an elevation well below

the expected elevation of the pile tips and accurate logs of these
In those cases where the piles are to be
borings shall be made.
designed on the basis of soil tests, undisturbed samples shall be
taken on all strata which will have Appreciable influence on the
capacity of the pile.
(c) Combination
point-bearing and friction pilss. Piles shall be clas

(1) point-bearing or (2) friction. Those cases
sified as either
*NOTE: The limitation in (c) and (d) govern

of the piles is determined by loading test piles.
except
where
the toint bearing capacity
DESIGN
where
adequate
friction may
157
is developed by both point bearing and

either of these classifications.
strength
be designed under
of the Ground to Support the Load Delivered
by the
(d)
Case C.
shall
(1) The capacity of the ground to support the load delivered by the pile
investi
be determined from the results of the required subsurface
Capacity
Pile.
gations.
Required Subsurface Investigations:

(a) Point-bearing pile3. Sufficient borings shall be made to determine
the thickness and quality of the stratum in which the point bearing
is developed. If the material in which point bearing is developed is of
sufficient thickness and is underlain by a firm material, no reduction
will be made for group action of piles. In general, piles should not
rest on a thin stratum of hard material which is underlain by a
thick stratum of soft or yielding material, but where this condition
cannot be avoided, group action should be considered and the design
(2)
loads reduced accordingly.
(b) Friction piles. Borings shall be made well below the tips of the
piles in order to determine the characteristics of the underlying
material. In most cases a study of those borings will suffice to
determine whether or not the underlying soil will support the loads
delivered to it, but in doubtful or special cases, especially large
foundation areas and important footings the material should be
investigated more thoroughly by soil mechanics methods.
A single row of piles shall not be considered as a group provided
that they are not spaced closer center to center than 2% times the
nominal diameter or dimension.
In those cases where piles are
driven in groups into plastic material, the design load shall be
determined by the loading of a group of piles or definite allowance
shall be made for the difference between the supporting capacity of
a single pile and a group of piles.
(Refer to (g).)
( e) Maximum Design Loads for Piles.

In those cases where it is not feasible
to make the required
subsurface
investigations or test loads the maximum assumed design load for piles shall
be as given in the table below.
These values may be increased 25 per cent
for certain combinations of loads as specified in article 3. 4. 1.
The assumed pile loads shall be substantiated
by determining the allowable load by formula, when the piles are driven, as
provided in article 2. 3. 6. (b).
Types of Piles
Size or Diameter
at Butt*, Inches
8
10
12
14
16
20
24
* Timber
Timber
Tons
Concrete
Tons
18
20
24
28
20
24
28
32
40
50
..
piles,
diameter to be measured
Steel
(Friction)
'
'
E?
3 feet
16
20
24
28
from butt.
Tons
Steel
Point Bearing
6000 pounds per
sq. in. of point
area.
HIGHWAY
158
(f)
BRIDGES
Uplift.
Friction piles may
be considered to resist an intermittent but not sus

equivalent to 40 per cent of the above loads providing proper
provision is made for the anchorage at top and sufficient skin friction is
developed and in no case shall it exceed the weight of material (buoyancy
considered) surrounding the embedded portion of the pile.
tained
uplift
(g) Group Pile Loading.

Where the capacity of a group of piles driven into plastic material is
not determined by test loading, the following Converse-Labarre formula is
suggested to determine the reduction of a single pile load for a group pile
load:
,(n-l)m+(m-l)n
Where
E =the efficiency or the decimal fraction of the single pile value to
is
<j, <*,
used for each pile in the group,

n = the number of piles in each row.
m=the number of rows in each group,
d = the diameter of the pile,
s = center to center spacing of piles
Tan = d/s
numerically equal to the angle expressed in degrees.
3. 4. 18. Moments,
Shears and Reactions.
Substructures
SECTION
Maximum moments, shears, and reactions are given in tables, appendix

A, for H 15, H 20, H 15 12 and H 20 16 loadings.
They are calcu
lated for the standard truck or the lane loading applied to a single lane
on the basis of freely supported spans. It is indicated in the table whether
the standard truck or the lane loading produces the maximum stress.
and Retaining Walls
3. 5. 1. Piles.
(a)
General.
general, piling shall be used when footings cannot, at
reasonable
expense, be founded on rock or other solid foundation material. At loca
tions where unusual erosion may occur and the soil conditions permit the
driving of piles, they, preferably, shall be used as
protection against
scour, even though the safe bearing resistance of the natural soil is sufficient
to support the structure without piling.
In general, the penetration for any pile shall be not less than 10 feet
the length of the pile nor less than
in hard material and not less than
%
In
feet in soft material.

very soft
For foundation work, no piling shall be used to penetrate
hard stratum unless the piles penetrate the hard
upper stratum overlying
material a sufficient distance to rigidly fix the ends.
a
20
(b) Limitation of
Use.
Untreated timber piles may be used for temporary construction, revet

ments, fenders and similar work, and in permanent construction under the
following conditions:
(1) For foundation piling when the cutoff is below permanent ground
water level.
DESIGN
159
(b) For trestle construction when it is economical to do so, though

treated piles are preferable.
(3) They shall not be used where they will, or may be, exposed to marine
borers.
The limitations of use of treated timber piles are given in division II,
section 21.
(c)
Design Loads.
(d)
Spacing,
The design loads for piles shall be according to article 3. 4. 17.

Piles shall be designed to carry the entire superimposed load, no allow
ance being made for the supporting value of the material between the piles.
The supporting power of piles shall be determined by the application
of test loads or by the use of formulas as specified in division II.
Clearances and Embedment.
Footing areas shall be so proportioned that pile spacing shall be not

less than 2 feet 6 inches center to center.
When the tops of foundation
piles are incorporated in a concrete footing, the distance from the side
of any pile to the nearest edge of the footing shall be not less than 9 inches.
The tops of piling in general shall project not less than 12 inches into
the concrete after all damaged material has been removed, but in special
cases
it
may be reduced to 6 inches.
(e) Batter Piles.
When the lateral resistance of the soil surrounding the piles is inade
quate to counteract the horizontal forces transmitted to the foundation or
when increased rigidity of the entire structure is required, batter piles shall
be used in the foundation.
(f)
Buoyancy.
(g)
Concrete Piles (Precast).

Precast concrete piles shall
The effect of hydrostatic;

provided in article 3. 2. 17.
pressure
shall be considered
in the design
as
If a square
be of approved size and shape.
section is employed, the corners shall be chamfered at least one inch. Piles,
preferably, shall be cast with a driving point and for hard driving, prefer
ably, shall be shod with a metal shoe of approved pattern. Piling may be
In general, tapered piling shall not
either of uniform section or tapered.
be used for trestle construction except for that portion of the pile which
lies below the ground line; nor shall tapered piles be used in any location
In general, concrete piles shall
where the piles are to act as columns.
have a cross sectional area, measured above the taper, of not less than 140
square inches and when they are to be used in salt water they shall have
a cross sectional area of not less than 220 square inches.
The diameter of tapered piles measured 2 feet from the point shall
In all cases the diameter shall be considered as
be not less than 8 inches.
The point in all cases, where
the least dimension through the center.
less
than 6 inches in diameter and
be
not
used,
shall
are
not
steel points
the pile shall be beveled, tapered or sloped uniformly from the point to
2
feet from the point.
Vertical reinforcement shall be provided consisting of not less than

four bars spaced uniformly around the perimeter of the pile. The vertical
reinforcement shall be not less than 1 V2 per cent of the total cross section
measured above the taper, except that if more than four bars are used,
the number may be reduced to four in the bottom 4 feet of the pile.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
160
The vertical steel shall be enclosed with spiral reinforcement for a

length of 4 feet at each end of the pile and with either spiral reinforce
In lieu of spiral reinforcement
ment or hoops for the intervening portion.
equivalent hoops may be used in the ends of the pile.
The spiral reinforcing at the ends of the pile shall have a pitch of 3
In addition the
inches, and gage of not less than No. 5 (Birmingham).
top 6 inches of pile shall have five turns of spiral winding at one-inch pitch.
For the remainder of the pile the vertical steel shall be enclosed with
spiral reinforcing No. 5 gage (Birmingham), with not more than 6-inch
pitch, or with %-inch round hoops spaced not more than 6-inch centers.
The reinforcement shall be placed at a clear distance from the face of
the pile of not less than 2 inches and when the piles are for use in salt
water or alkali soils this clear distance shall be not less than 3 inches.
Stresses due to handling shall be considered in the design of the
of long piles and extra reinforcement shall be added, if
reinforcement
necessary. The stress in the steel shall note exceed 12,000 pounds per square
inch, allowing 100 per cent of the calculated load for impact and shock.
Concrete Piles (Cast-in-Place).
Cast-in-place concrete piles shall be, in general, cast in metal shells
However, other types of castwhich shall remain permanenty in place.
in-place concrete piles, plain or reinforced, cased or uncased, may be used
if, in the opinion of the engineer, the soil conditions permit their use and
if their design and the method of placing are satisfactory to him.
Cast-in-place concrete piles may be of either uniform section or tapered,
The minimum size, measured at the butt, or
or a combination thereof.
above the taper, and embedment of reinforcing shall be as specified for
precast piles, except that foundation piles may have a minimum butt crossThe minimum diameter at tip of
section area of 100 square inches.
pile shall be 8 inches.
Cast-in-place piling shall be reinforced as prescribed for precast con
crete piling to at least 10 feet below the plane at which the soil may be
considered firm.
Where the encasement is in excess of .12 inches in thick
ness it may be considered as reinforcement subject to the deduction of Mg
inch for corrosion.
shall be provided at the junction of the pile
Sufficient reinforcement
with the superstructure to make a suitable connection.
The metal shall be of sufficient thickness and strength so that the
shell will hold its original form and show no harmful distortion after it
and adjacent shells have been driven and the driving core, if any, has been
withdrawn. The design of the shell shall be approved by the engineer
before any driving is done.
(h)
(i)
Steel Piles.
Steel piles shall have a minimum thickness

(1) Thickness of metal.
of web of .400 inch. Splice plates shall be not less than % inch thick.
Piles shall be spliced to develop the net section of pile.
(2) Splices.
The flanges and web shall be either spliced by butt welding or with plates,
welded, riveted or bolted. The bolted splices shall only be used on projects
where a small number of piling are required and where facilities for
riveting or welding are not available.
Splices shall be detailed on the contract plans.
In general, caps are not required for steel piles embedded
(3) Caps.
in concrete.
Reference is made to Research Report No. 1, 'Investigation
DESIGN
161
of the Strength of the Connection between a Concrete Cap and the Em

bedded end of the Steel H-Pile" Department of Highways, State of Ohio,
for a discussion of this subject and for the results of tests pertinent to it.
(4) If heavy scour is anticipated, consideration shall be given to design
of the portion of the pile which would be exposed, as a column.
(5) Lugs, scabs, and core-stoppers.
These devices may be used to increase the bearing power of the pile
where necessary.
They may consist of structural shapes, welded, riveted
or bolted, of plates welded between the flanges, or of timber or concrete
blocks securely fastened.
(j)
Steel Pile and Steel Pile Shell Protection.
Where conditions of exposure warrant, concrete encasement shall be

The encasement shall extend
used on steel piles and steel pile shells.
between an elevation 2 feet below the ground or low water surface and
not less than two feet above the ground or ordinary water level.
3. 5. 2. Footings.
(a)
Depth.
The depths of footings shall be determined with respect to the character

of the foundation materials and the possibility of undermining. Except
where solid rock is encountered or in other special cases, the footings of all
structures, other than culverts, which are exposed to the erosive action of
stream currents, preferably, shall be founded at a depth of not less than
Stream piers and arch
bed of the stream.
4 feet below the permanent
abutments, preferably, shall be founded at a depth of not less than 6 feet
below stream bed. The above preferred minimum depths shall be increased
as conditions
may require.
Footings not exposed to the action of stream currents shall be founded

on a firm foundation and below frost.
Footings for culverts shall be carried to an elevation sufficient to secure
a firm foundation, or a heavy reinforced floor shall be used to distribute
In any
the pressure over the entire horizontal area of the structure.
location liable to erosion, aprons or cut-off walls shall be used at both ends
of the culvert and, where necessary, the entire floor area between the
wing walls shall be paved. Baffle walls or struts across the unpaved bottom
of a culvert barrel shall not be used where the stream bed is subject to
When conditions require, culvert footings shall be reinforced
erosion.
longitudinally.
(b)
Anchorage.
Footings on inclined smooth solid rock surfaces which are not restrained
by an overburden of resistant material, shall be effectively anchored by
means of anchor bolts, dowels, keys or other suitable means.
(c) Distribution of
Pressure.
soil pressures
be designed to keep the maximum
within safe bearing values. In order to prevent unequal settlement, footings
shall be designed to keep the pressure as nearly uniform as practicable.
In footings having unequal pressures and requiring piling, the spacing of
the piles shall be such as to secure as nearly equal loads on each pile as
may be practicable.
All footings shall
162
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
f d)
Spread Footings.
Spread footings which act as cantilevers may be decreased in thickness
from the junction of the footing slab with column or wall toward the edge
of the footing, provided sufficient section is maintained at all points to
provide the necessary resistance to diagonal tension and bending stresses.
This decrease in section may be accomplished by sloping the upper surface
of the footing or by means of vertical steps. Stepped footings shall be
cast monolithically.
Except in small structures, no footing shall have a thickness at the
edge of less than 2 feet.
When piles are used, the footing shall have an
edge thickness of not less than 18 inches above the tops of the piles.
(e) Internal
Stresses in Spread Footings.
Spread footings shall be considered as under the action of downward

forces, due to the superimposed loads, resisted by an upward pressure
exerted by the foundation materials and distributed over the area of the
footings as determined by the eccentricity of the resultant of the downward
forces.
Where piles are used under footings, the upward reaction of the
foundation shall be considered as a series of concentrated loads applied at
the pile centers, each pile being assumed to carry its computed proportion
of the total footing load.
When a single spread footing supports a column, pier or wall, this
When two or more piers
footing shall be assumed to act as a cantilever.
or columns are placed upon a common footing, the footing slab shall be
designed for the actual conditions of continuity and restraint.
Footings shall be designed for the bending stress, diagonal tension
stress and bond at the critical section designated herein.
The critical section for bending shall be taken at the face of the column,
pedestal or wall. In the case of columns other than square or rectangular,
the critical section shall be taken at the side of the concentric square of
For footings under masonry walls, where bond between
equivalent area.
the wall and footing is reduced to friction value, the critical section shall
be taken as midway between the middle and the face of the wall.
For foot
ings under metallic column bases, the critical section shall be taken as
midway between the face of the column and the edge of the metallic base.
The load shall be considered as uniformly distributed over the column,
pedestal or wall, or metallic column base.
The critical section for bond shall be taken at the same plane as for
bending, and the shear used for computing bond shall be based on the same
Bond should also be investigated at
loading and section as for bending.
planes where changes of section or of reinforcement occur.
The critical section for diagonal tension in footings on soil or rock
shall be considered as the concentric vertical section through the footing
at a distance d from each face of the column, pedestal, or wall; d being
equal to the depth from the top of the section to the centroid of the longi
tudinal tension reinforcement.
The critical section for diagonal tension in footings supported on piles
shall be considered as the concentric vertical section through the footing
at a distance d/2 from each face of the column, pedestal or wall, and any
piles considered in computing the diagonal tension.
In sloped or stepped footings, stresses should be investigated at sec
tions where the depth changes outside the critical section as defined above.
Bending need not be considered unless the projection of the footing is
more than two-thirds of the depth.
DESIGN
168
In plain concrete footings, the stresses shall be computed on the basis

of a monolithic section having a depth measured from the top of the footing
to a plane 2 inches above the bottom of the footing. The maximum fibre
stress due to bending shall not exceed that specified in article 3. 4. 11 and
the average shearing stress on a concentric vertical section through the
footing at a distance (d minus 2 inches) from each face of the column,
pedestal or wall, shall not exceed the shearing stresses specified in article
3. 4. 11 for beams without web reinforcement and with longitudinal bars
not anchored.
(f)
Reinforcement.
Footing slabs shall
be reinforced for bending

stresses
necessary, for diagonal tension.
All bars shall be effectively
develop in bond the computed stress in the bar.
and, where
anchored to
The reinforcement for square footings shall consist of two or more

bands of bars. The reinforcement necessary to resist the bending moment
in each direction in the footing shall be determined as for a reinforced
concrete beam; the effective depth of the footing shall be the depth from
the top to the plane of the reinforcement.
The required reinforcement
shall be spaced uniformly across the footing, unless the footing width is
greater than the side of the column or pedestal plus twice the effective
depth of the footing, in which case the width over which the reinforcement
is spread may equal the width of the column or pedestal plus twice the
effective depth of the footing plus one-half the remaining width of the
footing. In order that no considerable area of the footing shall remain
unreinforced, additional bars shall be placed outside of the width specified,
but such bars shall not be considered as effective in resisting the calculated
For the extra bars a spacing double that used for the
bending moment.
reinforcement within the effective belt may be used. When reinforcement
is used in more than one direction the allowable unit bond stresses shall
be reduced as follows :
For two-way reinforcement . .
For each additional direction
(g) Transfer of
2o per cent
10
per cent
Stress from Vertical Reinforcement.
The stresses in the vertical reinforcement of columns or walls shall be

transferred to the footings by extending the reinforcement into them a
sufficient distance to develop the strength of the bars in bond, or by means
of dowels anchored in the footings and overlapping or fastened to the
vertical bars in such manner as to develop their strength.
If the dimensions
of the footings are not sufficient to permit the use of straight bars, the
bars may be hooked or otherwise mechanically anchored in the footings.
3. S. 3. Abutments,
(a)
General.
Abutments shall be designed to withstand earth pressure as specified

in article 3. 2. 18, the weight of abutment and superstructure, live load over
any portion of the superstructure or approach fill, wind forces, longitudinal
force when the bearings are fixed, and longitudinal forces due to frictional
The design shall be investigated for any combination of these
bearings.
forces which may produce the most severe condition of loading.
Abutments shall be designed to be safe against overturning about the
toe of the footing, against sliding on the footing base and against crushing
HIGHWAY
164
of foundation material or overloading
BRIDGES
of piles at the point of maximum
pressure.
In computing stresses in abutments, the weight of filling material

directly over an inclined or stepped rear face, or over a reinforced concrete
spread footing extending back from the face wall, may be considered as
part of the effective weight of the abutment.
In the case of a spread
footing, the rear projection shall be designed as a cantilever supported at
the abutment stem and loaded with the full weight of the superimposed
material, unless a more exact method is used.
The cross section of stone masonry or plain concrete abutments shall be
proportioned to avoid the introduction of tensile stress in the material.
(b) Reinforcement for
Temperature.
Except in gravity abutments, not less than % square inch of horizontal

reinforcement per foot of height shall be provided near exposed surfaces
not otherwise reinforced, to resist the formation of temperature and shrink
age cracks.
(c) Wing Walls.

Wing walls shall be of sufficient length to retain the roadway embank
against erosion.
to the required extent and to furnish protection
For ordinary materials, in the absence of accurate data, the slope of the
fill shall be assumed as 1% horizontal to one vertical and wing lengths
computed on this basis.
Reinforcing rods or other suitable rolled sections, preferably, shall
be spaced across the junction between all wing walls and abutments to
Such bars shall extend into the masonry on
thoroughly tie them together.
each side of the joint far enough to develop the strength of the bar as
and shall vary in length so as to avoid
specified for bar reinforcement,
planes of weakness in the concrete at their ends. If bars are not used, an
expansion joint shall be provided at this point in which the wings shall be
mortised into the body of the abutment.
ment
(d) Drainage.
The filling material behind abutments shall be effectively
weep holes with French drains, placed at suitable intervals.
drained
by
3. 5. 4. Retaining Walls.
(a)
General.
Retaining walls shall be designed to withstand earth

cluding any live load surcharge, and the weight of the wall,
with the general principles specified above for abutments.
Stone masonry and plain concrete walls shall be of the
Reinforced concrete walls may be of either the cantilever,
buttressed, or cellular types.
(b)
pressure, in
in accordance
gravity type.
counterforted,
Base or Footing Slabs.
The rear projection or heel of base slabs shall be designed to support

the entire weight of the superimposed
materials, unless a more exact
method is used.
The base slabs of cantilever walls shall be designed as cantilevers
supported by the wall.
The base slabs of counterforted and buttressed walls shall be designed
DESIGN
165
as fixed or continuous beams of spans equal to the distance between counter

forts or buttresses.
(c) Vertical
Walls.
The vertical stems of cantilever walls shall
be designed as cantilevers
at the base.
The vertical or face walls of counterforted and buttressed walls shall
be designed as fixed or continuous beams.
The face walls shall be securely
anchored to the supporting counterforts or buttresses by means of adequate
reinforcement.
supported
(d)
Counterforts
and Buttresses.
Counterforts shall be designed as T-beams.

Buttresses shall be de
signed as rectangular beams. In connection with the main tension reinforce
ment of counterforts there shall be a system of horizontal and vertical
bars or stirrups to effectively anchor the face walls and base slab. These
stirrups shall be anchored as near the outside faces of the face walls, and
as near the bottom of the base slab as practicable.
(e) Reinforcement for
Temperature.
Except in gravity walls, not less than % square inch of horizontal

per foot of height shall be provided near exposed surfaces
reinforcement
reinforced, to resist the formation of temperature
not otherwise
and
shrinkage cracks.
(f)
Expansion and Contraction Joints.

Contraction joints shall be provided at intervals not exceeding 30 feet
and expansion joints at intervals not exceeding 90 feet, for gravity or rein
forced concrete walls.
( g)
Drainage.
The filling material behind all retaining walls shall be effectively

drained by weep holes with French drains, placed at suitable intervals. In
counterforted walls there shall be at least one drain for each pocket formed
by the counterforts.
3. 5. 5. Piers.
(a)
General.
be designed to withstand the dead and live loads superImposed thereon; wind pressures acting on the pier and superstructure;
the forces due to stream current, floating ice and drift; and longitudinal
forces at the fixed ends of spans.
Where necessary, piers shall be protected against abrasion by facing
them with granite, vitrified brick, timber or other suitable material within
the limits of damage by floating ice or debris.
Piers shall
(b) Pier
Nose.
In streams carrying ice or drift, the pier nose shall be designed as

an ice breaker.
When a steel angle or other metal nosing is used it shall
be effectively secured to the masonry by means of suitable anchors.
3. 5. 6. Tubular Steel Piers,
(a)
be
Use.
Preferably, tubular steel piers shall not be used and they shall never
used in locations where they will be subjected to lateral earth pressure.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
166
In special cases their use may be permitted,

requirements shall apply:
(b)
in which cases the following
Depth.
The general requirements governing the depths of foundations as above

set forth shall govern in the case of tubular steel piers except that steel
tubes resting upon gravel foundation without piling shall in no case be
carried to a depth less than 8 feet below the permanent bed of the stream
and to such additional depth as may be necessary to eliminate all danger
of undermining.
(c) Piling.
Piles used in connection with tubular piers shall extend into the
In
concrete filling a sufficient distance to thoroughly brace the tubes.
general, these piles shall extend not less than 6 to 8 feet above the bottom
of the concrete.
of Shell.
The minimum thickness of the metal in the shells of tubular piers shall
be %e inch.
This thickness shall be increased where necessary to secure
strength and rigidity for placing the shell. In all cases the pier shall be
designed for safe pile or soil bearing values as specified herein, but when
the diameter required by these values is greater than that required for the
superstructure bearing, the diameter may be reduced at any splice point.
The minimum diameter of steel cylinders used for piers shall be 42 inches.
(d)
(e)
Dimensions
Splices and Joints.
All horizontal joints shall
be butt joints.
Vertical joints may be
the corners of the plates are properly scarfed.
When field
splicing is necessary the lower section of the tube shall extend at least 2 feet
above the water line when in position.
if
lapped
(f)
Bracing.
Adequate bracing connecting the tubes of cylinder piers shall be pro

In general, this bracing shall consist of a steel or concrete girder
vided.
diaphragm effectively secured to the tubes. The depth of this diaphragm
shall be as great as conditions will permit.
SECTION 6 Structural
Steel Design
3. 6. 1. Number of Trusses or Girders.
Preferably, through spans shall have only two trusses, arches or girders.
3. 6. 2. Spacing of Trusses and Girders.
Main trusses, arches and girders shall be spaced a sufficient distance
apart center to center, to be secure against overturning by the assumed
lateral forces.
3. 6. 3. Effective Span.
For
follows
the
calculation
of stresses,
span
lengths
shall
be
assumed
Beams and girders, distance between centers of bearings.

Trusses, distance between centers of end pins or of bearings.
Floorbeams, distance between centers of trusses or girders.
Stringers, distance between centers of floorbeams.
as
DESIGN
16?
3. 6. 4. Effective Depth.
For
follows:
the calculation of stresses,
effective
depths
shall
be
assumed
as
Riveted trusses, distance between centers of gravity of the chords.

Pin-connected trusses, distance between centers of chord pins.
Plate girders, distance between centers of gravity of the flanges, but
not to exceed the distance back to back of flange angles.
3. 6. S. Alternating Stresses.
Members subject to alternating stresses of tension and compression,
due to the combination of dead, live, impact and centrifugal stresses, shall
be proportioned for the kind of stress requiring the larger section.
If
the alternating stresses occur in succession during one passage of

the live load, each shall be increased by 5,0 per cent of the smaller.
The
connections of such members shall be proportioned for the sum of the net
alternating stresses not so increased.
If
the live load and dead load stresses are of opposite sign, only 70 per
cent of the dead load stress shall be considered as effective in counteracting
the live load stress.
3. 6. 6. Combined
Stresses.
All members subject to combined bending and direct stresses shall be

proportioned for the maximum unit stress specified in appendix "B." When
bending stresses are induced by the component of externally applied loads
acting perpendicular to the axis of the member, a shall be assumed equal
to + 1.
3. 6. 7. Secondary Stresses.
The design and details shall be such that secondary stresses will be
as small as practicable.
Secondary stresses due to truss distortion or floorbeam deflection usually need not be considered in any member the width
of which, measured parallel to the plane of distortion, is less than one-tenth
If the secondary stress exceeds 4,000 pounds per square
of its length.
inch for tension members and 3,000 for compression members, the excess
shall be treated as a primary stress.
3. 6. 8. Rolled Beams.
Rolled beams shall be proportioned by the moments of inertia method of

their net sections.
Suitable stiffeners shall be provided to stiffen the webs of rolled beams
at bearings, when the unit shear in the web adjacent to the bearing exceeds
75 per cent of the allowable shear for girder webs.
The compression flanges of rolled beams or stringers supporting timber
floors shall not be considered to be laterally supported by the flooring unless
the floor and fastenings are specially designed to provide adequate support.
3. 6. 9. Limiting Lengths of Members.
For compression members, the greatest ratio of unsupported length to

radius of gyration shall not exceed 120 for main members, or those in
which the major stresses result from dead or live load, or both; and shall
not exceed 140 for secondary members, or those whose primary purpose is
to brace the structure against lateral or longitudinal forces, or to brace or
reduce the unsupported length of other members, main or secondary.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
168
In determining the radius of gyration, the area of any portion of a

member may be neglected, provided that the area thus neglected shall not
be used in calculating the strength of the member.
For members resisting
calculated compressive stress, all of the specified requirements for minimum
thickness of component parts to resist bucking shall apply to material
comprising any area thus neglected.
The radius of gyration and the effective area for carrying stress of a
member containing perforated cover plates shall be computed for a trans
verse section through the maximum width of perforation.
When perfora
tions are staggered in opposite cover plates the cross-sectional area of the
member shall be considered the same as for a section having perforations in
the same transverse plane.
Unsupported length shall be assumed as follows: For the top chords
of half -through trusses, the length between panel points laterally supported
as required under 3. 6. 70 ; for other main members, the length between

or centers of braced points or centers of end
panel point intersections
connections; for secondary members, the length between the centers of the
end connections of such member or centers of braced points.
For tension members, except rods, eyebars, cables, and plates, the
greatest ratio of unsupported length to radius of gyration shall not exceed
200 for main members, and shall not exceed 240 for bracing members.
3. 6. 10. Deflection.
The term "deflection" as used herein shall be the deflection computed

in accordance with the assumptions made for loading when computing the
stress in the member.
Steel beams or girders having simple or continuous spans shall be
designed so that the deflection due to live load plus impact shall not exceed
%oo of the span, the span length being considered the distance center to
center of bearings.
The deflection of cantilever arms due to live load plus impact shall be
limited to ôo of the cantilever arm.
When bridges have cross bracing or diaphragms sufficient in depth
and strength to insure lateral distribution of loads, the deflection may be
all beams or girders as
computed for the standard loading, considering
acting together and having equal deflection.
Sidewalk live load may be neglected in computing deflection.
The moment of inertia of the gross cross-sectional area shall be used
for computing the deflections of beams and girders.
The gross area of each member shall be used in computing the deflections
of trusses. When perforated cover plates are used in truss members, the
effective area shall be the net volume divided by the length from center
to center of perforations.
3. 6. 11. Depth Ratios.
The ratio of the depth to the length

less than the following:
For
For
For
of spans, preferably shall
trusses
plate girders and rolled beams used as girders
continuous spans, the span length shall be considered
as the distance between dead load points of contraflexure.
1/10
1/25
be not
DESIGN
If depths less than these are used, the sections

that the maximum deflection will be not greater than
been exceeded.
3. 6. 12. Symmetrical
169
shall
if
be so increased
these ratios had not
Sections.
Main members shall be proportioned so that their gravity axes will

nearly as practicable in the center of the section.
be as
3. 6. 13. Effective Area of Angles in Tension.
The effective area of a single angle tension member, or of each angle

of a double tension member in which the angles are connected back to back
on the same side of a gusset plate, shall be assumed as the net area of the
connected leg plus one-half of the area of the unconnected leg.
If a double angle tension member is connected with the angles back to
back on opposite sides of a gusset plate, the full net area of the angles
shall be considered as effective. If the angles connect the separate gusset
plates, as in the case of a double-webbed truss, and the angles are connected
or by other
by stay plates located as near the gussets as practicable,
effective means, the full net area of the angles shall be considered as
effective.
If the angles are not so connected, only 80 per cent of the net
area shall be considered as effective.
Lug angles may be considered as effective in transmitting stress,
provided they are connected with at least one-third more rivets than required
by the stress to be carried by the lug angle.
3. 6. 14. Thickness
of Metal.
Gusset plates for main members shall not be less than % inch in
Other structural steel, except for webs of rolled shapes, fillers,
thickness.
and in railings, shall be not less than
inch in thickness.
The web thick
ness of rolled shapes shall not be less than 0.23 inch.
Silicon steel plates
shall be not more than 1% inches thick, low-alloy steel plates not more
than 1% inches thick and nickel steel plates not more than 1 inch in thick
ness.
Metal exposed to marked corrosive influences

or specially protected against corrosion.
shall
be
increased
in
thickness
3. 6. 15. Compression
Members.
Compression members shall be so designed that the main elements of

the section will be connected directly to the gusset plates, pins, or other
members.
The center of gravity of a built-up section shall coincide as nearly as
practicable with the center of the section. Preferably the segments shall
by solid webs.
members consisting of segments connected by cover plates or lacing,
or segments connected by webs, the thickness of the webs of the segments
shall be not less than %2 of the unsupported distance between the nearest
rivet lines or the roots of flanges of rolled segments for carbon steel,
for silicon steel, %e for low-alloy steel or ^5 for nickel steel.
be connected
In
The thickness of cover plates or webs connecting the segments shall be

not less than yo of the unsupported distance between the nearest lines of
their connecting rivets or the roots of their rolled flanges for carbon steel, %e
for silicon steel, %4 for low-alloy steel or Vs2 for nickel steel.
HIGHWAY
170
3. 6. 16
Web Plates of Solid
Rib
BRIDGES
Arches.
The thickness of web plates in solid rib arches shall not be less than the
following fractions of the depth as defined in article 3. 6. 15, except that
when the web is reinforced along its axis with a longitudinal rib of ample
cross-sectional area and rigidity, the thickness shall not be less than one-half
of these amounts:
Vtto
%o
Vi8
Vis
for
for
for
for
carbon steel.
silicon steel.
low-alloy steel.
nickel steel.
3. 6. 17. Outstanding
Legs of Angles and Bearing Sliffeners.

The widths of outstanding legs of angles in compression (except where
reinforced by plates) shall not exceed the following:
In girder flanges and bearing stiffeners, 12 times the thickness.
In main members carrying axial stress, 12 times the thickness.
In bracing and other secondary members, 16 times the thickness.
3. 6. 18
Size
of Pins.
Pins shall be proportioned for the maximum shears and bending mo

ments produced by the stresses in the members connected.
there are
eyebars among the parts connected, the diameter of the pin shall be not
less than 0.8 of the width of the widest bar.
If
Details
3. 6.
19. Size of
of Design
Rivets.
Rivets shall be of the size shown on the drawings, but generally shall
be % inch or % inch in diameter.
Rivets % inch in diameter shall not be
used in members carrying calculated stress except in 2% -inch legs of angles
and in flanges of sections requiring % rivets.
The diameter of rivets in angles carrying calculated stress shall not
exceed one-fourth of the width of the leg in which they are driven.
In angles whose size is not determined by calculated stress, %-inch
rivets may be used in 2-inch legs, %-inch rivets in 2 %-inch legs, %-inch
rivets in 3-inch legs, and 1-inch rivets in 3 %-inch legs.
Structural shapes which do not admit the use of %-inch diameter rivets
shall not be used except in handrails.
3. 6. 20. Pitch
of
Rivets.
The minimum distance between centers of rivets shall be three times

the diameter of the rivet but, preferably, shall be not less than the
following:
For 1-inch rivets, 3% inches.
For %-inch rivets, 3 inches.
For %-inch rivets, 2% inches.
3. 6. 21. Pitch in Ends of Compression
In
Members.
the ends of compression members the pitch of rivets connecting the

component parts of the member shall not exceed four times the diameter of
the rivet for a length equal to 1% times the maximum width of the member.
Beyond this point the pitch shall be increased gradually for a length equal
DESIGN
to \V times the maximum
is reached.
171
width ef the member until the maximum
pitch
3. 6. 22. Maximum Pitch.
The maximum
pitch in the line of stress shall not exceed 6 inches or

the thickness of the thinnest outside plate or angle connected,
except that in angles having two gauge lines with the rivets staggered,
the pitch in each line may be twice that given by these rules, with a
maximum of 10 inches.
16 times
3. 6. 23. Stitch Riveu.
If
two or more plates or shapes are in contact, they shall be held

together by stitch rivets. In compression members, the stitch rivets shall
be spaced on a gage line, in the direction perpendicular to the line of stress
not more than 24 times the thickness of the thinnest plate, and, in the line
of stress, not more than 12 times the thickness of the thinnest outer plate.
In tension members and girders, the stitch rivets shall be spaced, on a
In
pitch, not more than 24 times the thickness of the thinnest outer plate.
tension members composed of two angles in contact, the angles shall be held
together by stitch rivets having a maximum pitch of 12 inches.
3. 6. 24. Edge Distance of Rivets.
The minimum
shall be:
distance from the center of any rivet to a sheared edge
For 1-inch rivets, 1 % inches.

The minimum distance from a rolled or planed

of beams and channels, shall be:
edge,
except in flanges
For 1-inch rivets, 1% inches.

For %-inch rivets, 1 inch.
The maximum distance from any edge shall be eight times the thick
ness of the thinnest outside plate, but shall not exceed 5 inches.
3. 6. 25. Long Rivets.
Rivets subjected to calculated stress and having a grip in excess of

4% diameters shall be increased in number at least 1 per cent for each
the grip exceeds six times the diameter of
additional Me inch of grip.
the rivet, specially designed rivets shall be used.
If
3. 6. 26. Rivets in Tension.
Rivets in direct tension shall, in general, not be used, but

their value shall be one-half that permitted for rivets in shear.
sunk rivets shall not be used in tension.
if
so used
Counter
3. 6. 27. Parts Accessible.
The accessibility of all parts of a structure for inspection, cleaning

and painting shall be secured by the proper proportioning of members and
the design of their details.
HIGHWAY
172
BRIDGES
3. 6. 28. Closed Sections and Pockets.

Closed sections, and pockets or depressions which will retain water,
be avoided so far as practicable.
Pockets shall be provided with
effective drain holes or be filled with waterproofing material.
Details shall be so arranged that the retention of dirt, leaves, and
other foreign matter will be reduced to a minimum.
Wherever angles are
used, either singly or in pairs, preferably they shall be placed with the
vertical legs extending downward.
shall
3. 6. 29. Eccentric Connections.

Members, including bracing, shall be so connected that their gravity
axes will intersect in a point.
Eccentric connections shall be avoided if
that
practicable, but if unavoidable the members shall be so proportioned
the combined fiber stresses will not exceed the allowed axial stress.
3. 6. 30. Strength
of
Connections.
Except as otherwise provided herein, connections shall be designed for

the average of the calculated stress and the strength of the member, but
they shall be designed for not less than 75 per cent of the strength of the
member.
Connections shall be made symmetrical about the axes of the members
Connections, except for lacing bars and hand
in so far as practicable.
rails, shall contain not less than three rivets.
3. 6. 31. Splices.
Compression members, such as chords and trestle columns, in riveted
structures shall have milled ends and full contact bearing at the splices.
Splices, whether in tension, compression, bending or shear, shall be
designed for the average of the calculated stress and the strength of the
member, or section, but they shall be designed to transmit through the splice
material not less than 75 per cent of the strength of the member. The splice
shall be as near a panel point as practicable.
Splices in riveted columns and chord members shall be located as close
to panel points as possible and, usually, shall be on that side of the panel
point where the smaller stress occurs.
The arrangement of the plates, angles and other splice elements shall
be such as to make proper provision for the stresses, both axial and bendings
in the component parts of the members spliced.
3. 6. 32. Indirect Splices.
If splice plates are not in direct contact with the parts which they
connect, the number of rivets on each side of the joint shall be in excess
of the number required for a direct-contact splice to the extent of two
extra transverse lines of rivets for each intervening plate.
3. 6. 33
FUler:
(a) Welding.
When welding is called for on the plans it shall be designed according
to specifications of the American Welding Society, "Welded Highway and
Railway Bridges."
(b) Riveting.
If rivets
be extended
carrying stress pass through fillers, the fillers, preferably shall

beyond the connected member, and the extension secured by
DESIGN
173
enough additional rivets to average the total stress in the member over the
combined area of the member plus the fillers. As an alternate, the additional
rivets may be passed through the connected members without extending the
filler.
If the filler is less than %-inch thick it shall not be extended beyond
the splicing material and additional rivets are not required.
Fillers %-inch
or more in thickness shall consist of not more than two plates, unless special
permission is given by the engineer.
3. 6. 34. Gusset Plates.
Gusset or connecting plates shall be used for connecting main members,
except when they are pin-connected.
The rivets connecting each member
shall be symmetrical with the axis of the member, so far as practicable,
and the full development of the elements of the member shall be given
consideration.
The gusset plates shall be of ample thickness to resist shear,
direct stress, and flexure, acting on the weakest or critical section of
maximum stress.
Re-entrant cuts, except curves made for appearance, shall be avoided
as far as practicable.
If the unsupported edge of a gusset plate exceeds the following number
of times its thickness, the edge shall be stiffened:
60
50
48
45
for carbon steel.
for silicon steel.

for low-alloy steel.
for nickel steel.
3. 6. 35. Stay Plates.

The open sides of compression members shall be provided with lacing
bars and shall have stay plates as near each end as practicable.
Stay
plates shall be provided at intermediate points where the lacing is inter
In main members, the length of the end stay plates between end
rupted.
rivets shall be not less than 1% times the distance between the inner lines
of rivets connecting them to the flanges; and the length of intermediate
stay plates between end rivets, not less than % of that distance.
In lateral
struts and other secondary members, the over-all length of end and inter
mediate stay plates shall be not less than % of the distance between the
inner lines of rivets connecting them to the flanges.
The separate segments of tension members composed of shapes may be
connected by stay plates or end stay plates and lacing.
End stay plates
shall have the same minimum length as specified for end stay plates on
stay plates shall have a
members and intermediate
main compression
minimum length of % of that specified for intermediate stay plates on main
The clear distance between stay plates on tension
compression members.
members shall not exceed 3 feet.
The thickness of stay plates shall be not less than Yso of the distance
between the inner lines of rivets connecting them to the flanges for main
Stay plates shall
members, or Yeo of that distance for bracing members.
be connected by not less than three rivets on each side, and in members
having lacing bars the last rivet in the stay plate, preferably shall also
pass through the end of the adjacent bar.
When perforated cover plates are used instead of lacing bars and stay
plates, refer to article 3. 6. 36, item "Perforated Cover Plates."
3. 6. 36. Lacing and Perforated Cover Plates.
Lacing bars of compression members shall be so spaced that the slenderness ratio of the portion of the flange included between the lacing bar
HIGHWAY BR1DGES
174
connections will be not more than 40 nor more than two-thirds of the
slenderness ratio of the member.
In compression members, the shearing stress normal to the member in
the plane of the lacing or perforations shall be that obtained by the follow
ing formulas
For structural
carbon steel,
For structural
V
P
L
r
=
=
=
=
normal shearing stress in pounds.

allowable compressive axial load on members.
length of member in inches.
radius of gyration of section about the axis perpendicular to
plane of lacing in inches.
To the shear so determined shall be added any shear due to the weight
of the member or to other forces, and the lacing proportioned for the
combined shear.
The shear shall be considered as divided equally among all parallel

planes in which there are shear-resisting elements, whether continuous
plates or lacing. The section of the lacing bars shall be determined by the
formula for axial compression in which L is taken as the distance along
the bar between its connections to the main segments for single lacing and
70 per cent of that distance for double lacing.
If the distance across the member between the rivet lines in the flanges
is more than 15 inches and a bar with a single rivet in the connection is
used, the lacing shall be double and riveted at the intersections.
The angle between the lacing bars and the aiis of the member shall be
approximately 45 degrees for double lacing and ^0 degrees for single lacing.
Lacing bars may be shapes or flat bars.
For main members the
minimum thickness of flat bars shall be ViO of the distance along the bar
between its connections for single lacing and %o for double lacing.
For
bracing members the limits shall be %o for single lacing and Vis for double
lacing.
The diameter of rivets in lacing bars shall not exceed one-third of the
width of the bar. There shall be at least two rivets in each end of lacing
bars riveted to flanges more than 5 inches in width.
Perforated Cover Plates.
When perforated cover plates are used instead of lacing bars and stay
plates, the following provisions shall govern their design:
DESIGN
175
(1) The thickness of cover plate shall not be less than vaa of the unsup
ported distance between the nearest lines of connecting rivets for carbon
steel, Va for silicon steel, %2 for low-alloy steel and Vio for nickel steel.
(2) The transverse distance from the perforation to the nearest line of
connecting rivets or point of support shall not exceed twelve (12) times
the thickness of plate when measured at the centerline of perforation.
(3) The ratio of length

tion shall not exceed two.
(in the direction of stress) to width of perfora
(4) The clear distance between perforations, in the direction of stress,

shall not be less than the unsupported distance between the nearest lines
of connecting rivets.
(5) The clear distance between the end perforation and the end of the
cover plate shall not be less than 1.25 times the unsupported distance between
the nearest lines of connecting rivets in the cover plate.
(6) The periphery of the perforation at all points shall have a mini
mum radius of 1% inches.
3. 6. 37. Net Section at
In
pin-connected
Pin
Holes.
tension members the net section across the pin hole

net section back of the pin hole not
of the body of the member. The
hole transverse to the axis of the
shall not be more than 8.
shall be not less than 140 per cent and the

less than 100 per cent of the net section
ratio of the net width (through the pin
member) to the thickness of the segment
3. 6. 38. Net Section
of Riveted Tension Members.

The net section of a riveted tension member is the sum of the net
sections of its component parts. The net section of a part is the product
of the thickness of the part multiplied by its least net width.
The net width for any chain of holes extending progressively across
the part shall be obtained by deducting from the gross width the sum of
the diameters of all the holes in the chain and adding, for each gage space
in the chain, the quantity:
J!
4g
where S = pitch of any two successive
g = gage of the same holes.
The net section

the least net width.
holes in the chain
of the part is obtained from the chain which give?
For angles, the gross width shall be the sum of the widths of the legs
The gage for holes in opposite legs shall be the sum
less the thickness.
of gages from back of angle less the thickness.
For splice members, the thickness shall be only that part of the thick
ness of the member which has been developed by rivets beyond the section
considered.
The diameter
nominal
diameter
of the hole shall

of the rivet.
be taken
as % inch greater
than the
3. 6. 39. Location of Pins.
Pins shall be so located with respect to the gravity axes of the members
as to reduce to a minimum stresses due to bending.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
176
3. 6. 40. Pin Plates.

When necessary for the required section or bearing area, the section
at the pin holes shall be increased on each segment by plates so arranged
as to reduce to a minimum the eccentricity
of the segment. One plate on
each side shall be as wide as the outstanding flanges will allow.
At least
one full width plate on each segment shall extend to the far edge of the
stay plate and the others not less than 6 inches beyond the near edge.
These plates shall be connected by enough rivets to transmit the bearing
pressure and so arranged as to distribute it uniformly over the full section.
3. 6. 41. Forked Ends.
Forked ends will be permitted only where unavoidable.

There shall be
enough pin plates on forked ends to make the section of each jaw equal to
that of the member. The pin plates shall be long enough to develop the
pin plate beyond the near edge of the stay plate, but not less than the
length required by article 3. 6. 40.
3. 6. 42. Pins and
Pin
Nuts.
Pins shall be of sufficient length to secure a full bearing of all parts

They shall be secured in
connected upon the turned body of the pin.
position by hexagonal recessed nuts or by hexagonal solid nuts with washers.
If the pins are bored, through rods with cap washers may be used. Pin
nuts shall be malleable castings or steel. They shall be secured by cotter
pins in the screw ends or else the screw ends shall be long enough to
permit burring the threads.
Members shall be held against lateral movement on the pins.
3. 6. 43. Bolts.
authorized.
Bolted connections shall not be used unless specifically
Bolts shall be unfinished; turned as specified and meeting the requirements
of division IV ; or an approved form of ribbed bolt.
Bolts in tension shall have single self-locking nuts or double nuts.
3. 6. 44. Upset Ends.
Bars and rods with screw ends shall be upset to provide a section at
the root of the thread, which will exceed the net section of the body of the
member by at least 15 per cent.
3. 6. 45. Sleeve Nuts.
Sleeve nuts shall not be used.
3. 6. 46. Expansion and Contraction.
The design shall be such as to allow for expansion and contraction at

the rate of 1% inches in 100 feet. Provision shall be made for changes in
In spans more than 300
length of span resulting from live load stresses.
feet long, allowance shall be made for expansion and contraction in the
floor. The expansion end shall be secured against lateral movement.
3. 6. 47. Expansion Bearings.
Spans of less than 70 feet may be arranged to slide upon metal plates
Spans of 70 feet and greater shall be provided with
with smooth surfaces.
rollers or rockers.
DESIGN
177
3. 6. 48. Bronze
or Copper Alloy Sliding Expansion Bearings.

or copper alloy sliding plates shall be chamfered at the ends.
They shall be held securely in position, usually by being inset into the metal
of the pedestals and sole plates.
Provision shall be made against any
accumulation of dirt which will obstruct free movement of the span.
Bronze
3. 6. 49. Fixed Bearings.
Fixed ends shall

3. 6. 50. Pedestals
be
firmly anchored.
and Shoes.
Pedestals and shoes, preferably, shall be made of cast steel or struc

tural steel. The difference in width between the top and bottom bearing
surfaces shall not exceed twice the distance between them.
For hinged
In
bearings, this distance shall be measured from the center of the pin.
built pedestals and shoes, the web plates and angles connecting them to
the base plate shall be not less than % inch thick.
If the size of the
pedestal permits, the webs shall be rigidly connected transversely.
The
minimum thickness of the metal in cast steel pedestal shall be 1 inch.
Pedestals and shoes shall be so designed that the load will be distributed
uniformly over the entire bearing. Spans of 70 feet and greater shall have
hinged or pin bearings at both ends.
3. 6. 51. Rollers.
They
Expansion rollers shall be not less than 6 inches in diameter.
shall be connected by substantial side bars and shall be guided by gearing
or other effectual means to prevent lateral movement, skewing and creep
ing. The rollers and bearing plates shall be protected from dirt and water
and the design shall be such that water will not be
as far as practicable,
retained and that the roller nests may be inspected and cleaned easily.
3. 6. 52. Inclined
Bearings.
For
spans on an inclined grade and without hinged bearings, the sole

plates shall be beveled so that the masonry surfaces and the sliding
surfaces will be level.
3. 6. 53. Anchor
Bolts.
Trusses, girders and I-beam spans shall be securely anchored to the
substructure.
Anchor bolts shall be swedged or threaded to secure a satis
factory grip upon the material used to embed them in the holes.
The following are the minimum
requirements
for each bearing:
For I-beam
spans the outer beams shall be anchored at each end

bolts, 1 inch in diameter, set 10 inches in the masonry.
For trusses and girders:
Spans 50 feet in length or less, 2 bolts, 1 inch in diameter, set
10 inches in the masonry.
inches in diameter, set 12
Spans 51 to 100 feet, 2 bolts,
inches in the masonry.
Spans 101 to 150 feet, 2 bolts, 1)4 inches in diameter, set 15
inches in the masonry.
Spans greater than 150 feet, 4 bolts, 1 }4 inches in diameter, set
15 inches in the masonry.
with
\\i
Anchor bolts subject to tension shall be designed to engage a mass of

which will provide a resistance equal to 1% times the calculated
uplift.
masonry
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
178
3. 6. 54. Name Plates.

Unless otherwise specified, there shall be a name plate, showing in
raised letters and figures the name of the manufacturer and the year of
construction, bolted to the bridge near each end, at a point convenient for
inspection.
Welding
3. 6. 55. Welding General.

All welding shall conform to the current Specifications for Welded
Highway and Railway Bridges, Design, Construction, and Repair, of the
American Welding Society.
This specification provides for welding (and gas cutting) of base metal
consisting of structural carbon steel (article 4. 6. 2.), or similar low carbon
Wrought iron shall con
steel or wrought iron approved by the engineer.
form to the requirements of division IV, section 7.
Welding of the following items is permissible under these specifications
but shall be done only if called for on the plans or in the special provisions :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Floor expansion devices.

Railings.
Built-up shoes, pedestals or expansion rockers.
Diaphragm connection to beams or other members.
Stiffeners except that welding transversely across the tension flanges
of beams or girders, which have a flange stress of more than
75 per cent of their capacity, will not be permitted.
Filler
plates.
7. Stay plate and lacing connections to members.

8. Connections and details of bracing.
9. Caps and base plates for trestle columns except where
caps sup
porting stringers are welded to the sides of the pile.

10. Splicing of steel piling.
11. Sidewalk brackets except main tension connection.
12. Fastening of cover plates to rolled beams.
13. Other incidental parts of the structure.
Where a definite amount of riveting is specified as a minimum
connections, the welded connection shall develop an equivalent strength.
for
Floor System
3. 6. 56.r.Stiffness of Floor Members.
Floor members shall be designed with special reference to stiffness by
making them as deep as economy or the limiting under clearances will
permit.
3. 6. 57. Stringers.
Stringers, preferably shall be riveted

over two or more panels.
between the floor
beams or be
continuous
3. 6. 58. Cross Frames.

In bridges with wooden floors
frames (or diaphragms) shall
and steel stringers, intermediate

cross
between stringers more than 20
be placed
feet long.
3. 6. 59. Floorbeams.
Floorbeams, preferably shall be at right angles to the trusses or main
girders and shall be rigidly connected thereto.
Usually floorbeam con
nections shall be located above the bottom chord and, in riveted work, the
bottom lateral system shall engage both the bottom chord and the floorIn pin-connected trusses, if the floorbeams are located below the
beam.
DESIGN
179
bottom chord pins, the vertical posts shall be extended below the pins to
make a rigid connection to the floorbeam.
3. 6. 60. End
Floorbeams.
There shall be end floorbeams in all square-ended truss and girder

End floorbeams for truss spans,
spans and, preferably in skew spans.
preferably shall be designed to permit the use of jacks for lifting the
superstructure.
For this case the allowable stresses may be increased
50 per cent.
End floorbeams shall be arranged to permit painting of the side of the
beam adjacent
3. 6.
61. End
to the abutment
backwall.
Panels of Skew Bridges.
In
skew bridges without end floorbeams, the end panel stringers shall
be secured in correct position by end struts connected to the stringers and
to the main trusses or girders.
The end panel lateral bracing shall be
attached to the main trusses or girders and also to the end struts. Ade
quate provision shall be made for the expansion movement of stringers.
3. 6. 62. End Connection
of Floorbeams and Stringers.

The end connection shall be designed for the loads specified. The end
connection angles of floorbeams and stringers shall be not less than % inch
Except in cases of special end floorbeam details,
in finished thickness.
each end connection for floorbeams and stringers shall be made with two
The length of these angles shall be as great as the flanges will
angles.
Bracket or shelf angles which may be used to furnish support
permit.
during erection shall not be considered in determining the number of rivets
required to transmit end shear.
End connection details shall be designed with special care to provide
clearance for the driving of field connection rivets.
Where timber stringers frame into floorbeams, shelf angles with stiffenShelf angles shall be
ers shall be provided to carry the whole reaction.
not less than %6 inch thick.
Any type of floorbeam hanger which will permit the rotation or the
longitudinal motion of the floorbeam shall not be used.
3. 6. 63. Sidewalk
Brackets.
Sidewalk brackets shall be connected in such a way that the bending

will be transferred directly to the floorbeams.
stresses
3. 6. 64. Expansion
Joints.
To provide for expansion and contraction movement, floor expansion
joints shall be provided at the expansion ends of all spans and at other
points where they may be necessary.
Apron plates, when used, shall be designed to bridge the joint and to
of roadway debris upon
prevent, so far as practicable, the accumulation
Preferably, they shall be connected rigidly to the end
the bridge seats.
floorbeam.
Bracing
3. 6. 65. General.
be composed of angles or other shapes.

a double system of bracing is used, both systems may be considered
the members meet the requirements
both as
effective simultaneously
tension and compression members. The members shall be connected at their
Bracing shall
If
intersections.
if
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
180
3. 6. 66. Minimum Size
of Angles.
The smallest angle used in bracing shall be 3 by 2% inches. There
shall be not less than three rivets in each end connection of the angles.
3. 6. 67. Lateral Bracing.
Through truss spans, deck truss spans and spandrel braced arches
shall have top and bottom lateral bracing.
Lateral bracing is not required for deck plate girder or beam spans
of less than 125 feet which have a steel or concrete floor keyed or attached
to the supporting members and which are supported laterally by substantial
cross frames or diaphragms.
Deck plate girder or beam spans more than 40 feet in length which
have a timber floor shall have at least one system of lateral bracing in
combination with substantial cross frames or diaphragms.
The spacing of cross frames or diaphragms shall not exceed 25 feet.
Adequate temporary bracing shall be placed, if necessary during construc
tion.
The lateral bracing of compression chords, preferably shall
as the chords and effectively
be as deep
connected to both flanges.
3. 6. 68. Portal and Sway Bracing.

Through truss spans shall have portal bracing, preferably, of the
2-plane or box type, rigidly connected to the end post and the top chord
flanges, and as deep as the clearance will allow.
If a single-plane portal
is used, it shall be located, preferably, in the central transverse plane of
the end posts, with diaphragms between the webs of the posts to provide
for a distribution of the portal stresses. The portal bracing shall be
designed to take the full end reaction of the top chord lateral system and
the end posts shall be designed to transfer this reaction to the truss bearings.
Deck truss spans shall have sway bracing in the plane of the end
This bracing shall extend the
posts and at all intermediate panel points.
full depth of the trusses below the floor system. The end sway bracing
shall be proportioned to carry the entire upper lateral stress to the supports
through the end posts of the truss.
Through truss spans shall have sway bracing 5 feet or more deep at
Top lateral struts shall be at least as deep
each intermediate panel point.
as the top chord.
3. 6. 69. Deck Plate Girder Spans.
Deck plate girder spans shall be provided with cross frames at each
end, proportioned to resist the lateral forces, and shall have intermediate
Cross frames shall be
cross frames at intervals not exceeding 25 feet.
connected to the outstanding legs of the stiffener angles and to the girder
flanges.
3. 6. 70. Half-through Truss Spans.
The vertical truss members and the floorbeams and their connections
in half-through truss spans shall be proportioned to resist a lateral force of
not less than 300 pounds per linear foot, applied at the top chord panel
points of each truss.
The top chord shall be considered as a column with elastic lateral sup
ports at the panel points. The critical buckling force of the column, so de
termined, shall exceed the maximum force from dead load, live load and im
pact in any panel of the top chord by not less than 50 per cent.*
*
For
a discussion
of Elastic Stability,"
of columns with elastic lateral supports, refer to Timoshenko, "Theory

Mc-Graw-Hill Book Co., first edition, page 122.
DESIGN
181
3. 6. 71. Through Plate Girder Spans.

Through plate girder spans shall be stiffened against lateral deforma
tion by means of gusset plates, or knee braces with solid webs, attached to
the stiffener angles and floorbeams.
These braces generally shall extend to
the clearance line.
the unsupported length of the inclined edge of the
gusset plate exceeds 60 times its thickness, the gusset plate shall have 1 or
2 stiffening angles riveted along its edge.
If
3. 6. 72. Bracing of Long Columns.
The bracing of long columns shall be designed to fix the column in

both the lateral and the longitudinal directions, at or near the same point.
3. 6. 73. General.
Plate Girders
Plate girders shall be proportioned by the moment of inertia method.

In calculating the net moment of inertia, the gravity axis of the gross
section shall be used and the moment of inertia of all holes each side of the
axis shall be deducted. The tensile stress shall be computed from the moment
of inertia of the entire net section and the compressive stress from the mo
ment of inertia of the entire gross section.
The compression flanges of plate girders supporting timber floors shall
not be considered to be laterally supported by the flooring unless the floor
and fastenings are specially designed to provide adequate support.
3. 6. 74. Flange Sections.
The flange angle shall form as large a part of the area of the flange
as practicable.
Side plates shall not be used except where flange angles
The area of
exceeding % inch in thickness otherwise would be required.
cover plates shall not exceed 50 per cent of the total flange area (including
one-eighth of web) except when the heaviest flange angles are used, in
which case it shall not exceed 60 per cent.
The gross area of the compression flange shall be not less than the
gross area of the tension flange.
Flange plates shall be of equal thickness, or shall decrease in thick
ness from the flange angles outward.
No plate shall have a thickness
greater than that of the flange angles.
flange plates are used, at least one plate of the top flange shall
extend the full length of the girder, except where the flange is to be covered
with concrete. Any additional flange plates shall extend at least 1 foot
beyond the theoretical end but shall be not less than 2d+3 feet in length,
and there shall be a sufficient number of rivets at each end of each plate
to develop its full stress value before the end of the next outside plate is
reached.
The term "d" equals the depth of girder.
If
3. 6. 75. Thickness
of Web Plates.
of
The thickness
web plates, except those to be encased in concrete or
those properly stiffened longitudinally, shall be not less than Vi70 D for
carbon steel, not less than ^45 D for silicon steel, not less than ^40 D for
low-alloy steel and not less than Vi30 D for nickel steel, in which "D" is
the clear distance in inches between flanges (including side plates).
When one longitudinal stiffener is used, properly located with respect
to the toe of the compression flange and of adequate rigidity, both as pro
vided in article 3. 6. 81, the thickness of web plates shall be not less than
%70 D for carbon steel, not less than ^30 D for silicon steel, not less than
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
182
Mao
D for low-alloy steel and not less than %io D for nickel steel, in which
the clear distance in inches between flanges (including side plates).
"D" is
3. 6. 76. Flange Rivets.
The number of rivets connecting the flange angles to the web plate
shall be sufficient to develop the increment of flange stress transmitted to
the flange angles, combined with any load that is applied directly to the
flange.
Legs of angles 5 inches or greater in width, connected to either web

plates or cover plates, shall have two lines of rivets. Cover plates over
14 inches wide shall have four lines of rivets.
3.6.77. Flange
Splices.
Splices in flange parts shall not be used except by special permission

of the engineer. In general, not more than one part shall be spliced at the
same cross section. If practicable, splices shall be located at points where
there is an excess of section.
The strength of the splice shall be as
specified in article 3. 6. 31. Flange angle splices shall consist of two angles,
one at each side of the girder.
3. 6. 78. Web Splices.
Web plates shall be splicea symmetrically by plates on each side. The
strength of the splice for shear and moment shall be as specified in article
3. 6. 31.
The splice plates for shear shall extend the full depth of the
girder between flanges. In the splice there shall be not less than two rows
of rivets on each side of the joint.
3. 6. 79. Transverse End Stiffeners.
Over the end bearings of plate girders there shall be stiffener angles,
the outstanding legs of which shall extend as nearly as practicable to the
End stiffeners shall be proportioned for
outer edge of the flange angles.
bearing on the outstanding legs of the flange angles, no allowance being
made for the portions of the legs fitted to the fillets of the flange angles.
End stiffeners shall be arranged, and there shall be a sufficient number of
rivets in their connection to the web, to transmit the entire end reaction
They shall not be crimped.
to the bearings.
3. 6. 80. Transverse
Intermediate
Stiffeners.
The webs of plate girders shall be stiffened at intervals not greater

than:
(1) 6 feet, or the clear unsupported depth of the web
(2) The distance given by the formula
d
= the
t = the
s = the
9000
vr
in which
clear distance between stiffeners in inches,

thickness of web plates in inches.
average unit shearing stress, gross section in the web at
the point considered.
Intermediate transverse stiffeners may be omitted if the depth of the

web between the flange angles, or between the side plates, if there are side
plates, is less than 60 times the thickness of web for carbon steel, 55 times
for silicon steel, 52 times for low-alloy steel, or 50 times for nickel steel.
Intermediate stiffener angles shall be placed at points of concentrated
DESIGN
loading and shall
183
as to transmit the reactions to the girder

shall not be crimped.
Intermediate stiffener angles generally shall be riveted in pairs to the
web of the girder. The width of the outstanding leg shall not be more than
16 times its thickness, and not less than 2 inches plus %o of the depth of
the girder.
be so designed
Such stiffeners
web.
3. 6. 81. Longitudinal Stiffeners.
The gage line of the longitudinal stiffener shall be % D from the toe
of the compression flange. The longitudinal stiffener shall be proportioned
so that:
Where
IE = Minimum moment of inertia of longitudinal stiffener about

the edge in contact with web plate.
D = Clear distance between flanges,
t = Thickness of web plate.
d = Clear distance between transverse
stiffeners.
Longitudinal stiffeners do not need to be continuous and may

their intersection with transverse stiffeners.
be cut at
3. 6. 82. Ends of Through Girders.
The upper corners of through plate girders, where exposed, shall be

rounded to a radius consistent with the size of the flange angles and the
vertical height of the girder above the roadway.
The first flange plate, or
a plate of the same width, shall be bent around the curve and continued to
the bottom of the girder. In a bridge consisting of 2 or more spans, only
the corners at the extreme ends of the bridge need be so rounded unless the
In such a case the higher girders
spans have girders of different heights.
shall have their top flanges curved down at the ends to meet the top corners
of the girders in the adjacent spans.
3. 6. 83. Sole Plates.
Sole plates of plate girders shall have a thickness of not less than %
and not less than the thickness of the flange angles plus % inch.
Preferably, they shall not be longer than 18 inches.
inch
3. 6. 84. Masonry
Bearings.
shall be so supported
be above the bridge seat,
Ends of girders on masonry
that the bottom flanges will
on metal pedestals
preferably not less
than 6 inches.
3. 6. 85. Camber.
In general, camber will not be required in plate girders except

When required, it shall be in the
spans or special conditions.
specified by the engineer.
3. 6. 86. General.
for long
amount
Trusses
Preference will be given to trusses with single intersection web sys

Members shall be symmetrical about the central plane of the truss.
Trusses, preferably shall have inclined end posts. Laterally unsup
ported hip joints shall be avoided.
tems.
HIGHWAY
184
BRIDGES
3. 6. 87. Top Chords and End Posts.
Top chords and end posts usually shall be made of two side segments
with one cover plate, and with stay plates and lacing on the open side.
If the shape of the truss permits, compression chords shall be continu
ous. The splice shall be as near the panel point as practicable and, prefer
ably on the side of the panel point where the smaller stress occurs.
3. 6. 88
Bottom Chords.
The bottom chords of riveted trusses generally shall be spliced near

panel points and on the side of the panel points where the smaller stress
occurs.
In bottom chords composed of angles

shall preferably extend downward.
the vertical legs of the angles
3. 6. 89. Working Lines and Gravity Axes.
In compression members of unsymmetrical section, such as chord sec

tions formed of side segments and a cover plate, the gravity axis of the
section shall coincide as nearly as practicable with the working line, except
In
that eccentricity may be introduced to counteract dead load bending.
2-angle bottom chord or diagonal members, the working line may be taken
as the gage line nearest the back of the angle.
3. 6. 90. Camber.
The length of the truss members shall be such that the camber
equal to or greater than the deflection produced by the dead load.
3. 6. 91. Riveted
Tension Members in Pin-Connected
will
be
Trusses.
In pin-connected trusses the hip verticals and members performing

similar functions, and the bottom chords in the first two panels at each end,
shall be riveted members.
3. 6. 92. Counters.
If
web members are subject to reversal of stress, their end connection

Counters, preferably shall be rigid. Adjustable counters,
shall be riveted.
if used, shall have open turnbuckles, and in the design of these members an
Only one set
allowance of 10,000 pounds shall be made for initial stress.
of diagonals in any panel shall be adjustable.
Sleeve nuts and loop bars
shall not be used.
3. 6. 93
Eyebars.
of eyebars shall be not less than % of the width, nor

The section of the head
% inch, and not greater than 2 inches.
through the center of the pin hole shall exceed that of the body of the
bar by at least 35 per cent. The form of the head shall be submitted to the
engineer for approval before the bars are made. The diameter of the pin
shall be not less than 0.8 of the width of the widest bar through which it
passes.
The thickness
less than
3. 6. 94. Packing of Eyebars.
The eyebars of a set shall be symmetrical about the central plane of

the truss and as nearly parallel as practicable.
The inclination of any bar
to the plane of the truss shall not exceed Me inch to a foot.
Bars shall be
as close together as practicable and held against lateral movement, but they
shall be so arranged that adjacent bars in the same panel will be separated
by at least % inch.
DESIGN
185
Intersecting diagonal bars not far enough apart to clear each other
at all times shall be clamped together at the intersection.
Steel filling rings shall be provided, if needed, to prevent lateral move
ment of eyebars or other members connected on the pin.
3. 6. 95. Diaphragms.
There shall be diaphragms in the trusses at the end connections of

floorbeams.
The gusset plates engaging the pedestal pin at the end of the truss
shall be connected by a diaphragm. Similarly, the webs of the pedestal
shall, if practicable, be connected by a diaphragm.
There shall be a diaphragm between gusset plates engaging main
members if the end tie plate is 4 feet or more from the point of intersection
of the members.
3. 6. 96. Sole Plates.
Sole plates of trusses
3. 6.
97. Masonry
shall
be not less than
% inch thick.
Bearings.
Trusses on masonry shall
that the bottom chords will

than
be so supported on metal
be above the bridge seat,
plates or pedestals
preferably not less
inches.
3. 6. 98. Type.
Viaducts
Viaducts shall consist of rolled beam sections, plate girders or riveted

on bents, and usually arranged in alternate tower spans
trusses supported
and free spans.
3. 6. 99. Bents and Towers.

Bents, preferably shall be composed of two supporting columns,
the bents usually shall be united in pairs to form towers.
3. 6. 100
and
Batter.
Bents, preferably shall have a sufficient spread at the base to prevent

uplift under the assumed lateral loadings. In general, the width of a bent
at its base shall be not less than one-third of its height.
3. 6. 101. Single Bents.
Single bents shall have hinged ends or else shall
be designed
to resist
bending.
3. 6. 102. Bracing.
Towers shall be braced, both transversely and longitudinally, with stiff

The sections of members of longi
members having riveted connections.
tudinal bracing in each panel shall not be less than those of the members
in corresponding panels of the transverse bracing.
Column splices shall be above and close to the panel points of the
bracing.
Horizontal diagonal bracing shall be placed in all towers having more
than two vertical panels, at alternate intermediate panel points.
3. 6. 103. Bottom Struts.
The bottom struts of viaduct towers shall be strong enough to slide the
movable shoes with the structure unloaded, the coefficient of friction being
Provision for expansion of the tower bracing shall be
assumed as 0.25.
made in the column bearings.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
186
3. 6. 104. Depth of Girders.

The depth of girders in viaducts,
preferably shall
be
uniform.
3. 6. 105. Girder Connections
and Bracing.
Girders of tower spans shall be fastened at each end of the tops of
the columns or to the cross girders. Preferably, there shall be a line of
girders resting directly over the columns. One end of the girders between
towers shall be riveted to the support, and there shall be an effective expan
sion bearing at the other end. No bracing or sway frame shall be common
to abutting spans.
If girders are not supported directly on the column, provision shall be
made for the transmission of the longitudinal forces to the tower bracing.
3. 6. 106. Sole and Masonry Plates.
Sole plates, masonry
inch thick.
plates,
and cap plates
shall
be not less
than %
SECTION 7 Concrete Design

3. 7. 1. General Assumptions.
The design of reinforced concrete members under these specifications
shall be based on the following assumptions:
(1) Calculations are made with reference to unit working stresses and
safe loads, as elsewhere specified herein, rather than with reference to
ultimate strength and ultimate loads.
(2) A plane section before bending remains plane after bending.
(3) The modulus of elasticity of concrete in compression is constant
within the limits of working stresses; the distribution of compressive stress
in flexure is, therefore, rectilinear.
(4) The ratio "n" shall be assumed as follows:
Values of
Ultimate strength of concrete,
Lbs. per sq. in.
2,000 to 2,400
2,500 to 2,900
3,000 to 3,900
4,000 to 4,900
5,000 or more
For computations
For computations
of deflection
of strength
15
12
10
n=|r
Ec
\
j
>
>
In computing the ultimate deflection of slabs and beams, the value of

the modulus of elasticity of concrete should be assumed as one-twelfth that
of steel in order to allow for the effect of plastic flow.
(5) Concrete shall be assumed as offering no tensile resistance.
(6) The bond between concrete and metal reinforcement is assumed to
remain unbroken throughout the range of working stresses.
Under com
pression the two materials are therefore stressed in proportion to their
moduli of elasticity.
(7) Initial stress in the reinforcement, due to contraction or expansion
of the concrete, is neglected, except in the design of reinforced concrete
columns.
(8) For the determination of external reactions, moments, shears, and

deflections, moments of inertia of rigid frame and continuous structures
shall be computed for the gross concrete sections, neglecting the effect of
steel reinforcing, except that the transformed area of the steel shall be in
cluded for columns, arches or other compressive members.
DESIGN
181
(9) The moment of inertia of the entire superstructure sections, except

railings or any curbs or sidewalks not placed monolithically with the super
structure before the falsework is released, and the moment of inertia of
the full cross section of the pier or bent shall be used to determine the
elastic properties of the various spans and supports.
(10) The depth of girder or slab to be used in computing moment of
inertia at the centerline of support shall be obtained by extending the slope
of the intrados of the member to the centerline.
(11) Rigid frames shall be considered free to sway longitudinally due
to the application of vertical dead loads and vertically applied live loads,
except when the structure is restrained from movement by external forces.
(12) The assumption of no moment restraint at the base of column shall
be used in the analysis of rigid frames (superstructures) unless the base is
known to be fully fixed. When a pinned end condition is assumed for the
analysis of the superstructure, the base of column, footing and piling shall
be designed to resist the moment resulting from an assumed restraint vary
ing from zero to full fixity. The degree of restraint shall be determined
by the type of footing and the character of the foundation material.
(13) Piers or bents constructed integrally with footings placed on a
skew exceeding 10 shall be considered fixed at the top of footing.
3. 7. 2. Standard
(a)
Rectangular
Notations.
Beams.
fs= tensile unit stress in longitudinal reinforcement.

compressive unit stress in extreme fiber of concrete.
Ea= modulus of elasticity of steel.
Ec= modulus of elasticity of concrete.
fc =
M = bending moment, or moment of resistance in general.

As = effective cross sectional area of tension reinforcement,
b = width of beam
d = effective depth, or depth from compression surface of beam to center
of tension reinforcement.
k=ratio of depth of neutral axis to effective depth, d.

j = ratio of lever arm of resisting couple to depth, d.
jd=d z=arm of resisting couple.
p= ratio of effective area of tension reinforcement to effective
area of
concrete in beam =
bd
=
z
depth from compression surface of beam to resultant of compressive
stresses.
(b)
T-Beams.
b = width of flange,
b' = width of stem.
t= thickness of flange.
( c)
Beams Reinforced for Compression.

A' = area of compressive steel.
p'= ratio of effective area of compression reinforcement to effective area
of concrete in beam
bd
unit stress in longitudinal reinforcement.

total compressive stress in concrete.
f ' compressive
A'
=(
r
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
188
C'= total compressive
stress in steel.
d' = depth from compression surface of beam to center of compression
reinforcement.
z = depth from compression surface of beam to resultant of compressive
stresses.
(d)
Shear, Bond and Web Reinforcement.

V= total shear.
V' = external shear on any section after deducting that carried by the
concrete,
v = shearing unit stress.

u = bond stress per unit of area of surface of bar.
o = perimeter of bar.
So = sum of perimeters of bars in one set.
a = spacing of web reinforcement bars, measured perpendicular to their
direction.
s= spacing of web reinforcement bars, measured at the neutral axis and
in the direction of the longitudinal axis of the beam.
Av = total area of web reinforcement in tension within a distance, a, of the
total area of all bars bent up in any one plane,
o = angle between web bars and longitudinal bars.
fv= tensile unit stress in web reinforcement.
3. 7. 3. Design Formulas.
(a) Flexure of
Rectangular Reinforced Concrete Beams and Slabs.

Computations of flexure in rectangular reinforced concrete beams and
slabs shall be based on the following formulas:
(1) Reinforced for tension only : (See figure 7)
Position of neutral axis,
k=
V2pn + (pn)2
- pn.
Arm of resisting couple,
3-1-3
Compressive unit stress in extreme fiber of concrete
.
2M
2pf8
jkbd2
IC =7
Tensile unit stress in longitudinal reinforcement

f8
M.
Asjd^pjbd2'
Steel ratio for balanced reinforcement

1
V=V2
fcUfc
Note For approximate

made:
A"
computations,
the following
assumptions may be
VsUd
6M
,
fc=bd2
(2) Reinforced for both tension and compression:
(See figure 8)
Jt>,
DESIGN
189

k=
|/2n(p+p'jj-')+n2(p+p')2-n(p+p').
Position of resultant compression,
Kk3d+2p'nd'(k-^).
k*+2p'n(k-j)
jd = d z.
Compressive unit stress in extreme fiber of concrete.
6M
K)]
''"C*-^k-f)
Tensile stress in longitudinal
reinforcement,
fs
'pjbd^-
Compressive stress in longitudinal
reinforcement,
f'.-nf.
^k~H-^.
Concrete T-Beams: (See figure 9)
Computations of flexure in reinforced concrete T-beams shall be based on th
following formulas:
(b) Flexure of Reinforced
Neutral axis in the flange:

Use the formulas for rectangular beams and slabs.
(b) Neutral axis below the flange:
The following formulas neglect the compression in the stem
(a)
'
2ndAi+bt '
2nAs+2bt
<.;
/3kd-2t\t
z-^2kd-t
h'
,;

jd = d z.
Compressive unit stress in extreme fiber of concrete,
U
nU-kj
8f,
Tensile unit stress in longitudinal
\,
Mkd
bt(kd-}^t)jd
reinforcement,
M
Asjd
[For approximate results, the formulas for rectangular
beams
may be used).
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
190
The following formulas take into account the compression in the stem :
they are recommended where the flange is small compared with the stem:
/2ndA.+(b-b')t*
xa-y
, ^
+\
nA.+(b-b')t
nA. + (b-b')t'V
b'
b'

Z=
(kdt2
- %t)b+[(kd-t)(t+M(kd-t))]b>
t(2kd-t)b+(kd-t)2b'

jd = d z.
Compressive unit stress in extreme fiber of
*
concrete
2Mkd
[(2kd
-t)bt+(kd -t)*b'] jd
Tensile unit stress in longitudinal reinforcement,

fs
Aljd
Shear, Bond and Web Reinforcement:

Diagonal tension and shear in reinforced concrete beams shall
lated by the following formulas:
(c)
be calcu
Shearing unit stress,
V
bjd
in vertical web reinforcement.
Stress
fT
V's
- Avjd
When a series of web bars or bent-up longitudinal bars is used, the

web reinforcement shall be designed in accordance with the formula:
^
_ V'a V's sin

T_fvjd=
fvjd
When the web reinforcement consists of bars bent up in a single plane

all sections of the beam which require it, the bent-up bars
in accordance with the formula:
so as to reinforce
shall be designed
fv
sin a
The bond between concrete and reinforcement bars in reinforced con

crete beams and slabs shall be computed by the formula:
V
jdZo
(For approximate results "j," in
the above formulas, may be taken as %.)
As regards shear and bond stress for tensile

apply also to beams reinforced for compression.
steel, the above formulas
DESIGN
FIGURE
191
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
192
(d)
Columns
with Lateral Ties.
The safe load for short and long columns shall he determined
to formulas given in article 3. 4. 11.
(e) Spiral
according
Columns.
The safe load for spiral columns

formulas given in article 3. 4. 11.
shall he determined
according
to
3. 7. 4. Span Lengths.
The effective span lengths of slabs shall be as specified in article 3. 3. 2.

The effective span length of freely supported beams shall not exceed
the clear span plus the depth of beam.
For the analysis of all rigid frames, the span lengths shall be taken
as the distance between the centers of bearings at the top of the footings.
The span length of continuous or restrained floor slabs and beams shall
be the clear distance between faces of support.

Where fillets making an
angle of 45 degrees or more with the axis of a continuous or restrained slab
are built monolithic with the slab and support, the span shall be measured
from the section where the combined depth of the slab and fillet is at least
one-half times the thickness of slab. Maximum negative moments
are to be considered as existing at the ends of the span, as above defined.
No portion of the fillet shall be considered as adding to the effective depth
of the slab.
one and
3. 7. 5. Expansion.
In general, provision for temperature changes shall be made in all

simple spans having a clear length in excess of 40 feet.
In continuous bridges, provision shall be made in the design to resist
thermal stresses induced or means shall be provided for movement caused
by temperature
changes.
Expansion not otherwise provided for shall be provided

hinged columns, rockers, sliding plates or other devices.
by means of
3. 7. 6. T-Beams.
(a)
Effective
Flange Width.
In
beam and slab construction, effective and adequate bond and shear
resistance shall be provided at the junction of the beam and slab. The slab
may then be considered an integral part of the beam, but its assumed
effective width as a T-beam flange shall not exceed the following:
(1) One-fourth of the span length of the beam.
(2) The distance center to center of beams.
(3) Twelve times the least thickness of the slab plus the width of the
girder stem.
For beams having a flange on one side only, the effective overhanging
flange width shall not exceed one-twelfth of the span length of the beam,
nor six times the thickness of the slab, nor one-half the clear distance to
the next beam.
(b)
Shear.
The flange shall not be considered as effective in computing

and diagonal tension resistance of T-beams.
the shear
DESIGN
(c)
Isolated
193
Beams.
beams, in which the T-form is used only for the purpose of

providing additional compression area, shall have a flange thickness of not
less than one-half the width of the web, and a total flange width of not
more than 4 times the width of web.
Isolated
( d)
Diaphragms.
For
T-beam spans over 40 feet in length diaphragms or spreaders

be placed between the beams at the middle or at the third points.
shall
3. 7. 7. Reinforcement.
(a)
Spacing.
The minimum spacing center to center of parallel bars shall be 2% times

the diameter of round or 3 times the side dimensions of square bars, but in
no case shall the clear distance between the bars be less than 1% times the
maximum size of the coarse aggregate.
(b)
Covering.
The minimum covering, measured from the surface of the concrete to

the face of any reinforcing bar, shall be not less than 2 inches except in
slabs where the minimum covering shall be 1 inch.
In the footings of
abutments and retaining walls and in piers the minimum covering shal'
In work exposed to the action of sea water the minimum
be 3 inches.
covering shall be 4 inches except in precast concrete piles, where a minimum
of 3 inches may be used.
(c) Splicing.
Tensile reinforcement shall not be spliced at points of maximum stress.
When reinforcement is spliced, the spliced bars shall lap sufficiently to
develop the full strength in bond.
(d) Allowable
Capacity of End Anchorage
Hooks.
End anchorage shall be designed to develop a stress of 10,000 pounds

End anchorage may be an extension of the
per square inch in the bars.
bar or a hook. In either case the additional length of bar should provide the
needed anchorage by normal bond stress, assumed to be uniformly dis
tributed over the additional embedded surface.
A properly dimensioned
hook is one in which the bar is bent in a full semicircle, with a radius of
bend not less than 3 diameters, plus an extension at the free end of at
Right angles or other abrupt bends, which do not
least 4 bar diameters.
engage a structural steel member, are not to be considered as anchorage
unless the radius of the bend is at least 4 bar diameters and the total length
from beginning of bend to the free end of the bar is at least 16 bar
diameters.
(e) Extension of Reinforcement.

(1) To provide for contingencies
arising from unanticipated distri
bution of loads, yielding of supports, shifting of points of inflection, or

other lack of agreement with assumed conditions governing the design of
elastic structures, the reinforcement shall be extended at the supports and
at other points between the supports as indicated in (2) to (5) below.
These paragraphs relate to ordinary anchorage and are the minimum re
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
194
quirements under which normal working stresses for bond or shear are
permitted.
(2) Negative tensile reinforcement at the supported end of a restrained
or cantilever beam or member of a rigid frame shall be extended in or
through the supporting member in such a manner as to develop the maximum
tension in the bar with a bond stress not exceeding the normal .working
stress provided in article 3. 4. 12.
the supports of continuous or simple beams, every re
be extended at least 15 diameters but not less than %o
of the span length, beyond the point at which computations indicate it is
no longer needed to resist stress.
(3) Between
inforcing bar shall
(4) In simple beams and freely supported ends of continuous beams, at

least Va of the positive reinforcement
shall extend beyond the face of the
supports a distance sufficient to develop V2 the allowable stress in the bars.
(5) In restrained or continuous beams at least % of the positive rein
forcement shall extend beyond the face of the supports and the remainder
treated as provided in (3).
(f) Maximum
Sizes.
The maximum size of bar reinforcement shall be 1% inches square or

equivalent, unless the particular conditions warrant the adoption of special
reinforcement design. When structural steel shapes are used for reinforce
ment, no section having a surface area per foot of length of more than 150
square inches shall be used as a reinforcing member unless mechanical bond
is provided by means of lugs, bars or other details which will effectively
bond the member to the surrounding concrete mass.
Reinforcement in Beams.
in girders and beams shall be secured
reinforcement
Compression
against buckling by ties or stirrups adequately anchored in the concrete,
and spaced not more than 16 bar diameters apart.
Where compression rein
forcement is used, its effectiveness in resisting bending may be taken as
twice the value indicated from the calculations assuming a straight-line
relation between stress and strain and the modular relation of stress in steel
to stress in concrete given in article 3. 7. 1. (4). However, in no case should
greater than 16,000 pounds per
a stress in compression
reinforcement
square inch be allowed.
3. 7. 9. Web Reinforcement,
(a)
General.
When the allowable unit shearing stress for concrete is exceeded, web
reinforcement shall be provided by one of the following methods:
(1) Longitudinal bars bent up in series or in a single plane.
(2) Vertical stirrups.
(3) Combination of bent-up bars and vertical stirrups.
When any of the above methods of reinforcement are used, the concrete
may be assumed to carry external vertical shear not to exceed 60 pounds per
square inch for bars not anchored nor 90 pounds per square inch for bars
the remainder
of the shear being carried by the web
anchored,
reinforcement.
The webs of T-beams shall

cases.
be
reinforced with vertical stirrups in all
DESIGN
(b) Bent-up
195
Bars.
Bent-up bars used as web reinforcement may be bent at any angle

between 20 and 45 degrees with the longitudinal reinforcement.
The radius
of bend shall not be less than 4 diameters of the bar.
The spacing of bent-up bars shall be measured at the neutral axis and
in the direction of the longitudinal axis of the beam. This spacing shall
of article 3. 7. 3 (c) and shall not exceed threemeet the requirements
fourths the effective depth of the beam. The first bar from the support
shall cross the mid-depth of the beam at a distance from the face of the
support, measured parallel to the longitudinal axis of the beam, not greater
than one-half the effective depth.
( c)
Vertical Stirrups.
The spacing of vertical stirrups shall not exceed three-fourths of the

effective depth of the beam. The first stirrup shall be placed at a distance
from the face of the support not greater than one-fourth of the effective
depth of the beam.
Stirrups shall surround three sides of the tensile
reinforcement.
(d)
Anchorage.
(1) The stress in a stirrup or other web reinforcement shall not exceed
the capacity of its anchorage in the upper or lower one-half of the effective
depth of the beam.
(2) Web reinforcement which is provided by bending into an inclined
position one or more bars of the main tensile reinforcement where not
required for resistance to positive or negative bending, may be considered
or
completely anchored by continuity with the main tensile reinforcement,
by embedment of the requisite length in the upper or lower half of the beam,
provided at least one-half of such embedment is as close to the upper or
lower surface of the beam as the requirements of fire and rust protection
allow.
A hook placed close to the upper or lower surface of the beam may
be substituted for a portion of such embedment.
(3) Stirrups shall be anchored at both ends by one of the following
methods, or by a combination thereof:
as by welding, to the main longitudinal rein
forcement.
(b) Bending around and closely in contact with a bar of the longi
tudinal reinforcement, in the form of a U-stirrup or hook.
(c) A hook placed as close to the upper or lower surface of the beam
In esti
as the requirements of fire and rust protection will allow.
mating the capacity of this anchorage the stress developed by bond
between midheight of the beam and the center of bending of the
hook may be added to the capacity of the hook.
(d) An adequate length of embedment in the upper or lower one-half
of the effective depth of the beam, whether straight or bent.
Anchorage of this type alone should not be relied on for stirrups in
cases where the shearing stress in the web exceeds that recom
mended for beams without end anchorage of the reinforcement.
(See article 3.4. 12.)
(a) Rigid attachment,
3. 7. 10. Columns,
fa)
General.
The ratio of unsupported
length
of plain concrete piers and pedestals
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
196
to their least dimension shall not exceed 3. The minimum dimension of any
column shall be 15 inches.
For the design of short and long columns see article 3. 4. 11.
(b)
Columns icith Lateral Ties.

The reinforcement of columns shall consist of at least 4 longitudinal
bars tied together with laterial ties or hoops enclosing the longitudinal rein
forcement.
The longitudinal reinforcement shall be of bars not less than %-inch in

diameter and shall have a total cross sectional area of not less than 1.0
per cent of the total cross sectional area of the column except that this
percentage may be reduced in the case of columns or pier shafts which, for
architectural reasons, have a larger cross section than required by con
siderations of loading.
Reinforcement in excess of 4 per cent of the cross sectional area of the
shall not be considered in computing compressive stresses.
The
lateral ties or hoops shall be not less than
inch in diameter and spaced
not farther apart than 12 inches.
column
( c) Spiral
Columns.
(1) The longitudinal reinforcement shall consist of at least six bars of

minimum diameter of % inch and of an effective cross sectional area not
less than 1 per cent nor more than 6 per cent of that of the core. The
number of bars concentrated in the ring at the periphery of the core shall be
governed by the spacing requirements
for parallel bars in beams and in
case all the bars cannot be placed at the periphery of the core, the bars
within shall be stayed at intervals of 24 inches and shall not be nearer to
the outer ring than %o times the core diameter.
(2) The ratio of the spiral reinforcement shall be not less than onefourth the ratio of the longitudinal reinforcement. Spiral reinforcement
shall consist of evenly spaced continuous spirals held firmly in place and
true to line by at least three vertical spacer bars. At the ends of all spirals
and at points of splice the outside diameter shall be maintained.
The center to center spacing of the spirals shall not be greater than
one-sixth of the diameter of the core and the clear distance between spirals
shall not exceed 3 inches nor be less than 1 % inches or 1 Vi times the maxi
mum size of the coarse aggregate.
(3) Reinforcement shall be protected everywhere by a covering of con
crete cast monolithic with the core having a minimum thickness of 1% inches.
(d) Flexure
(1)
and Direct Stress.
General.
When columns are subjected to bending stresses due to eccentric loads,

monolithic construction or lateral forces, they shall be so proportioned that
the combined direct and bending stresses shall not exceed the allowable unit
compressive stresses herein specified.
(2) Special Cases.
When the plane of bending does not lie on a principal axis of the column
section or within the core radius, the position and direction of the neutral
axis shall be determined by a solution of the following formula :
DESIGN
197
P =load parallel to the axis of column, in lbs.

A = transformed area of cracked section in sq. in.
Mi = component
of moment parallel to
axis.
axis.
Xo = coordinate distance from center of gravity of the cracked section
parallel to the X axis, in inches.
Y0 = coordinate distance from center of gravity parallel to Y axis, in inches.
Ii=the amount of inertia of "A" along the X axis about the centroidal
axis Y, in inches4.
Iy=the moment of inertia along the axis Y, in inches.4
Ixy= product of inertia of "A" about the axes X and Y through the
centroid.
My = component of moment parallel to
In solving
the above formula
either Xo or Yq.
Formulas
it
to assume
is necessary
a value
for
for Stresses
With the position and the direction of the neutral axis determined, the
unit stress in the concrete shall be computed with the formula,
maximum
, Mjv
, Myv
f = T^.in or f =^-Xd
ly
Ix.
, . ,
in which
Yn = distance from the neutral axis to the extreme fiber in compression
parallel to the Y axis.

Xn = distance to extreme fiber parallel to the
axis.
Note:
The above formulas are based on a study by Professor Hardy Cross on
"Column Analogy."* For the procedure and methods employed in the appli
cation of the formulas reference is made to an article by William G. S.
Saville.t "Analyzing Non-Homogeneous Sections Subjected to Bending and
Direct Stress."
(3) Columns in Earth Fills.
Columns placed in earth fills, as in the case of "pedestals" or "buried"
abutments, shall be designed to withstand the earth pressure from the rear,
disregarding the effect of the fill in front.
3. 7. 11. Concrete Arches.
( a)
Shape of Arch Ring.
Arch rings shall be selected as to shape in such manner that the axis
of the ring shall conform, as nearly as practicable, to either the equilibrium
polygon for full dead load or to the equilibrium polygon for full dead plus
one-half live load over the full span, whichever produces the smallest bend
ing stresses under combined loads.
* Engineering
14, 1930.
Experiment
Station,
t Civil Engineering, Volume No.
University
10, March
1940.
of
Illinois,
Bulletin
No.
215,
October
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
198
(b) Spandrel
Walls.
When the spandrel walls of filled spandrel arches exceed 8 feet in height
above the extrados they shall be designed as vertical slabs supported by
transverse diaphragm walls or deep counterforts. Vertical cantilever walls
over 8 feet in height, or counterforts having a back slope of less than 45
degrees with the vertical, shall not be used, on account of the excessive
and indeterminate stresses set up in the arch ring by torsion.
(c) Expansion Joints.

Vertical expansion joints shall be placed in the spandrel walls of arches
to provide for movement due to temperature change and arch deflection.
These joints shall be placed at the ends of spans and at intermediate points,
generally not more than 50 feet apart.
(d) Reinforcement.
Arch ribs in reinforced concrete construction shall be reinforced with
a complete double line of longitudinal reinforcement consisting of an intradosal system and an extradosal system connected by a series of stirrups
or tie-rods.
For barrel arches, a system of transverse reinforcement, thoroughly
anchored to the longitudinal reinforcement,
shall be used in both intrados
and extrados.
The transverse reinforcement shall be proportioned to resist
the bending stresses due to any overturning action of the spandrel wall.
For rib arches, hoops or tie bars shall be used in connection with the
longitudinal rib reinforcement, as in the case of reinforced concrete columns.
(e) Waterproofing.
Preferably, the top of the arch ring and the interior faces of the
spandrel walls of all filled spandrel arches shall be waterproofed with a
membrane waterproofing constructed in accordance with the requirements
specified in division II.
(f)
Drainage of Spandrel Fill.

The fills of filled spandrel arches shall be effectively drained by a
system of tile drains or French drains laid along the intersection of the
spandrel walls and arch rings and discharging through suitable outlets in
the piers and abutments.
The location and details of the drainage outlets
shall be such as to eliminate, as far as possible, the discoloration by drainage
water of the exposed masonry faces.
3. 7. 12. Viaduct
Bents and Towers.
When concrete columns are used in viaduct construction, bents and

towers shall be effectively braced by means of longitudinal and transverse
struts. For height greater than 40 feet, both longitudinal and transverse
cross or diagonal bracing, preferably, shall be used and the footings for the
columns forming a single bent shall be thoroughly tied together.
SECTION 8Timber
Structures
3. 8. 1. Bolts.
Bolts of diameters not exceeding 1 inch, preferably shall be spaced not

closer than 6 inches center to center, not less than 6 inches from the center
of the bolt to the end of any timber, and not less than 2% inches from the
DESIGN
199
center of the bolt to the side of any timber.

These distances, preferably
shall be increased for bolts larger than 1 inch in diameter.
Inclined bolts
through timber, preferably, shall be provided with beveled cast washers to
eliminate the cutting of inclined daps in the timber.
3. 8. 2
Washers.
A washer shall
be used under all bolt heads and nuts which would

otherwise come in contact with wood. Either cast or plate washers may be
used and they shall be designed to prevent excessive crushing of the wood
when the bolts are tightened.
For bolts in important locations, such as
joints and splices, and for rods, the washers shall be designed to develop the
bolt or rod in tension, at the unit-bearing stresses specified for compression
perpendicular to the grain of timber.
A standard circular
washer
shall
be used under
the heads of all lag
screws.
3. 8. 3. Hardware
for
Seacoast Structures.
The hardware for structures on the seacoast shall

cadmium
be
galvanized
or
plated.
3. 8. 4. Columns
and Posts.
No column shall have an unsupported
length
greater than
50 times
its
least dimension.
The strength of built-up columns composed of two or more sticks bolted

together, either with or without packing blocks, shall be considered as equal
to the combined strength of the single sticks each considered as an inde
pendent column.
The strength of connector-joined
in article 3. 4. 14.
spaced columns
shall
be
determined
as provided
3. 8. 5. Pile and Framed Bents.
(a) Pile
Bents.
Pile bents generally shall not exceed 40 feet in height. Pile bents over
10 feet high shall be sway-braced transversely with diagonal braces on each
In general,
side of the bent, and shall be adequately braced longitudinally.
pile bents shall contain not less than four piles each and the outside piles,
The piles shall be designed for safe bearing
preferably, shall be battered.
and for column action.
(b) Framed
Bents.
Framed bents may be supported on piles, concrete pedestals or mud

sills. All bents shall be sway-braced transversely and adequate provision
shall be made for longitudinal bracing. In general, framed bents shall
contain not less than four posts each and the outside posts of the bent shall
The posts shall be designed as columns.
be battered.
(c) Sills
and Mud Sills.
Mud sills, and all sills which are to be located in close proximity to the
When
ground surface, preferably, shall be given a preservative treatment.
possible, sills shall be located clear of all earth so that there may be a free
circulation of air around them. Sills shall be fastened to mud sills or piles
with drift bolts of not less than %-inch diameter and extending into the
Sills shall be fastened to pedestals with
mud sills or piles at least 6 inches.
9
HIGHWAY
200
BRIDGES
dowels of not less than 94 -inch diameter, set in the pedestals and extending
into the sills at least 6 inches.
Posts shall be fastened to sills by dowels of not less than %-inch
diameter, extending at least 6 inches into the posts and sills, or by drift
bolts of not less than %-inch diameter driven diagonally through the base
of the posts and extending at least 9 inches into the sill. Posts shall be
fastened to pedestals with dowels of not less than %-inch diameter and
extending into the posts at least 6 inches.
(d)
Caps.
Timber caps shall
in size than 10 by 10 inches. They shall

of not less than %-inch diameter, extending at
or posts.
be not less
be fastened with drift bolts

least 9 inches into the piles
(e) Bracing.
Single-story bracing shall not exceed 20 feet in height. The minimum
size of transverse sway braces shall be 3 by 8 inches. All bracing shall be
bolted through the piles, posts or caps at the ends; at intermediate inter
In all cases, spikes shall be provided
sections it may be bolted or spiked.
in addition to bolts. The bolts used shall be of not less than %-inch diam
eter.
(f)
Pile Bent Abutments.

Pile bent abutments shall be adequately braced or anchored to resist
earth pressure.
Bulkhead plank shall be not less than 3 inches thick and,
It shall be fastened to the piles with spikes,
preferably, shall be treated.
the length of which shall be at least 3 inches greater than the thickness of
the plank.
3. 8. 6. Trusses.
(a) Joints and

Joints shall
Splices.
be detailed to shed water to the maximum

degree prac
ticable. Joints and splices shall be designed to develop the computed stresses
in the members connected and, preferably, to develop the full strength of
the members. Posts or struts bearing against the sides of timber members,
preferably, shall be provided with metal end bearings.
Joints involving
end bearing on inclined surfaces shall be avoided, preference being given to
square-cut ends of timbers bearing against blocks.
Bearing surfaces of castings connecting timber members shall be milled
to provide smooth, even surfaces permitting accurate fitting and complete
Rolled plates, bars and
contact of the wood and metal bearing surfaces.
shapes used in chord splice plates, or other parts bearing upon wood sur
faces, shall be true and even. The wood surfaces taking bearing upon metal
parts shall be not less than % inch in width. Bolts engaging castings and
structural parts shall hold them rigidly in position so that bending on the
The joint details at truss
parts in contact will be reduced to a minimum.
panel points shall provide definite lines of action and shall be simple and
When inclined bolts
as susceptible as possible of definite strength analysis.
are used to connect end posts or web members with chord members, they
shall be placed approximately at an angle of not more than 60 degrees with
the latter and when used in conjunction with joint castings, the holes in one
of the connected members shall be bored % inch larger than the nominal
diameter of the bolts. No daps in chords for butt blocks shall be less than
% inch deep.
DESIGN
201
Splices fox tension members shall be designed to reduce to a minimum

the effects of cross shrinkage of the timber.
Neither steel splice plates of
the batten type nor shear pin splices shall be used when the timbers to be
spliced are more than 8 inches thick, since the shrinkage will permit the
joint to become loose. Shear pin points shall be used only with fully sea
soned timber.
(b) Floor
Beams.
Floor beams shall be sized at bearing points. In floor beams composed

of two or more timbers, the timbers shall be separated by at least 2 inches
for air circulation. Floor beams shall be connected to the main truss mem
bers by means of rods or structural shapes.
(c)
Hangers.
Hangers generally shall be rods having upset ends with a suitably

designed washer or bearing plate at each end. Upset ends shall conform
to the requirements specified for Structural Steel Design, division III.
(d)
Eyebars
and Counters.
specified for Structural Steel Design, division III, for

counters, eyebars and eyebar packing shall apply to such members when
used in timber trusses.
The requirements
(e) Bracing.
Timber trusses shall be provided with a rigid system of laterals in the
plane of the loaded chord. When the details will permit, this lateral bracing
shall be securely fastened to all longitudinal stringers. Lateral bracing,
preferably rigid, in the plane of the unloaded chord, and rigid portal and
sway-bracing shall be provided in all trusses having sufficient headroom.
Outrigger brackets connected to extensions of the floor beams shall be used
for bracing through trusses having headroom insufficient for a top lateral
system.
(f)
Camber.
Camber, in addition to that required to provide for dead load and

shrinkage, shall be provided in timber trusses in sufficient amount to give
the structure a good appearance.
3. 8. 7. Floors and Railings.
(a)
Stringers.
Stringers shall be of sufficient length to take bearing over the full width
of caps or floor beams, except outside stringers which may have butt joints.
Preferably, they shall be of two panel lengths placed with staggered joints.
The lapped ends of untreated stringers shall be separated at least % inch
for air circulation. Stringers shall be secured to caps or floor beams.
( b) Bridging.
shall
Stringers shall be braced by cross bridging in each panel.

be not less in size than 2 by 4 inches.
(c) Nailing Strips.
The bridging
When timber floors are supported by steel joists, the joists shall be
provided with nailing strips which shall be bolted either to the top flanges
or the webs.
HIGHWAY
202
BRIDGES
When nailing strips are bolted to the flanges, they shall be used on all
joists. They shall be not less than 4 inches deep and shall be wider than
the supporting flange.
They shall be secured with %-inch bolts through
the flanges, spaced not more than 4 feet apart and not more than 18 inches
from the ends of the strips.
Nailing strips bolted to the webs shall be not less than 4 inches thick
and shall be fastened with bolts spaced not farther apart than 5 feet. They
shall be held clear of the flanges by blocks between the web and strip, and
bolted through the web with %-inch bolts spaced not more than 4 feet apart
and not more than 18 inches from the ends of the strips.
(&) Flooring.
Roadway floor plank shall have a nominal thickness of not less than 3
inches. Sidewalk floor plank shall have a nominal thickness of not less than
2 inches.
The minimum
size of material used for laminated
or strip floors shall
be 2 by 4 inches.
(e) Retaining
Pieces.
Retaining pieces, where required, shall be not less than 6 inches in width.
general, they shall be secured in place by %-inch bolts at 3-foot intervals
and spiked at 1-foot intervals.
In
(f)
Wheel Guards.
Wheel guards having a cross section of not less than 4 by 6 inches shall
be provided on each side of the roadway.
The guard timbers shall be in
lengths of not less than 12 feet. They shall be secured with %-inch bolts
at the ends and at intermediate points not more than 4 feet apart.
In strip floors or cambered floors, not provided with retaining pieces,
the wheel guards shall be placed directly on the flooring with scupper holes
at suitable intervals. In other floors the wheel guards shall be supported
by scupper blocks not less than 4 inches thick and 1 foot long, held in place
by spikes and a bolt through the wheel guard and flooring, and spaced not
more than 4 feet center to center.
(g)
Drainage.
Adequate
floors.
provision shall
be made
for the proper drainage
of timber
(h) Railings.
Wood railings shall consist of not less than 2 horizontal lines of rails.
Rails shall have a cross-section not less than 2 by 6 inches.
Rail posts shall have a cross-section not less than 4 by 6 inches and
shall be spaced not more than 8 feet apart.
Preferably, rails shall be surfaced 4 sides (S4S) and painted.
Fire Stops.
To check the spread of fire lengthwise of the structure, timber floors
or trestles of any considerable length, preferably, shall be provided with
3. 8. 8
fire
stops.
In timber
floors these fire stops should be provided at intervals of

over 75 feet. They may consist of diaphragms of wood or fire-resistant
terial at least as thick as the flooring, located over caps or floorbeam
completely filling the openings between the joists.
In timber trestle bridges, in addition to the fire stops in the floor,
not
ma
and
fire
DESIGN
203
curtains should be provided at intervals of 100 feet or more. These cur

tains may consist of plank or asbestos-covered metal spiked to the bents.
They should extend downward from the bottom of the joists at least 5 feet
and horizontally at least to the ends of the caps. A fire stop between the
joists should be located over each curtain.
3. 9. 1. General
SECTION 9 Composite
Beams
Assumptions:
Specifications pertaining to the design of concrete, steel, and timber

structures shall govern the design of composite beams where such specifi
cations are applicable.
Composite beams shall be proportioned
of the net composite sections.
by the moment of inertia method
3. 9. 2. Effective Flange Width.
In
composite beam construction the assumed effective width of the slab

flange shall not exceed the following:
as a T-beam
One-fourth of the span length of the beam.

(2) The distance center to center of beams.
(3) Twelve times the least thickness of the slab.
(1)
For beams having a flange on one side only, the effective flange width
shall not exceed one-twelfth of the span length of the beam, nor six times
the thickness of the slab, nor one-half the distance center to center of the
next beam.
Composite beam type construction
shall not
be used
for isolated beams.
3. 9. 3. Stresses.
Maximum compressive and tensile stresses in beams, which are not

provided with temporary supports during placing of the permanent dead
load, shall be the sum of the stresses produced by the dead loads acting on
the beam before the concrete slab has set and the stresses produced by the
superimposed loads acting on the composite beam. Where beams are pro
supports during the placing of the
vided with temporary intermediate
permanent dead load, the stresses shall be computed on the basis of the
composite section.
3. 9. 4. Shear.
Resistance to horizontal shear shall be provided by mechanical
at the junction of the slab and the beam or girder.
Shear shall be computed by the following formula:
means
I
in which S = the horizontal shear per linear inch at the junction of the
slab and beam at the point of the beam in question.
V = total shear due to superimposed load after concrete in slab has
set.
Q = statical moment (product of the compressive area of slab and

the distance from its center to the neutral axis of the composite section).
I = moment of inertia of composite section.
Spacing of the shear devices shall
be determined
by dividing the re-
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
204
sistance value of the individual shear device by the shear per linear inch
"S," with a maximum spacing of two feet.
The flange of the composite beam shall not be considered effective in
These
computing the resistance to vertical shear and diagonal tension.
forces shall be assumed to be resisted entirely by the beam or girder web.
3. 9. 5. Deflection.
The requirements relative to live load deflection in article 3. 6. 10 shall
Where the beams are not pro
govern in the design of composite beams.
vided with falsework or support during the placing of the concrete slab,
the deflection due to the slab and other permanent dead loads added before
the slab concrete sets, shall be computed without composite beam action.
3. 9. 6. Shear Devices.
Mechanical means which are used at the junction of beam and slab for
the purpose of furnishing the shear resistance necessary to produce com
of the respective
posite beam action shall conform to the specifications
materials as provided in division 4. The shear devices shall be of such
construction as will permit a thorough compaction of the concrete mass and
will insure entire surfaces of shear devices being in contact with surrounding
concrete.
The nature of the shear devices shall be such as to prevent a vertical
separation of the slab and beams or else additional means shall be provided
for this purpose.
3. 10.
SECTION 10Sectional
1. General.
Plate Pipe
The material for sectional plate pipe shall conform to division IV, and
the construction shall conform to division II. The minimum gage shall be
according to the following tables or as otherwise specified herein.
The pipe
shall be according to table 1, if strutted, or table 2, if unstrutted. Unless
unstrutted pipe is called for on the plans or by special provisions, the
strutted pipe shall be used.
3. 10. 2. Gage of Side and Top Plates.
(For live load not to exceed H20 or H20-S16)
Sectional Plate Pipe

Strutted Pipe
TABLE
Height of Cover in Feet
Diameter
60
2
6
11
16
21
26
31
36
41
46
51
56
61
71
to 5. inclusive
to 10, inclusive
to 15, inclusive
to 20, inclusive
to 25, inclusive-.
to SO, inclusive
to 35, inclusive
to 40, inclusive
to 45, Inclusive
to 50, inclusive
to 55, Inclusive
to 60, Inclusive
to 70, inclusive
to 80, Inclusive
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
8
8
8
7
5
3
75
10
10
10
10
10
8
8
8
7
7
5
5
3
90
10
10
8
8
8
8
7
7
5
5
3
of Pipe, in Inches
105
120
135
150
165
180
8
8
8
7
7
5
5
5
3
3
8
8
7
5
5
S
3
3
7
7
5
5
3
3
3
7
5
5
3
3
1
1
5
5
3
3
1
1
5
3
3
1
DESIGN
206
Unstrutted
TABLE 2
Height of Cover in Feet
Diameter
60
2
6
11
16
21
26
31
36
41
46
51
56
61
71
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
10
10
8
8
8
7
5
5
5
3
3
6
5f inclusive
10, inclusive
15, inclusive
20, inclusive
25, inclusive
80, inclusive
85, inclusive
40, inclusive
45, inclusive
50, inclusive
55, inclusive
60, inclusive
70, inclusive
80, inclusive
of Pipe, in Inches
75
90
105
120
135
150
165
180
10*
10
8
7
5
5
3
8
1
1
1
10*
8
7
5
3
1
1
10*
7*
5
3
1
8*
5
3
1
7*
3
1
5*
3*
5*
1*
3*
1
1
* Gage shown with (*) to be used only when there is to be no live load over pipe.
carry live load use strutted pipe as given in table 1.
3. 10. 3. Minimum Height
of
If
the pipe is to
Cover.
The height of cover, measured from finished grade to the top of the
pipe shall be not less than 2 feet.
3. 10. 4. Gage of Bottom Plate*.
For pipes having a lighter gage than one, the bottom plates shall have
the next heavier gage shown in the gage table, unless otherwise provided
The additional metal is
by special provisions or by notes on the plans.
provided to resist abrasion.
3. 10. S. Bolts.
Not less than four bolts shall be used per foot of longitudinal seam.
the culvert is to be placed under greater height of cover than given in
table 1, the bolts shall be increased in number as specified in article 3. 10. 6.
Where ends are skewed, not less than iVie inch hook bolts at 12-inch centers
shall be used to anchor the plates to headwalls.
If
3. 10. 6. Cover Exceeding Heights Specified in Table 1.

The height of cover for strutted culverts, given in table 1, may be
increased 50 per cent providing that the number of bolts used per foot of
longitudinal seam is increased by 50 per cent and the minimum gage used
is No. 1.
3. 10. 7. Sizes
of Pipe
not in Tables.
For sizes of pipe which are between those in the tables, the gage shall
interpolated where possible, otherwise the gage of the next larger size
shall be used.
be
3. 10. 8. Multiple Pipes.
Where multiple lines of pipe are installed, the adjacent sides shall be
at least one-half diameter apart up to 4 feet to permit careful tamping of
the filling material.
3. 10. 9. Strutting.
When strutted pipe is specified, the strutting shall

in division II.
be done as specified
HIGHWAY
206
SECTION
BRIDGES
1Sectional Plate Arches
3. 11. 1. General.
The material for arches shall conform to division IV, and the construc
tion shall conform to division II. The minimum gage shall be according to
the following table.
3. 11. 2. Gages
Span
I
r
V
V
w
w
ir
13'
14'
15'
16'
17'
18'
19'
20"
22'
for
Plate Arches.
Sectional
H-10 Lire Load
H-15 Live Load
H-20 Live Load
Height of Cover
Height of Cover
Height of Cover
t y
0'
7'
10' 2'
3'
4'
5'
6'
tt
9"
If
2'
3'
4'
S'
r r
If
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 M 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 8 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
M 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 8 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 7 8 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
8 10 10 M 10 10 10 8
8
S 10 10 10 10 10 8
8 7
7
7
7
7
8
7
7
7
8
8
7
7
8
7
S
5
7
s
3
3
7
7
8
s
5
3
3
1
1
3
I
1
10 10 10
s
1 s
7 7
7
7
7 7
s
5
7
5
6
7
7
6
.1
1
1
3
3
1
5
3
3
3
3
5
5
3
l
l
1
1
3
1
23'
24'
3. 11.3
7
7
5
Ratio
5
3
3
1
7
7
7
8 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
8 10 10 10 10 10 8
8
7 8 8 10 8 8 7 7
5
5
3
1
7
7
5
3
7
7
5
5
8
7
7
5
8
7
7
7
8
7
5
5
7
5
5
3
3
3
1
5
3
1
5
5
3
3
3
1
1
I
7
5
3
1
s
3
I
7
7
5
8 10 10 10 10 10 10
7 8 8 10 10 8 8
7 7
7 8 8 8
7
8
8
7
3
1
5
3
1
5
3
1
7
5
3
1
7
5
5
3
7
7
5
5
7
7
5
3
3
1
7
5
3
1
5
3
3
1
Ri*e
Span
The designs of the arches given in the table are based on ratios of
rise to span varying from .2 to .5 inclusive except as provided in article
3. 11. 5.
3. 11. 4. Minimum Height of Cover.
The height of cover, measured from finished grade to the top of the
arch shall be not less than 2 feet of earth alone ; or 18 inches of earth under
a flexible type pavement; or 6 inches of earth under a rigid type pavement.
3. 11. 5. Adjustment
of Table.
In
case the ratio of rise to span is less than .3, in combination with a
height of cover of 3 feet or less, the gage of the plates shall be the next
heavier than required by the table and those for which number one gage
is specified shall not be used.
3. 11. 6. Bolts.
Not less than four bolts shall
be used per
foot of longitudinal seam.
DESIGN
207
3. 11. 7. Skewed Spans and Multiple Arches.
The skew shall not exceed 45. When the skew is more than 15 the
length of the structure shall be such that no portion of the live load will
be carried by the cut portion of the arch end. Where right of way or other
conditions do not permit the required length the cut end shall be supported
by a rigid headwall designed to meet the conditions.
The plates shall be
anchored to the headwall with not less than H/ig-inch hooked bolts at not
over 12-inch centers.
Where mutiple arch spans are used the distance between plates at
skewback shall be not less than
of the longer adjoining span.
3. 11. 8. Substructure
Design.
The substructure shall be designed according

for substructures of bridges.
SECTION 12Rating of
3. 12.
Existing
to specifications
herein
Bridges
1. General.
The specifications set forth in this section shall be used in determining

the rating of existing structures for inventory purposes and for determin
ing the safe live load capacity of existing structures.
3. 12. 2. Inventory Ratings.
The inventory rating shall
be
terms of the standard H loadings.

mined as follows:
a classification of existing bridges in

The inventory rating shall be deter
(1) The load-carrying value of each member, connection, or part of

the structure shall be determined in accordance with the unit working
stresses and design procedure set forth in the design division of these
In this determination, due consideration shall be given to
specifications.
deterioration of material, loss of section, type of material, and physical
condition as shown by field examination.
Where dimensions of members
are outside the limits for which design formulae are applicable, the pro
cedure set up in articles which follow shall be used.
(2) The dead load stress in each member and connection of the struc
ture shall be determined.
(3) The difference between the load-carrying value and the dead load
stress gives the stress capacity available for live load and impact.
(4) The live load stress in each member and connection under the
standard H-15 loading, with suitable impact factor, is computed.
(5) The available stress capacity, (3), divided by the H-15 live load
and impact stress, (4), gives a factor which when multiplied by 15 is the
inventory or H rating of the member or connection.
The inventory rating of the structure is the rating of the weakest
member or connection.
3. 12. 3. Operating Rating.
The operating rating is the safe load-carrying capacity of the structure

and is to be used in determining the maximum loads which may be per
mitted to pass over the structure. It is intended that structures requiring
load limitations shall be kept in service only long enough to permit replace
ment or repair and that during such period frequent inspections are to be
made. Under these conditions, unit working stresses 1% times the design
HIGHWAY
208
BRIDGES
stresses given in section 4 of this division or IV2 times the stresses as

This limitation shall apply to
reduced in article 3. 12. 7 may be permitted.
metal, concrete, and timber.
3. 12. 4. Dead Load.
The dead load on the structure shall consist of the weight of the struc
ture plus any attachments thereto.
It shall be determined by actual field
The unit weights shall be assumed to be those set forth in
inspection.
article 3. 2. 2.
3. 12. 5. Live Load.
The live load used in establishing the inventory or H rating shall

H loading with impact as given in article 3. 2. 5. The live load used
in establishing the operating rating shall be the actual vehicle size and
type using the highway, together with an impact factor dependent on local
conditions, and will vary from time to time and from state to state in
accordance with local laws or regulations. Probable sidewalk loads also
shall be considered.
be the
3. 12. 6. Minimum Wind Load.
The minimum wind load provision of paragraphs (2) and (3), article
shall not apply in the calculations for operating rating.
3. 2. 14.
3. 12. 7. Unit Stresses.
The unit working stresses used in determining the load-carrying ca

pacity of each member of a structure shall take into account the type of
material from which the member is made. The unit working stress assumed
for the inventory rating shall not exceed 0.545 of the yield point and for the
operating rating shall not exceed 0.82 of the yield point. Where information
concerning the specification under which the metal was supplied is not avail
able, it will be assumed that the yield point does not exceed 30,000 pounds
per square inch for all bridges built after 1905. Bridges built previous to this
year shall be checked to see that the material is not of a fibrous nature. If
it is fibrous or of doubtful character, the yield point will be assumed to be
equal to that of wrought iron which shall be taken as 26,000 pounds per
square inch. In the absence of definite information, it shall be assumed that
the yield point of wrought iron is 26,000 pounds per square inch, and the
unit working stress shall be taken as 14,000 pounds per square inch.
The provisions of this section apply to material with a yield point of
33,000 pounds per square inch, unless otherwise noted.
3. 12. 8
Traffic Lanes.
The lane loadings or truck loadings shall be considered to occupy lanes,

each having a width of 10 feet for bridges of over 20 feet in width. For
bridges having a roadway width of at least 16 feet but less than 20 feet, the
vehicle shall be considered to occupy half of the available roadway.
On
structures having a roadway width of less than 16 feet, a maximum load
lane 10 feet in width shall be placed so as to give the maximum stress in the
member under consideration.
3. 12. 9. Allowable Stresses (Columns loaded concentrically
or eccentrically)
The permissible unit stress in all concentrically loaded columns as well

as those with known eccentricity of loading shall be as specified in appendix
DESIGN
209
B, except that, where they apply, the approximate formulas given in

articles 3. 4. 2, 3. 4. 7 and 3. 4. 8 may be used.
The value of the factor of safety "n," as specified in appendix B shall
per
be used for the inventory rating of structures but only seventy-nine
cent (79%) of the values shown therein shall be used for operating ratings.
3. 12. 10. Batten
Plate Columns.
To allow for the reduced strength of batten plate columns, the actual
length of the column shall be increased by the following factor to obtain
the value of L/r to be substituted in the formulae given in article 3. 4. 2
or
3. 12. 9.
Spacing center to center of batten plates
Actual
L/r
Up to
40
80
120
160
200
1.3
1.1
1.0
1.0
1.0
2d
4d
6d
lOd
2.0
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
2.8
1.7
1.3
1.2
1.1
4.5
2.3
1.8
1.5
1.3
d = width of member perpendicular to battens.
For
columns having a solid plate on one side and batten plates on the other,
the foregoing increase factors shall be reduced 50 per cent.
on Flanges
of Beams and Girders.

Compression in the extreme fiber of rolled shapes, girders, and built
sections subject to bending when the value L/b is less than 40 shall be
limited to the value given by the formula in article 3. 4. 2. For such mem
bers whose L/b ratio exceeds 40, the maximum stress shall be limited to
the value given by the following formula:
k
where p = allowable compressive unit stress

L = distance in inches between points of definite lateral support
b= flange width of beam or girder in inches
k = 18,000 for inventory rating
k = 27,000 for operating rating
In determining "L" in the above formula, it can be assumed that well-seated

and properly-bearing timber stringers furnish adequate lateral support.
3. 12. 12. Details
(a)
Strength
For
of
of Design.
Connections.
the purpose of rating, connections having a capacity

stress in the member connected shall be considered adequate.
(b)
equal to the
Splices.
For
compression splices with milled ends in contact, 70 per cent

of the stress may be considered to be taken in bearing, in which case,
splice plates and rivets with a capacity equal to 30 per cent of the stress
For the purposes of rating
across the splice shall be considered adequate.
210
structures lug angles

carrying stress.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
and
shelf angles
shall
be
considered
effective
in
(c) Pins.
For the
purpose of rating, the stress in the outer fiber of pins need

not be computed unless the lever arm of the couple producing the moment
is greater than the diameter of the pin.
3. 12. 13. Field Inspection.
As a basis for the rating of existing structures, adequate information

as to the dimensions and condition of the members in the structure shall
The data provided shall include
be provided by competent field inspection.
line diagrams showing lengths and positions of all members, detailed dimen
sions of all members and connections, supplemented by sketches as neces
sary; detailed information as to the condition of the material showing re
duced sections due to deterioration, accident, or other cause; and any other
pertinent information that will aid in the intelligent evaluation of the
structure. The field inspection shall be made under the direction of a
thoroughly trained and competent engineer who should be familiar with
all phases of bridge design and construction.
DIVISION
IV
Materials *
SECTION I Cement
4. 1. 1. General.
The portland cements recognized by these specifications are of five

types which are designated as follows:
Type I. For use in general concrete construction when the special
properties specified for types II, III, IV, and V are not required.
Type II. For use in general concrete construction exposed to moderate
sulfate action or where moderate heat of hydration is required.
Type III. For use when high early strength is required.
Type IV. For use when a low heat of hydration is required.
(Note)
Type V. For use when high sulfate resistance is required.
(Note)
Note. Attention is called to the fact that cements conforming to the
requirements for type IV and type V are not usually carried in stock. In
advance of specifying their use purchasers or their representatives
should
determine whether these types of cement are, or can be made, available.
Cement of the type specified shall conform to the Specifications
for
Portland Cement of the A. A. S. H. 0., Designation: M 85-48.
Unless
otherwise provided, or called for in the special provisions, type 1 cement
shall
be
furnished.
4. 1. 2. Sampling and Testing.
Portland cement shall be sampled and tested in accordance with the

"Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Highway Materials," Ameri
can Association of State Highway Officials.
Cement may be sampled either at the mill or at the site of the work as
The seals of cars containing cement
provided in the above specification.
which has been sampled shall not be broken except by the engineer; other
wise additional samples shall be taken from these cars.
The contractor shall notify the engineer of dates of delivery so that
there will be sufficient time for sampling the cement, either at the mill or
If this is not done or if additional tests are necessary, the
upon delivery.
contractor may be required to rehandle the cement in the storehouse for
the purpose of obtaining the required samples.
SECTION 2Water For
Use With Cement
4. 2. 1. Quality.
Water for use with cement in mortar or concrete shall be subject to

It shall not be salt or brackish and shall be
the approval of the engineer.
reasonably clear and free from oil, acid, injurious alkali or vegetable matter.
4. 2. 2
Tests.
When required by the engineer the quality of the mixing water shall be
determined by the Standard Method of Test for Quality of Water to be
Used in Concrete of the A. A. S. H. O. Methods of Sampling and Testing,
Designation: T 26-35.
* Note: Also refer to division 1, Section 6, for "Control of Materials" and to article 1. 6. 2
regarding amendments and revisions to the A. A. S. H. O. and A. S. T. M. Specifications
for Materials and Testing:.
211
HIGHWAY
212
BRIDGES
In sampling; water for testing, care shall be taken that the containers
are clean and that samples are representative.
When comparative tests are made with a water of known satisfactory
quality, any indication of unsoundness, marked change in time of setting, or
a reduction of more than 10 per cent in mortar strength, shall be sufficient
cause for rejection of the water under test.
SECTION 3 Fine Aggregate
4. 3. 1. Fine Aggregate.
All fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to the Specification for
Pine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete of the A. A. S. H. 0. Specifi
cations for Highway Materials, Designation: M 6-48. Note: Requirements
for soundess should be stipulated in the special provisions (Refer to A. A.
5. H. O., Designation: M 6-48, 4 (a), (b) and (c)).
4. 3. 2. Sand for Mortar.
Sand for mortar shall conform to the Specifications for Mortar Sand of
for Highway Materials, Designation:
the A. A. S. H. 0. Specifications
M 46-42.
SECTION
Coarse
Aggregates
4. 4. 1. Coarse Aggregates.
All coarse aggregates for concrete shall conform to the Specification

for Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete of the A. A. S. H. 0.
Specifications for Highway Materials, Designation: M 80-42. Note: Re
quirements for soundness should be stipulated in the special provisions (refer
to A. A. S. H. O., Designation: M 80-42, 6 (a), (b), (c)).
Slag shall be used for aggregate only if its use is provided for in the
special provisions.
4. 4. 2. Rubble or Cyclopean
Aggregate.
One-man and derrick stone used in rubble or cyclopean concrete shall

The stone shall be free from
consist of tough, sound and durable rock.
coatings, drys, seams or flaws of any character.
In general, the percentage
of wear shall be not greater than 6 per cent as determined by Standard
Method of Test for Abrasion of Stone and Slag by use of the Deval Ma
chine of the A. A. S. H. 0. Methods of Sampling and Testing, Designation :
T 3-35.
Preferably, stone shall be angular in shape and shall have a rough
surface such as will thoroughly bond with the surrounding mortar.
SECTION
5 Reinforcement
4. 5. 1. Bar Reinforcement.
Bar reinforcement for concrete shall conform to the requirements of the

Specification for Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement of the A. A.
for Highway Materials, Designation: M 31-48 with
5. H. O. Specifications
the following modifications:
(1)
All bars shall
be
of the deformed type unless otherwise specified.
MATERIALS
213
(2) The use of cold twisted bars not permitted.

(3) All bars shall be either "Structural Steel Grade" or "Intermediate
Grade," open hearth process, unless otherwise called for in the special
provisions or on the plans.
(4) The type of deformation shall be subject to the approval of the
engineer.
In addition to the above requirements the deformation of deformed

bars shall conform to the Minimum Requirements for the Deformation of
of the A. A. S. H. O.
Deformed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement,
Specifications for Highway Materials, Designation: M 137-48 (A. S. T. M.
Designation:
A 305-47T).
4. 5. 2. Wire and Wire Mesh.
Wire shall conform to the Specification for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for
Reinforcement,
of the A. A. S. H. O. Specifications for Highway
Materials, Designation: M 32-42 (A. S. T. M. Designation: A 82-34).
Wire mesh, when used as reinforcement in concrete shall conform
to the Specification
for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforce
ment of the A. A. S. H. 0. Specifications
for Highway Materials,
Designation: M 55-37 (A. S. T. M. Desigination : A 185-37). The type of
mesh shall be approved by the engineer.
Concrete
4. 5. 3. Bar Mat Reinforcement.

Bar mat reinforcement for concrete shall conform to the Specification
for Fabricated Steel Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement of the
A. A. S. H. O. Specification for Highway Materials, Designation: M 54-37
(A. S. T. M. Designation: A 184-37).
4. 5, 4. Structural Shapes.
Structural shapes used as reinforcement in concrete shall conform

for structural steel as provided in these specifications.
to
the requirements
SECTION
6 Structural,
Eyebar
and Rivet Steels
4. 6. 1. General.
to the following specifications,
Steel shall be furnished according
supplemented by the additional requirements of articles 4. 6. 9. to 4. 6. 14.,
inclusive.
Unless otherwise specified, structural carbon steel (4.6.2) and
structural rivet steel (4. 6. 6) shall be furnished.
4. 6. 2. Structural Carbon Steel and Eye Bar Steel.
Structural carbon steel shall conform to the Specification for Steel for
Bridges and Buildings of the A. S. T. M., Designation: A 7-46.
for Steel for
Steel for eye bars shall conform to the Specifications
Bridges and Buildings of the A. S. T. M. Designation: A 7-39.
4. 6. 3. Structural Silicon Steel.
Structural silicon steel shall conform to the Specification

tural Silicon Steel of the A. S. T. M. Designation: A 94-46.
for Struc
4. 6. 4. Structural Low-Alloy Steel.
Structural low-alloy steel shall conform to the Specification

Alloy Steel of the A. S. T. M. Designation: A 242-46.
for Low-
HIGHWAY
214
BRIDGES
4. 6. 5. Structural Nickel Steel.
Structural nickel steel shall conform to the Specifications

Nickel Steel of the A. S. T. M. Designation: A 8-46.
for Structural
4. 6. 6. Structural Rivet Steel.
Structural rivet steel shall conform to the Specification for Structural

Rivet Steel of the A. A. S. H. O. Specifications for Highway Materials,
Designation: M 97-39 (A. S. T. M. Designation: A 141-39).
4. 6. 7. High-strength Structural Rivet Steel.
High-strength structural rivet steel shall conform to the Specification

for High-Strength Structural Rivet Steel of the A. A. S. H. 0. Specifica
tions for Highway Materials, Designation: M 98-41 (A. S. T. M. Desig
nation: A 195-41).
4. 6. 8. Copper Bearing Steels.
When copper bearing steel is specified, the steel shall contain

than 0.2 per cent of copper.
4. 6. 9
Full
not less
Size Tests.
When full-size tests of built-up structural members and eyebars are

required by the contract, the contractor shall supply testing machines of
the proper type and capacity and shall provide all facilities and labor
incidental to the making of tests. In all tests involving the determination
of tensile and compressive strengths, the ultimate strength, deformation
and other pertinent data shall be recorded.
4. 6. 10. Number and Size of Test Bars.
When tests of full-sized eyebars are required, the number and size of
the bars to be tested shall be designated by the engineer before the mill
order is placed.
The number shall not exceed 5 per cent of the whole
number of bars ordered, with a minimum of two bars on small orders.
4. 6. 11
Selection
of
Test Bars.
Test bars shall be of the same section as the bars to be used in the
structure and of the same length if within the capacity of the testing
machine.
They shall be selected by the inspector from the finished bars,
Test bars representing bars too long for the
preferably after annealing.
testing machine shall be selected from the full-length bar material after
the heads on one end have been formed and shall have the second head
formed upon them after being cut to the greatest length which can be
tested.
4. 6. 12. Failure to Meet Requirements.
If an eyebar fails to fulfill the specified requirements, two additional

The bars
bars of the same size and from the same melt shall be tested.
represented by the test may be reannealed before the additional bars are
tested.
two of the three test bars fail to give satisfactory results, the bars
of that size and melt shall be rejected.
If
4. 6. 13. Record of Annealing.
A record of the annealing charges shall be furnished the engineer

showing the bars included in each charge and the treatment they received.
MATERIALS
4. 6. 14. Payments
for Full-Size
215
Tests.
Any full-size member tested to destruction shall be paid for by

purchaser at the unit contract price, if the test proves satisfactory. If
test proves the member to be unsatisfactory, the members represented
it will be rejected.
The expense of conducting tests shall be borne by
contractor unless otherwise provided.
SECTION 7Wrought
the
the
by
the
Iron
4. 7. 1. Wrought-Iron Plates.
Wrought-Iron Plates shall conform to the Specification

Iron Plates of the A. S. T. M. Designation : A 42-47.
4. 7. 2. Rolled
Wrought-Iron
Shapes
and
for Wrought-
Bars.
Rolled Wrought-Iron Shapes and Bars shall conform to the Specifi

cation for Rolled Wrought-Iron Shapes and Bars of the A. A. S. H. 0.
Designation: A 207-39).
4. 7. 3. Welded Wrought-Iron Pipe
Pipe shall conform to the Specification

Welded Wrought-Iron
Welded Wrought-Iron Pipe of the A. S. T. M. Designation: A 72-45.
for
SECTION 8 Steel Forgings

4. 8. 1. Carbon Steel Forgings.
for Carbon-Steel
Steel Forgings shall conform to the Specifications
Forgings for General Industrial Use of the A. S. T. M. Designation:
A 235-46. Class C 1 forgings shall be furnished unless otherwise specified.
SECTION 9 Steel Castings

4. 9. 1. Carbon
Steel Castings.
Carbon Steel Castings shall conform

castings
carbon-steel
medium-strength,
A. S. T. M. Designation: A 27-46T.
unless otherwise specified.
4. 9. 2. Chromium
Alloy-Steel
for mild to
to the Specification
application of the
general
Grade 65-35 shall be furnished
for
Castings.
Chromium Alloy-Steel Castings shall conform to the Specification for

Chromium Alloy-Steel Castings of the A. S. T. M. Designation : A 296-46T.
Grade 10 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified.
SECTION 10 Gray-Iron Castings

4. 10. 1. Gray
Iron
Castings.
Gray iron castings shall conform to the specification for Gray Iron
Class No. 30 shall be
Castings of the A. S. T. M. Designation: A 48-46.
furnished unless otherwise specified.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
216
4. 10. 2. Workmanship and Finish.
Iron castings shall be true to pattern in form and dimensions, free

from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes, and other defects in
position affecting their strength and value for the service intended.
Castings shall be boldly filleted at angles and the arrises shall be sharp
and perfect.
4. 10. 3. Cleaning.
All castings must be sandblasted or otherwise effectively cleaned of

scale and sand so as to present a smooth, clean, and uniform surface.
SECTION II Malleable Castings
4.11. 1. Malleable
Castings.
Malleable castings shall conform to the Specification for Malleable

Iron Castings of the A. S. T. M. Designation: A 47-47. Grade No. 35018
shall be furnished unless otherwise specified.
4.
11.2. Workmanship and Finish.

'
Malleable castings shall be true to pattern in form and dimensions,

free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes, and other defects in
positions affecting their strength and value for the service intended.
The castings shall be boldly filleted at angles and the arrises shall be
The surfaces shall have a workmanlike finish.
sharp and perfect.
4. 11. 3. Cleaning.
All castings must be sandblasted or otherwise effectively cleaned of

scale and sand so as to present a smooth, clean, and uniform surface.
SECTION
12 Bronze
or Copper-Alloy
Bearing
and Expansion
Plates
4. 12 1. Bronze Bearing and Expansion Plates.
Bronze bearing and expansion plates shall conform to the Specification

and Moveable Bridges and for Bearing
and Expansion Plates of Fixed Bridges of the A. S. T. M. Designation:
B 22-46T. Class B shall be furnished unless otherwise specified.
for Bronze Castings for Turntables
4. 12. 2. Rolled
Copper-Alloy Bearings and Expansion Plates.

Rolled copper-alloy bearing and expansion plates shall conform to the
Specification for Rolled Copper-Alloy Bearing and Expansion Plates for
Bridge and Other Structural Uses of the A. S. T. M. Designation: B 100Type A shall be furnished unless otherwise specified.
46.
SECTION 13 Steel
Piles
4. 13. 1.Steel Piles.

Steel piles shall consist of structural steel shapes of the section pro
The steel shall conform to
vided on the plans or as otherwise specified.
the Specification for Steel for Bridges and Buildings of the A. S. T. M.
Designation A 7-46.
MATERIALS
217
SECTION 14 Steel Sheet Piling

4. 14. 1. Process.
The steel shall be made by the open hearth process.

4. 14. 2. Chemical
Composition
The steel shall conform

composition :
to the following
requirements
Phosphorus not over 0.06 per cent.

Sulphur not over 0.06 per cent.
Copper, when copper steel is specified, not less than
as to chemical
0.20 per cent.
4. 14.3. Physical Properties.
The steel shall conform

properties :
Tensile strength,
Elongation in
A minimum
permitted
to the following
minimum,
requirements
as to physical
pounds per square inch
inches, minimum,
per cent
70,000
1,400,000
tensile
strength
tensile strength of 60,000 pounds per square inch shall be

used in the fabrication of corners, tees, etc.
for piling
4. 14. 4. Bend Tests.

Bend test specimens shall stand being bent cold through 180" around
a pin, the diameter of which is equal to twice the thickness of the specimen,
without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
4. 14. 5. Miscellaneous
Requirements.
All piling shall conform in other respects test specimens, number of

tests, finish, marking and inspection to the requirements
of the Specifi
cations for Steel for Bridges and Buildings of the A. S. T. M. Designation:
A 7-46.
SECTION 15 Steel Grid
4. 15. 1
Floors
Steel.
All steel shall conform to the Specification for Steel for Bridges and
Unless the material
Buildings of the A. S. T. M. Designation: A 7-46.
is galvanized, it shall have a copper content of 0.2 per cent.
4.
I5.
2. Protective
Treatment
(Shop Coat).
Open type floors, preferably, shall be galvanized in accordance with the

Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Structural Steel Shapes,
Plates and Bars, and their Products of the A. S. T. M. Designation: A
123-47.
In lien of galvanizing the floor may be painted if specified in the special
provisions. The paint shall be applied according to the specifications for
Painting Metal Structures, except that dipping will be permitted.
The paint
shall be as specified for metal structures unless paint of other type is
required by the special provisions.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
218
4.
3. Concrete.
I5.
All
concrete in filled steel grid floors shall conform to the specification

for concrete, division II. The concrete and the size of aggregate shall be
as specified for Class Y concrete, division II.
SECTION 16 Paint
4. 16.
1. Paint for Timber
Structures.
Paint for timber structures,
except as otherwise provided herein, shall

conform to the Specification for White and Tinted Ready-Mixed Paint (Lead
and Zinc Base) of the A. A. S. H. 0. Specifications for Highway Materials,
Designation: M 70-42. The paint as specified is intended for use in cover
ing previously painted surfaces.
When it is applied to unpainted timber,
turpentine and linseed oil shall be added as required by the character of
the surface in an amount not to exceed one pint each per gallon of the
paint as specified.
The paint shall be either white or tinted as directed
by the engineer.
aluminum or black paint is specified the first or prime coat shall
be as specified above. The paint for additional coats shall be as follows :
If
(a) Aluminum Paint.
Aluminum paint shall conform to the Specification for Aluminum Paint

(Paste-Mixing Vehicle) of the A. A. S. H. O. Specifications for Highway
Materials, Designation: M 69-48.
(b) Black Paint.

(1)
Composition.
Maximum
per cent
Pigment
Liquid (containing at least
80 per cent linseed
oil)
Water
Coarse particles and "skins" (total residue re
tained on No. 325 sieve based on pigment) . .
Weight per gallon, not lass than
Minimum
per cent
32
28
72
0.5
68
1.5
9.0 lbs.
(2) Pigment.
The pigment in both semipaste and ready-mixed paints shall consist
of carbon, lead oxide, insoluble mineral material, and, at the option of the
manufacturer, oxide of iron. The pigment shall show on analysis not less
than 20 per cent of carbon and not less than 5 per cent of lead oxide calcu
lated as PbaQj.
(Since oxide of lead may be dissolved by the oil in paint,
in all cases when the amount of lead in the pigment calculated as Pb304
is found to be less than 5 per cent of the pigment, lead should be determined
in the vehicle and the total lead in the paint computed to percentage of
The total of the lead oxide, iron oxide, insoluble mineral material,
pigment.)
and loss on ignition shall be not less than 90 per cent.
(3) Vehicle.
The liquid in semipaste paint shall be entirely linseed oil; in readymixed paint it shall contain not less than 80 per cent of linseed oil, the
balance to be combined drier and thinner. The thinner shall be turpentine,
volatile mineral spirits, or a mixture thereof.
MATERIALS
219
Ready-Mixed Paint.
Unless otherwise authorized by the engineer the paint shall be "readymixed" (factory-mixed).
Ready-mixed paint shall be well-ground, shall not settle badly or cake
in the container, shall be readily broken up with a paddle to a smooth
uniform paint of good brushing consistency, and shall dry within 18 houre
The color anu
to a full oil gloss, without streaking, running, or sagging.
hiding power when specified shall be equal to those of a sample mutually
(4)
agreed upon by buyer and seller.

(5)
of Analysis.
in accordance with methods given in Federal
Nos. TT-P-141a and TT-P-27.
Methods
Paint shall
Specifications
be analyzed
Paint for Metals

4. 16. 2. Shop Coat
(Prime Coat).
The shop or prime coat of paint for metal shall be a red lead paint
and shall conform to the Specification for Red Lead (Dry and Paste-in-Oil)
and Paint Made Therefrom, Designation: M 71-42 or to the Specification
for Red Lead Ready-Mixed Paint, Designation: M 72-48 of the A. A. S. H. O.
Specifications
for Highway Materials. Note: If a mixture of raw and
boiled linseed oil is desired, the percentages of each kind shall be stipulated
in the special provisions. Refer to footnote of A. A. S. H. 0., Designation:
M 71-42, article 5 (a).
The paint, preferably, shall be factory mixed. As an alternative the
pigment shall be furnished in the form of red lead paste.
4.16.3. First Field
Coat.
When the finish coat of paint is specified to be aluminum, black or

graphite paint, or colored green, brown or dark gray, the first field coat
shall be a red lead paint as specified for the shop coat, tinted light brown
as required, with lamp black in an amount not to exceed % pound per gallon
of linseed oil.
When the finish coat is to be white or gray, a first field coat conforming
to the Specification for White and Tinted Ready-Mixed Paint (Lead and
Zinc Base) of the A. A. S. H. O. Specifications for Highway Materials,
Designation: M 70-42 may be used in lieu of red lead paint. The paint
shall be tinted as directed by the engineer.
4.16.4.
(a)
Second Field
Coat.
(Finish Coat.)
General.
The paint to be used for the second field coat shall be as required
by the special provisions or as noted on the plans.
It shall conform to
one of the following specification3 :
If
(1) Green Graphite Bridge Paint (refer to (b)).

(2) Black Bridge Paint, Designation (refer to (c)).
(3) Aluminum Paint (Paste-Mixing Vehicle), Designation: M 69-48.
Paint (Lead and Zinc Base), Desig
(4) White and Tinted Ready-Mixed
nation: M 70-42.
and Paint made therefrom, Desig
(5) Red Lead (Dry and Paste-in-Oil)
nation: M 71-42.
Paint, Designation: M 72-48.
(6) Red Lead Ready-Mixed
red lead is used for the second field

lampblack as directed by the engineer.
coat
it shall
be
tinted with
HIGHWAY
220
(b)
BRIDGES
Green Graphite Bridge Paint.
Scope
These
for bridges.
1.
specifications
cover
linseed
oil
green
ready-mixed
paint
The paint shall be well-ground, shall not settle badly or cake in
the container, shall be readily broken up with a paddle to a smooth uniform
paint of good brushing consistency, and shall dry to a full-oil gloss with
out streaking, running or sagging when applied to a vertical surface. The
shade and hiding power shall be that which may be specified in the contract.
2.
Pigment
shall consist of graphitic carbon, chrome green,
red lead and insoluble siliceous mineral matter.
The chrome green shall
be a mixture of prussian blue and chrome yellow.
The pigment shall show
on analysis not more than 50 per cent siliceous pigment and not less than
10 per cent graphitic carbon.
The red lead calculated as PbsCU shall not
be less than 20 per cent by weight of the pigment.
Since oxide of lead
may be dissolved by the oil in the paint, in all cases when the amount of
lead in the pigment, calculated as PbsCt, is found to be less than 20 per
cent of the pigment, lead shall be determined in the vehicle and the total
lead (as PbsCU) in the paint computed to percentage of pigment.
The lead
to be calculated as PbsC^ shall not include the lead in the lead chromate.
(b) The materials used in the preparation of the pigment shall conform
to the requirements given in the following:
3.
(a) The pigment
Graphite.
1. The material required shall contain at least 82 per cent of
graphitic carbon and shall be free from grit, dirt, or any other
deleterious
substance.
General Requirements.
2. The general
paragraph.
requirements'
shall
be
as stated
in the following
Detail Requirements.
(a) Amorphous graphite shall be ground to such fineness that
100 per cent will pass through a No. 20 bolting cloth.
(b) The graphite shall not lose more than 3 per cent in weight
when tested for ignition, as required in paragraph 4 (c).
3.
Method of Inspection and Tests.

shall be
4. (a) Samples from each lot submitted for inspection
obtained for chemical analysis.
(b) A sufficient amount of material shall be tested for fineness
as required in paragraph 3 (a).
(c) A one-gram sample of the amorphous graphite shall be taken
to represent each lot and shall be dried for one hour at 110 C., then
placed in a tightly covered 30 cubic centimeter capacity platinum cruci
ble and heated for 30 seconds over the full flame of a Bunsen gas burner.
The difference in weight, between the dried material immediately
MATERIALS
221
before submitting to the Bunsen flame and after being heated and
cooled, shall be taken as ignition loss referred to in paragraph 3 (b).
A. A. S. H. O. Designation: M 130-42
Chrome green
Red lead
Vehicle
(a) The liquid or vehicle in the paint shall contain not less than
80 per cent of raw linseed oil and the balance to be combined thinner and
dryer. The thinner shall be turpentine, volatile mineral spirits or a
mixture thereof.
(If desired the raw linseed oil may be wholly or partially replaced
with boiled oil. The desired percentage shall be stated in the contract.)
(b) The materials used in the preparation of the vehicle shall
conform to the requirements given in the following specifications:
4.
A. A. S. H. 0. Designation : M 125-42
S. H. O. Designation: M 126-42
A. A. S. H. O. Designation : M 128-42
Federal Specification TT-D 651a
Raw linseed oil

linseed oil
Turpentine
Mineral spirits
Drier
A. A.
Boiled
Composition
The paint shall conform to the following requirements:
5.
Minimum
Maximum
per cent
Pigment
Liquid (containing at
80 per cent linseed
least
oil)
Water
tained on No. 325 sieve)
Drying
per cent
45
40
60
0.5
55
1.5
Time
6. When applied in a normal brushing coat the paint shall dry hard
and tough in not more than 24 hours, under normal conditions of temper
ature and humidity.
Weight
7.
The weight per gallon at
77
F.
shall not be less than
11
pounds.
Packing and Marking
Paint shall be delivered in such containers as may be specified in

Each container shall bear a label with the following
information shown thereon:
name and address of the manufacturer and
contractor, shipping point, trade mark or trade name, kind of paint, formula,
number of gallons, date and lot number.
8.
the .contract.
Methods of Analysis
Paint shall be analyzed in accordance with the methods given in
Federal Specification No. TT-P-141a and TT-P-27.
9.
(c) Black Bridge Paint.

Scope
1. These
bridges.
specifications
cover linseed
oil black
ready-mixed
paint for
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
222
2. The paint shall be well-ground, shall not settle badly or cake in
the container, shall be readily broken up with a paddle to a smooth uniform
paint of good brushing consistency, and shall dry to a full oil gloss with
The
out streaking, running or sagging when applied to a vertical surface.
covering or hiding power shall be that which may be specified in the contract.
Pigment
3. (a) The pigment shall consist of gaphitic carbon, red lead, iron
The pigment shall show on
oxide and insoluble siliceous mineral matter.
analysis not less than 35 per cent carbon and 20 per cent lead oxide,
calculated as Pb304.
Since some oxide of lead may be dissolved by the oil
in the paint, in all cases when the amount of lead in the pigment, calculated
as PbsO-i, is found to be less than 20 per cent of the pigment, lead shall
be determined in the vehicle and the total lead (as PbsGj) in the paint
computed to percentage of pigment.
The total of the lead oxide, iron
oxide, insoluble mineral matter and loss on ignition shall not be less than
90 per cent.
in the preparation of
given in the following:
(b) The materials used
conform
to the requirements
the
pigment
shall
Graphite.
1. The material required
graphitic carbon and shall
deleterious
shall contain at least 82 per cent of

free from grit, dirt, or any other
be
substance.
General
2. The general
paragraph.
Requirements.
requirements
shall
be
as stated
in the following
Detail Requirements.
(a) Amorphous graphite shall be ground to such fineness that
will pass through a No. 20 bolting cloth.
(b) The graphite shall not lose more than 3 per cent in weight
when tested for ignition, as required in paragraph 4 (c).
S.
100 per cent
Method
h.
obtained
(a)
Samples
of Inspection and Tests.
from each lot submitted
for chemical analysis.

A sufficient amount of material shall
for inspection
shall
be
be tested for fineness

(a).
(c) A one-gram sample of the amorphous graphite shall be taken
to represent each lot and shall be dried for one hour at 110C., then
placed in a tightly covered 30 cubic centimeter capacity platinum
crucible and heated for 30 seconds over the full flame of a Bunsen
gas burner.
The difference in weight, between the dried material
immediately before submitting to the Bunsen flame and after being
heated and cooled, shall be taken as ignition loss referred to in
paragraph 3 (b).
(b)
as required
Red lead
Iron oxide
in paragraph
A. A. S. H. O. Designation: M
A. A. S. H. O. Designation : M
71-42
129-42
MATERIALS
223
Vehicle
(a) Liquid. The liquid or
vehicle in the paint shall contain not

4.
less than 80 per cent of raw linseed oil and the balance to be combined
dryer and thinner.
The thinner shall be turpentine, volatile mineral
spirits, or a mixture thereof.
(If desired, the raw linseed oil may be replaced with boiled oil to
the extent of 50 per cent of the total oil content.
The desired percentage
shall be stated in the contract.)
(b) The materials used in the preparation of the vehicle
conform to the requirements given in the following specifications :
Raw linseed oil

Boiled
linseed
Turpentine
Mineral spirits
Drier
shall
A. A.
S. H. 0. Designation : M 125-42
A. A. S. H. O. Designation : M 128-42
Federal Specification TT-D 651a
oil
Composition
5.
The paint shall consist of:

Maximum
per cent
Pigment
Liquid (containing at least
80 per cent linseed
oil)
Water
tained on No. 325 sieve)
Drying
Minimum
per cent
40
35
65
0.5
60
1.6
Time
applied in a normal brushing coat the paint shall dry in

than 24 hours, under normal conditions of temperature
and
6. When
not more
humidity.
Weight
7.
The weight per gallon at
77
Packing
F. shall not
be less than 9% pounds.
and Marking
8. Paint shall be delivered in such containers

as may be specified
in the contract.
Each container shall bear a label with the following
information shown thereon: name and address of the manufacturer and
contractor,
shipping point, trade mark or trade name, kind of paint,
formula, number of gallons, date and lot number.
Methods of Analysis
Paint shall be analyzed in accordance with the methods given in
Federal Specifications Nos. TT-P-141a and TT-P-27.
9.
SECTION
17 Welding
4. 17. 1. Welding Materials.
Materials used for welding shall conform to the Specifications for

Welded Highway and Railway Bridges of the American Welding Society.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
224
SECTION 18 Sheet Metal for Water Stops

4. 18.
1. Sheet
and General Use
Copper.
for Copper Sheet,

Sheet copper shall conform to the Specifications
Strip and Plate, of the A. A. S. H. O. Specifications for Highway Materials,
Designation: M 138-48 (A. S. T. M. Designation: B 152-46 T). Type A
shall be used unless otherwise specified.
4. 18. 2. Sheet Lead.
Sheet lead shall conform to the requirements for Common Desilverized
Lead A, of the Specification for Pig Lead of the A. A. S. H. O. Specifications
for Highway Materials, Designation: M 112-45 (A. S. T. M. Designation:
B 29-43).
4.18.3
Sheet Zinc
II
of the
Sheet zinc shall conform to the requirements
for Type
for Rolled Zinc of the A. A. S. H. 0. Specifications for
Specifications
Highway Materials, Designation: M 113-39 (A. S. T. M. Designation:
B 69-39).
SECTION 19Sectional
Plate Pipe and Arches
4. 19. 1. General.
Plates shall
be
fabricated from base metal made by the open hearth

shall conform to one of the following chemical
The base metal

process.
requirements :
Composition
Chemical
(Position of base metals does not indicate preference)

Kind of Base Metal
Tolerances
Elements
Pure
Iron
Carbon, maximum %
Manganese, maximum %
Phosphorus, maximum %
Silicon, maximum %
Copper, minimum
Molybdenum, minimum
Sum of first 5 elements,
maximum %
Sum of first 6 elements,
maximum %
.015
.040
Copper
Bearing
Pure
Iron
Copper
Molyb
Copper
Iron
denum
Iron
Copper
Steel
.bis
.bis
.bis
.040
.050
.20
.20
.40
.05
.20
.10
.25
.25
.70
.040
.040
.10
Genuine
Wrought
Iron
.05
.06
.12
.04
.15
.01
.01
.42
.04
.bi
.02
.04
....
NOTE These requirements conform to the Specification for Corrugated Metal Culvert
Pipe of the A. A. S. H. O. Specifications for Highway Materials, Designation: M 36-42.
4. 19. 2. Spelter
Coating.
A coating of prime western spelter or equal shall be applied by the

hot-dip process at the rate given below per square foot of double-exposed
surface.
Pipe
60 to 120 inches
8
1
Pipe
in diameter
(inclusive) and arches:
to 10 gage, incl., 2 oz.

to 7 gage, incl., 3 oz.
135 to 180 inches in diameter
(inclusive),
3 oz.
MATERIALS
225
If
the average spelter coating as determined from the required samples

is less than the amount specified above, or if any one specimen shows a
deficiency of 0.2 ounce where a 2-ounce coating is specified, or a deficiency
of 0.3 ounce in the case of a 3-ounce coating requirement, the lot sampled
shall be rejected. Spelter coating shall be of first-class commercial quality,
free from injurious defects, such as blisters, flux and uncoated spots.
4. 19. 3. Galvanising.
All pipe and arches for which 3-ounce spelter is required shall bt
When gages No. 8 and lighter are used, the
galvanized after fabrication.
metal may be galvanized either before or after fabrication.
4. 19. 4. Sampling.
For testing weight of spelter coating and for chemical analysis of base
metal, when required, a sample approximately 3 inches square, or a sample
of equivalent area, shall be cut from the corner of one plate in each 100
plates of a shipment or fraction thereof.
4.19. S. Chemical
Analysis
and Tests
for
Spelter Coating.
When required, the chemical analyses of base metal shall be made in

E 30-45.
accordance with A. S. T. M. Specification
The test for weight of spelter coating shall be made in accordance with
A. A. S. H. O. Standard Method T 65-42, or A. S. T. M. Designation: A
90-39.
4. 19. 6. Certified Analysis and Guarantee.
The manufacturer of the base metal shall file with the engineer a
certificate setting forth the name or brand of metal to be furnished and
a typical analysis showing the percentage of carbon, manganese, phos
phorus, sulphur, silicon and copper; also molybdenum, when provided for
under the particular kind of base metal. The certificate shall be sworn to for
the manufacturer by a person having legal authority to bind the company.
The manufacturer shall include in the certificate a guarantee providing
that all metal furnished shall conform to requirements of that particular
base metal as set forth in section 4. 19. 1, shall bear a suitable identification
brand or mark, and shall be replaced without cost to the purchaser when
not in conformity with the specified analysis, gage, or spelter coating, the
cost to be limited to the replacement of sectional plate material only; and
the guarantee shall be so worded as to remain in effect so long as the
manufacturer continues to furnish material.
One brand, and one brand only, shall be approved for each kind of base
metal furnished by each of the actual manufacturers of the base metal.
4. 19. 7. Identification.
No plates will be accepted unless the metal is identified by a stamp on

each plate showing:
(1) Name of base metal manufacturer.
(2) Name of brand and kind of base metal.
(3) Gage number.
(4) Weight of spelter coating.
S heat number
(5) Identification symbols showing pot number
I
The identification brands shall be so placed that when the pipe or arch
is erected the indentification will appear on the inside of the structure.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
226
4.19.8. Bolts (for Connecting Plates).

Bolts for connecting plates shall be not
less than uAe inch in diameter,

and shall be hot-dip galvanized. The threads shall be American National
Coarse Thread Series, Class 2 fit.
They shall meet the following physical test requirements:
Minimum tensile strength

Minimum shear
Minimum reduction of area
Brinell hardness between the limits
110,000# per sq. in.

80,000# per sq. in.
35 per cent
241-286
The tests shall be made on finished bolts. Unless otherwise authorized,

the bolts shall be furnished so they may be sampled and tested before
erection is commenced.
4. 19. 9. Nuts and
Bolt Heads.
Bolt heads and nuts shall
uniform bearing on the curved
shall be used in lieu thereof.
special designed to provide even and

surfaces, or special washers
corrugated
be
4. 19. 10. Corrugations.
Corrugations shall have a pitch of

1 % inches, with
and a depth of at least

4. 19. 11. Gage
inches with a tolerance of M inch

of plus or minus % inch.
a tolerance
Determination and Tolerance.
Where mill or factory inspection is employed, gage shall be determined

Theoretical weights and
by weight of flat plates before corrugating.
tolerances shall be as follows:
Gage
Theoretical
wt. before
galvanizing
(Lbs./sq. ft.)
Theoretical
wt. after
galvanizing
(Lbs./sq. ft.)
1
S
S
7
8
10
11.25
10.00
8.75
7.50
6.875
5.625
11.438
10.188
8.938
7.688
7.031
5.781
Permissible variation in ave. wt. of

lots* (in per cent)
Over
4
4
4.5
4.5
5
5
Under
S
3
S
8
5
5
* The term "lot" means all the plates of one gage in the shipment, for gages
heavier, and not less than 6,000 pounds constitutes a "lot" for gages 8 and lighter.
vidual plates shall not underrun the theoretical weights by more than 10 per cent.
7 and
Indi
4. 19. 12. Field
Inspection and Acceptance of Plates.

The field inspection shall be made by the engineer, who
nished with an itemized statement of the number and length
in each shipment by the manufacturer.
Each plate included in a shipment shall fully meet the
of these specifications; and if 25 per cent of the plates in any
to meet the requirements
shall be fur
of the plates
requirements
shipment fail
the entire shipment may be rejected.
SECTION 20 Stone for Masonry

4. 20. 1
Ashlar Stone.
Stone for ashlar masonry shall be of the kind specified on the plans or
The stone shall be tough, dense, sound and durable, resist
in the contract.
ant to weathering action, reasonably fine grained, uniform in color, and
MATERIALS
227
free from seams, cracks, pyrite inclusions, or other structural defects.

Preferably, stone shall be from a quarry the product of which is known
to be of satisfactory quality.
Stone shall be of such character that it can
be wrought to such lines and surfaces, whether curved or plane, as may
Any stone having defects which have been repaired with
be required.
cement or other materials shall be rejected.
Each bidder shall submit with his bid a 6-inch cubical block of the
stone he proposes to furnish and shall designate the quarry from which it
is obtained.
The quality of the stone furnished shall be at least equal to
that of the sample.
The sample shall be squared and dressed on three
sides; one side shall be smooth-finished, one side fine-finished, and one side
shall be given the finish indicated on the plans for exposed surfaces of
face stone.
The remaining sides shall be left with quarry face. (For
definitions of surface finishes of stone, see "Ashlar Masonry," division II.)
When permitted by the engineer, bidders may submit bids, accompanied
by samples as specified above, on kinds of stone other than that specified.
4. 20. 2. Rubble Stone.
Stone for mortar rubble or dry rubble masonry shall be of approved
quality, sound and durable, and free from segregations, seams, cracks, and
other structural defects or imperfections tending to destroy its resistance
to the weather.
It shall be free from rounded, worn, or weathered surfaces.
All weathered stone shall be rejected.
4.20. 3. Riprap.
Stone for riprap shall consist of field stone or rough, unhewn quarry
stone as nearly rectangular in section as is practicable.
The stone shall
be dense, resistant to the action of air and water, and suitable in all other
respects for the purpose intended.
SECTION 21 Brick
4. 21. 1. Paving Brick.
Brick to be used in the wearing surface of bridge floors shall conform

to the Specification for Paving Brick of the A. A. S. H. O. Specification for
Highway Materials, Designation: M 40-42.
4. 21. 2. Brick
for
Masonry.
Brick for masonry construction shall conform to the Specification for

Building Brick (made from clay or shale) of the A. A. S. H. 0. Specifications
for Highway Materials, Designation: M 114-41.
The grade of brick
to be furnished shall be as specified in the special provisions.
The brick shall have a fine-grained, uniform, and dense structure, free
from lumps of lime, laminations, cracks, checks, soluble salts, or other
defects which may in any way impair their strength, durability, appearance,
or usefulness for the purpose intended. Bricks shall emit a clear, metallic
ring when struck with a hammer.
SECTION
4. 22. 1. Oil
22 Bituminous
Materials and Joint Fillers
Asphalt Fillers.
The filler shall be Type A or Type B, as specified in the special pro

or on the plans.
visions
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
228
Type A.
Asphalt filler for brick wearing surfaces and poured expansion joints
shall conform to the Specification for Oil Asphalt Filler of the A. A. S. H. O.
Specifications for Highway Materials, Designation: M 18-42.
Type B.
The filler shall consist of:
80 to 85 parts of asphalt cement
15 to 20 parts of mineral filler.
The asphalt cement shall conform to the Specification for Asphalt

Cement of the A. A. S. H. 0. Specifications for Highway Materials, Desig
nation: M 20-42.
The mineral filler shall all pass a No. 200 sieve and 95 to 100 per cent
shall pass a No. 325 sieve.
This blend of asphalt and mineral filler shall show a per cent of filler
in the lower portion not more than 10 per cent greater than the average
filler content of the blend, when the blend is maintained at a temperature
of 325 for two hours without agitation. The blend shall meet the follow
ing requirements:
Penetration at 77 F
Ductility at 77 F
Inorganic material insoluble in carbon disulphide.
Test Loss on heating at 325, 5 hours
4. 22. 2. Premolded Expansion
40 +
20 cms. +
. 15 to 26% by weight
2%
Joint Fillers.
Non-extruding
shall conform to the Specification
for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete of the A. A. S. H. O.
Specifications
Bituminous fiber types shall conform to the specification for Preformed
Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete of the A. A. S. H. O. Specifications
Bituminous type filler shall conform to the Specification for Preformed
Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete of the A. A. S. H. O. Specifications
and resilient types
Bituminous
4. 22.
Carpets
3. Tar.
The first or prime coat (cold application) for tar carpets, on concrete
wood bridge floors, shall be a homogeneous tar conforming to the Specifi
cations for Highway Materials, Designation : M 52-42, Grade RT-2. Grades
RT-1, RT-3 or RT-4 may be used when designated by the engineer.
The second coat (hot application) shall be Grade RT-8 or RT-9. The
grade to be used, dependent on local conditions, shall be designated by the
engineer.
jr
4. 22. 4. Asphalt.
For the first or prime coat (cold application) for either mixed or
the
penetration asphalt carpets, asphalts Type MC or RC shall be used.
S. H. O.
surfaces are lean or absorbent, asphalt Type MC-0 or MC-1 (A.
the surfaces are well compacted
Designation: M 82-42) shall be used.
or nonabsorbent, asphalt Type RC-0 or RC-1 (A. A. S. H. O. Designation :
M 81-42) shall be used. For heavier prime coats than those obtainable with
If
If
MATERIALS
229
the aforementioned materials, asphalts Type MC-2 or RC-2 may be used.

If the use of heat is necessary for the satisfactory application of these
materials, the application of such heat shall be done cautiously.
The second coat (hot application) for asphalt carpets on concrete or
wood bridge floors shall be either Type RC-3, RC-4, or RC-5 (A. A. S. H. O.
Designation: M 81-42) or an asphaltic emulsion (A. A. S. H. O. Designa
tion: M 48-42, M 49-42, M 50-42, or M 51-42).
The grade used shall be
specified by the engineer in accordance with local conditions.
The heating
of the asphalts Type RC shall be done with caution.
4. 22. 5. Asphalt.
Waterproofing
Materials
Waterproofing asphalt shall conform to the specification for asphalt

for damp-proofing and water-proofing of the A. A. S. H. O. Specifications
Note: Type A is for use
above ground and Type B for use below ground.
Unless otherwise speci
fied, Type B shall be used.
Primer for use with asphalt in waterproofing shall conform to the
Specification for Primer for Use with Asphalt in Damp-proofing and Water
proofing of the A. A. S. H. O. Specification for Highway Materials, Desig
nation: M 116-42 (A. S. T. M. Designation: D 41-41).
4. 22. 6
Pitch.
Waterproofing pitch shall conform to the Specification for Coal-tar

Pitch for Roofing, Damp-proofing and Waterproofing of the A. A. S. H. 0.
Type B
Specification
pitch shall be furnished unless otherwise specified.
Primer for use with coal-tar pitch in damp-proofing and waterproofing
shall conform to the Specification for Creosote for Priming Coat with
Coal-tar Pitch in Damp-proofing and Waterproofing of the A. A. S. H. 0.
Designation: D 43-41).
4. 22. 7. Fabric.
The fabric shall conform to the Specification for Woven Cotton Fabrics
Saturated with Bituminous Substances for Use in Waterproofing of the
A. A. S. H. O. Specifications for Highway Materials, Designation: M 117-40.
4. 22. 8. Tar for Absorptive Treatment.
Tar for absorptive treatment shall be a liquid water-gas
conforms to the following requirements:
tar which
1.030 to 1.100
Specific gravity, 25/25 C. (77/77 F.)
Specific viscosity at 40 C. (104 F.) (Engler), not
more than
3.0
Total distillate, per cent by weight, to 300 C. (572
F.), not more than
50.0
Bitumen (soluble in carbon disulphide), not less than,
98.0
per cent
Water, not more than, per cent
3.0
4.22.9
Tar
Tar Seal Coat.
seal coat shall conform to the Specification for Tar for Use in
for Highway
Road Construction of the A. A. S. H. O. Specifications
Materials, Designation: M 52-42, Grade RTCB-5.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
230
Joint Fillers.
Filler for use in horizontal joints in waterproofing work shall
4. 22. 10
straight
refined
oil asphalt conforming to the following
be a
requirements:
(1) Flash point: Not less than 232 C. (450 F.).

(2) Softening point: 48.9 C. (120 F.) to 54.4 C. (130 F.).
(3) Penetration: At 0 C. (32 F.), 200 grams, 1 minute, not less than 15.
At 25 C. (77 F.), 100 grams, 5 seconds, 50 to 60.
At 46 C. (115 F.), 50 grams, 5 seconds, not more than 300.
(4) Loss on heating: At 163 C. (325 F.), 50 grams, 5 hours, not more
than 0.5 per cent.
(5) Ductility: At 25 C. (77 F.), 5 centimeters per minute, not less than 85.
(6) Total bitumen (soluble in carbon disulphide): Not less than 99.5
per cent.
Filler for use in vertical joints in waterproofing work shall be an

asphalt conforming to the requirements specified above for horizontal joint
filler, to which has been added 20 per cent by weight, of asbestos fiber.
The incorporation of the asbestos fiber with the asphalt shall be done at
the factory of the manufacturer to insure a uniform distribution of the
fiber throughout the mix.
4. 22. 11. Inspection and Delivery.
All waterproofing materials shall
be tested before shipment.

Unless
ordered by the engineer, they shall be tested at the place of
manufacture, and, when so tested, a copy of the test results shall be sent
to the engineer by the chemist or inspection bureau which has been desig
nated to make the tests, and each package shall have affixed to it a label,
seal, or other mark of identification, showing that it has been tested and
found acceptable, and identifying the package with the laboratory tests.
Factory inspection is preferred, but, in lieu thereof, the engineer may
order that representative samples, properly identified, be sent to him for
test prior to shipment of the materials. After delivery of the materials,
representative
check samples shall be taken which shall determine the
acceptability of the materials.
All materials shall be delivered on the work in original containers,
plainly marked with the manufacturer's brand or label.
otherwise
4. 23. 1. General.
SECTION 23 Asphalt
Paving
Blocks
Asphalt blocks shall be composed of asphaltic cement, mineral aggre

gate and inorganic dust, as herein specified, thoroughly mixed while hot
in such proportions that the finished blocks shall conform to the specified
requirements.
v
The ingredients of the blocks shall be tested in accordance with the
methods provided in the Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing of
the American Association of State Highway Officials.
Each bidder shall submit with his bid a specimen block of the size and
quality described in these specifications, labeled with the name of the bidder,
the name of the manufacturer, and the place of manufacture.
Bids not
accompanied by specimen blocks will not be accepted.
4. 23. 2. Asphaltic Cement.
The asphaltic cement shall conform to the following
requirements:
(1) It shalllbe homogeneous and free from water.

(2) Specificvgravity 25/25 C. (77/77 F.), not less than 1.00.
MATERIALS
231
(3) Flash point: Not less than 190 C. (374 F.).

(4) The penetration at 25 C. (77 F.), 100 grams, 5 seconds, shall be
varied to suit climatic and traffic conditions in accordance with the

following table:
Temperature
Traffic
Light
Low
15-25
15-25
15-20
Moderate
Heavy
(5) Loss on heating: At 163 C. (325

more than 2.0 per cent.
F.),
Moderate
High
15-25
15-20
10-20
10-15
10-15
5-15
50 grams, 5 hours, not
Penetration of residue after heating: At 25 C. (77 F.), 100

grams, 5 seconds, as compared to penetration before heating,
not less than 50 per cent.
Ductility: At 25 C. (77 F.), 5 to 10.
(8) Proportion of bitumen soluble in carbon tetrachloride: Not less
than 99.0 per cent.
(6)
4. 23. 3. Mineral
Aggregate.
shall be clean, hard, unweathered trap rock,

dolomite, limestone, copper conglomerate, or other suitable material which
shall show a percentage of wear of not more than 5 per cent. Its grading
shall be such as to produce, with the inorganic dust, the granulometric
composition hereinafter . specified.
The mineral aggregate
4. 23. 4. Inorganic
Dust.
The inorganic dust, or filler, shall be produced from sound limestone

or other approved material and shall be powdered to such a fineness that
95 per cent shall pass a 30-mesh sieve and not less than 50 per cent shall
pass a 200-mesh sieve. Sufficient inorganic dust shall be used to give the
granulometric composition hereinafter specified.
4. 23. 5. Manufacture.
Before being mixed, the asphaltic cement and crushed mineral aggre
In no case shall either be heated to a
gate shall be heated separately.
higher temperature than 350 F. but the temperature of each shall be so
regulated that the temperature
of the mixture as delivered to the press
moulds shall be not less than 225" F.
The mineral aggregate, inorganic dust and asphaltic cement in the
proper proportions shall be thoroughly mixed to produce a homogeneous
mass in which all particles are thoroughly coated with asphaltic cement.
The blocks shall receive a compression in the moulds of not less than
4,000 pounds per square inch, applied on the 3-inch by 12-inch surface.
After pressing, they shall be cooled by passing through water or by other
suitable means.
4. 23. 6. Physical Characteristics.
(a)
Size and Shape.
The blocks shall be 5 inches in width by 12 inches in length unless the

depth required is less than 2 inches, in which case they shall be 4 inches in
width by 8 inches in length.
The depth shall be as shown on the plans.
A variation either way from these dimensions of Vl inch in length or % inch
in width or depth will be sufficient cause for rejection of any block.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
232
(b)
Composition.
The composition
follows:
of the blocks, as delivered
on the work, shall be as
Mineral matter:
Retained by Ji-inch screen (circular openings), not more than 10 per

Passing J-inch screen and retained by 20-mesh sieve, 30 to 60 per
Passing 20-mesh sieve and retained by 100-mesh sieve, 15 to 35 per
Passing 100-mesh sieve (including all fines), 20 to 40 per cent.
Passing 200-mesh sieve, not less than 15 per cent.
Asphaltic cement, 6J to 9 per cent.
Specific gravity: The blocks shall have a specific gravity of not less
2.35 at 77 F.
(c) Absorption
cent.
cent.
cent.
than
Test.
The blocks to be tested shall be cleaned of loose particles, carefully

weighed, placed in a pressure vessel and subjected to a vacuum of 22 inches
for one hour at room temperature.
While still maintaining the vacuum,
water shall then be admitted to the vessel until the blocks are completely
immersed, after which the vacuum shall be relieved and water pressure
carried up to 100 pounds per square inch and there maintained for one
hour. The blocks shall then be removed from the vessel and, after mopping
The average of a set of
off all surface water, shall be carefully weighed.
four blocks tested in this manner shall not show an absorption exceeding
0.3 per cent by weight.
SECTION 24 Premolded Asphalt
Plank
4. 24. 1. General.
for PrePremolded asphalt plank shall conform to the Specification

for Highway
molded Asphalt Plank of the A. A. S. H. O. Specifications
Materials, Designation: M 46-38. Type (a) Plain Asphalt Plank and
Type (b) Mineral Surfaced Asphalt Plank shall be furnished as specified
in the special provisions or as noted on the plans.
SECTION
25 Structural Timber, Lumber and Piling
4. 25. 1. Species of Woods.
The common and botanical names of the species of woods recognized

in these specifications are described as follows:
Common Name
Cedar, Northern White
Cedar, Port Orford
Cedar, Western Red
Chestnut
Cypress, Tidewater Red
Fir, Douglas (Coast)
Fir, Douglas (Inland)
Gum, Black
Hemlock, Eastern
Hemlock, West Coast
Larch, Western
Oak, Red, includes:
Red Oak
Black Oak
Botanical Name
Thuja occidentalis
Chamaecyparis lawsoniana
Thuja plicata
Castanea dentata
Taxodium distichum
Pseudotsuga taxifolia (Coast)
Pseudotsuga taxifolia
(Inter-mountain type)
Nyssa sylvatica
Tsuga canadensis
Tsuga heterophylla
Larix occidentalis
Quercus borealis and
Quercus borealis maxima
MATERIALS
233
Common Name
Southern Red Oak
Water Oak
Willow Oak
Scarlet Oak
Pin Oak
Shumard Red Oak
Swamp Red Oak
Blackjack Oak
Laurel Oak
Texas Red Oak
Botanical Name
Quercus rubra
Quercus nigra
White Oak
Quercus alba
Quercus montana
Quercus stelata
Quercus macrocarpa
Quercus lyrata
Quercus prinus
Quercus tricolor
Quercus virginiana
Quercus muehlenbergii
Pinus monticola
Pinus contorta
Pinus strobus
Pinus resinosa
Pinus ponderosa
Quercus
Quercus
Quercus
Quercus
Quercus
Quercus
Quercus
Quercus
Oak, White, includes:
Chestnut Oak
Post Oak
Bur Oak
Overcup Oak
Swamp Chestnut Oak
Swamp White Oak
Live Oak
Chinquapin Oak
Pine, Idaho White

Pine, Lodgepole
Pine, Northern White
Pine, Norway
Pine, Pondorosa
Pine, Southern Yellow, includes:
Loblolly Pine
Longleaf Pine
Pitch Pine
Pond Pine
Shortleaf Pine
Slash Pine
Pine, Sugar
Redwood
Spruce, Eastern, includes:
Black Spruce
Red Spruce
White Spruce
Spruce, Engelmann, includes
Engelmann Spruce
Blue Spruce
Spruce, Sitka
Tamarack
Pinus
Pinus
Pinus
Pinus
Pinus
Pinus
Pinus
phellos
coccinea
palustris
shumardii
rubra pagodaefolia
marilandica
laurifolia
texana
taeda
palustris
rigida
serotina
echinata
caribaea
lambertiana
Sequoia
sempervirens
Picea mariana
Picea rubra
Picea glauca
:
Picea engelmanni
Picea parryana
Picea sitchensis
Larix laricina
4. 25. 2. Limitation of Use.

Timbers of the following species shall not be used in exposed structures
without preservative treatment:
Red oaks; black gum; hemlock; shortleaf, loblolly, pond, Idaho white,
Ponderosa, and sugar pines ; and all spruces.
4. 25. 3. Grading of Yard Lumber.

Yard lumber shall be graded in accordance with grading rules, adopted
by regional associations of lumber manufacturers, which conform to the
basic provisions of the "American Lumber Standards."
Lumber ordered in multiple lengths shall be graded after being cut
to length.
4. 25. 4. Hewn and Round Timbers.
Hewn timbers used in place of sawed timbers
respects to the grading rules for structural timber.
shall conform
in all
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
234
Round timbers used in place of sawed timbers shall be of a quality

equal to that hereinafter specified for timber piles.
The effective size of
a round timber shall be considered the same as that of a square timber
having sectional dimensions equal to those of the inscribed square of the
round timber at the critical section.
Hewn and round timbers shall not be used except when specified or
Grading of Structural
4. 25. 5. General.
Timber
Structural timber used as a permanent part of a structure shall be

graded, for the grade selected, in accordance with the grading rules adopted
by the regional association of the lumber manufacturers which conform to
the basic provisions of the "American Lumber Standards."
( a)
Grade of Timber.
The grade to be used shall be as specified in article
modified in the special provisions or as shown on the plans.
(b)
as
shall
be
Grading Rules.
Commercial
In referring
stipulated
or
2. 20. 1
to
commercial
grading
rules the following
(1) The name of the association.

(2) The year of issue of the grading rules referred to.
(3) The paragraph number.
(4) The stress grade selected.
(5) The species.
(6) Whether rough, dressed or extent of dressing.
(usually special grade).
(7) Square edge, if wane is not permitted
(8) Any heartwood requirements
(refer to article 4. 25. 6).
The material supplied according to the Commercial Grading Rules

shall be of equal or greater stress value than the stress grade specified.
4. 25. 6. General
Requirements.
no heartwood requirement
for timber that is to be
pressure treated and the amount of sapwood shall not be limited.
It is generally considered advisable to specify a minimum heartwood
requirement for untreated structural timbers.
Also it is considered advis
If
able to specify sidecut material for stringers, floor beams and caps.
either of these provisions are adopted, definite requirements
shall be
stipulated in the special provisions or on the plans.
There shall
be
4. 25. 7. General.
Timber Piles
Timber piles which will be below water level at all times may be of
any species of wood which will satisfactorily withstand driving.
In untreated piling for use in exposed work, the diameter of the
heartwood at the butt shall be not less than $io of the required diameter
of the piles.
4. 25. 8. Quality.
All piling shall be cut from sound trees and shall be free from any
defects which might impair their strength or durability.
Pieces showing
decay or attack by grubs, worms or borers will not be accepted. Fire-killed
MATERIALS
235
will
be accepted provided the sapwood has not been charred.

Piling
no unsound knots.
Sound knots will be permitted provided
the diameter of the knot does not exceed 4 inches or % of the diameter
of the stick at the point where it occurs. Any defects or combination of
defects which will impair the strength of the pile more than the maximum
allowable knot shall not be permitted.
The butts shall be sawed square,
and the tips shall be sawed square or tapered to a point not less than
4 inches in diameter, as directed by the engineer.
Unless otherwise specified, all piles shall be peeled by removing all of
the rough bark and at least 80 per cent of the inner bark. No strip of
inner bark remaining on the stick shall be over % inch wide and there
shall be at least 1 inch of clean wood surface between any two such strips.
Not less than 80 per cent of the surface of any circumference shall be
clean wood.
Piles shall be cut above the ground swell and shall taper from butt to
tip. A line drawn from the center of the tip to the center of the butt shall
not fall outside of the center of the pile at any point more than 1 per cent
of the length of the pile. In short bends, the distance from the center of
the pile to a line stretched from the center of the pile above the bend to
the center of the pile below the bend shall not exceed 4 per cent of the
length of the bend or a maximum of 2% inches. All knots shall be trimmed
close to the body of the pile.
trees
shall contain
4. 25. 9. Dimensions.
Round piles shall have a minimum

the bark, as follows:
Length of pile
Less than 40 feet
40 to 60 feet
Over 60 feet
diameter
at the tip, measured under
Tip diameter
8
7
6
inches
inches
inches
The minimum diameter of piles at a section 3 feet from the butt,

measured under the bark, shall be as follows:
Diameter in inches
All other
Douglas fir,
species
southern yellow pine
Length of pile
11
11
20 feet and under
12
21 to 30 feet
12
13
31 to 40 feet
12
14
13
Over 40 feet
The diameter of the pile at the butt shall not exceed 20 inches. The
diameter of a pile in cases where the tree is not exactly round shall be
determined either by measuring the circumference and dividing the number
of inches by 3.14, or by taking the average of the maximum and minimum
diameters at the location specified.
Square piles shall have the dimensions shown on the plans.
SECTION
4. 26. 1. Preservatives.
26 Timber Preservatives
Timber preservatives
shall conform to the Specification for Timber
Preservatives of the A. A. S. H. O. Specifications for Highway Materials,
Designation: M 133-42.
The type of preservative furnished shall be in accordance with that
specified in the special provisions or as noted on the plans.
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
236
4. 27. 1. General.
SECTION 27 Timber Connectors
Reference is made to article 2. 20. 2, Timber Connectors.

Connectors
treated timber structures, except those of malleable iron, shall be
galvanized in accordance with A. S. T. M. Designation: A 123-47.
for
4. 27. 2. Split Ring Connectors.
Split rings of 2% -inch inside diameter, 4-inch inside diameter and

6-inch inside diameter shall be manufactured from hot rolled, low-carbon
for Carbonsteel conforming to A. S. T. M. Standard Specifications
Steel Blooms, Billets, and Slabs for forgings, Designation: A 273-47T,
Grade 1015.
Each ring shall form a closed true circle with an outside
cylindrical surface parallel to the axis of the ring. The inside surface,
except for the 6-inch ring, shall be beveled from the median line toward
to
the edges. It shall be cut through in one place in its circumference
form a tongue and slot.
Connector grooves in timber shall be cut concentric
and shall be of the following dimensions:
with the bolt hole
2% -inch split-rings inside diameter, 2.56 inches; width of groove,

inch; depth of groove, 0.37 inch.
For 4-inch split-rings inside diameter, 4.08 inches; width of groove,
For 6-inch split-rings inside diameter, 6.12 inches; width of groove,
For
0.18
0.21
0.27
4. 27. 3. Tooth-Ring Connectors.
Toothed-ring timber connectors shall be stamped cold from U. S.

Standard 16-gage hot rolled sheet steel conforming to A. S. T. M. Standard
Specifications for Carbon-Steel Blooms, Billets, and Slabs for forgings, Des
ignation: A 273-47T, Grade 1015, and shall be bent cold to form a circular,
corrugated, sharp-toothed band and circle and shall be parallel to the axis
of the ring. The central band shall be welded to fully develop the strength
of the band. All sizes, 2-inch, 2% -inch, 3% -inch and 4-inch diameters, shall
have an over-all depth of .94 inch and a depth of fillet of .25 inch.
4. 27. 4. Shear Plate Connectors.
Pressed Steel Type. Pressed steel shear-plates of 2% -inch diameter
shall be manufactured from mild steel conforming to A. S. T. M. Standard
Specifications for Carbon-Steel Blooms, Billets, and Slabs for forgings, Des
ignation: A 273-47T, Grade 1015. Each plate shall be a true circle with a
flange around the edge, extending at right angles to the face of the plate
and extending from one face only, the plate portion having a central bolt
hole and two small perforations on opposite sides of the hole and midway
from the center and circumference.
Malleable Iron Type. Malleable iron shear-plates of 4-inch diameter
shall be manufactured according to A. A. S. H. O. M 106-35 (A. S. T. M.
A 47-47), Grade No. 35018, for malleable iron castings. Each casting shall
consist of a perforated round plate with a flange around the edge extending
at right angles to the face of the plate and projecting from one face only,
the plate portion having a central bolt hole reamed to size with an integral
hub concentric to the bolt hole and extending from the same face as the
flange.
MATERIALS
4.27.5,
Clan-Plate
237
Connectors.
Claw-plate timber connectors of 2% -inch, 3% -inch and 4-inch diameters,

shall be malleable iron castings, manufactured acording to A. A. S. H. O.
M 106-35 (A. S. T. M. A. 47-47), Grade No. 35018. Each claw-plate shall con
sist of a perforated circular flanged plate with three-sided teeth arranged
about the perimeter of one face. The male plate shall have integral cylin
drical hubs on both faces concentric to a bolt hole through the center of the
plate. The female plate shall be flat on the side opposite the teeth but shall
have an integral cylindrical hub concentric to the central bolt hole and on
the face with the teeth.
4. 27. 6. Spike-Grid Connectors.
Spike-grid timber connectors shall be manufactured according to

A. A. S. H. O. M. 106-35 (A. S. T. M. A. 47-47), Grade No. 35018, for
malleable iron castings.
They shall consist of four rows of opposing spikes
forming a 4%-inch square grid with 16 teeth which are held in place by
Fillets for the fiat grid in cross section shall be diamond shaped.
fillets.
Fillets for the single and double curve grids shall be increased in depth
to allow for curvature and shall maintain a thickness between the sloping
faces of the fillets equal to the width of the fillet.
APPENDIX
Loading H 15-44
Table of Maximum Moments, Shears and Reactions
Simple
Spans, One Lane
Spans in feet; moments in thousands of foot-pounds; shears and reac

tions in thousands of pounds.
reduction
for loading of
These values are subject to specification
multiple lanes.
Impact not included.
End shear
Span
1...
2...
8...
4...
5...
Moment
6.0 (b)
12.0 (b)
18.0 (b)
24.0 (b)
30.0 (b)
End shear
and end
Span
reaction (a)
24.0 (b)
24.0 (b)
24.0 (b)
24.0 (b)
24.0 (b)
42
44
46
48
50
Moment
274.4 (b)
289.3 (b)
304.3 (b)
319.2 (b)
334.2 (b)
and end
reaction (a)
29.6
30.1
80.5
81.0
81.5
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
36.0
42.0
48.0
54.0
60.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
52
54
56
58
60
349.1 (b)
364.1 (b)
379.1 (b)
397.6
418.5
82.0
32.5
82.9
88.4
88.9
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
66.0
72.0
78.0
84.0
90.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.4
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
62.
64.
66.
68.
70.
439.9
461.8
484.1
506.9
530.3
34.4
84.9
85.3
85.8
86.3
16
17
18
19
20
96.0
102.0
108.0
114.0
120.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
24.8
25.1
25.3
25.6
25.8
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
75.
80.
85.
90.
95.
590.6
654.0
720.4
789.8
862.1
87.5
88.7
89.9
41.1
42.3
21
22
23
24
25
126.0
132.0
138.0
144.0
150.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
26.0
26.2
26.3
26.5
26.6
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
100
110
120
130
140
937.5
1,097.3
1,269.0
1,452.8
1,648.5
43.5
45.9
48.3
50.7
58.1
26
27
28
29
30
156.0
162.7
170.1
177.5
185.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
26.8
26.9
27.0
27.1
27.2
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
150
160
170
180
190
1,856.3
2,076.0
2,307.8
2,551.5
2.807.3
55.5
57.9
60.3
62.7
65.1
31
32
83
34
35
192.4
199.8
207.3
214.7
222.2
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
27.3 (b)
27.4 (b)
27.5 (b)
27.7
27.S
200
220
240
260
280
3,075.0
3,646.5
4,266.0
4,933.5
5,649.0
67.5
72.3
77.1
81.9
86.7
36
37
38
39
40
229.6
237.1
244.5
252.0
259.5
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
28.1
28.4
28.6
28.9
29.1
300
6,412.5
91.5
placed
at the support.
(a) Concentrated load is considered
stipulated for shear.
(b) Maximum value determined by Standard Truck Loading.
Otherwise the Standard Lane Loading governs.
238
Loads
used
are those
APPENDIX "A"
239
Loading H 20-44
Table of Maximum Moments, Shears and Reactions Simple Spans, One Lane
reduction
for loading of
multiple lanes.
End shear
End shear
Span
1...
2...
S...
4...
5...
Moment
8.0 (b)
16.0 (b)
24.0 (b)
22.0 (b)
40.0 (b)
and end
reaction (a)
82.0 (b)
32.0 (b)
32.0 (b)
32.0 (b)
82.0 (b)
Span
42
44
46
48
50
Moment
865.9 (b)
385.8 (b)
405.7 (b)
425.6 (b)
445.6 (b)
and end
reaction (a)
39.4
40.1
40.7
41.4
42.0
6.
7.
8.
>.
10.
48.0
56.0
64.0
72.0
80.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
32.0
32.0
32.0
32.0
82.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
52
54
56
58
60
465.5 (b)
485.5 (b)
505.4 (b)
530.1
558.0
42.6
48.1
4S.9
44.6
45.2
11
12
18
14
15
88.0
96.0
104.0
112.0
120.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
32.0
82.0
32.0
32.0
32.5
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
62.
64.
66.
68.
70.
586.5
615.7
645.5
675.9
707.0
45.8
46.5
47.1
47.8
48.4
16
17
18
19
20
128.0
186.0
144.0
152.0
160.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
83.0
83.4
33.8
84.1
34.4
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
75
80
85
90
95
787.5
872.0
960.5
1,053.0
1,149.5
50.0
51.6
58.2
54.8
56.4
21
22
28
24
25
168.0
176.0
184.0
192.0
200.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
34.7
34.9
35.1
85.3
35.5
(b)
(b)
(b)
r(b)
i
(b)
100
110
120
130
140
1,250.0
1,463.0
1,692.0
1,937.0
2,198.0
58.0
61.2
64.4
67.6
70.8
26
27
28
29
SO
208.0
216.9
226.8
286.7
246.6
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
35.7
35.9
36.0
36.1
36.3
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
150
160
170
180
190
2,475.0
2,768.0
8,077.0
8,402.0
8.743.0
74.0
77.2
80.4
8S.6
86.8
21
82
88
84
85
256.E
266.5
276.4
286.8
296.2
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
86.4 (b)
86.5 (b)
86.6 (b)
86.9
200
220
240
260
280
4,100.0
4,862.0
5,688.0
6,578.0
7,532.0
90.0
96.4
102.8
109.2
115.6
86
87
88
29
40
806.2
816.1
826.1
886.0
846.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
87.5
87.8
88.2
88.5
88.8
800.
8,550.0
122.0
87J
...
placed
at the support.
(a) Concentrated load ie considered
Loading.
by
Standard
Truck
(b) Maximum value determined
Otherwise the Standard Lane Loading: governs.
Loads
used
are
those
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
240
Loading H 15-S 12-44

Table of Maximum Moments, Shears and Reactions
Simple
Spans, One Lane

reduction
for loading of
multiple lanes.
End shear
Span
1.
..
2...
S...
4...
5...
Moment
6.0 (b)
12.0 (b)
18.0 (b)
24.0 (b)
80.0 (b)
and end
reaction (a)
24.0 (b)
24.0 (b)
24.0 (b)
24.0 (b)
24.0 (b)
End shear
Span
and end
42
44
46
48
50
Moment
864.0 (b)
8*0.7 (b)
417.4 (b)
444.1 (b)
470.9 (b)
reaction (a)
42.0 (b)
42.5 (b)
48.0 (b)
48.5 (b)
48.9 (b)
52
54
56
58
60
497.7
524.5
551.3
578.1
604.9
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
44.3
44.7
45.0
45.8
45.6
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.0
25.6
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
62
64
66
681.8
658.6
685.5
712.8
712.3
739.2
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
45.9
46.1
46.4
46.6
46.8
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
96.0
102.0
108.0
114.0
120.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
27.0
28.2
29.3
30.8
31.2
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
75
80
85
90
95
806.3
878.7
941.0
1,008.3
1,074.9
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
47.8
47.7
48.1
48.4
48.7
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
21
22
23
24
25
126.0
132.0
188.0
144.5
155.5
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
32.0
82.7
83.4
84.0
34.6
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
100
110
120
130
140
1,148.0
1,277.7
1,412.5
1,547.8
1,682.1
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
49.0 (b)
49.4 (b)
49.8 (b)
50.7
58.1
26
27
28
29
30
166.6
177.8
189.0
200.8
211.6
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
35.1
85.6
36.0
86.6
37.2
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
150
160
170
180
190
1,856.8
2,076.0
2.807.8
2,551.5
2,807.8
65.5
57.9
60.3
62.7
65.1
81
82
83
84
35
228.0
234.4
245.8
257.7
270.9
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
87.7
88.8
88.7
39.2
89.6
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
200
220
240
260
280
8,075.0
8,646.5
4,266.0
4.933.5
5,649.0
7J
72.8
77.1
81.9
86.7
86
284.2
297.5
310.7
324.0
337.4
(b)
(b)
(b)
40.0
40.4
40.7
41.1
41.4
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
800
6,412.5
91.1
10.
86.0
42.0
48.0
54.0
60.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
66.0
72.0
78.0
84.0
90.0
16
17
18
19
20
6.
7.
8.
9.
87...
88
89
40
<b)
<b)
(b)
(b)
placed
at the support.
Loads used are those
(a) Concentrated load is considered
by Standard Truck Loading:
(one H-S truck).
Otherwise the Standard Lane Loading: governs.
APPENDIX "A"
Loading H 20-S
241
16-44
Table of Maximum Moments, Shear* and Reactions Simple Spans, One Lane
reduction
for loading of
multiple lanes.
Span
Moment
8.0 (b)
16.0 (b)
24.0 (b)
32.0 (b)
40.0 (b)
1...
2...
I...
4...
6...
End shear
and end
reaction (a)'
32.0 (b)
32.0 (b)
32.0 (b)
32.0 (b)
32.0 (b)
End shear
Span
42
44
46
48
50
Moment
485.3 (b)
520.9 (b)
556.5 (b)
592.1 (b)
627.9 (b)
and end
reaction (a)
6.0 (b)
56.7 (b)
57.3 (b)
58.0 (b)
58.5 (b)
48.0
56.0
64.0
72.0
80.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
32.0
32.0
32.0
32.0
32.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
52
54
56
58
60
668.6
699.3
785.1
770.8
806.5
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
59.1
59.6
60.0
60.4
60.8
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
88.0
96.0
104.0
112.0
120.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
32.0
32.0
32.0
32.0
34.1
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
62
64
66
68
70
842.4
878.1
914.0
949.7
985.6
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
61.2
61.5
61.9
62.1
62.4
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
128.0
136.0
144.0
152.0
160.0
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
36.0
87.7
39.1
40.4
41.6
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
75
80
85
90
95
1,075.1
1,164.9
1,254.7
1,344.4
1,433.2
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
68.1
68.6
64.1
64.5
64.9
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
168.0
176.0
184.0
192.7
207.4
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
42.7
43.6
44.5
45.3
46.1
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
100
110
120
180
140
1,524.0
1,703.6
1,883.3
2.063.1
2,242.8
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
65.3 (b)
65.9 (b)
66.4 (b)
67.6
70.S
222.2
237.0
252.0
267.0
282.1
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
46.8
47.4
48.0
48.8
49.6
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
150
160
170
180
190
2,475.1
2,768.0
3,077.1
3,402.0
8,743.1
74.0
81
32
38
84
85
297.3
312.5
827.8
348.5
S61.2
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
50.3
51.0
51.6
52.2
52.8
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
200
220
240
260
280
4,100.0
4,862.0
5,688.0
6,578.0
7,582.0
90.0
6.4
102.8
109.2
115.6
36
87
38
39
378.9
896.6
414.3
432.1
449.8
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
53.3
53.8
54.3
64.8
55.2
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
(b)
300
8,550.0
122.0
6.
7.
8.
(.
10.
11
12
1S
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
..
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
.40
M>)
77J
80.4
88.6
86.8
placed
( a ) Concentrated load i: considered
at the support.
Loads used are
stipulated for ahear.
by Standard Truck Loading;
(one H-S truck).
Otherwise the Standard Lane Loading governs.
those
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
242
APPENDIX "B"
Formulas for Steel Columns*
The permissible average unit
stress for steel columns shall be:
f, =
v1
(.25
B Cosec
(A)
P=load parallel to the axis of the member in lbs.
= gross cross-sectional area of column in sq. in.

=
yield point stress in tension,
f>
= 33000 lbs. per sq. in. for carbon steel.
=45000 lbs. per sq. in. for silicon steel.
= 55000 lbs. per sq. in. for nickel steel.
= 50,000 lbs. per sq. in. for low-alloy steel, thickness % inch and under.
=45,000 lbs. per sq. in. for low-alloy steel, thickness over % inch to
inch inclusive.
lbs. per sq. in. for low-alloy steel, thickness over 1 Yi inch to
inclusive.
t) = factor of safety based on yield point,
= 1.76 for carbon steel.
= 1.80 for silicon steel.
= 1.83 for nickel steel.
= 1.82 for low-alloy steel, thickness % inch and under.
= 1.80 for low-alloy steel, thickness % inch to 114 inch inclusive.
= 1.78 for low-alloy steel, thickness 1H inch to 2 inch inclusive.
c= distance from neutral axis to the extreme fiber in compression.
r= radius of gyration in the plane of bending
=40,000
~\
inch
radians
^lt~
L = 75%
E
of the total length of a column having riveted end connections.

= 87.5% of the total length of a column having pinned end connections.
= modulus of elasticity of steel
=29,000,000
a =
-â2-2a
lbs. per sq. in.

cos 0 + 1
When eB and es lie on the same side of the column axis, o is positive;
when on opposite sides, o is negative; i.e.
When +es = +eg, a = +1
When es=0, cc=0
When +es = eg, a = 1
=
eccentricity
of applied load at the end of column having the greater com
eg
puted moment, in inches.
es= eccentricity at opposite end.
:
68
* Refer also to the column formulas given in articles 3.4.2, 3.4.7 and 3.4.8.
** When the radius of gyration perpendicular to the plane of bending is less
than "r", the column shall be investigated for the case of a long column concen
trically loaded, having
a greater value of -
APPENDIX "B
For values of
L
-
equal to or less than I cos
-1\
j
243
rE^14V
the permissible
fs
25 4- e-^\
r2
fy
shall be determined from the formula:
A
1+.25
When the values of end moments are not computed but considered negli
gible in amount, a shall be assumed equal to +1.
a shall be assumed equal to +1 for a member subject to bending stresses
induced by the components of externally applied loads acting perpendicular to
its axis. For this case the general formula becomes:
(0,=
1+
.25
(eb+d)]
*
Sec^0
^.f&j-h^'
d deflection due to the transverse components of externally applied loads,

in inches.
I=moment of inertia of section about an axis perpendicular to the plane of
bending, in (inches)4.
4
M= moment due to the transverse components of externally applied loads,
in inch pounds.
Note: The value of

ness and unknown
0.25 in the above formulas provides for inherent crooked

eccentricity.
Permissible unit stresses, in accordance with the formulas A and B given

above, may be obtained from following graphs.
Graphs are provided for
carbon and silicon steels; pinned and riveted end conditions, and for values
of a= +1, 0, and 1.
The graphs for silicon steel are applicable also to low-alloy
steel, thickness over % inch to 1 14 inch inclusive.
Straight-line interpolation between a = +1 and 0, and between
may be used for intermediate values of eccentricity ratios.
a =0
and 1
When egc/r2=0, the top curve for a = +l shall be used.

The curves for
egc/r2 =0 in the graphs for a =0 and a = 1 are to be used for interpolating values
of fs between egc/r2=0 and egc/r2 = .l.
244
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
OZ
09
09
001
OZI
001
091
081
002
OZZ
02
Ofr
09
09
001
OZI
0l
091
OBI
003
OZZ
0*Z
9fZ
avmhoih saoama
HIGHWAY BRIDGES
248
APPENDIX C
TRUCK TRAIN AND EQUIVALENT LOADINGS-
1935 SPECIFICATIONS
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY OFFICIALS
o
o
o
o
o
f\J
,15 TON TRUCK
,20 TON TR
3 0' . I . 14'
14'
30'
14'
H-20-35
ill^TON TRUCK,
30'
30
14'
ill* TON TRUCK,
30'
H-15-35
30'
30'
LOADING
,15TON TRUCK,
TEL.
.15 TON TRUCK,
. .
,llaT0N TRUCK ,
I4'
30'
l4'
()
.. .
30'
LOADING
o
o
o
,7jT0N TRUCK.
14'
12
,10 TON TRUCK
30'
,7jf TON TRUCK,
D_
30'
H-IO-35 LOADING
TRUCK TRAIN LOADING
H-20-35
,7; TON TRUCK,
30'
LOADING
" "M ENT
'
-CONCENTRATED L0Ad{
[ 19,500 FOR SHE):ar
LINEAR FOOT OF LANE
^.UNIFORM LOAD 480-LBS.PER
H-15-35
l^-CONCENTRATED
ÛNIFORM
LOAD
LOADING
,000 FOR MOMENT
13/,000 FOR SHEAR
LOAD 320-LBS. PER LINEAR
H-IO-35
LOADING
EQUIVALENT LOADING
LANE WIDTH
FEET
FOOT OF LANE
INDEX
Abutment :
Design, general
Distribution of earth pressure
Drainage
General
Pile bents
Reinforcement for temperature
Wing walls
(See also Foundations and Substructures.)
Acceptance :
Pinal payment
No waiver of legal rights
Aggregate:
Bituminous carpet
Coarse, for concrete
Fine, for concrete
Rubble or cyclopean
Sand for mortar
Anchor Bolts and Anchorages 2.10.51, 3.5.2b, 3.6.43,
Angle of Repose (various materials)
Annulment of Contract
Appendixes :
Charts for, Appendix B
reinforced concrete tied
Permissible stresses,
columns, Appendix D
Tables of moments, shear and reactions for H 15,
H 20, H 15-S 12, H 20-S 16 loadings. App'x A
Truck train and equivalent loadings. App x C
for reference use.)
(1935 specifications
Arbitration, Board of
Arches :
Ashlar masonry
Concrete
Class of concrete
Drainage of fill
Expansion joints
Placing concrete
Reinforcement
Shape of ring
Spandrel walls
Surface finish
Waterproofing
General
Centering (see Centering and Falsework).
Drainage
Fill
Cores and backing

Headers and stretchers
251
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
5.
5.
5.
4.
8.
5.
5.
Page
3
2
3d
3a
5f
3b
3c
163
161
164
163
200
164
164
1. 9. 7
1. 7.12
24
18
2.24.22
4. 4. 1
4. 3. 1
4. 4. 2
4. 3. 2
3. 6.53
3. 4.16
1. 8. 8
117
212
212
212
212
.78, 161, 176, 177
155
21
242, 244
249
238, 239, 240, 241
248
1. 5.12
15
2. 6.15
64
2.
3.
3.
2.
3.
3.
3.
2.
3.
4. 4
7.1 1f
7.11c
4. 9
7. lid
7.11a
7.11b
4.23
7. lie
38
198
198
44
198
197
198
53
198
3.
2.
3.
2.
7.11f
1. 9
7. lie
7. 8
198
27
198
66
2.
2.
2.
2.
6.14
6. 1
6.13
6. 5
64
2.6.8, 2. 6.15
2.6.6, 2 . 6 . 7
62,64
Waterproofing
Rubble masonry
Sectional plate (see Sectional Plate Arches).
Ashlar Masonry :
Arches (see Arches)
Copings
Description
Dowels and cramps
Dressing stone
Laying
Article
61
64
61
62
Article
Laying stone
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
Concrete cores and backing

Face stone
General
Stone backing and cores
Leveling courses
2.6.2, 4.20.
2.6.2, 2. 6.
Material
Mortar and mixing
9
2 . 6 . 17
Payment conditions
Pointing
Resetting
Size of stone
Surface finish
Asphalt Mat (see Bridge Floors.)
Asphalt Paving Blocks :
Absorption test
Bridge wearing surface (see Bridge Floors).
Composition
General
Manufacture
Materials
Asphaltic cement
Inorganic dust
Mineral
6.10d
6.10b
6.10a
6.10c
6.11
aggregate
Physical characteristics
Asphalt Plank
2.
2.
2.
2.
6.16
6.12
6. 3
6. 4
4.23.
6c
4.23.
4.23.
4.23.
6b
4.23.
4.23.
4.23.
1
5
4
3
4 . 23 . 6
4.24.
2.5.1,2.5.6, 4. 5.
1.4.5, 1. 7 .
Backfill (see Excavation and Fill).

Bar Reinforcement
Barricades and Warning Signs
Bid right to reject
Bidder
Competency
Definition
Disqualification
Instructions to
Bituminous Carpet:
Asphalt
1.
3 .
1
1
!.
2.11
1. 1.1
1. 2.10
1 .
4.22.
4.22.
4
3
4.22.
4.22.
1
2
1.
Tar
(See also Bridge Floors.)

Bituminous Filler
Oil asphalt
Premoulded
Blast Protection
Board, Arbitration
Board, definition
Bracing:
Cofferdams
2 . 20 . 12,
Framed and pile bents
3 . 6 . 65,
Steel structures
Wooden truss spans .
Brick for Masonry
(See also Brick Masonry.)
Brick for Pavement :
Bridge wearing surface (see Bridge Floors).
Material
252
3. 1.14
1. 5.12
1. 1. 1
4.
I.
2 . 20 . 13
3 .
6.72
3 .
8 .
4.21.
4.21.
Article
Brick Masonry:
Construction
Copings, bridge seats, backwalls
Description
Material
Mortar
2. 9.
Page
68
69
68
2. 9. 4
2.9.2,4.21.1,
Payment conditions
Railings (see Railings and Parapets).
Bridge:
Clearances, roadway
Highway loadings (see Loads)
Bridge Floors:
Asphalt plank
Concrete
Class of
Curing
Drainage
Expansion joints
Placing concrete
Placing reinforcement
Surface finish
Laminated or strip, general
Nonskid
Plank-
Details
Design
Drainage
Fire stops
General
Materials
Retaining pieces
Wheel guards
Steel grid
Computed weight
Construction
Arrangement of sections
Concrete filler
Connection to supports
Field assembly
General
Materials
2. 9.
68,227
2. 9.
2
2
5
3. 1. 8
3. 2. 5
122
129
4.24.
232
4.21.
2 .
9 .
2. 4. 4
2. 4.21
3. 1.11
2.4.22, 3. 7. 5
2. 4. 9a, b,
2. 5. 7
2.4.23, 2. 4.31
2.20.18
3. 1.13
2.20.17
3. 8. 7d
3. 8. 7g
3. 8. 8
2.20.17
2.20.17
3. 8. 7e
3. 8. 7f
2.10.67g
2.12.
2.12.
2.12.
2.12.
2.12.
2.12.
Painting
3
9
6
5
1
2
2.12.10
Provision for camber
2.12. 4
Repairing damaged galvanized coatings 2 . 12 . 8
Welding
2.12. 7
3. 3. 5
Design, distribution, moments
Materials
Concrete filler
4.15. 3
Protective treatment
4.15. 2
Steel
4.15. 1
Measurement and payment
2.12.11
Wearing surfaces
3. 2. 2
Allowance for
Asphalt block
2.24.15
General requirement
2.24.19
Laying
Materials
2.24.16
2.24.21
Mortar bed
2.24.18
2.24.20
Opening to traffic
2.24.17
Preparation to subfloor
253
68
69
38
52
124
c, d
52,192
4447
59
53,56
103
124
103
202
202
202
103
103
202
202
82
83
84
83
83
83
83
84
83
84
84
143
218
217
217
85
127
116
116
116
117
116
117
116
Article
Bituminous carpet
Aggregate
Asphalt mat surface, construction
Mixed method
Prime coat
Seal coat
Second coat
Penetration method
Prime coat
Second coat
2.24.23,4.22.3,
Materials
Opening to traffic
Preparation of subfloor
Concrete subfloor
Wood subfloor
Tar mat surface
Construction
Prime coat
Seal coat
Second coat
Brick-
Asphalt filler
Application
Bedding course, placing
General requirements
2.24.23
117
2.24.26a
2.24.26c
2.24.26b
119
119
119
2.24.27a
2.24.27b
120
120
4.22.
2.24.29
Materials
Opening to traffic
Preparation of subfloor
Rolling the brick
Sand cement bed
Surface dressing
Testing the surface
Concrete
Description
Broken Stone for Concrete
Bronze Bearing and Expansion Plates :
Bronze sliding expansion bearings
Bronze plates
Copper-alloy plates
General
Material

Placing
120
120
2.24.24b
2.24.24a
118
117
2.24.25
118
118
118
118
2.24.25a
2.24.25b
2.24.25c
2.24.
2.24.
2.24.
2.24.4, 4.21.
7
3
8
1
2.24.14
2.24.13
2.24.
2.24.
2.24.
9
6
2.24.12
2.24.10
2.24.
2.24.
4. 4.
1
2
2
3. 6.48
2.11.
2.11.
2.11.
2.11.2, 4.12.
2.11.
2.11.
4
1
113,227
115
115
113
115
114
115
115
113
113
212
177
82
82
82
82,216
82
82
148
3. 4. 9
3. 2.17
3. 5. 4d
Camber :
Diagram required
Steel girders
Steel trusses
Timber trusses
Cantilever Slabs
2.10.13
3. 6.85
3. 6.90
3. 8. 6f
3. 3. 2f
254
115
114
113
114
Buoyancy
Buttresses and Counterforts
stresses
....117,228,228
2.24.28
2.24.11
Laying
Unit
Page
137
165
71
183
184
201
141
Castings
Article
:
Gray iron
Cleaning
Workmanship and finish
Malleable
Steel (see Steel, Castings).
Unit
stresses
(see Stresses,
4.10.
4.10.
4.10.
4.11.
Page
215
216
216
216
1
3
2
1
Unit).
Cement:
Sampling and testing
Types I, II, III, IV and V
2.4.17,
Centering and Falsework
Removal of falsework, forms and housing
Channel of Stream:
Erosion
Openings
Preservation
Claims :
1.7.7,
Contractor's responsibility, damages
Disputed
Cleaning Up
Clearance Diagrams
Cofferdams and Cribs:
Construction
Construction plans
General
Preservation of channel
Protection of concrete
Pumping
Removal
(See also Concrete Cribbing; Timber Cribbing.)
Cold Weather:
Concrete construction
Painting
Commission :
Appointment of arbitration board
Definition
Personal liability
Composite Beams :
Deflection
Effective flange width
General assumptions
Shear
Shear devices
Steel-concrete
Stresses
Timber-concrete
Concrete :
Bearing piles (see Pile Concrete).
Bonding
Cement for
Classes of
Classification and proportioning
Coarse aggregate
Cold weather construction.. . .2. 3. 13c, 2.3. 13g,
Consistency
Construction joints
Bonding
General
Curing
2.3.13g,
Cyclopean or rubble
Depositing under water
Discontinuance of placing
255
4. 1. 2
4. 1. 1
2.10.49
2. 4.19
2. 1.
3. 1.
2. 1.
2 . 1 . 5c
2. 1. 5a
2.1.2
2. 1. 5b
2. 1. 6
2. 1. 5d
2. 4.20
2.14.
51
25
121
25
2
3
2
1. 7.10
1. 5.11
1. 4. 8
Figs. 1,2
2. 1.
211
211
50, 78
1. 5.12
1. 1. 1
1. 7.11
17,
18
14
12
121, 122, 123, 125
26
26
26
25
26
26
26
52
87
15
6
18
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
9. 5
9. 2
9. 1
9. 4
9. 6
9. 1
9. 3
9. 1
204
203
203
203
204
203
203
203
2.
4.
2.
2.
4.
4.13b
1. 1
4. 4
4. 5
4. 1
49
211
38
2.4.20
2. 4.
2. 4.13b
2. 4.13a
2. 4.21
2 . 4.14
2. 4.12
2. 4. 9a
38-41
212
33,34,52
41
49
49
34,52
49
48
44-46
Arrte
2. 4.22
expansion joints in
Expansion and fixed joints and bearings
Bearing devices
Filled joints
Open joints
Steel joints
Water stops
Exposed to alkali soil or watpr
Exposed to sea water .
Fine
aggregate
Finishing surfaces
Class 1, Ordinary
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Floating
Longitudinal floating
Straightedging
Striking off
Transverse floating
General
Forms
Handling ;and placing
Arche
hea..
Culverts
Girders, slabs and columns
General
Measuring materials
2. 4. 9d
4. 9b
4. 9c
4. 9a
4.32
2. 4. 7
2.
2.
2.
2.
Mixing
Delivery
General.
Hand mixing
Mixing at site
Partial mixing at central plant
Plant mix
Re tempering
Time of hauling and placing mixed concrete .
Truck mixing
Pneumatic placing
Pneumatically applied mortar
Bond
2. 4. 8h
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
4.
8a
4.
4.
8d
8e
8i
4. 8g
4. 8b
4.
2 . 4 . 8f
2. 4. 8c
2. 4.10
2. 4. Se
2. 4.31k
2. 4.31h
2. 4.31a
2. 4.31i
2. 4.31d
2. 4.31f
2. 4.31e
2. 4.31b
2. 4.31g
2. 4.31c
2. 4.11
2. 4. 8i
2.2.1,2. 2. 3
2. 4. 2
2. 4.23
curing
Forms
General
Joints
Mixing
. .
4.24
4.25
4.26
4.27
4.28
2. 4.29f
2. 4.29b
2. 4.29c
2. 4.29e
2. 4.29a
2. 4.29d
2. 4.23
2.4.9,2.4.18,2. 4.19
.....
Nozzle position
Nozzle velocity
Proportions
Rebound sand
Water content
Pumping
Re tempering
Sheet piles
Storage of materials
Surface finish
4.22e
4.22b
4.22a
4.22c
4.22d
4.16
2. 4.15
*- 3- 1
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2, Rubbed
3, Tooled
4, Sand blasted
5, Wire brushed
6, Floated
Final finishing
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
256
Article
Sidewalk
2. 4.30
(See also Finishing Surfaces.)
Water for
4. 2. 1
2.3.13,2. 4.20
Weather protection
Weighing equipment
2. 4. 7
Concrete Arches (see Arches Concrete).
Concrete Cribbing:
Construction
2.16. 2
General
2.16. 1
2.16. 3
Concrete Culverts Monolithic :
Class of concrete
2. 4. 4
Footings
3 . 5 . 2
Inverts, aprons, curtain walls
3. 5. 2
Placing concrete
2 . 4 . 9b
Surface finish
2. 4.23
Concrete Railings (see Railings and Parapets).
Concrete Reinforcement :
Anchorage
3. 7. 9d
Bar mat
2. 5. 6
Cleaning
2. 5. 7
Design
Sec. 7
Fabrication
2. 5. 4
Formulas
3. 7. 3
Lapping
2. 5. 9
2.5.1,4. 5. 1
Material
Mesh
2. 5. 5
2.5.11,2. 5.12
Placing and fastening
2. 5. 7
,
Protection of
2 . 5 . 3
Splices
2. 5. 8
Stirrups
3. 7. 9
Structural shapes
4. 5. 4
Substitutions
2. 5.10
Substructure and retaining wall. .. .3.5.2, 3.5.3,3. 5. 4
(See also Reinforcement, Concrete.)
Concrete Slabs and Girders :
(See also Slabs.)
Camber
2. 4.17
Class of concrete
2. 4. 4
Drainage
3. 1.11
Placing concrete
2 . 4 . 9c
Surface finish
2. 4.23
Waterproofing
Sec. 17
Concrete Structures :
Arches (see Arches Concrete).
Cold weather construction
2. 4.20
Cribbing (see Concrete Cribbing).
Culverts (see Concrete Culverts).
Design
Allowable stresses
Bearing on bridge seats
3. 4.11f
Bond on piles (in seals)
3. 4. lie
Columns
3. 4.11g
Flexure
3. 4.11c
General
3. 4.11b
Shear
3. 4. lid
Standard notations and assumptions. . . 3. 4.11a
Arches
Drainage of fill
3. 7.11f
Expansion joints
3. 7.11c
257
Article
Page
3. 7. lid
Reinforcement
3. 7.11a
Shape of ring
3. 7.11b
Spandrel walls
3. 7. lie
Waterproofing
3. 9. 1
Beams (Composite)
Columns
3. 7.10b
Columns with lateral ties
3. 7.10d
Flexure and direct stress
3. 7.10a
General
3. 7.10c
Spiral columns
3. 4.11g
Stresses, Appendix D
3. 7. 6d
Diaphragms
2.4.22, 3 . 7 . 5
Expansion joints
Formulas
3. 7. 3d
Columns with lateral ties
Flexure of rectangular reinforced con
3. 7. 3a
crete beams and slabs
Flexure of reinforced concrete T-beams 3. 7. 3b
3. 7. 3c
Shear, bond and web reinforcement
3. 7. 3e
Spiral columns
3.4.11b, 3. 7. 1
General assumptions
3. 3. 2
Moments in floor slabs
Reinforcement
3. 7. 7d
Anchorage
3. 7. 8
Compression in beams
3. 7.76b
Covering
3. 7. 7e
Extension
3 . 7 . 7f
Maximum size
3. 7. 7a
Spacing
3. 7. 7c
Splicing
Reinforcement web
3. 7. 9d
Anchorage
3. 7. 9b
Bent-up bars
3. 7. 9c
Vertical stirrups
3.3.2i, 3. 7. 4
Span lengths
3.4.11a, 3. 7. 2
Standard notations
T-Beams
Unit
3.
3.
3.
3.
Diaphragms
Effective flange width
Isolated beams
Shear
stresses
(see Stresses).
Viaduct bents and towers

Concrete Substructures :
Class of concrete
Construction joints
3.2.18,
Drainage
Foundation protection
Placing concrete
Surface finish
Concrete Viaducts :
Bents and towers
Class of concrete
Column forms
Placing concrete
Concrete Wearing Surfaces (see Bridge Floors).
2.20.2,3.4.14,3.8.4,
Connectors
Construction :
Acceptance no waiver, legal rights
Defective and unauthorized
Final work at site
258
7.
7.
7.
7.
6d
6a
6c
6b
198
197
198
198
203
196
196
195
196
150
193
52,192
192
188
189
190
192
149,186
139
193
194
193
193
194
193
193
195
195
195
142,192
148,187
193
192
193
192
3. 7.12
198
4. 4
38
49
2 .
2. 4.13
3. 5. 4g
3. 5. 2
2 . 4.
2. 4.23
3. 7.12
2 .
4. 4
2. 4.18
2. 4. 9c
4.27.
1. 7.12
1. 5. 9
1. 4. 8
137,165
161
44
53
198
38
50
46
.99,152,199,236
18
14
12
Article
Limitation of (operations
1.
1.
Non-completion, contract time

Notice of beginning of work
Prosecution of
Quantities, measurement
Stakes
Superintendence
Temporary suspension
Workmen and equipment
Contract :
Annulment
Approval
Arbitration board
Award
Bond, definition
Bond, requirements
Compensation for delays
Definition
Disputed claims
Execution
Extension, contract time
Extra work
Failure to complete on time
Failure to execute
8.
2
2 . 10 . 39
1. 8 . 2
1. 9. 1
1.5.5,
1.
1.
1.
1.
8.
8.
8.
5.
1.
8.
1.
1.
1.
1.
6
4
5
4
3. 6
1. 5.12
1. 3. 2
1.
1. 3. 4
1. 8.10
1.4.8,
Final acceptance
Final payment
Included documents
Omitted terms
Prosecution and progress
1.4.3,
Quantity changes
Quantity measurements
Special work
'. . .
Subletting or assignment
Termination
Time extension
Contract Bond, requirement of
Contractor :
Claim for extras
Compensation for delays
1.5.5,1.8.2,
Cooperation of
Definition
May use certain materials
Notice of beginning of work
Responsibility for construction stakes
1.4.5, 1.7.7,
Responsibility for damages
Responsibility for temporary constructions
1.7.7,
Responsibility for work
Sub-contractor, definition
1.7.7,
Termination of responsibility
Working drawings
Copper Alloy Bearing and Expansion Plates :
Materials
Placing
Unit
8.
stresses
Counterforts and Buttresses

County, definition
Cribs (see Cofferdams and Cribs; also Timber
Cribbing).
Crossings, temporary
259
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
5.11
3. 5
8. 6
4. 4
8. 7
3. 7
1. 9. 7
1 . 9. 7
1.
1 .
1. 9.
1. 8.
1. 9.
1. 9.
1- 4.
1.
8 .
1
5
2
3
1
2
1
9
1. 8.
1 . 8. 6
1.
3 .
5.11
8.10
2.10.40
1.
1.
1.
it
1.
4.
1
7
2 . 10 . 38
1. 5. 6
1. 7. 9
1. 4. 5
1. 7.10
1. 8.
5.
9
2
4.12.
2.11.
2
6
1.
2.11.
3. 4.
5
6
3 .
5.
4d
1.
1.
1. 4.
Culverts :
Concrete (see Concrete Culverts, Monolithic).
Foundations
Length
Loads on :
Weight of earth
Weight on rigid culverts
Size of waterway
3.2.11,
Curbs, Safety
2.20.19,3.1.9,
Curbs and Wheel Guards
Current, force of
Page
Article
3. 5.
3. 1.
161
122
3. 1. 5
3. 1. 9
3. 8. 7f
3 .
2 .
1. 7.
2.18.
2.18.
2.18.
2.18.
2.18.
4
2
1.5.7, 1. 5.
128
128
122
134,122
....104,122,202
137
D
Damage, responsibility
Dampproofing :
Application
General
Materials
Preparation of surface
Dead Load (see Loads Dead Load).
Defective Workmanship
Definition of Terms
Deflection, steel beams and girders
Delivery of Materials
Department, definition
Depressed Roadways
Clearance between walls
Curbs, minimum width
Width between curbs
Design, General Features:
Analysis (Rational Acceptable).
Blast protection
Channel openings
Classes of loadings
Clearances
Culvert, length
Culvert, size
Curbs and safety curbs
Depressed roadways
Drainage, roadway .. .'
Floor
1.4.5,1.7.7,
5
3
1. 1. 1
3. 6.10
2.10.47
1. 1. 1
surfaces
13,14
6-8
168
78
6
126
126
126
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
1.14
1. 3
2. 5
1. 8
1. 6
1. 5
1. 9
1.17
1.11
1.13
124
121
129
122
122
122
122
126
124
124
1. 4
121
25
124
122
124
125
126
3.
2.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
(see Stresses).
97
97
97
100
97
3. 1.17
3. 1.17
3. 1.17
3 .
Loads (see Loads).

Pier spacing and location
Preservation of channel
Railings
Roadway and sidewalk widths
Superelevation
Tunnels
Underpasses
Unit stresses
Utilities
11,17,18
1.2
1.10
1. 7
1.12
1.16
1.18
3. 1.15
125
Waterway area
3. 1. 1
121
Waterway restricted
3. 1.2
121
Detours, construction and maintenance
1. 4. 5
11
Disqualification of Bidders
1 . 2.10
9
Distribution of Loads (see Loads).
Drainage of Structures 2.6.15,2.7.8,3.1.11,3.2.18,3.
5. 4g ..64,66,124,137
3.7.11f, 3. 8. 7g ....165,198,202
260
Article
Drawings :
Contractor's
Deviation from
Engineer's approval
1.
1.
1.
5.
5.
5.
E
Earth Pressure :
3. 4.16
Angle of repose
3. 2.18
Pressure
Engineer :
1. 9 . 7
Acceptance by
1. 5. 8
Access to work
1.5.1, 1.8.2
Authority of
1. 1. 1
Definition
1. 9. 1
Measurement of quantities
1. 7.11
Personal liability
1. 5. 2
Plans and working drawings
1. 7. 7
Precautions for public safety
1. 1. 1
Resident, definition
1. 5. 6
Stakes for construction uses
1. 8 . 4
Equipment, adequacy of
Erosion Protection:
3. 5. la
Piles
2.15.1, 2.15.11
Riprap
Estimate :
1. 2 . 2
Interpretation of
1. 4. 3
Quantities
Excavation and Fill :
2. 1. 9
Arches, spandrel filled
Backfill-
.
Construction
2.1.8,
Drainage
Materials
Cofferdams and cribs
Construction
Pumping
Removal
Sheet piles
Embankment
Approach
Construction
Excavation
Backfill
Classification
Cofferdam and crib protection
Foundation, preparation
Inspection
Existing Bridges, rating of :
General
Inventory
Operating
(See also Rating of Existing Bridges.)
1 . 4.. 6,
Existing Structures
Expansion Joints:
Bituminous
2.4.22,
Bridge floor
Bridge railing
2.4.22,
Concrete structures
261
2. 1.
3. 7.
8
1
If
2. 1. 8
2. 1.
2. 1.
2. 1.
5
6
5
Sec. 2
1.10
2. 1.10
2. 1.12
2 .
2. 1.
2 .
1.11
1. 5
1. 4
1. 7
2.
2.
2.
2. 1.12
3.12.
3.12.
3.12.
1
2
3
2 . 10 . 58
4.22.
3. 6.64
2.13.11
3. 7. 5
Article
Extra Work
Eyebars:
2 . 10 . 32,
Annealing and annealing record
3.6.93,3.6.94,
Design
Fabrication
Full size test
2.10.59,
Payment for full size tests
3.8.6,4.6.8,
Physical requirements
Test bars and testing
1. 4. 4
4 . 6.13
3. 8. 6
2.10.31
4. 6. 9
4. 6.14
4. 6.12
4. 6.10
Fabrication of Steel Structures :

(Riveted unless otherwise specified)
Falsework and Centering (see Centering and
Falsework).
Federal Participation
Fill (see Excavation and Fill).
Final Inspection
Fire Stops
Flame Cleaning
Flame Cutting
Floors (see Bridge Floors).
Footings (see Foundations and Substructures).
Forgings, Steel (see Steel Forgings).
Forms for Concrete (see Concrete).
Foundations :
Excavation
Falsework support
2.3.3,3.4.17,
Piles
Timber cribbing
Foundations and Substructures ;
Abutments (see Abutments).
Anchor bolts
Anchorage
Bearing power of soils
Bearing plates
Cofferdams
Concrete and concrete placing
Classes of concrete
Construction joints
Placing concrete
Surf ace finishes
2.1.3,
Depth below soil surface
Distribution of pressure
2.1.8,
Drainage
Earth
pressure
Angles of repose
Pressure
Excavation
Footings
Anchorage
Depth
Internal stresses in spread footings
Piles
Sec. 3,
Preparation of foundation
Protection against erosion
Reinforcement
Spread footings
Transfer of stress from verical reinforcement .
Ice breakers
262
2 . 10 .
1.
7 . 4
1. 5.10
3. 8. 8
2.14.10d
2.10.22
2. 1. 1
2. 4.17
3. 5. 1
Sec. 22
2.10.51
3. 5. 2b
3. 4.15
2 . 10 . 51
2. 1.
2. 4. 4
2. 4.13
2.
2.
3.
3.
3.
4. 9
4.23
5. 2a
5. 2c
5. 3d
3. 4.16
3. 2.18
2. 1. 4
3. 5. 2b
3. 5. 2a
3. 5. 2 c
3 . 5 . 2e
3. 5.
2. 1. 4
3. 5. 2
3. 5. 2f
3 . 5 . 2d
. 3 .
5 . 2g
5
3. 5.
Article
Ice pressure
Inspection and approval
Piers (see Piers).
Tubular steel piers (see Tubular Steel Piers).
General Provisions, definition of terms

Girders and Slabs (see Concrete Slabs and Girders
and Slabs).
Girders Steel (see Steel Structures; Plate Girders;
Viaducts).
Gravel, (or concrete
3. 2.16
2 . 1. 7
1. 1.
4. 4 .
2. 3.
H
Hammers, pile-driving
Highway Lave Loads (see Loads Live Load).
Horizontal Shear in Beams
3. 4.14
I
Ice Breakers
Impact (see Loads Impact).
Inspection :
Engineers and inspectors, access for
3.
1.5.8,
Final
1.5.8, 2.10.40
1.5.7, 2.10.41
1.
Gray iron castings

Wrought
Joints
2 . 10 . 40
1. 9.
Inspector :
Access to work
Authority and duties
Definition
Iron
5 .
1.
4.10.
3.4.4, 4. 7.
2.10.24,
Abutting, metal
Construction joints, concrete (see Concrete).
Expansion (see Expansion Joints).
Fillers-
Oil asphalt
Premoulded
3. 8.
4.22.
4.22.
L
1. 1. 1
3. 6.36
Laboratory, definition
Lacing Bars, design
Lane (see Loads).
Lateral Forces (see Loads).
Laws (see Legal Relations).
Legal Relations :
Federal participation
Legal rights of state
Observance of laws
Patented processes
Permits and licenses
Live Loads (see Loads).
Loads :
Application
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
7. 4
7.12
7.
7.
7.
1
3
2
3. 2. 8
263
Article
Loads :
Application
H-lane loadings continuous spans
Loading for maximum stress
Number and position, traffic lane units
Traffic lane units
Buoyancy
Current, floating ice and drift
Culverts :
Weight of earth assumed
Earth pressure by formula
Dead load weights
Distribution of wheel loads
Design of concrete slabs
Bending moment
Cantilever slabs
Distribution reinforcement
Edge beams (longitudinal)
Edge distance
Shear
Slabs supported on four sides
Span lengths
Unsupported edges (transverse)
Steel grid floor
Floor filled with concrete
General
Open floors
Stringers and floor beams
Bending moment in floor beams
Bending moment in stringers
Position of loads for shear
Through earth fills
Timber flooring
Continuous flooring
Longitudinal
Transverse
Earth Pressure
Electric railway
General
Impact
Live, highway
Application
Classes
Designation
General
H loadings
H-S Loadings
Lane Loadings
Minimum
...
3 .
3 .
2 .
2 .
2a
2b
3. 2.
3 .
3 .
3 .
3 .
3 .
3 .
3 .
3 .
3 .
3 .
2a
3f
2c
2b
2h
2d
2g
2i
2e
3. 3 .
5b
3 .
3. 3.
3. 3.
3. 3.
3 .
3. 3. 5a
3 .
5c
3. 3.
lc
lb
la
3 .
3. 3.
3. 3.
3. 3.
4c
4b
3 . 3 . 4a
3 .
3 .
3 .
3 .
3. 2.18
3. 2.10
3. 2. 1
3 .
2 . 12
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
3 .
2 .
Bearing value
3.4.17,
Design
Reduction in intensity
Sidewalk and safety curb
Tables of moments, shears, etc., Appendix A
Thermal
264
2. 8c
2. 8d
2. 8b
2. 8a
2.17
2.16
3.
3.
3.2.3, 3.
3.
3.
3.
3.2.6, 3.
3.
3.
Standard trucks
Traffic lanes
Live, highway (1935 specifications), App'x C
Longitudinal forces
Overload provision
Piles-
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
5d
5e
5a
5b
5c
7
5f
7
3. 2.13
3. 2. 4
2.
3.
3.
3.
3. 6
5. 1
2. 9
2.11
3. 2.15
Article
Wearing surface, allowance for
Wind
Longitudinal
Longitudinal
Low-Alloy
Lumber
Malleable Castings
Cleaning
Material
Workmanship
Masonry:
3. 2. 2
3. 2.14
Forces (see Loads).

Stiff eners (Plate Girders)
Steel
(see Timber,
Page
3. 6.
Lumber and Piles).
3.4.7, 4. 6.
127
136
183
147,213
216
216
216
M
:
4.11.
4.11.
4.11.
and finish
Ashlar (see Ashlar Masonry).

(see Brick Masonry).
Railings (see Railings and Parapets).
Rubble (see Rubble Masonry).
Masonry Arches (see Arches).
Materials:
Aggregates, coarse
Aggregates, fine
Asphalt plank (premolded)
Bituminous
1
2
Brick
Brick
Bronze
Cement
Chromium alloy-steel castings
Copperi alloy
Defective
Eyebars (see Structural Steel).
Found on site
Gray iron castings
Malleable castings
4. 4.
4. 3.
1. 6. 4
212
212
232
227
227
216
211
215
216
16
1. 4. 7
Sec. 10
Sec. 11
215
216
4.24.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
1
1
1
22
21
12
1
4. 9.
Sec. 12
Paint-
11
Aluminum
4.16. la
218
Black
4.16. lb
218
First field coat
4.16. 3
219
Second field coat
4.16. 4
219
4.16. 2
219
Shop coat
Timber structures
4.16. 1
218
Patented
1. 7. 3
17
Preservative treatment for timber section
Sec. 21
104
Reinforcement
Sec. 5
212
Sectional plate arches
224
Sec. 19
Sectional plate pipe
Sec. 19
224
Sheet metal
Sec. 18
224
Source and quality of
1. 6. 1
15
Steel castings (see Steel, castings).
Steel forgings (see Steel, forgings).
Steel grid
217
Sec. 15
Steel piles
216
Sec. 13
Steel sheet piles
Sec. 14
217
Stone for concrete
212
Sec. 4
61, 226
Stone for masonry
Sees. 6, 20
1.6.3,2.4.3,2.10.3,
Storage
2.20.3 ....16,37,69.99
Structural and rivet steels (see Steels).
Tests
1. 6. 2
15
Timber preservative oils
4.26. 1
235
Water
4. 2. 1
211
Waterproofing
229, 230
4 . 22 . 5-4 . 22 . 1 1
Welding
Sec. 17
223
265
Article
Wood preservatives
Woods, structural
Wrought iron
Mortar
Sec. 26
Sec. 25
Sec. 7
Ashlar masonry
Cement for
Pneumatically applied
Rubble masonry
Sand for
Water for. ,
2.
4.
2.
2.
4.
4.
6. 2
1. 1
4.31
Sec. 19 3.
6.54
7 .
3. 2
2. 1
N
Name Plate
Nickel Steel (see Steel, structural).
Notation, concrete design, Figs. 10, 11, 12
Nuts:
Pilot and driving
3. 7. 2
2 . 10 . 37,
Pin
Sleeve
2 . 10 . 55
3. 6.42
3. 6.45
O
Officials, personal liability
Oil Asphalt Filler
Oil, wood preservatives
Overload Provision
Paints and Painting:

Materials
Metals
Timber structures
Metal structures
Application
1. 7.11
4.22.
4.26.
3. 2. 4
P
4.16.2,4.16.3,
Brushing
General
Inaccessible surfaces
Spraying
Cleaning surfaces
General
Method A
Method B
Method C
Surfaces inaccessible after assembly.
Coats and colors
Contact and inaccessible surfaces
Erection marks
Field
Galvanized surfaces
General
Machine finished surfaces
1
1
4.16.
4.16.
4
1
2.14.
2.14.
6b
6a
2 . 14 . 6d
2.14. 6c
. .
2.14.12,4.16.3,
2.14.10a
2.14.10b
2.14.10c
2.14.10d
2.14.10e
2 . 14 .
2 . 14 . lOe
2.14.11
4.16.
2.14.
2.14.
4
9
1
2 . 14 . 11
Mixing
Removal
Shop
2.14.11,
Thinning
Weather conditions
Welded surfaces
Patented Processes and Materials
Payment :
Ashlar masonry
Asphalt block wearing surfaces
Bituminous mat surfaces
2.14.
2.14.
4.16.
2.14.
2 . 14 .
4
7
2
8
5
2.14.11
1. 7. 3
2. 6.17
2 . 24 . 21
2 . 24 . 29
266
Article
Brick masonry
Brick wearing surface
2. 9.
2 . 24 . 14
2. 4.32
Concrete
Concrete cribbing
Concrete wearing surface
Embankment
Excavation and fill
Extra work
2.16.
2.24.
3
2
2. 1.12
2. 1.12
1. 9. 4
9.
J.
1. 9. 4
Final
Force account work

Full size tests, eyebars
Full size tests, steel members
Omitted items
2 . 10 . 59
4. 6.14
1. 9. 5
Partial
1.
2. \.
3.20
2. 3.18
1.4.3, 1. 9. 3
1. 9. 1
2.13.14
2. 5.12
2. 5.11
2. 8. 8
1. *. 2
2. 2. 5
2.12.11
Pile, loading test

Piles wooden; concrete; steel
Quantity changes
Quantity measurements
Railings and parapets
Reinforcing steel
Riprap
Rubble masonry
Scope of
Sheet piles
Steel grid
Steel structures
Timber cribbing
Timber structures
Waterproofing
Permits and Licenses
Phosphor Bronze (see Bronze).
2 . 10 . 60
2 . 22 . 6
2 . 20 . 23
2.17.
7 .
1 .
Piers:
Design
General
1. 4
5. 5a
3. 5. 5b
3. 5. 2 c
13.
Pier nose
Distribution of earth pressure
Tubular (see Tubular Steel Piers).
Piles:
Additional equipment
Battered
Bearing Values
Capacity as structural member
Capacity to transfer load to ground
Capacity of ground to support piles
General
Group Loading
Sub-Surface investigations uplift
Uplift
Design loads
General
Group Loading
Leads
Loading test
Methods of driving, general
Order lists
Payment
Additional requirements
Cutoff
, ,
o
o
^ . o. 4a
3. 5. le
3 . 4.17
3. 4.17b
3. 4.17c
3 .
3.
3.
3.
3.
2.3.2, 3.
3.
3.
2.
2.3.6,
4 . 17d
4.17a
4.17g
4.17d
4.17f
5. 1
5. 1
4.17
3. 4e
2. 3.20
2 .
3 .
2. 3.
2.
2.
2.
2.
Driving
Falsework and defective

Furnishing
4a
8
3.18e
3.18b
3.18c
3.18d
2 . 3 . 1 8b,
267
Page
Article
Method A
Method B
Payment
Projection into footings
Protection against scour
Spacing
2.
2.
2.
3.
3.
3.
2.
2.
Steel
Steel sheet
Steel shell (concrete filled)
3. 4.17
3. 5. 6
3. 4.17
Uplift
Piles, concrete
Accuracy of driving
Bearing values
Caps
Cast in place
Class of concrete
Extension or "build-ups"
General
shells
Painting
Payment conditions
Placing concrete
Reinforcement
Defective
Details
Batter
Buoyancy
Cast in place
Design loads
General
Limitation
of use
Precast
Spacing, clearances and embedment
Steel piles
Steel pile and shell protection
Driver
2.3.3
Sub-surface Investigations
Tubular Steel Piers
Metal
3.18b
3.18c
3.18b,
5. lc
5. 1
5. 1
3. 3
2. 1
leads
Extensions or "build-ups"
Followers....
Hammer for driving
Loading tests
Precast
Casting.
Class of concrete
Curing
Finish
Form work
General
Handling and storage
Placing concrete
Projection in footings
Reinforcement
Size and shape
Test piles
Water jets
Piles, steel:
Accuracy of driving
Bearing values, formulas
2. 3. 4h
2. 3. 6
2. 3. 3b
31
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
3.15c
3.16
3.15a
3.15b
3.17
3.18
3.15e
3.15d
3. 5
34
35
34
34
35
35
34
34
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
2.
2.
2.
3.
5. le
5. 1f
5. lh
5. 1d
5. la
5. lb
5. lg
5. 1d
5. li
5. lj
3. 4e
3.16
3. 4f
5. 1
2 .
3 .
4c
31
29
'.
2. 3. 6a, c
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
3.
2.3.13d, 3.
3.
3.13e
3.13b
3.13g
3.131
3.13c
3.13a
3.14
3.18
3.15
5. 1
5. lg
5. lg
2. 3.19
2.3.7,
2.3.4g, 2. 3.
6b
2. 3. 4h
2.3.6
268
35
36
36
159
158
158
29
28
29
155
165
155
31
159
159
160
159
158
158
159
159
160
161
30
35
30
158
30
31,32
33
33
33
33
33
33
34
3d
34
158
33, 159
159
32,37
31,32
31
31
Article
Bearing values, general
2. 3.
2. 6.
CnrtK
Sfe:::::::::::::::...
Page
31
6D
2.3.3c
29
33
Cutting off
2. 3.11
Defective piles
6. a
<u
Design
Buoyancy
&.
g.
|
3. 5. i
Caps
160
. . . .
Core stoppers
..
2.3.2, 3. 5. la
29,158
General
3.4.1,3.4.17,3. 5. lc ....144,155,159
Loads ;.
3. 5. 1d
Spacing, clearance, embedment
159
3. 5. h
Splices
1M)
3. 5. li
Thickness of metal
160
Excavation
2. 3. 3a
9
Followers
2. 3. 4f
30
Hammers for driving
.
.
f.
j
Loading tests
\. 4.17
Va}\..
144,
Loads (for design)
3.4. ,3.
loo
29,216
2.3.1,4 .13. 1
Material
2. 3 .18
6a
Order lists
2. 3. 8
2.3.3f,2. 3.17
30,35
Painting
Preparation for driving
. .
j|
3e
Splicing
29
i.
...
"
"
J-
|- |.
wlt^S.v.
Piles, wooden:
Accuracy of cut-off
Accuracy of driving
Bearing values, formulas
Bents
Caps, driving'.
Collars, dnving
Defective
Design loads
Dimensions
Driver
:::::::::::2:3:4g,2:
::::
31,32
.
IJ.1"4h
2. d.
o'n\,
2.20.12
2. 3. 3b
2. o3. 5c
3
4.17
leads
Follower
Hammer for driving
Handling and storage
Heads, treatment of
Limitations of use
Loading test, bearing value
Payment conditions
4.25.
2. '
3.
if
2.20.
2. 3. 4b
2. 8. 9
3. 5. lb
2. 3. bb
2. 3.18
2. 3. 3d
2. 3
Pointing
.Ji
,i
iu29
qi
61
155
tio
So
30
30
66
100
is>
61
60
.3
Preparation
Preservatives
Preservative treatment
Projection into footings
4.26.
2 .21.
4.2o.
ô
|*
io
234
3. 5. 1d
Quality
Sheet piles (see Sheet Piles).

Splicing
2. 3. 3e
SSs/.:::::::::::::::::::::::::^^^:
also Timber, Lumber and Piles; Timber
3: 6b
Structures.)
, .
2 10.34
2.10.35
2.10.55
2.10.33
(See
Pins, Pin Holes and Rollers

Boring pin holes
Clearances
Connections
Fabrication
3: eb
269
30
...31,32
76
76
80
/b
Article
Holes
2.10.34,
Location, pins
Pilot and driving nuts
2 . 10 . 37,
Pin nuts
Plates
Size
Pipe Railing (see Railings and Parapets).
Pipe, Sectional Plate (see Sectional Plate Pipe).
3. 6.37
3. 6.39
2 . 10 . 55
3. 6.42
3. 6.40
3. 6.18
Plans:
Contractor's approval
.
Coordination with specifications
Definition
Deviation from
Examination
1. 5. 2
1. 5. 4
1.
1.
5.
2. 3
Intent
1. 4. 1
Working drawings
1. 5. 2
Plate Girders (see Steel Structures Design and Details).
Preservative Treatments for Timber :
Construction
Amount of preservative
2 . 21 . 4
Creosote
2.21. 4a
Salt treatments
2.21. 4b
General
2.21. 1
Limitations of treatments
2.21. 1
Preparation for treatments
2.21. 3
Framing
2.21. 3b
Incising
2.21. 3c
Sorting
2.21. 3a
Pressure treatment processes
2.21. 5
Materials
Chromated zinc chloride
4 . 26 . 1
Creosote-coal -tar solution
4.26. 1
Creosote oil
4.26. 1
Creosote-petroleum solution
4 . 26 . 1
Sodium fluoride-arsenate dinitrophenol solu
tion (Wolman Salts)
4.26. 1
Zinc chloride
4 . 26 . 1
Zinc meta arsenite (Z.M.A.)
4.26. 1
Property Protection and Restoration
1.4.8, 1. 7. 8
Proposal :
Competency of bidders
1. 2.11
Contents of proposal form
1. 2. 1
Definition
Delivery
1. 2. 7
Disqualification of bidders
1 . 2 . 10
Examination of plans, specifications and site. .. . 1. 2. 3
Form for
1.2.1, 2. 2. 4
Guaranty (see Proposal Guaranty).
Interpretation of estimates
1. 2. 2
Preparation
1. 2. 4
Public opening
1. 2 . 9
Rejection
1. 2. 5
Requirements and conditions
Sec. 2
Withdrawal
1. 2. 8
Proposal Guaranty:
Definition
Forfeiture
1. 2. 6
Return
1. 3. 3
Submitted
1. 2. 7
Public Safety and Convenience
1. 7. 6
270
Railings and Parapets :

Concrete
Cast in place
Expansion joints
General
Materials
Precast
Surface finish
Description
Design
Line and grade
Loading (live)
Article
2.13.
2.13.11
2.13.
2.13.
2.13.
2.13.
2.13.
2.13.
4
2
2.13.10
2.13. 1
3.1.10, 3. 2.11
2.13. 3
3. 2. lid
Metal-
Construction
Materials
Painting
Weight
Payment conditions
Stone and brick
Types and general requirements
Wooden
Ratings of Existing Bridges :
Columns
Batten plate
Eccentrically loaded
Long
Compression, flanges of beams and girders
Dead load
Details of design
Pins
Splices
Strength of connections
Field inspection
General
Inventory ratings
Live load
Operating rating
Stresses, unit
Traffic lanes
2.10.62f
2 . 13 . 14
2.13.12
3. 1.10
2.13.13
3.12.10
3.12.
3 . 12 .
9
9
3.12.11
3.12.
3.12.12c
3.12.12b
3 . 12 . 12a
3.12.13
3.12.
3.12.
3.12.
3.12.
1
2
5
3
3 . 12 . 7
3.12.
Wind load
3.12.
Reinforcement, concrete:
Anchorage
3.
4.
4.
4.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.
2.5.8, 2.
4.
Bar
Bar deformations
Bar mat
Fabrication
Material
Order lists
Payment conditions
Placing and fastening
Protection of
Splices and lapping
Structural shapes
Substructure and retaining wall
(See also Concrete Reinforcement.)
Wire and wire mesh
Retaining Walls :
Base or footing slabs
Counterforts and buttresses
Drainage
Expansion and contraction joints
3 .
8
6
7. 9d
5. 1
5. 1
5. 3
5. 4
5. 1
5. 2
5.12
5. 7
5. 3
5. 9
5. 4
5.
2f
4. 5. 2
3 .
3 .
5.
5.
4b
4d
3. 5. 4g
3. 5. 4f
271
Article
General
Reinforcement for temperature
Vertical walls
Right to Reject Bids
Right of Way, definition
Riprap :
Concrete (in bags)
Concrete slab
3.
3.
3.
1.
1.
5.
5.
4a
4e
5. 4c
3.
1.
2.15.7, 2.15.
2.15.
2.15.2, 2.15.
Dry
Foundation protection
Grouted
Material
Mortared
Placing
Rivets (see Steel and Steel Structures).
Roadway :
Access to abutting property
Clearances
Curbs
Definition
Drainage
Opening to traffic
2.15.1,
1
1
9
8
3
2.15. 6
2.15. 5
4.20. 3
2.15.11
2.15. 4
2.15.10
1.
3.
2.20.19, 3.
1.
3.1.11, 3.
1.
Width-
Page
6.
1.
1.
1.
8.
7.
91
92
92
91,227
93
92
93
16
122
.104, 122
9
1
7
124,201
17
1. 8
1.17
122
126
8 .
1
4
2.
2.7.10, 2.
2.
2.7.5, 2.
2.7.3, 2.
7.
8.
7.
8.
8.

Pointing
Shaping of stones
Size of stones
93
93
8.
8.
2.7.2,2.8.2,2.20.1,
10
7
3.1.7, 3.
Bridges, Figs. 1 to 4
3.
Depressed roadways
Depressed roadways
Clearance
3.
Curbs
3.
Roadway width
3.
Minimum required, Figs. 1 to 3 . . 3.1.7,3.1.8, 3.
Tunnels, Fig. 3
3.
3.
Underpasses
Rolled Plates and Shapes :
3.
Angles, effective area
3.
Angles, minimum size (bracing)
3.
Angles, outstanding leg
3.
Beams
3.
Thickness of metal
2.10.33,3.4.2, 3.
Rollers
Rubble Masonry:
Arches
2.
Arch rings
Backing
2.
General
2.
2.7.7, 2.
Copings, bridge seats and backwalls
2.7.1, 2.
Description
2 .
Dry rubble masonry
2.7.4, 2.
Headers
2.7.6, 2.
Laying
Material
Mortar rubble masonry
164
165
165
1.17b
1.17c
1.17a
1 . 17
1.16
1.18
6.13
6.66
6.17
6. 8
6.14
6.51
7.
7.
7.
7.
8.
8
8
8
8
1
2.20.2
8
9
126
126
127
122, 126
125
126
169
180
170
167
169
76,145,177
66
66
66
66
65,67
67
65,67
65,67
....65,67,98,99
65
67,68
67
65,67
65
6
2
17
212
S
1. 7.
4. 3.
Safety, public
Sand, for mortar
272
Page
Article
Sandblasting
Sanitary Provisions
Sectional Plate Arches:
Construction
Description, general
Description of plates
Erection
Forming and punching plates
Measurement
Payment
Substructure and headwalls
Workmanship
Design
Adjustment of table
Bolts
Gage of plates
General
Minimum height of cover
Multiple spans
Ratio, rise to span
Skewed spans
Substructure
Material
Base metal
Bolts
Certified analysis and guarantee
Chemical analysis and tests for spelter coat
ing
Corrugations
Field inspection and acceptance of plates . .
Gage determination and tolerance
Galvanizing
Identification
Nuts and bolt heads
Sampling
Spelter coating
Sectional Plate Pipe :
Construction
Description, general
Description of plates
Erection
Forming and punching plates
Measurement
Payment
Strutting
Workmanship
Design
Bolts
Cover exceeding heights in Table 1
Gage of bottom plates
Gage of plates
General
Minimum height of cover
Multiple pipes spacing
Size of pipe not in table
Strutting
Material
Base metal
Bolts
Certified analysis and guarantee
273
2.14.10c
1. 7. 5
89
2.23. 1
2.23. 3
2.23. 6
2.23. 4
2.23.10
2.23.11
2.23. 8
2.23. 9
108
109
110
3.11.
3.11.
3.11.
3.11.
3.11.
3.11.
3.11.
3.11.
3.11.
206
206
206
206
206
207
206
207
207
4.19.
4.19.
4.19.
5
6
2
1
4
7
3
7
8
17
109
113
113
1ll
1ll
8
6
224
226
225
4.19. 5
4.19.10
4.19.12
4.19.11
4.19. 3
4.19. 7
4.19. 9
4.19. 4
4.19. 2
225
226
226
226
225
225
226
225
224
2.23. 1
2.23. 3
2.23. 5
2.23. 4
2.23.10
2.23.11
2.23. 7
2.23. 9
108
109
109
109
113
113
3.10.
3.10.
3.10.
3.10.
3.10.
3.10.
3.10.
3.10.
3.10.
205
205
205
204
204
205
205
205
205
4.19.
4.19.
4.19.
5
6
4
2
1
3
8
7
9
1
8
6
1ll
1ll
224
226
225
Chemical analysis and tests for spelter coat

ing
Corrugations
Field inspection and acceptance of plates ...
Gage determination and tolerance
Galvanizing
Identification
Nuts and bolt heads
Sampling
Spelter coating
Sheet Metal:
Copper
Lead
Zinc
Sheet Piles:
Concrete
Payment conditions
Steel
Wooden
Sidewalk :
Brackets
Article
4.19.
4.19.
4.19.
4.19.
4.19.
4.19.
4.19.10
4.19.12
4.19.11
4. 18.
4.18.
4. 18.
2.
2.
2.
2.
7
9
4
2
1
2
3
2. 3
2. 5
2. 4,!
2. 2
Finish
Load
3. 6.63
2. 4. 30
3. 2. 11
Width
Railing (see Railings and Parapets).
Silicon Steel (see Steel, structural).

Site:
Examination
Final cleaning up
Temporary crossing
Slabs (see also Concrete Slabs and Girders).
Cantilever
1. 2.
1. 4.
1. 4.
Intent
Silence of
274
3
8
5
3. 3. 2f
Distribution
Reinforcement perpendicular
Edge supports
Moments
Shear
Span lengths
Supported four sides
Sodium Fluoride-Arsenage Dinitrophenol
(Wolman Salts)
Soils, bearing power
Span lengths:
Concrete
Steel
Special Provisions :
Coordination
Definition
Examination of
Special Work
Specifications :
Coordination with plans
Definition
Examination of
Solution
3.3.2(i),
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
2f
3
2
2
2
2b
2
2d
2i
28
4.26. 1
3. 4.15
3. 7.
3. 6.
4
3
1.
1.
1.
1.
4
1
5.
1.
2.
4.
1. 5.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
2.
4.
6.
1.
1.
3
2
4
1
3
1
5
1
1
Article
Steel:
Castings
Carbon
4. 9. 1
Chromium -alloy
4. 9. 2
Malleable
4.11. 1
Copper bearing
4. 6. 8
Forgings
4. 8. 1
General
4. 6. 1
Grid floor (see Bridge Floors).
4.13.1,4.14. 1
Piles
Reinforcement (see Reinforcement, Concrete).
Rivet-
High strength
Structural
Sheet piles
Structural
Carbon
Low-alloy
4. 6.
4. 6.
4.14.
4. 6. 2
6. 4
4. 6. 5
4. 6. 3
Tests-
Failure to meet requirements
4. 6.12
4. 6. 9
size
4.6.10
Number and size of test bars

Payment for full size tests
Record of annealing
Selection of test bars
Steel Structures :
Design and details
Alternating stresses
Anchor bolts
Angles, effective size
Arches, Solid Web :
Web plates for
Beams (composite)
Bedplates
Bolts
Bracing
Deck plate girders
General
Half through trusses
Lateral
Long columns
Minimum size of
Portal and sway
3.4.7,4.
steel
Nickel
Silicon
Structures (see Steel Structures).
Full
'. . . .
4. 6.14
4. 6.13
4. 6.11
3. 6. 5
3. 6.53
3. 6.13
3. 6.16
Sec. 9
2.10.52
3. 6.43
3. 6.69
.
3. 6.65
3. 6.70
3. 6.67
3 .
6 . 72
3. 6.66
angles
3 .
3.
Through plate girders
Closed sections and pockets
3.
Columns
3.4.2, 3., 4., 5., 7., 3.
Formulas
Formulas, Appendix B.
Combined stresses
3.
Compression members
3.
Cover plates (perforated)
3.
Depth ratios
3.
Eccentric connections
3.
Effective area, angles
3.
3.6.46,3.
Expansion
.3.6.47, 3.
Expansion bearings
Fabrication, riveted unless otherwise speci
6 . 68
6.71
6.28
4.
6. 6
6.15
6.36
6.11
6.29
6.13
6.64
6.48
2.10.
fied
Fillers
3. 6.33
275
Article
Fixed bearings
Floor Steel grid (see Bridge Floors).
Floor system
Cross frames
End floorbeams
End connections
,
End panels, skew
Expansion joints
Floorbeams
Sidewalk brackets
Stiffness
Stringers
Forked ends
Gusset plates
Inclined bearings
Intermediate stiff eners
Lacing and perforated cover plates
Limiting length of members
Loads (see Loads).
Minimum thickness of metal
Name plates
Net sections, riveted members
Outstanding legs of angles
Parts accessible
Payment conditions
Pedestals and shoes
Pin holes, net section at
Pin plates
Pins and pin nuts
Pins, location of
Pins, size of
Plate girders
Camber
Depth
Flange
Rivets
Section
Splice
General
Masonry bearings
Sole plates
Stiffener, transverse, end
Stiff eners, transverse, intermediate
Stiff eners, longitudinal
Through, ends of
Web plates, thickness
Web splices
Plates in compression
Plates for arches (Solid Rib)
Rivets :
Deduction for net section
Edge distance
Lone grip
Size of
Stitch
Tension
Rolled beams
Rollers
3. 6.49
177
6.58
6.60
6.62
6.61
6.64
6.59
6.63
6.65
6.57
6.41
6.34
6.52
6.80
6.36
6. 9
178
179
179
179
179
178
179
178
178
176
173
177
182
174
167
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3. 6.14
2.19.1, 3. 6.54
175
170
171
80
177
175
176
176
175
170
3. 6.85
3. 6.104
183
186
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
6.76
6.74
6.77
6.73
6.84
6.83
6.79
6.80
6.81
6.82
6.75
6.78
6.15
6.16
182
181
182
181
183
183
182
182
183
183
181
182
169
170
6 . 38
175
171
171
170
3.
3.
3.
3.6.21, 3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
6.24
6.25
6.20
6.22
6.19
6.23
6.26
6. 8
3.4.2,3.4.7,3.4.8,3.6.51
276
169
97,178
3. 6.38
3. 6.17
3. 6.27
2.10.58
3. 6.50
3. 6.37
3. 6.40
3. 6.42
3. 6.39
3. 6.18
3 .
Pitcn
Pitch
Page
170,171
170
171
171
167
....145,146,177
Article
Secondary stresses
Sleeve nuts
Splices
Splices, indirect
Stay plates
3.6.79,3.6.80,
Stiffener, plate girders
.
Strength of connections
Symmetrical sections
Thickness of metal
T ru ssgs
Bottom chords
Camber
Counters
Diaphragms
Eyebars
General
Half -through
Masonry bearings
Riveted tension members
Sole plates
Top chords and end posts
Working lines and axes
Trusses and girders
Effective depth
Effective span
Number
Sidewalk brackets
Spacing
Upset ends
Viaducts
Bents and towers
Batter
Bents and towers
Bottom struts
Bracing
Single
Girder connections, bracing
Girder
Sole and masonry plates
Types
Welding
Erection
Assembling steel
Bearings and anchorages
Bedplates, setting
Bolted connections
Camber diagram
Delivery of material
Erection of structure
2.10.49,
Falsework
Handling and storing material
Methods and equipment
Misfits
Old structure, removal

Pin connections
Plans and shipping statements
Plant
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
6. 7
6.45
6.31
6.32
6.35
6.81
6.30
6.12
6.14
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
6.88
6.90
6.92
6.95
6.93
6.86
6.70
6.97
6.91
6.96
6.87
6.89
184
184
184
185
184
183
180
185
184
185
184
184
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
6. 4
6. 3
6. 1
6.63
6. 2
6.44
167
166
166
179
166
176
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
6.100
6.99
6.103
6.102
6.101
6.105
6.105
6.106
6.98
6.55
185
185
185
185
185
186
186
186
185
178
2.10.53
2 . 10 . 51
2.10.51
2.10.18
2.10.13
2.10.47
2.10.47
2.10.57
2.10.48
2.10.50
2.10.56
2 . 10 . 57
2.10.55
2.10.45
2.10.46
2.10.54
Riveted connections
Straightening bent material
Work to include
2 . 10 . 52
2.10.44
277
Page
167
176
172
172
173
182,183
179
162
169
79
78
78
72
71
78
78
78,80
78
78
80
80
80
77
78
79
79
77
Article
Inspection and tests2.10.39
Facilities for
4. 6. 8
Full size tests
2.10.40
Inspector's authority
Materials
2.10.32
Annealing eyebars
4. 6.13
Annealing record
4. 6.12
Failure to meet requirements
2.10.41
Mill orders
4. 6.10
Number and size test bars
2.10. 3
Storage
2.10.4,2 10.52
Straightening
4
6.10
Test bars and test eyebars
2 10.42
Weighing finished pieces
Payment conditions
.. 2.10.59
Basis of payment
.. 2.10.62(i) to (8).
Computed weight
.. 2.10.59
Eyebars, tested
59,4. 6.14
Full size tests
.. 2.10.60
Pay weight
.. 2.10.61
Variance in weight . .
Workmanship and fabrication
.. 2.10.24
Abutting joint
.. 2.10.32
Annealing
12,2.10.53
Assembling, shop
2.10.23
Bearing surfaces
2.10.29
Bent plates
Bolts and bolting
2.10.18
Field connections
Field connections
. 2.10.18d
Special ribbed bolts
. 2.10.18c
Turned bolts
. 2.10.18b
Unfinished bolts . . .
. 2.10.18
Fitting up
. 2.10.13
Camber diagram
. 2.10.25
End connections angles
. 2.10.31
Eyebars
. 2.10.17
Field rivets
2,2.10. 5
Finish
. 2.10.27
Finished members
. 2.10.30
Fit of stiffeners
. 2.10.22
Flame cutting
. 2.10.48
Handling finished material .
. 2.10.26
Lacing bars
. 2.10.43
Marking and shipping
. 2.10.15
Match marking
Milled and planed surfaces
2.10.24
Abutting joints
2.10.25
End connection angles
2 . 10 . 23
Facing bearing surfaces
2 . 10 . 20
Planing sheared edges
Paints and painting (see Paints and Painting).
2 . 10 . 37
Pilot and driving nuts
Pins (see Pins, Pin Holes and Rollers).
Punched, reamed and drilled
2 . 10 . 11
Accuracy of drilled holes
Accuracy of punched and sub -drilled
2.10.10
holes
2.10.11
Accuracy of reamed holes
2.10.14
Drifted holes
2.10.6,2.10. 8
Drilled holes
2.10. 7
Punched holes
....
278
81
71
Article
10.6,2.10.
2.10.
2.10.
2.10.
2.10.
Punched work
Reamed work
Reaming
Reaming, field connections
Sub-punched holes
Rivets and riveting-
Field
Field connections
Riveting
2.10
2.10
2.10
2.10
Page
8
9
9
9
70
70
70
70
70
17
54
19
16
72
79
73
72
(See also Design and Details; Unit Stresses )

Rollers (see Pins, Pin Holes and Rollers).
Screw threads
2.10. 86
Shipping
2.10 43
Stiff eners, fit of
. . 2.10. 30
3 . 6 44
Upset ends
Web plates
2.10 28
Welds
2.10. 21
Stone for Masonry :
2.6.3,4.20. 1
Ashlar
61,226
3
2
227
227
Riprap
Rubble
(See also Ashlar Masonry; Rubble Masonry.)
Stresses:
Alternating
Combined
Concrete piles (due to handling)
Moments
Secondary
Sheets
Steel structures-
'
4.20.
4.20.
3.
3.
3.
3.
8.
1.
6. 5
6. 6
5. lK
4. 18
6. 7
5. 2
Carbon
3. 4.
Cast iron
3 . 4.
Cast steel
3.4.
.3.4.2, 3.4.7,3. 4.
Column formulas. . .
.
Column formulas (Appendix B)
Low-Alloy
3.
3.
3.
3.
4.
4.
4.
4.
3. 4.
3. 4.
Nickel
Rivets
Rivets (high strength)
Silicon
7
Welding
Wrought iron
3. 4.
Timber-
Column formulas
Column formulas, round columns
Column formulas (connector joined)
Horizontal shear
Inclined surfaces, bearing
Notched beams
Timber connectors
Treated
Untreated
Unit
stresses
Bearing on masonry
Bronze
Concrete structures
Concrete
Reinforcement
Copper-alloy
General
2
5
5
8
7
8
2
3
8
9
4
3. 4.14
3. 4.14d
3. 4.14c
3 . 4 . 14a
3. 4.14f
3 .
4 . 14e
3. 4.14g
3. 4.13
3. 4.13
3. 4.10
3. 4.
3. 4.11
3. 4.12
3. 4.
3. 4.
279
6
1
76
77
75
176
74
73
167
167
159
158
167
12
145
146
146
. .145, 146, 147
242
146
147
145
146
147
148
146
152
153
153
152
154
154
154
151
151
148
146
148
150
146
144
Article
Piles, design load

Concrete
3.
3.
3.
3.
3.
Steel
4.17
4.17
4.17
4. 1
4.15
Timber
Reduction (load in combination)
Soils, bearing power
Structural Steel (see Steel).
Structure :
1.4.6,2.10.58
Existing
Temporary, definition
1. 4. 6
Temporary, removal
Sub-contractor, definition
Substructure :
2.10.51,3. 52b, 3 . 6 . 53
Anchor bolts in
Definition
3. 5. 2c
3. 5. 4g
Drainage
3. 5. 5
Ice breakers
Piles (see Foundations and Substructures).
2.15.6,3. 5. la
Scour protection
Tubular steel piers (see Tubular Steel Piers).
Substructures and Foundations (see Substructures and
Foundations).
1 . 5 . 5, 1 . 8 . 4
Superintendent, competence of
Superstructure :
2 . 10 . 51
Anchor bolts, setting
2.10.51
Bedplates
1. 1. 1
Definition
1. 1 . 1
Surety, definition
2. 4.23
Surface Finish, concrete
1. 8. 5
Suspension of Operations
T
Appendix A
Tables of Moments, Shears, etc.
Temporary Structures :
Construction and maintenance
Definition
Removal
Terms, definition of
Thermal Force
Timber Cribbing :
Construction
Face logs of timbers
Filling
Foundation
Material
Mudsills
Ties and fastenings

Materials .
Dimensions
Preparation
Payment condition
Timber, hewn and round
Timber, Lumber and Piles :
Grading of yard lumber
Grading, structural timber
General
Limitation of use
Species of woods
1. 4.
1. 4.
1 .
1.
3. 2.15
2 .22 .
2.22.
2.22.
2.22.
2.22.
2.24.
2.22.
2.22.
2.22.
4.25.
4.25.
4.25.
4.25.
4.25.
4.25.
280
4c
5
4a
1
4b
3, e
3
2
6
4
3
5
6
2
1
Article
Structural beams and stringers
3. 4.13
Stress grades and working stresses
Structural joist and plank
3 . 4.13
Structural posts and timbers
3. 4.13
Timber piles
Dimensions
4.25. 9
General
4.25. 7
Quality
4.25. 8
Wooden.)
(See also Piles
Treated (see Preservative Treatment for Timber).
Timber preservative oils
4.26. 1
Timber structures :
Application of grades and sizes
4.25. 5
3. 9. 1
Beams (composite)
2.20.15, 3.85e, 3. 8. 6e
Bracing
Bridging
2.20.16
Caps
2.20.14
Columns and posts
3.4.14c, 3. 8. 4
Connector joined
3. 8. 4
Design
Formulas
3. 4.14
3. 4.13
Stresses
Connectors
Construction
2.20. 2
3. 4.14
Design
Material
4.27.1-4.27. 6
Countersinking
2.20.10
Cribs (see Cofferdams and Cribs; also Tim
ber Cribbing).
3. 8. 7g
Drainage
Erection, housing and railings
2.20.22
Fire stops
3. 8. 8
Formulas
Axial compression on connector
joined spaced columns
3. 4.14c
Axial compression in rectangular col
3. 4.14b
umns
3 . 4 . 14f
Bearing on inclined surfaces
Horizontal shear in rectangular beams . 3.4. 14a
3 . 4 . 14e
Notched beams
3. 4.14d
Safe load on round columns
3. 4.14g
Timber connectors
Framed bents
2.20.15, 3. 8. 5e
Bracing
3. 8. 5d
Caps
3. 8. 5b
Framed bents
Pile bents
3. 8. 5a
Pile bent abutments
3 . 8 . 5f
Sills and mud sills
3. 8. 5c
2.20.14, 3. 8. 5
Caps
2.20.13a, 3. 8. 5
Mudsills
Pedestals, concrete
2.20.13b
2.20.13d,3.8.4, 3. 8. 5
Posts
2.20.13c, 3. 8. 5c
Sills
Framing
2.20.11
Hewn and round timbers
4.25. 4
Holes, bolt, dowel and lag screw
2.20. 8
Lumber and timber
2.20. la
Metal parts
2.20.9, 3. 8. 1
Bolts and washers
281
Page
Article
2.20.1c,
Castings
2.20.1b,
Eyebars
Hangers
2.20. Id,
Hardware
2.20.1b,
Structural shapes
Painting
Payment conditions
2.20.12,
Pile bents
Pile bents, abutment
Pile heads, treatment
Fabric covering
General
Zinc covering
Plank, laminated and strip floors (see Bridge
Floors).
2.20.19,
Railings
Storage of material
Stringers
Treated timber
Bolt holes, treatment
Cuts and abrasions
Framing and boring
Handling
Pile heads, treatment
Temporary attachment
Trusses
Bracing
Bridging
2.20.20,
Camber
Drainage
Eyebars and counters (see Eyebars).
Fire stops and curtains
Floorbeams
Flooring
Hangers
Housing
Joints and splices
Nailing strips
2.20.19,
Railing.
Retaining pieces
Stringers
Wheel guards
...r
Unit
stresses
(see Stresses).
Unsupported length, columns and posts ... .

Untreated timber
Wheel guards and railings
2.20.4,2.20.11,
Workmanship
Washers
Town or Township, definition
Traffic Lane
Trucks
Trusses :
Steel (see Steel Structures).
Timber (see Timber Structures).
Tubular
Steel
Bracing
Depth
Details
Piers:
3. 8. 6a
3. 8. 6d
99,200
99,201
3. 8. 6c
3. 8. 3
3. 8. 6
201
99,199
99,200
2.20.23
104
104
2.20.24
3. 8. 5f
3. 8. 5f
2.20.
2.20.
2.20.
2.20.
102,200
200
100
101
100
7c
7a
7b
101
104,202
3. 8. 7h
2.20.
2.20.16
99
103
2.20.
2.20.
2.20.
2.20.
2.20.
2.20.
100
100
100
100
100
100
3. 8.
5
5
5
7
5e
201
201
6e
3. 8. 7b
3. 8. 6f
3. 8. 7g
104,201
202
3. 8. 8
3. 8. 6b
3. 8. 7d
3. 8. 6c
2.20.21
3. 8. 6a
3. 8. 7c
3. 8. 7h
202
201
202
201
104
200
201
104,202
3 . 8 . 7e
3. 8. 7a
202
201
202
3. 8. 4
199
100
104
3. 8. 7f
2.20. 6
2.20.19
2.20.20
3. 8. 2
1. 1. 1
3. 2. 6
3. 2. 7
...100,102,104
199
$
130
130
3. 5. 6f
3. 5.
3.
3.
3.
Piling
Use of
282
6b
5. 6
5. 6c
5. 6a
. :
166
166
165
166
165
Article
Tunnels:
Clearance between walls

Clearance, vertical
Width between curbs
3. 1.16b
3. 1.16d
3. 1.16c
3. 1.16a
U
Underpasses :
Clearance, vertical
Width between curbs
Unit Stresses (see Stresses).
Utilities, provision for
3. 1.18b
3 .
1 . 18c
3. 1.18a
3. 1.15
V
Viaducts :
Concrete (see Concrete Viaducts).
Steel (see Steel Structures Viaducts).
w
Warning Signs and Barricades
Water:
Concrete and mortar

Sampling
Tests
Waterproofing :
Application
Damage patches
Details
General
Arches (see Arches).
Materials
Asphalt
1.4.5, 1.
7 .
4. 2 .
7
1
4. 2.
4. 2.
2.17.
2.17.
2.17.1, 2.17.
6
5
Fabric
2.17.2, 4.22.
2.17.2, 4.22.
Joint filler
Pitch
Tar
4.22.
4.22.8, 4.22.
Inspection and delivery
Payment conditions
Preparation of concrete surfaces
Protection course
Storage of fabric
Waterway Area (see Design).
Waterway Restricted (see Design).
Wearing Surface, allowance for (see Loads).
Wearing Surfaces (see Bridge Floors).
Weight of Materials
Welding:
Construction
Design
General
Material
Specifications
Stresses
2.20.19,3.1.9,
Wheel Guards and Curbs
Wind Loads (see Loads).
Wolman Salts
Wood, Wooden (see Timber, Lumber and Piles ; also
Timber Structures).
4.22.11
4.22.10
2 . 17 .
6
9
2.17.
2.17.
2.17.
4
8
3
2 .
3 .
2.10.21
3. 6.55
3 .
6 . 55
4.17.
4.26.
3. 6.55
3. 4. 9
3. 8. 7f
Article
Wood Preservatives:
Material (see Preservative Treatment for Timber).
Work, definition
1. 1.
1. 1 .
Working Day, definition
1
Workmen, competence of
Wrought Iron :
Plates
4. 7.
Shapes and bars
4. 7.
4. 7.
Pipe.
J1
4
1
2
3
2.21.1, 4.26.
2.21.1, 4.26.
Zinc Chloride
Zinc meta Arsenate (Z.M.A.)
284
1
1
TLoicA
VhobLtu
4228?
TG
American Association of
State Highway
Officials .
Standard specifications
for highway bridges
tf.
.A6
Of
M.
FLINT COLLFGF LIBRARY

Standard Specifications For Highway Bridges AASHO 1949 - Fifth Edition

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Standard Specifications For Highway Bridges AASHO 1949 - Fifth Edition

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Standard specifications for highway bridges adopted by the American

Association of State Highway Officials.

Public Domain, Google-digitized

The American Assfton of Slate Hishway Officia

THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY -OFFICIALS

Contents of Proposal Form

and Execution of Contract

SECTION 4 Scope of the Work

SECTION 7 Legal Relations and Responsibility

SECTION 8 Prosecution and Progress

SECTION 9 Measurement and Payment

Payment for Omitted Items

SECTION 1 Excavation and

SECTION 2 Sheet Piles

Timber Sheet Piles

SECTION Concrete Masonry

SECTION 8 Bearing Piles

Time of Hauling and Placing Mixed Concrete

Ordinary Surface Finish

Ik) Hand Mixing

(b) Method B. Proportions Based ou

or Copper-Alloy Bearing and

SECTION 12 Steel Grid Flooring

Number of Coats and Color

SECTION 21 Preservative Treatments for Timber

SECTION 23 Sectional Plate Pipe and Arches

Asphalt Block Wearing Surface

(b) Clearance Between Walls

SECTION 3 Distribution of Loads

Stresses, Pile Loads and Bearing

Steel Structures (Permissible Unit Stresses)

Standard Notations and Assumptions

Concrete Piles (Precast)

Limiting Lengths of Members

Web Plates of Solid Rib Arches

Stiffness of Floor Members

SECTION 7 Concrete Design

Viaduct Bents and Towers

(f) Drainage of Spandrel Fill

Gage of Side and Top Plates

SECTION II Sectional Plate Arches

Water for Use with

Wire and Wire Mesh

SECTION Structural, Eyebar and Rivet Steels

SECTION 7 Wrought Iron

Carbon Steel Castings

Gray Iron Castings

SECTION 11Malleable Castings

or Copper-Alloy Bearing and

SECTION 14 Steel Sheet Piling

Paint for Timber Structures

Paint for Metal

Metal for Water Stops and General Use

SECTION IBSectional Plate Pipe and Arches

Materials and Joint Fillers

SECTION 23 Asphalt Paving Blocks

Split Ring Connectors

The first edition of the Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

Committee on Bridges and Structures

Raymond Archibald, Chairman

ALABAMA J. W. Chambers, Bridge Engineer,

ARIZONA R. A. Hoffman, Bridge Engineer,

State Highway Department,